OFS San Fernando Facility Project Phase II - CIVIL - STRUCTURAL Specifications

Materials & Workmanship for the
OFS SAN FERNANDO FACILITY PROJECT

PHASE II
LA ROMAIN, SAN FERNANDO
November 2014
Schlumberger (T’DAD) Inc. OFS San Fernando Facility Project – Phase II
Materials and Workmanship
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SPECIFICATION SERIES 100 – GENERAL

101 Definitions and Terms
102 General Requirements and Provisions
103 Health and Safety
104 General Environmental Requirements
105 Office and Laboratory Facilities for the Engineer
106 Transport and Communication Facilities for the Engineer
107 Accommodation of Traffic
108 Temporary Diversions and Crossings
SPECIFICATION SERIES 200 –EARTHWORKS

201 Clearing, Grubbing and Demolition
202 General Excavation
203 Earthworks for Structures
204 Preparation of Subgrade
205 Embankment
206 Topsoil and Grassing
207 Surcharging Embankments
208 Shoulder Rehabilitation
212 Investigative Excavation
SPECIFICATION SERIES 300 – PAVEMENT LAYERS OF GRAVEL OR GRANULAR

MATERIAL
300 Overall Requirements
301 Sub base
303 Granular Surface Course
304 Granular Base Course
i
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___
SPECIFICATION SERIES 400 – PAVEMENT LAYERS OF BITUMINOUS MATERIAL

401 Bituminous Mixes
402 Bituminous Base Course
403 Bituminous Binder Course
404 Bituminous Surface Course
405 Overall Requirements for Asphaltic Concrete
406 Bituminous Surface Treatment
407 Bituminous Materials
408 Bituminous Prime Coat
409 Bituminous Tack Coat and Joint Sealer
410 Bituminous Penetration Seal
411 Bituminous Slurry Seals and Crack Filling
413 Pavement Patching
414 Cold Milling of Asphalt Pavement
SPECIFICATION SERIES 500 – STRUCTURAL WORKS

500 Portland Cement Concrete
501 Cast-in-place Concrete
502 Piling
503 Precast Pre-stressed Concrete Girders and Beams
504 Reinforcing Steel
505 Structural Steelwork
506 Corrosion Protection
507 Elastomeric Bearings
508 Concrete Blockwork
509 Dowel Bars
510 Waterproofing for Structures
511 Movement Joints
512 Concrete Repairs
513 Concrete Sidewalks and Driveways
514 Substructure Drainage
515 Protection of Embankments and Slope Areas beneath Structures
516 Bridge Deck Drains
517 Concrete Guard Rail
ii
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___
SPECIFICATION SERIES 600 – DRAINAGE WORKS

601 Reinforced Concrete Pipe Culvert
602 Rip Rap
603 Drainage Appliance
604 Ditch Rehabilitation
605 Concrete Curb, Slipper and Swale Drains
606 Drainage Channels
607 Manholes, Inspection Chambers and Catch-pits
608 Underdrains
SPECIFICATION SERIES 700 – ANCILLARY WORKS

701 Fences
702 Metal Beam Guard Rails
703 Metal Railing
704 Raised Medians and Islands
705 Roadside Traffic Signs
706 Pavement Markings
707 Epoxy Adhesive for Pavement Markings
708 Repair/Reconstruction of Water Services Lines
709 Pedestrian Handrail
710 Electrical Ducts, Splice Boxes & Pole Bases
711 Ducting for Traffic Signals
712 Gabions
713 Geomembranes & Geotextiles
714 Rubble Masonry
715 Reno Mattress
716 Rumble Strips
iii
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___
SPECIFICATION SERIES 100

GENERAL
S100.0
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___
SERIES 100: GENERAL

SECTION 101: DEFINITIONS AND TERMS
CONTENTS
101.1 General Definitions and Terms
101.2 Standard Methods of Sampling and Testing of Soils and Materials
_____________________________________________________________________________
101.1 General Definitions and Terms

In these specifications, the following terms, words or expressions shall have the meanings hereby
assigned to them.
Bituminous Material/ A mixture to predetermined proportions of aggregate, filler and bituminous
Concrete binder material prepared off the road and usually placed by means of a
paving machine (alternatively known as asphalt concrete).
Surface Course The top layer of bituminous or granular material intended to directly support
vehicles within the roadway. Bituminous material may be placed on top of
binder or base course materials.
Base Course The layer of material constructed on top of the sub base, or in the absence
thereof, the capping layer. A base course may extend outside the roadway.
It may be a granular or bituminous material.
Binder Course The layer of bituminous material placed on top of base course material and
under the surface course to support the surface course, or placed on an
existing roadway to remove irregularities before a surface course is laid
(see levelling course).
Borrow Area An area within designated boundaries, approved for the purpose of
obtaining borrow material. A borrow pit is the excavated pit in a borrow area
Borrow Material Any gravel, sand, soil, or rock obtained from borrow areas, or sources other
than cuttings and excavations within the road reserve, and which is used in
the construction of the Works. It shall not include crushed stone or sand
obtained from commercial sources.
Bridge A structure erected over a depression, river, watercourse, railway line, road
or other obstacle for carrying motor, railway, pedestrian, or other traffic or
services and having a length of 6 meters or more, measured between the
abutment faces along the center line of the road, except that road-over-
road or road-over-rail structures are always classified as bridges.
Carriageway The surface of the pavement over which traffic normally passes usually
delineated by edge markings or constraints such a slipper drains or kerbs.
Capping Layer The lower layer or layers of the pavement which is constructed directly onto
a weak or moisture sensitive subgrade prior to the placing of the sub base
(see selected subgrade material).
Selected Subgrade The lower layer or layers of the pavement which is constructed directly onto
Material a non-moisture sensitive subgrade prior to the placing of the sub base (see
capping material).
S101.1
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___
SERIES 100: GENERAL

Culvert A structure, other than a bridge, which provides an opening under the
roadway, for drainage or other purposes.
Excess Overburden Overburden within a borrow area which is not required or is unsuitable for
use in construction.
Embankment That portion of the road prism consisting of suitable material which lies
above the formation and is bounded by the side slopes, shown on the typical
cross-sections on the drawings running downwards and outwards from the
outer edge of the shoulder, and on which the capping layer, sub base, base
course and shoulders are to be constructed.
Formation The existing ground (after clearing and grubbing and the removal of topsoil),
onto which material is placed for the construction of embankments.
Lane That part of the roadway intended for a single stream of traffic in one
direction, which has normally been demarcated as such by road/pavement
markings.
Levelling Course One or more layers of asphalt of varying thicknesses, but with a specified
minimum total thickness, which are applied to improve the cross sectional
characteristics of a road, such that constructing the final wearing course or
resurfacing layer in accordance with the required standards for levels,
thickness and cross section will be possible.
Overlay Additional bituminous pavement layer(s) applied on top of an existing road

for strengthening the pavement and/or for improving the riding quality.
Pavement Layers The upper layers of the road comprising of, as appropriate, the capping or
selected subgrade layer, sub base, base course and wearing courses, and
the shoulder layers.
Road Reserve The entire area included by the boundaries of the road as legally stated.
Roadway The extents of the top layer of the pavement, between the vertical face of
edge constraints or, in the absence of any constraint, the back of the
shoulder.
Roadway The excavation of the existing roadway over one half or the whole of the
Reconstruction width to a depth below the existing road surface and the reconstruction of
the subgrade and the individual pavement layers each in accordance with
the appropriate sections of the specification.
Roadway Subgrade The layer of re-compacted material consisting of existing pavement material
pulverised and relaided on to which is placed the capping layer, sub base
or base course.
Roller Passes An area will be considered to have received one roller pass when a roller
has passed over such an area once. Additional passes made only as a
result of nominal overlapping so as to ensure full coverage shall not be
taken into account.
S101.2
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___
SERIES 100: GENERAL

Cables, pipes or other facilities to provide conduits for electricity, telephone,

Services
water, sewage etc.
Side Drain An open longitudinal drain situated adjacent to and at the bottom of cut or
embankment slopes.
Side Slope The sloping surface to the side of an embankment supporting the road
commencing at the shoulder breakpoint or the outside edge of the verge.
The Site shall be the area within the Boundary limits, drainage reserve,
Site (The)
temporary access to the site and areas identified within the drawings and
directed by the Engineer. See also special definition contained in Section
104.
Shoulder 1. When referring to this as a surface: The area between the outside edge
of the roadway and the shoulder breakpoint
2. When referring to this as a pavement layer: The upper pavement layer

lying between the outside edge of the base course and the shoulder
breakpoint.
Sub base The layer of material on top of the subgrade or capping layer and below the
base course and shoulders.
Subgrade The insitu material at the base of cuttings or excavations and the top level
of fill in embankments, onto which is placed a pavement layer.
Verge The surface between the shoulder break point and the top of the side
drain or side slope.
Wedging One layer of asphalt of varying thicknesses, but with a specified minimum
thickness, which is applied to provide the longitudinal characteristics of a
road at the tie in to an existing pavement, such that constructing the final
wearing course or resurfacing layer in accordance with the required
standards will be possible.
Note 1: The term Lead Consultant and Engineer shall be considered to be interchangeable when
referred to in the Contract.
Note 2: The term Schedule of Quantities and Bill of Quantities shall be considered to be
interchangeable when referred to in the Contract
S101.3
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___
SERIES 100: GENERAL

101.3 Standard Methods of Sampling and Testing of Soils and Materials

The following lists the methods of testing prescribed by AASHTO and IBC relevant to the Contract.
The Contractor shall ensure that all materials incorporated into the permanent works conform to
the requirements of the specification and that, as required for the materials supplied, the tests
listed can be undertaken under the Contract to confirm compliance.
All material testing shall be undertaken fully in accordance with the procedures laid down in the
prescribed test, taking due account of the material being tested. In the case of tropical soils and
aggregates the materials will be tested in their natural condition and as prescribed in the test
procedures for tropically weathered soils and rocks.
AASHTO*
1. Soils Test No.
Dry preparation of Disturbed Soil and Soil
Aggregate Samples for Test AASHTO * T-87
Wet preparation of Disturbed Soil Samples for Test T-146
Mechanical Analysis of SoilsT-88 T-88
Liquid Limit (LL) T-69
Plastic Limit (PL) and Plasticity Index (P1) T-90
Shrinkage Factors T-92
Standard Density T-99
Modified Density T-180
Moisture Density Relations of Soil-Cement Mixtures T-134
Cement Content of Soil-Cement Mixtures T-144
Plastic Fines in Graded Aggregates and Soils by Use of the T-176
Sand Equivalent Test
Density of Soil In-Place by the Sand-Cone Method T-191
Density of Soil and Soil Aggregate In-Place by Nuclear Methods T-238
California Bearing Ratio (CBR) T-193
Determination of Organic Matter in Soils T-194
Determination of Cement Content in Cement Treated Aggregate T-211
Sampling Hydrated Lime T-218
Determination of the Strength of Soil-Lime Mixtures T-220
Correction for Coarse Particles in the Soil Compaction Test T-224
Determination of Lime Content in Lime Treated Soils T-232
Moisture Content of Soil and Soil-Aggregate In-Place by Nuclear Methods T-239
*All are AASHTO Standard Tests unless otherwise noted.
S101.4
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___
SERIES 100: GENERAL

AASHTO*
2. Aggregates Test No.
Sampling Stone, Slag, Gravel, and Stone Block for use as Highway Materials T-2
Amount of Material Finer than 0.075 mm sieve in Aggregate T-11
Unit Weight of Aggregate T-19
Voids in Aggregate for Concrete T-20
Organic Impurities in Sands for Concrete T-21
Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates T-27
Mechanical Analysis of Extracted Aggregate T-30
Sieve Analysis or Mineral Filler T-37
Effect of Organic Impurities in Fine Aggregate on Strength of Mortar T-71
Specific Gravity and Absorption of Fine Aggregate T-84
Specific Gravity and Absorption of Coarse Aggregate T-85
Resistance to Abrasion of Coarse Aggregate by use of the Los Angeles Machine T-96
Soundness of Aggregates by Use of Sodium Sulphate or Magnesium Sulphate T-104
Clay Lumps and Friable Particles in Aggregates T-112
Lightweight Pieces in Aggregate T-113
Surface Moisture in Fine Aggregate T-142
Percentage of Particles of less than 1.95 Specific Gravity in Coarse Aggregate T-150
Scratch Hardness of Coarse Aggregate Particles T-189
Production of Plastic Fines in Aggregates T-210
Reducing Field Samples of Aggregate to Testing Size T-248

AASHTO*
3. Concrete Test No.
Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens T-22
Making and Curing Concrete Compressive and Flexural Test Specimens in the Field T-23
Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of Concrete T-24
Quality of Water to be used in concrete T-26
Flexural Strength of Concrete (using simple beam with third-point loading) T-97
Slump of Portland Cement Concrete T-119
Weight per cubic foot, yield and air content (gravimetric) of concrete T-121
Making and curing concrete compression and flexure test specimens in the laboratory T-126
Compressive Strength of Concrete Using Portions of Beams broken in flexure T-140
Sampling Fresh Concrete T-141
Measuring Length of Drilled Concrete Cores T-148
Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method T-152
Water Retention Efficiency of Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds T-155
and Impermeable Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete
Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete T-157
Bleeding of Concrete T-158
Comparing Concrete on the Basis of the Bond Developed with Reinforcing Steel T-159
Length Change of Cement Mortar and Concrete T-160
Flexural Strength of Concrete (Using Simple Beam with Centre-Point Loading T-177
Cement Content of Hardened Portland Cement Concrete T-178
Ball Penetration in Fresh Portland Cement Concrete T-183
Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Volumetric Method T-196
Time of setting of concrete mixtures by penetration resistance T-197
Splitting Tensile strength of cylindrical concrete T-198
Capping cylindrical concrete specimens T-231
S101.5
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___
SERIES 100: GENERAL

AASHTO*
4. Bituminous Materials Test No.
Sampling Bituminous Materials T-40
Solubility of Bituminous Materials in Organic Solvents T-44
Loss of Heating of Oil and Asphaltic Compounds T-47
Flash and Fire Points by Cleveland Open Cup T-48
Penetration of Bituminous Materials T-49
Float Test for Bituminous Materials T-50
Ductility of Bituminous Materials T-51
Softening Point of Asphalts and Tar in Ethylene Glycol (Ring and Ball Apparatus) T-53
Water in Petroleum Products and Bituminous Materials by Distillation T-55
Residue of Specified Penetration T-56
Testing Emulsified Asphalts T-59
Saybolt Viscosity T-72
Distillation of Cut-Back Asphaltic Products T-78
Flash point with Tag Open Cup Apparatus T-79
Spot Test of Asphaltic Materials T-102
Settlement Ratio of Mineral Matter in Bituminous Filler T-109
Moisture or Volatile Distillates in Bituminous Mixtures T-110
Inorganic Matter or Ash T-111
Distillation of Petroleum Products T-115
Quantitative Extraction of Bitumen from Bituminous Paving and Mixtures T-164
Effect of Water on Cohesion of Compacted Bituminous Mixtures T-165
Specific Gravity of Compacted Bituminous Mixtures T-166
Sampling Bituminous Paving Mixtures T-168
Recovery of Asphalt from Solution by Abson Method T-170
Bituminous Mixing Plant Inspection T-172
Effect of Heat and Air on Asphalt Materials (Thin-Film Oven Test) T-179
Coating and Stripping of Bitumen-Aggregate Mixtures T-182
Degree of Particle Coating of Bituminous-Aggregate Mixtures T-195
Kinematic Viscosity of Asphalts T-201
Absolute Viscosity of Asphalts T-202
Maximum Specific Gravity of Bituminous Paving Mixtures Density, Specific Gravity or T-209
API Gravity of Crude Petroleum by Hyrdometer Method. T-227
Specific Gravity of Road Oils, Road Tars, Asphalt Cements, and Soft Tar Pitches T-228
Specific Gravity of Solid Pitch and Asphalt (Displacement Method) T-229
Determining Degree of Pavement Compaction of Bituminous Aggregate Mixtures T-230
Effect of Heat and Air on a Moving Film of Asphalt (Roiling-Thin-Film Oven Test) T-240
Resistance to Plastic Flow of Bituminous Mixtures Using Marshall Apparatus T-245
Hubbard-Field Method ASTM D-138
S101.6
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___
SERIES 100: GENERAL

AASHTO*
5. Portland cement Test No.
Fineness of Portland cement by the Turbidimeter T-98
Chemical Analysis of Hydraulic Cement T-105
Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars T-106
Autoclave Expansion of Portland cement T-107
Sampling Hydraulic Cement T-127
Fineness of Hydraulic Cement by the 0.150mm and 0.075 mm Sieves T-128
Normal Consistency of Hydraulic Cement T-129
Time of Setting of Hydraulic Cement by Vicat Needle T-131
Tensile Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars T-132
Specific Gravity of Hydraulic Cement T-133
Air Content of Hydraulic Cement Mortar T-137
Fineness of Portland Cement by Air Permeability Apparatus T-153
Time of Setting of Hydraulic Cement by Gillmore Needles T-154
Mechanical Mixing of Hydraulic Cement Pastes and Mortars of Plastic Consistency T-163
False Set of Portland Cement (Mortar Method) T-185
False Set of Portland Cement (Paste Method) T-186
Fineness of Hydraulic Cement by the 0.045 mm (No. 325) Sieve T-1192
6. Sieve Sizes
Sieve Opening
ASTM Sieve Size or Number
Millimetres Inches
4” 100 4.00
3½” 90 3.50
3” 75 3.00
2½” 63 2.50
2” 50 2.00
1¾” 45 1.75
1½” 37.5 1.50
1¼” 31.5 1.25
1” 25.0 1.00
⅞” 22.4 0.875
¾” 19.0 0.750
⅝” 16.0 0.625
½” 12.5 0.500
7/ ”
16 11.2 0.438
⅜” 9.5 0.375
5/ ”
16 8.0 0.3 12
¼” 6.3 0.250
7/ ”
32 5.6 0.223
No.4 4.75 0.187
5 4.00 0.157
6 3.35 0.132
7 2.80 0.111
S101.7
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___
SERIES 100: GENERAL

Sieve Opening
ASTM Sieve Size or Number
Millimetres Inches
8 2.36 0.0937
10 2.00 0.0787
12 1.70 0.0661
14 1.40 0.0555
16 1.18 0.0469
18 1.00 0.0394
20 0.850 0.0331
25 0.710 0.0280
30 0.600 0.0232
35 0.500 0.0197
40 0.425 0.0165
45 0.355 0.0138
50 0.300 0.0117
60 0.250 0.0098
70 0.212 0.0083
80 0.180 0.0070
100 0.150 0.0059
120 0.125 0.0049
140 0.106 0.0041
170 0.090 0.0035
200 0.075 0.0029
230 0.063 0.0024
270 0.053 0.0021
325 0.045 0.00 17
400 0.038 0.0015
S101.8
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___
SERIES 100: GENERAL

SECTION 102: GENERAL REQUIREMENTS AND PROVISIONS
CONTENTS
102.1 Scope
102.2 Performance Security, Insurances and Maintenance during Defects Liability
Period
102.3 Relocation and Protection of Services
102.4 Road Intersections and Junctions
102.5 Workmanship and Quality Control
102.6 Setting Out of Works and Protection of Beacons
102.7 Notices, Signs and Advertisements
102.8 Measurements and Quantities
102.9 Contract Rates and Payment
102.10 Water for Construction.
102.11 Drawings Provided by the Contractor
102.12 Use of Explosives
102.13 Site Progress Meetings
102.14 Legal Provisions
102.15 Sewers, Drainage and River Channels
102.16 Adverse Weather
102.17 Measurement and Payment
___________________________________________________________________________
102.1 Scope
This section covers matters, which relate to the Contract as a whole. Definitions,
phrases or wording which would otherwise require repetition in other sections of the
specifications are also covered by clauses in this section. Matters covered by the
General Conditions of Contract are not repeated in this section, except where
necessary for providing more detailed information.
102.2 Performance Security, Insurances and Maintenance during Defects Liability

Period
Attention is drawn to the obligation of the Contractor under the Conditions of Contract:
i. To provide a Performance Security.

ii. To insure the Works and Contractor’s equipment.
iii. To maintain the Works during the Defects Liability Period in accordance with the
requirements and provisions of the Conditions of Contract, except where
iv. The need for such maintenance is determined by the Engineer to be outside the
responsibility of the Contractor.
S102.1
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___
SERIES 100: GENERAL

Separate payment items are included in the Bill of Quantities to compensate the
Contractor for his compliance with items ii and iii listed above. No separate payment
shall be made for the provision of Performance Security the cost which shall be
included in the rates tendered for in the Bill of Quantities.
102.3 Relocation and Protection of Services

This Contract may include certain work relating to the protection, moving and
reinstating of existing services that may be affected by the construction of the works.
The Employer will, in the Contract documents, provide information available to him
regarding the location of existing utility services, but the Employer does not accept
responsibility for the accuracy of this information. The Employer will not be
responsible for providing information regarding the location of service connections.
The Contractor shall check and determine on the site the positions of any services
shown on the drawings. This shall be done by visual inspections, using detecting
apparatus, and by making excavations to expose the position of the service at critical
points. This shall also be done where no services are shown on the drawings but
where such services can reasonably be believed to be present. The positions of all
services so detected shall be marked carefully on site and then drawn in on the
drawings. These services will then be defined as “known services”. The Contractor
shall take all reasonable precautions not to damage the services during the search,
when the onus shall rest with him to prove that, in the event of damage being done to
such services during the search, that such damage was unavoidable.
The Contractor will be held responsible for any damage caused by him to known
services, unless he can prove that he has taken all the above precautions and that the
damage has nevertheless been caused because the position of the known service had
deviated by more than one metre from the position as may reasonably have been
deduced from the investigation made by him.
The Contractor shall take all reasonable precautions to support and protect existing
services and service connections during construction and during the relocation of the
same. All known services, or other pipes, cables, conduits of any nature whatsoever
damaged as a result of the Contractor’s operations shall be repaired and reinstated
S102.2
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___
SERIES 100: GENERAL

forthwith by the Contractor or by the authority concerned, all at the expense of the
Contractor and to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
It shall be clearly understood that, in certain instances, existing services can be

relocated only after the Contractor has advanced sufficiently on or has completed
certain sections of earthworks or certain structures.
Whenever services are encountered which are in conflict with the permanent works
and which thereby need to be permanently moved or relocated, the Contractor shall
advise the Engineer, who will determine the extent of the work, if any, to be undertaken
by the Contractor in moving, relocating and reinstating or protecting such services.
Any work required to be undertaken by the Contractor in permanently moving and
relocating the services for which no provision has been made in the Contract
documents, or for which there are no appropriate tender rates, will be classed as a
variation, as provided in the General Conditions of Contract.
The Contractor shall work in close co-operation with private owners or public
authorities controlling services affected by the works. Should the owners of services
refuse to co-operate with the Contractor in a reasonable manner in connection with
the protection or moving of services belonging to them, the Contractor shall refer the
matter to the Engineer.
The Contractor shall, in consultation with the Engineer, clearly indicate in his
programme of the works as to when he proposes to start with and conclude the
relocation of each service or when he will require the owner to start with and conclude
the moving of each service.
102.4 Road Intersections and Junctions

Except where otherwise specified, no additional payment over and above payment for
the various items of work included in this Contract will be made for the construction in
a confined space of curves, tapers, bell mouths, traffic islands, farm accesses and
other appurtenant works in connection with the construction and maintenance of road
intersections and junctions.
S102.3
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___
SERIES 100: GENERAL

102.5 Workmanship and Quality Control

The onus rests with the Contractor to produce work which conforms in quality and
accuracy of detail to all the requirements of the specifications and drawings, and the
Contractor shall, at his own expense and before the commencement of any permanent
works, institute and have approved by the Engineer a quality-control system and
provide experienced Engineers, foremen, surveyors, materials technicians, other
technicians and other technical staff, together with all transport, instruments and
equipment, to ensure adequate supervision and positive control of the works at all
times. If, during the course of the works, the Engineer shall consider that work is being
undertaken that does not conform to the specifications and drawings he may instruct
the Contractor to amend the quality-control system in order to ensure that future work
does conform. The increased costs associated with such an instruction will remain at
the Contractor’s expense.
In accordance with the quality-control system the Contractor shall conduct tests or
have them conducted continually on a regular basis, to check the properties of natural
materials and processed natural materials and of products manufactured on the site,
such as concrete and bituminous mixes. Although not a requirement for the Contractor
to conduct regular tests on any commercially produced products such as cement,
bitumen, steel and pipes, the Contractor shall remain fully responsible for any
defective material or equipment provided by him. Similarly, the quality of all elements
of the works shall be checked on a regular basis so as to ensure compliance with the
specified requirements. . The results of all tests, quality checks, etc. shall be made
available to the Engineer within 24 hours of their completion.
The intensity of control and of tests to be conducted by the Contractor in terms of these
obligations is not specified but shall be adequate to ensure that proper control is being
exercised.
Where any natural materials or products made from natural materials are supplied to
the works the Contractor shall test and check such materials, products and/or
elements for compliance with the specified requirements and shall submit his results
to the Engineer for approval. Such submission shall include all his measurements and
test results and shall furnish adequate proof of compliance with the specified
requirements.
S102.4
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___
SERIES 100: GENERAL

No specific pay items are provided as compensation for the above obligations,
including the provision of all samples delivered to the Engineer, the repair of places
from which samples were taken, and the provision of the necessary personnel and
testing apparatus and facilities, for which compensation shall be included in the
tendered rates of the Contractor for the various items of work to which these
obligations apply.
102.6 Setting-Out of Work and Protection of Beacons

The Contractor’s attention is drawn to the requirements of the Conditions of Contract,
and he shall also comply with all legal provisions in regard to surveying and setting
out work.
The Contractor shall check the condition of all reference and level beacons and shall
satisfy himself that they have not been displaced and are true in regard to position and
level. If beacons have been destroyed, displaced or damaged before the site is handed
over to the Contractor, the Engineer will arrange to have new beacons installed. A
beacon that has been displaced shall not be used unless its true position and level
have been re-established and the new values verified by the Engineer.
Where a beacon is likely to be displaced during construction operations, the Contractor

shall establish suitable reference beacons at locations where they will not be displaced
during construction. No beacon shall be covered over, displaced or destroyed before
accurate reference beacons have been established and details of the position and
levels of such beacons have been submitted to and approved by the Engineer. The
Contractor’s reference beacons shall be of at least the same quality and durability as
the existing beacons.
The Contractor shall establish for the Works, temporary bench marks adjacent to each
structure, retaining wall and culvert site and at intermediate points so that the distance
between adjacent temporary bench marks does not exceed 100 metres. The
temporary bench marks shall be located within 15 metres of each site and the line and
level of each shall be agreed with the Engineer.
All survey control and setting-out points, bench marks and their coordinates and levels
shall be expressed in terms of the National Grid and Datum system
S102.5
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___
SERIES 100: GENERAL

The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer the method of setting-out he proposes to
employ. To ensure beyond all doubt that the complex elements of the road, such as
traffic interchanges, structures and other important features are located truly and
correctly, the Contractor shall check all setting-out by a second method. The Engineer
may at any time request the Contractor to submit proof that his setting-out has been
satisfactorily checked.
The Contractor shall, as soon as practicable, supply the Engineer with records in an
approved form relating to all references, pegs and temporary bench marks and shall
keep these records up to date by formal notice to the Engineer. All pegs shall be
painted in such distinguishing colours as may be agreed with the Engineer.
All survey reference pegs shall be carefully preserved except where construction
requires their removal. Before such removal, the approval of the Engineer shall be
obtained and adequate alternative measures taken to allow accurate relocation of
reference points and re-establishment of survey pegs if necessary.
All computations, survey notes and other records necessary to accomplish the Works
shall be neatly compiled and made available to the Engineer on request. On
completion of the Contract, all data shall be submitted to the Engineer and shall
become the property of the Employer
In cases where the displacement of or damage to property beacons or trigonometric-

survey beacons is unavoidable, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer in good time
so that he may arrange to have such beacons suitably referenced and later on
reinstated.
The Contractor shall give the Engineer not less than 24 hours’ notice in writing of his
intention to set out or give levels for any part of the work in order that arrangements
may be made for the data to be checked.
Following the completion of the site clearance and before the commencement of any
earthworks, the site shall be surveyed in conjunction with the Engineer's
Representative to establish existing ground levels. These agreed ground levels shall
form the basis for calculation of quantities of any subsequent excavation, filling, or the
formation of bunds.
S102.6
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___
SERIES 100: GENERAL

For preparation of the formation and all subsequent stages of pavement or other
construction, lines and levels shall be set out at intervals not exceeding 10m using
pegs, stakes or steel pins. These shall be securely fixed and capable of being used to
stretch a taut nylon line across the pavement with which to check the compliance with
surface level tolerances. The levelling devices shall be immediately replaced
whenever they are disturbed and the same devices shall be used for all stages of the
pavement construction. The levels of the devices shall be correct to a tolerance of
±3mm.
The setting-out of work will not be measured and paid for directly, and compensation
for the work involved in setting-out will be deemed to be covered by the rates tendered
and paid for the various items of work included in this Contract.
102.7 Notices, Signs and Advertisements

The Contractor shall not erect any signs, notices or advertisements on or along the
works or the site of the works without the written approval of the Engineer.
The Contractor shall at each project location provide, erect and maintain at a
prominent location approved by the Engineer at both the start and end of the project
limits, Project Sign Boards as defined in the Contract. The text for signs shall be as
defined in the Contract and shall include the full name of the Contractor, and a contact
name and details for the Contractor’s ‘Liaison Officer’. The Contractor shall submit for
the Engineer's approval the design, text, and lettering proposed for the signs.
The Project Sign Boards shall be erected not later than one month after the Contractor
has been given access to the site.
No signboards other than those specified above will be permitted on or adjacent to the
works, except that the Contractor may permit each of his subcontractors to display
one signboard, and one only, of less than 2m2 at the works office.
The Engineer shall have the right to have any sign, notice or advertisement moved to
a better position or to have it removed from the site of the works if it should in any way
prove unsatisfactory, inconvenient or dangerous to the general public.
S102.7
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___
SERIES 100: GENERAL

All advertisements, notices and temporary signs shall be removed by the Contractor
upon completion of the works.
102.8 Measurements and Quantities

a. Units of measurements
Generally, all work shall be measured in accordance with the SI System of metric
units.
If however any materials described in the Contract or ordered by the Engineer are
described by dimensions in the Metric or Imperial measure, and the Contractor
cannot in accordance with the Contract procure such materials in the measure
specified in sufficient time to avoid delay in the performance of his other
obligations under the Contract, but can obtain such materials in the other measure
to dimensions equivalent to those described in the Contract or ordered by the
Engineer, then the Contractor shall forthwith give notice to the Engineer of these
facts stating the dimensions to which such materials are procurable in the other
measure. The foregoing is subject to the Contractor providing evidence that he
attempted to procure, at the earliest possible time, the item in the specified
measurement units and had taken satisfactory alternative steps to procure said
item.
As soon as practicable after the receipt of any such notice under the preceding
Sub-Clause the Engineer shall give an order to the Contractor pursuant to Clause
13 of the Conditions of Contract, which shall either:
i. Direct the Contractor to supply such materials to the dimensions stated in

his said notice to be procurable instead of to the dimensions described in
the Contract or originally ordered by the Engineer: or
ii. Direct the Contractor to make some other variation whereby the need to
supply such materials to the dimensions described in the Contract or
originally ordered by the Engineer will be avoided.
The provisions of this Clause shall apply to variations ordered pursuant to this
Clause and Clause 13, as they do to variations ordered pursuant to Clause 13
alone.
S102.8
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___
SERIES 100: GENERAL

The provisions of this Clause shall apply irrespective of whether the materials in
question are to be supplied, in accordance with the Contract, directly by the
Contractor or indirectly by a nominated Sub-Contractor or nominated supplier.
b. Schedule of quantities
The quantities set out in the schedule of quantities are estimated quantities and
are used for the comparison of tenders and for awarding the Contract. It must be
clearly understood that only the actual quantities of work done or materials
supplied will be measured for payment, and that the scheduled quantities may be
increased or decreased as provided in the General Conditions of Contract.
c. Measurement of completed work

i. All distances along the centre line of the road as shown on the drawings
are horizontal distances, which will be used in calculating the quantities of
fill and pavement layers for purposes of payment. All cross-sections shall
be taken in a vertical plane.
ii. All materials, which are specified to be measured in a vehicle, shall be
hauled in vehicles of such type and size that the actual volume may be
readily and accurately determined. Unless all vehicles are of uniform
capacity, each vehicle shall bear a plainly legible identification mark
indicating its specific approved capacity.
iii. The quantity of bituminous and similar materials to be paid by volume
shall be measured at the specified temperature
iv. Structures shall be measured to the neat lines shown on the drawings and
shall include any changes ordered in writing by the Engineer and, for
purposes of payment, the calculated volume of concrete structures no
deduction shall be made for the volume of the reinforcing steel or strands,
or for individual minor openings (e.g. weep holes) of less than 0.02m2
passing through the thickness of the structure.
102.9 Contract Rates and Payment

a. Contract rates
In computing the final Contract amount, payment shall be based on the actual
quantity of authorized work done in accordance with the specifications and
drawings. The tendered rates shall apply, subject to the provisions of the General
Conditions of Contract, irrespective of whether the actual quantities are more or
S102.9
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___
SERIES 100: GENERAL

less than the scheduled quantities.
Where no rate or price has been entered against a pay item in the schedule of
quantities by a tenderer, it shall be understood that he does not require any
compensation for such work. Where, however, a pay item described in these
specifications or in the project specifications does not appear in the schedule of
quantities, the Contractor will receive reasonable compensation for such work if
required, unless anything to the contrary has been determined elsewhere.
b. Rates to be inclusive
The Contractor shall accept the payment provided in the Contract and
represented by the rates tendered by him in the schedule of quantities, as
payment in full for executing and completing the work as specified, for procuring,
furnishing, placing and installing all materials, for procuring and providing labour,
supervision, constructional plant, tools and equipment, for wastage, transport,
loading and off-loading, handling, double handling, maintenance, temporary work,
protection of the works from loss or damage, testing, quality control including
process control, overheads, profit, risk and other obligations and for all other
incidentals necessary for the completion of the work and maintenance during the
period of maintenance.
The Contractor shall note that the cost of all works and materials for minor
construction details at bridges, for example small quantities of caulking compound
and joint filler (other than expansion joints), anchor-bar covers, etc, not shown in
the schedule of quantities, shall be included in the tendered rates for concrete.
This clause shall apply in full to all pay items except where these requirements
may be specifically amended in each case.
c. The meanings of certain phrases in payment clauses:

i. Procuring and furnishing(material)
Where any of the words “supply”, “procure”, “provide”, “provision of' or
“furnish (material)” are used in the description of a pay item, it shall mean
the supply and delivery to the point of use of all materials of any kind
required for the work covered by the particular pay item, including all tax,
purchase costs, claims, damages, royalties and transport costs involved,
S102.10
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___
SERIES 100: GENERAL

but excluding overhaul. In the case of borrow materials, stone and sand
and the like it shall also include all negotiations with the owners
concerned, royalties, excavating, producing, preparing, processing,
testing, hauling and delivering the material to the point of use; the
construction, repair, maintenance and making good after completion of all
access roads, and all work required in opening, using and finishing off
borrow pits unless covered by other pay items in the schedule of
quantities.
ii. Placing material

The phrase “placing material” shall mean the off-loading, spreading,
blending, processing, watering, mixing, shaping and compacting (where
specified) of the material in the works, as well as the procuring, furnishing,
applying and admixing of water; the breaking-down of oversized material,
the removing of oversize material which cannot be broken down,
correcting irregular or uneven surfaces or layers, the thickness of which
is not to specification, finishing-off to within the specified tolerances, the
refilling of test holes and maintaining the completed work. In the case of
asphalt courses and bituminous seals, it shall also mean the heating and
spraying of binder, the spreading of aggregate or asphalt mixtures, rolling,
compacting, finishing-off to within the specified tolerances, and
maintaining the completed work.
The phrase “procuring, furnishing and placing” shall mean procuring and
furnishing in addition to placing, all as defined herein.
d. Pay items
The descriptions under the pay items in the various sections of the specifications,
indicating the work for which allowance shall be made in the tendered rates for
such pay items, are for the guidance of the Contractor and do not necessarily
repeat all the details of work and materials required by and described in the
specifications.
These descriptions shall be read in conjunction with the relevant specifications

and drawings, and the Contractor shall, when tendering, bear in mind that his
rates shall be inclusive as specified in sub clause (b) above.
S102.11
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___
SERIES 100: GENERAL

102.10 Water for Construction

The Contractor himself shall make arrangements for procuring, transporting, storing,
distributing and applying the water needed for construction and other purposes, except
where otherwise specified. No direct payment will be made for providing water, the
cost of which shall be included in the rates tendered for the various items of work for
which water is needed.
Only clean water, free from undesirable concentrations of deleterious salts and other
deleterious materials, shall be used. All water sources used shall be subject to the
Engineer’s approval.
102.11 Drawings Provided for the Contractor

Where the Contractor is required to prepare any drawings for the purpose of this
Contract, they shall be prepared and submitted to the Engineer for his adjudication in
the form of five hard (paper) copies and a copy contained on a Compact Disc (CD).
The standard of detailing and quality of print shall be the same as those of the drawings
supplied to the Contractor under the Contract. The drawings shall be compiled in the
English language and shall comply in all respects with the requirements of the
Employer.
Accepted drawings shall form an integral part of the Contract documents, and any
drawing not accepted and signed will not be authorised for construction purposes
and/or used for the manufacture of any item. Notwithstanding the approval and/or
acceptance and signing of the drawings, the Contractor shall take full responsibility for
all details, discrepancies, omissions, errors, etc. in respect of the said drawings as
well as for the consequences thereof.
The Contractor shall submit only fully completed drawings in accordance with this
Specification and shall not be entitled to claim for delays resulting from the submission
of incomplete drawings. The Engineer will require a period of four to eight weeks,
depending on circumstances, for reviewing the complete drawing(s).
No direct payment for design, preparation and submission of drawings will be made
and all costs shall be included in the rates tendered for the relevant pay items as
S102.12
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___
SERIES 100: GENERAL

provided in the schedule of quantities. The cost of reviewing the design/drawings shall
be for the Contractor’s account.
102.12 Use of Explosives

Generally the Contractor will be permitted to use explosives for breaking up rock and
hard material during excavation, for demolishing existing structures, and for such other
purposes for which it may normally be required, subject to the following conditions:
a. The Engineer will have the right to prohibit the use of explosives in cases where,
in his opinion, the risk of injury to persons or damage to property or adjoining
structures is too high. Such action by the Engineer shall not entitle the Contractor
to any additional payment for having to resort to other less economical methods
of construction unless otherwise provided in the project specifications or the
schedule of quantities.
b. The Contractor shall take proper care when excavating cuts not to loosen, where
it can be avoided, any material outside the specified cut line, whether by ripping,
blasting or by other means, which would endanger the stability of the slopes or
which would subsequently cause undue erosion or disintegration of the batters.
c. Legal provisions in regard to the use of explosives and the requirements of the
Inspector of Explosives or/and Trinidad and Tobago Fire Services shall be strictly
complied with.
d. The Contractor shall, at his own cost, make arrangements for supplying,
transporting, storing and using explosives.
e. Before any blasting is undertaken, the Contractor, together with the Engineer,
shall examine and measure up any buildings, houses or structures in the vicinity
of the proposed blasting and establish and record, together with the owner
thereof, the extent of any cracks or damage that may exist before blasting
operations are commenced. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to make
good, at his own expense, any further damage to such houses, buildings or
structures which is a result of the blasting operations.
f. Where there is considerable danger of damage to power or telephone lines or
underground or other services or any other property, the Contractor shall suitably
adapt his method of blasting and the size of the charges, and shall take adequate
protective measures, such as cover blasting, in order to limit the risk of damage
as far as possible.
g. The Engineer shall, twenty-four hours before each blasting operation is carried
S102.13
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___
SERIES 100: GENERAL

out, be advised thereof, in writing, unless otherwise agreed on with the Engineer.
102.13 Site Progress Meetings

The Contractor or his authorized representative shall attend regular meetings on the
site with representatives of the Employer and the Engineer, at dates and times to be
determined by the Employer. Such meetings will be held for evaluating the progress
of the Contract and for discussing matters pertaining to the Contract which any of the
parties represented may wish to raise. Such meetings are not intended for discussing
matters concerning the normal day-to-day running of the Contract.
102.14 Legal Provisions

The Contractor shall keep himself fully conversant with the latest enactments,
provisions and regulations of all legislative and statutory bodies, and, in all respects
and at all times, shall comply with such enactments, provisions and regulations in
regard to executing the Contract.
102.15 Sewers, Drainage and River Channels

Drains and sewer connections that are to remain in service and are connected to
existing pipelines that are to be abandoned or removed shall remain in service until
connected to new or existing pipelines. Where the work intercepts or affects existing
drains or sewers, whether shown on the Drawings or not, the Contractor shall arrange
to keep such drains or sewers in proper working order at his own expense until new
connections are made by others.
The Contractor’s attention is directed to the fact that he may be required to make
alteration to existing drainage channels. Prior consultation shall be made with the
Ministry of Works and Transport Drainage Division and approval shall be obtained
from the Engineer in advance of the start of the operations for the Contractor’s
proposals for any alterations to drainage systems and temporary drainage structures
and the placement of false work in a drainage or river channel.
Temporary drainage facilities may be required and the Contractor shall in no way
interfere with normal adequate drainage systems. It will be the responsibility of the
Contractor to provide adequate temporary drainage throughout this Contract until such
time as new drainage facilities are completed. All proposed drainage diversions must
be submitted to the Engineer for his approval.
S102.14
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___
SERIES 100: GENERAL

102.16 Adverse Weather

Adverse weather shall be deemed to be if, during any given month, the total monthly
rainfall measured at an agreed point(s) within the project or individual sites making up
the project should exceed the five year monthly average rainfall estimated for the area
of the project or an individual site. The estimation will be made by the Government’s
Meteorological Department, at the Contractor’s cost to justify any claim for an
extension. Weather will only be considered to be adverse, on a daily basis, if the
foregoing has been substantiated and rainfall in excess of the average has been
recorded during that day during the same month, and the day was an approved
working day under the Contract.
The Contractor is reminded that the impact of the average five year monthly rainfall or
such other rainfall as the Contractor may consider appropriate should already have
been accommodated in his programme of works and as such the Engineer may
assume an appropriate number of days lost to inclement weather have already been
allowed for in the Contractor’s programme. Should the rainfall in any month be below
average, the Engineer may consider this benefit in assessing the impact of inclement
weather on the Contractor’s programme.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the provision of recording stations at each site
and for recording the rainfall in conjunction with the Engineer. In submitting justification
for proof of excess rainfall the contractor shall provide records from the nearest
Government recording station to confirm the order of accuracy of the site
measurements.
S102.15
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___
SERIES 100: GENERAL

Pay Item No. Description Unit

102.2 Provisional Sum for repair works during the Defects Prov. sum
Liability Period not occasioned by the Contractor.
The work authorised by the Engineer shall be paid for in accordance with the provisions of the General
Conditions of Contract
102.3 Provision of Insurances

The tendered rate shall include full compensation for providing all insurance policies required under
the various clauses of the Conditions of Contract.
102.4 Protection of Services Lump Sum

The tendered lump sum shall include full compensation for the protection of all known services during
ongoing construction operations to the satisfaction of the Engineer. The lump sum will be paid in two
instalments of 50% each, one to be paid once the Engineer is satisfied that 50% of the relevant work
has been adequately carried out and the other to be paid at the end of the Contract subject to the
remaining protection works having been adequately carried out
102.5 Provisional Sum for Relocation and/or Permanent Prov. sum

Protection of Services as Directed by the Engineer
The sum provided shall be disbursed by the Engineer as he sees fit and in compensation for such
permanent protection or relocation works as he might require.
102.6 Provision of Project Signboards No.

The unit of measurement shall be the number of project signboards supplied, erected, maintained
during the contract and dismantled at the end of the contract.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for procurement, supply, erection, maintenance and
all transport to and from the site all in accordance with the requirements of the Contract and to the
satisfaction of the Engineer. Payment will be made in two instalments, 75% upon initial provision of
the signboards and 25% upon their satisfactory maintenance up to, and their removal from site
following completion of the works
S102.16
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___
SERIES 100: GENERAL

SECTION 103: HEALTH AND SAFETY
CONTENTS
103.1 Health and Safety Standards
103.2 Health and Safety Plan to be Submitted
103.3 Appointment of Health and Safety Officer
103.4 Protective Clothing and Safety Equipment (PPE)
103.5 First Aid Kits to be Available
103.6 Staff to be Trained as First-Aiders
103.7 Reporting of Accidents
103.8 Emergency Evacuation Plans
103.9 Contractor’s Site Office
103.10 Contractor’s Site Sanitary Facilities
_____________________________________________________________________________
103.1 Health and Safety Standards

The standards and guidelines regarding health and safety to be adopted by the
Contractor shall be Trinidad And Tobago Osh Act 2004 Amended 2006, Schlumberger
Safety Standards and the U.S. Army Corps of Engineers manual, “General Safety
Requirements”, E.M. 385-1-1. A copy of the manual shall be held at the Contractor’s
site offices, and shall be made available for inspection on request to any member of
the workforce.
103.2 Health and Safety Plan to be Submitted

The Contractor’s Method Statements shall include a Health and Safety Plan, which
sets out, to the satisfaction of the Engineer, the general and specific measures and
procedures which are to be adopted to ensure the health and safety of the workforce
and of the general public in the vicinity of the site, during construction of temporary
and permanent works. The Health and Safety Plan shall also set out the emergency
procedures to be adopted in the event of unforeseen events occurring which present
a hazard to the workforce or to the general public. All activities shall be undertaken in
accordance with the approved Plan.
103.3 Appointment of Health and Safety Officer

The task of ensuring that all workforce health and safety matters are properly and fully
addressed shall be the responsibility of a senior member of the Contractor’s site staff,
designated by the Contractor as the Health and Safety Officer.
S103.1
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___
SERIES 100: GENERAL

A deputy shall all be designated by the Contractor to act during temporary absences
of the Health and Safety Officer from the site.
The Contractor shall notify the Engineer of the names of the Health and Safety Officer
and his deputy, together with the method whereby they can be contacted at any time
during normal working hours. This information shall also be prominently displayed in
the Contractor’s site offices in a location where it can be seen easily by the workforce.
In the event that, in the opinion of the Engineer, the Health and Safety Officer or his
deputy is failing to address health and safety issues adequately, the Engineer shall
require his immediate replacement.
The assigned responsibilities of the Health and Safety Officer shall cover all aspects
of workforce health and safety. They shall include, but not be limited to, instruction of
the workforce in the measures and procedures which are to be adopted in relation to
health and safety matters, safe working practices and site monitoring to ensure that
such measures and procedures are being adopted and are effective, and the
preparation of health and safety action plans to accompany the Contractor’s method
statements.
103.4 Protective Clothing and Safety Equipment (PPE)

All members of the workforce and Contractor’s supervisory staff shall be issued with
protective clothing and other safety equipment (PPE) appropriate to the tasks being
undertaken or supervised, as set out in the Health and Safety Standards, at no cost to
themselves. It shall be a condition of employment that the appropriate clothing and
equipment be worn and/or used as indicated in relation to specific activities set out in
the Standards, on pain of instant dismissal. All workers shall be provided with overalls,
hard-toe cap safety boots and safety helmets of patterns approved by the Engineer,
and these shall be replaced by the Contractor when they become worn-out or
damaged. Fluorescent jackets of a type approved by the Engineer shall be worn by all
workers and supervisory staff deployed on or adjacent to public roads, and at such
other locations as may be decided by the Engineer.
103.5 First Aid Kits to be Available

First aid kits, of a type equivalent to that specified in the Health and Safety Standards,
or as approved by the Engineer, shall be provided by the Contractor at each worksite
and in the Contractor’s offices. Any consumable items which have been used shall be
replaced without undue delay. The Health and Safety Officer or his Deputy shall be
S103.2
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___
SERIES 100: GENERAL

responsible for making weekly checks to ensure that the kits are complete. The
location of first aid kits at each workplace shall be made known to all members of the
workforce. The kits shall be freely accessible, and shall not be kept locked or in locked
storage during working hours.
103.6 Staff to be Trained as First-Aiders

One person who has been trained in basic first aid/CPR and holds a currently valid
first aid certificate issued by an organisation approved by the Engineer, shall be
present at each work location and at the Contractor’s site offices or, in cases where a
number of separate work locations are close together, at each group of locations,
during all construction operations. In the event that one first-aider is to be responsible
for a group of locations, the Engineer will determine the number of locations which
constitute a group for first aid purposes.
First aid certificates shall be those issued by the St John’s Ambulance Brigade or
Emergency Medical Planning International, or equivalent as determined by the
Engineer. The Engineer shall be provided by the Contractor with a list of names of
first-aiders and copies of their certificates. The Contractor’s Health and Safety Officer
shall ensure that the workforce at each worksite is made aware of the name of the
person responsible for first aid at that worksite, and the means whereby they can be
called in the event of an accident occurring.
103.7 Reporting of Accidents

The Contractor shall provide, within 24 hours of the occurrence of any accident at or
about the site or in connection with the execution of the accident, a report to the
Engineer. The Contractor shall also report such accident to the competent authority
whenever such report is required by law.
The Contractor’s Health and Safety Officer shall institute procedures for the reporting
of minor and major accidents, and shall keep a record of such events in an Accident
Register of a form acceptable to the Engineer. The Accident Register shall be available
at all times during normal working hours for inspection by the Engineer.
103.8 Emergency Evacuation Plans

The Contractor’s Health and Safety Officer shall draw up plans, to the satisfaction of
the Engineer, for the emergency evacuation to hospital of any seriously injured
member of the workforce.
S103.3
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___
SERIES 100: GENERAL

The plan shall not rely on the provision of transport by EHS, but shall make provision
for transport using the Contractor’s own resources. Each person responsible for first
aid shall be advised in writing of the procedure to be adopted to call for emergency
evacuation.
The Contractor shall provide such equipment and facilities as are necessary or
required, in case of accidents, for first aid service to any, who may be injured in the
progress of the Work; and he shall have standard arrangements with local hospitals
for the removal and hospital treatment of any employee who may be injured or who
may become ill. Details of the equipment, facilities and hospital arrangements shall
be submitted to the Engineer for approval.
103.9 Contractor’s Site Office

The Contractor shall provide appropriate sanitary/ablution facilities for the use of base-
camp personnel, with separate facilities for males and females. The numbers of male
and female toilets and male and female wash basins shall be appropriate to the peak
numbers of staff of each sex working at the base camp. The toilet facilities shall be
provided at all times with adequate supplies of toilet paper.
Wash basins shall be provided at all times with adequate supplies of water, soap and
paper towels. The toilets/ablution facilities shall be maintained in a clean and hygienic
condition at all times to the satisfaction of the Engineer. The arrangements for
toilet/ablution facilities shall be approved by the Engineer, prior to commencement of
base camp establishment.
Toilets shall be of the flush WC type, and shall be located in a ventilated weatherproof
enclosure. An adequate water supply for flushing shall be available at all times. In the
event that connection to a municipal sewer is not feasible and, in the opinion of the
Engineer, the soil conditions are suitable, all wastewater arising from toilets, ablution
and other site office facilities shall be discharged to a septic tank connected to a soak
away. In the event that soil conditions are unsuitable for soak ways to be effective,
wastewater discharges shall be to a cess pit, which shall be pumped out as and when
necessary. Rainwater shall be prevented from entering septic tanks or cesspits.
S103.4
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___
SERIES 100: GENERAL

103.10 Contractor’s Site Sanitary Facilities

The use of pit latrines as site toilets is specifically prohibited. Site toilets shall be of the
portable chemical type in a ventilated weatherproof housing, and shall be emptied at
least once a week, well before they become full, by a contractor who is duly authorised
and licensed to carry out this activity. Separate facilities shall be provided for male and
female site workers.
The numbers of toilets at each worksite shall be in a ratio of not less than one toilet for
every 12 workers, with the provision that there shall be at least one toilet reserved for
female use, if any female workers are present at the worksite.
The toilets shall have adequate supplies of toilet paper available at all times. Hand
washing facilities including soap, and paper towels shall be provided adjacent to each
toilet and an adequate supply of water shall be available at all times. Toilet and hand
washing facilities shall be maintained in clean, tidy and hygienic condition at all times,
to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
103.1 Compliance with the requirements of Section 103: Health Month

and Safety
The tendered rate per month shall include full compensation for full and thorough compliance with
the requirements and provisions of Section 103 for one month and to the satisfaction of the
Engineer.
S103.5
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___
SERIES 100: GENERAL

SECTION 104: GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
CONTENTS
104.1 Definition of the Site
104.2 Acts Prejudicial to the Environment
104.3 Contractor to Appoint Public Liaison Officer
104.4 Haulage of Equipment and Construction Materials
104.5 Naturally-Occurring Construction Materials
104.6 Hot Mix Plant Operation
104.7 Dust, Noise and Other Nuisances
104.8 Land and Water Pollution
104.9 Wastes and Waste Disposal
104.10 Siltation and Erosion Control
104.11 Land Temporarily Required for Site Offices, Access, Storage, safe Working
Areas etc.
104.12 Abstraction of Water from Natural Sources
104.13 Protection from Asphalt, Fuels, Lubricants etc.
104.14 Environmental Management Plan
_____________________________________________________________________________
104.1 Definition of the Site

The term “Site” shall, for the purposes of these Environmental Requirements, be
deemed to include all places where the Contractor carries out construction-related
activities including but not limited to site base camps, material and equipment storage
areas, temporary access areas, areas occupied by temporary works, and quarries and
borrow pits opened by the Contractor to supply materials for use in the Works.
104.2 Acts Prejudicial to the Environment

The Engineer shall have the authority to order an immediate suspension of and/or halt
to any activity on the part of the Contractor which, in his opinion, is causing, or is likely
to cause, significant environmental damage. The Contractor shall, without undue delay
and at his own expense, carry out remediation in accordance with the instructions of
the Engineer.
Any consequential delay to execution of the works arising from being ordered to
suspend or halt the activity concerned, or in carrying out the remediation, shall not be
considered due cause for a claim by the Contractor.
S104.1
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___
SERIES 100: GENERAL

The Engineer shall require the summary and permanent dismissal from the site of any
member of the Contractor’s workforce who, in his opinion, is committing, or has
committed, acts prejudicial to the environment or any of its components, either on site
or in vicinity of the site. Such acts shall include, but not be limited to the unsanctioned
felling of trees, the theft of or interference with agricultural crops, the theft of or
interference with the property of other persons, offensive or threatening behaviour
towards other persons, the trapping or killing of wildlife (other than vermin) and the
collection of plants.
104.3 Contractor to Appoint Public Liaison Officer

The Contractor shall designate one of his senior site staff as Public Liaison Officer,
who shall have responsibility for dealing with complaints from the general public
concerning any aspects of the site activities. The Engineer shall be advised of the
name of the person so designated, together with details of how he can be contacted
during normal working hours, and his usual work location.
The Public Liaison Officer’s contact details shall be displayed on all project sign
boards. The Public Liaison Officer shall develop effective procedures for recording
public complaints and ensuring that these are dealt with appropriately without undue
delay. He shall maintain an up-to-date Register of Public Complaints which is available
during normal working hours for inspection by the Engineer. The Register shall be of
a form acceptable to the Engineer and shall record such details as the Engineer may
require. These shall include, but not be limited to, the name and address of the
complainant, the nature of the complaint, the action which has been taken to address
the complaint and the name of the person responsible for implementing the action.
In the event of no action being considered necessary by the Public Liaison Officer, the
Register shall contain a record setting out the reasons for no action being taken. The
Public Liaison Officer shall monitor implementation of actions taken in relation to
complaints and shall sign the Register accordingly when he is satisfied that the
requisite action has been completed.
104.4 Haulage of Equipment and Construction Materials

All vehicles used by the Contractor for haulage of equipment and materials on public
roads shall be of a type and capacity suitable for the duty they are employed on. They
shall be duly licensed, in a roadworthy condition, and shall have a valid test certificate.
S104.2
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___
SERIES 100: GENERAL

All loads shall be properly secured. No load shall be carried that results in an axle
loading or MGW (maximum gross weight) that is greater than the limit imposed by law.
The tailgates and drop sides of vehicles used to haul loose materials shall be properly
secured at all times when travelling on public roads. When loose materials are being
transported they shall be covered with a heavy duty load sheet which is adequately
fastened down to prevent the emission of dust and load shedding. Loading of loose
materials above the level of the truck sides (as provided by the original manufacturer)
shall not be permitted. The use of truck side and/or tailgate height extensions to
increase carrying capacity shall not be permitted. Haulage vehicles shall be
maintained according to the original manufacturer’s specifications and manuals.
If, in the opinion of the Engineer a haulage vehicle is not in a roadworthy condition, is
excessively loaded, or is emitting undue smoke or noise, that vehicle shall immediately
be taken out of service and the faults rectified before it shall be permitted to return to
site duty. No claim for additional costs associated with such action by the Engineer
shall be entertained.
All drivers shall be duly licensed for the category of vehicle they drive. They shall
comply at all times with speed limits on public roads which are imposed by law. The
Contractor shall dismiss from the site any driver who persistently ignores speed limits
or drives in a reckless manner. The Engineer shall have the right to require dismissal
from the site and immediate replacement of any driver who, in his opinion persistently
engages in speeding or reckless driving. No claim for additional costs associated with
such action by the Engineer shall be entertained.
Particular care shall be taken to ensure that concrete mix trucks and fuel tankers are
driven in such a manner as will not result in fresh concrete or fuel spilling on public
roads. The Contractor shall be responsible, at his own cost, for cleaning up of any
such spillage or shedding of other loads without undue delay.
104.5 Naturally-Occurring Construction Materials

The use of sand or any other material extracted from existing beaches or the beds
and/or banks of existing watercourses in any part of the works shall not be permitted,
with the exception of material excavated in accordance with the Drawings, which is
approved by the Engineer for use elsewhere in the Works, and which would otherwise
be disposed of as waste.
S104.3
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___
SERIES 100: GENERAL

All naturally-occurring construction materials supplied for use in the works shall be
obtained only from quarries and borrow pits which are in possession of such valid
licences, permits and authorisations as may be required under the law for their
operation. The Contractor shall provide the Engineer with copies of such licences etc.
at the time of seeking approval of material sources.
The Contractor’s attention is drawn to the provisions of Article 43 of the Minerals Act
2000 which requires an application for a licence under the Act to extract and/or
process construction materials to be accompanied by an Environmental Impact
Assessment and a Certificate of Environmental Clearance. The Contractor is advised
that preparation of the required documents and the official procedures relating to their
processing are likely to take at least six months in total.
In the event that the Contractor chooses to open new quarries or borrow pits to supply
material for use in the works, he shall note that delays in obtaining the necessary
licence shall not be considered a valid reason for a claim for an extension of time to
complete the works.
104.6 Hot Mix Plant Operation

Asphalt and other hot-mix bituminous materials supplied for use in the works shall be
obtained only from plants which are in possession of such valid licences, permits and
authorisations as may be required by law for their operation. The Contractor shall
provide the Engineer with copies of such licences etc. at the time of seeking approval
of material sources.
In the event that the Contractor chooses to employ demountable (moveable) plant for
the supply of hot-mix bituminous materials, he shall seek the approval of the Engineer
of the location or locations where such plant is to be deployed, prior to commencement
of installation. The location shall be deemed part of the site. The Contractor is advised
that approval will not normally be given for any installation to be sited within 500m of
any dwelling or other occupied buildings. Such plant shall be fitted with dust
suppression equipment and shall be operated and maintained in a manner which will
minimise emissions of dust and fumes.
If, in the opinion of the Engineer, the plant is emitting undue dust or fumes, he shall
have the discretion to order immediate shutdown of the plant, until such time as
S104.4
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___
SERIES 100: GENERAL

appropriate and effective remedial action has been taken. No valid claim for delay
shall arise in such circumstances. The Contractor‘s attention is drawn to Item 18 (a)
of the Schedule which forms part of the Certificate of Environmental Clearance
(Designated Activities) Order 2001. This may result in the need for a Certificate of
Environmental Clearance to be issued before a new hot-mix plant can legally be
operated.
The Contractor is advised that preparation of the required documents and the official
procedures relating to their processing may take several months in total. In the event
that the Contractor chooses to install hot-mix plant at a location not currently used for
that purpose in order to supply material for use in the work, he shall note that delays
in obtaining the necessary Certificate shall not be considered a valid reason for a claim
for an extension of time to complete the works.
104.7 Dust, Noise and Other Nuisances

The Contractor shall conduct all his activities in a manner which minimises nuisance
to the general public and to the occupiers of premises adjacent to the site.
The Contractor’s activities shall be conducted in a manner which complies fully with
the relevant provisions of the Noise Pollution Control Rules 2001. In the case of
activities taking place in the vicinity of premises which, in the opinion of the Engineer,
are noise sensitive (including but not limited to educational establishments, hospitals
and places of worship), or where construction activities take place outside the hours
of 7am and 7pm on the same day, the Engineer shall have the discretion to require
appropriate measures to be adopted by the Contractor to reduce noise levels.
The Contractor shall take all appropriate measures to minimise the generation of
fugitive dust on the site to the satisfaction of the Engineer. These shall include, but not
be limited to, the regular watering of unsealed pavement layers which are being
rehabilitated as part of the Works and of unsealed parts of material haul routes,
watering of stockpiles of construction aggregates and soil materials, and the adoption
of procedures for site clearance and demolition which minimise dust generation. The
maximum length of time during which road pavement shall remain unsealed following
removal of existing surfacing as part of the Works shall be decided by the Engineer.
The Engineer shall require such special precautions to be taken as he shall consider
S104.5
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___
SERIES 100: GENERAL

appropriate in the circumstances to prevent harmful fugitive dust emissions arising

from activities such as cement- or lime- stabilisation of soils. Specific provision shall
be made in the Contractor’s Method Statements for dust minimisation measures, to
the satisfaction of the Engineer.
The Contractor shall keep clean and free of mud, soil and other materials, sections of
public roads which have material deposited on them as a result of his activities, to the
satisfaction of the Engineer. All site vehicles and machinery deployed to site by the
Contractor shall not emit undue noise or smoke, and shall be maintained in this state
throughout the contract period. If, in the opinion of the Engineer, any of the
Contractor’s vehicles or machinery is emitting undue noise or smoke, such shall be
removed from the site immediately or immediate rectification shall be carried out.
All works shall be executed in a manner which does not unduly impede pedestrian
and/or vehicular access by owners and the general public to adjacent houses, other
premises and lands. Specific provision shall be made in the Contractor’s Method
Statements for the maintenance of access, to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
104.8 Land and Water Pollution

The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to prevent pollution of land and
water resources arising directly or indirectly from his activities. He shall be responsible
for taking immediate remedial action at his own cost to minimise the effects of any
spills and leakages of polluting substances, to the satisfaction of the Engineer and in
accordance with any instructions given by the Engineer in this respect. The Contractor
shall be responsible for the payment of full and fair compensation to any persons or
entities that have suffered damage to resources or property following spillages or
leakages.
Sanitary facilities at the site offices and at worksites shall be maintained in a clean and
hygienic condition at all times, and shall be provided in such numbers and of such
types as set out in the Specification.
The washing of vehicles and construction equipment in or adjacent to watercourses is

specifically prohibited. All such washing is to be carried out at designated washing
areas, approved by the Engineer, which are equipped with efficient oil and grease
traps.
S104.6
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___
SERIES 100: GENERAL

Refuelling, routine servicing and non-emergency repair of vehicles and equipment

shall only be carried out in designated refuelling/maintenance areas approved by the
Engineer, with the exception of refuelling of small mobile equipment such as pumps,
compressors, generators and concrete mixers, which may be carried out at
deployment locations. Refuelling/maintenance areas shall be provided with an
impermeable base and drainage systems which discharge through efficient oil and
grease traps. They shall be protected from rain by means of suitable roofing.
Facilities shall be provided to contain and clean up spillages and leakages of

petroleum products to the satisfaction of the Engineer, Recovered petroleum products
may be returned to store or shall be disposed of as special wastes, as provided for in
the Contract. Materials used in clean up shall be disposed of as special waste.
Fuel stores shall have an impermeable base which shall be surrounded by an

impermeable bund such that the volume of the area contained within the bund is not
less than 110% of the maximum capacity of the storage. Storage facilities shall be
subject to the approval of the Engineer. Spillages and leakages shall be dealt with
without undue delay in the same manner as those which occur in
maintenance/refuelling areas.
In the event of refuelling of minor equipment or emergency repairs to vehicles or plant

being carried out at locations other than the designated refuelling/maintenance area,
drip trays shall be employed to contain spillage of potentially polluting materials. These
shall be of size and capacity appropriate to the activity being undertaken and shall be
of a type approved by the Engineer. Any soil which becomes contaminated with
petroleum products shall be carefully and immediately removed and disposed of as
special waste.
Storage facilities for potentially polluting materials other than petroleum products shall
be of a type approved by the Engineer.
Particular care shall be taken when activities are carried out in, or in the vicinity of,
watercourses or bodies of standing water, to ensure that pollution does not occur.
Special precautions shall be taken as necessary, to the satisfaction of the Engineer,
to ensure that materials such as, but not limited to, cement dust, fresh concrete, lime
and petroleum products do not pollute the water body.
S104.7
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___
SERIES 100: GENERAL

104.9 Wastes and Waste Disposal

All wastes arising directly or indirectly in connection with construction activities shall
be disposed of only at landfill sites operated by SWMCOL (Trinidad and Tobago Solid
Waste Management Company Limited) or by recycling at a facility which is duly
authorised to conduct recycling activities. Disposal of any type of waste by burning or
burial is specifically prohibited. In the event of the Contractor disposing of wastes other
than as provided for in this Contract, he shall be required to remove any such wastes,
dispose of them at a SWMCOL site and clean up the disposal area at his own cost
and to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
Prior to the commencement of any activities which may result in the generation of
wastes, the Contractor shall consult with SWMCOL concerning any special
arrangements which they may require in relation to waste disposal at sites under their
control, and shall comply fully with any such requirements. The Contractor shall
confirm to the Engineer that such consultation has taken place, and shall inform him
of any requirements of SWMCOL regarding waste disposal.
All wastes shall be segregated for haulage and disposal purposes. Loads of mixed
wastes shall not be delivered to SWMCOL sites. Deliveries of wastes to SWMCOL
sites shall be properly recorded by the Contractor. Drivers of waste haulage vehicles
shall be provided with record books, available for inspection by the Engineer, which
set out the registration number of the vehicle, the driver’s name, the date and time of
delivery of waste to a SWMCOL site, and the nature and volume of the waste. The
record of each delivery shall be signed as correct by the driver, and shall be
countersigned by the SWMCOL employee at the landfill site who is responsible for
logging and inspecting waste deliveries.
Disposal of wastes at the landfill site shall be carried out in accordance with the
instructions of SWMCOL site staff. Waste concrete shall be broken into lumps which
are no greater than 350mm in any dimension. Reinforcing steel shall be bent parallel
and close to the concrete surface or cut off flush with the surface, so as to facilitate
use in temporary roadways.
Waste oils shall be stored on site in leak proof containers until taken for disposal at a
duly licensed recycling facility approved by the Engineer. Waste steel and other metals
shall be disposed of at a duly licensed recycling facility approved by the Engineer. In
S104.8
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___
SERIES 100: GENERAL

the event that the material is considered unsuitable for recycling, it shall be disposed
of in accordance with the instructions of the Engineer.
Arrangements for the disposal of special wastes including, but not limited to, soil and
other materials contaminated by petroleum products, waste paint, resins and other
potentially polluting materials and their containers, shall be discussed and agreed with
SWMCOL, and shall be to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
Temporary storage of wastes shall not be done in such a manner as causes pollution
or public nuisance in any form and shall be for the minimum practicable time. If, in the
opinion of the Engineer, temporary storage arrangements are inappropriate in any
way, the Contractor shall be required to remove such wastes for disposal forthwith.
104.10 Siltation and Erosion Control

In executing the Works, the Contractor shall take all reasonable steps to minimise
siltation and erosion arising as a consequence of his activities. If, in the opinion of the
Engineer, the Contractor’s activities are causing undue erosion and/or siltation, or
inappropriate or ineffective control measures are being adopted, the Contractor shall
be required to implement, at his own cost, such additional siltation and erosion control
measures and removal and disposal of deposited silt and repair of eroded locations
as the Engineer may decide are appropriate in the circumstances.
In-bank or in-waterway excavation undertaken in connection with Construction or bank

protection works shall be carried out behind a cofferdam or silt curtain. Dewatering
systems shall incorporate sedimentation basins whose outflow has suspended
sediment content which is not, in the opinion of the Engineer, significantly higher than
that in the watercourse immediately upstream of the structure. The Contractor’s
Method Statements for Construction and bank protection works shall contain full
details of the measures to be adopted to minimise siltation, and shall be to the
satisfaction of the Engineer.
The excavation of river-mouth sand bars in order to facilitate execution of the works
shall be expressly prohibited.
S104.9
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___
SERIES 100: GENERAL

104.11 Land Temporarily Required for Site Offices, Access, Storage, safe Working
Areas etc.
The Contractor shall obtain the permission in writing of landowners or those who have
right-of-use of any land which is required temporarily in connection with execution of
the Works. Such permission shall state the name and address of the owner concerned,
the location and area of the land, the intended use for the land, the period over which
it will be required and the extent to which the Contractor intends to clear the land in
connection with the intended use.
The location and type of any trees or structures which are not to be
cleared/demolished shall be stated. Copies of such permissions shall be provided to
the Engineer, whose agreement to use of such parcels of land for the specified
purpose and period shall be obtained prior to commencement of any activity on that
land by the Contractor. Such lands shall be deemed part of the Site.
The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining, at his own expense, any legal
agreements and/or permits and authorisations required by law, in connection with the
intended use of such lands.
The Engineer shall not agree to temporary use of lands by the Contractor which, in his
opinion, are located in or adjacent to environmentally sensitive areas or have been
designated as Environmentally Sensitive Areas by the relevant authority under the
Environmentally Sensitive Areas Rules 2001 and subsidiary legislation. The Engineer
shall not agree to the temporary use by the Contractor of beach or foreshore areas.
104.12 Abstraction of Water from Natural Sources

The Contractor shall consult with the relevant authorities regarding suitable locations
from which water may be abstracted for construction or other purposes from surface
or groundwater resources. He shall obtain at his own expense any permits,
authorisations and licences which are required by law in relation to the abstraction of
water, prior to commencement of abstraction.
In the event that abstraction by the Contractor adversely affects the availability of
supply to other users, he shall provide an adequate alternative supply at his cost and
to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
S104.10
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___
SERIES 100: GENERAL

104.13 Protection from Asphalt, Fuels, Lubricants etc.

Materials that are hazardous to health and the environment, such as asphalt, fuels,
lubricants, etc., shall be stored in protected areas. Bunds shall be provided to prevent
leakage of fuels and lubricants to surrounding lands or watercourses and storage
areas shall be lined with leak proof membranes in sensitive areas. No fuelling or
servicing of vehicles will be permitted outside of these bunded areas. A spill
containment plan (including provisions for removal and remediation of contaminated
soil after the end of construction) shall be prepared and approved by the Engineer
prior to the start of work on site. On-site remediation of soil will not be permitted without
the approval of the Employer.
The contractor shall take all necessary steps, throughout the duration of the project,
to minimize the emission of noxious gaseous contaminants to the atmosphere.
Vehicles and equipment shall be routinely serviced and fitted with adequate exhaust
systems.
If any vehicle or equipment (in the Engineer’s opinion) emits excessive smoke, it shall
(on the Engineer’s instruction) be removed from the site for repair or maintenance.
104.14 Environmental Management Plan

The Contractor is to prepare and present to the Engineer for approval an
Environmental Management Plan (EMP) that clearly states the methodology for
implementing the mitigation measures during construction activities. This EMP must
be submitted within 28 days of award of the Construction Contract.

104.1 Compliance with the requirements of Section 104: General Month
Environmental Requirements
The tendered rate per month shall include full compensation for full and thorough
compliance with the requirements and provisions of Section 104 to the satisfaction of the
Engineer during the completion of the Works.
S104.11
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___
SERIES 100: GENERAL

SECTION 105: OFFICE AND LABORATORY FACILITIES FOR THE ENGINEER
CONTENTS
105.1 Scope of Works
105.2 Construction and Equipment Requirements for Engineer's Office
105.3 Construction and Equipment Requirements for Engineer’s Laboratory
105.4 Assistance for the Engineer
_____________________________________________________________________________
105.1 Scope of Works

The Contractor shall provide and maintain offices for the exclusive use of the Engineer
for the duration of the Contract, including the Defects Liability Period after which the
offices and equipment and furnishings shall become the property of the Employer.
These facilities shall be located adjacent to the project site in a place to be approved
by the Engineer. The Engineer shall have exclusive use of the office and all
furnishings in the administration of this or any other similar contract for the duration of
the Contract, including the maintenance period.
105.2 Construction and Equipment Requirements for Engineer's Office

Office buildings shall be supplied in the numbers and types shown in Bill of Quantities
and the standard detail drawings.
All materials used in the construction of the Employer’s office shall be new and unused
and shall provide completely weatherproof and secure office buildings with adequate
natural and artificial lighting and all finishes, fixtures, fittings as specified in Appendix
A105. The Contractor shall provide and maintain utility services and parking areas as
specified and provide security fencing around the office and parking areas.
The furniture and equipment shall be new, of standard manufacture and supplied and
installed immediately on completion of the building. All items shall comply with the
specifications contained in the Bill of Quantities. All items shall become the property
of the Employer at the end of the maintenance period.
The offices, furnishings and equipment and all other requirements of this sub-section
shall be provided within 6 weeks of the date for commencement of the Contract.
S105.1
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___
SERIES 100: GENERAL

The Contractor shall insure, secure (including the provision of night watchmen), repair,
clean daily and maintain the Engineer's Offices and their contents for the duration of
the Contract.
105.3 Construction and Equipment Requirements for Engineer’s Laboratory (NOT

USED IN CONTRACT)
In order to facilitate all the necessary testing of material in accordance with the relevant
bill items in the specifications or as directed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall
provide a laboratory as described in Bill of Quantities to the satisfaction of the
Engineer. Laboratories shall be supplied in the numbers and types specified in Bill of
Quantities.
All materials used in the construction of the laboratories shall be new and unused and
shall provide completely weatherproof buildings with adequate natural and artificial
lighting and all finishes, fixtures, fittings, furniture and equipment as shown and
specified in Bill of Quantities. The Contractor shall provide and maintain utility services
and parking areas as specified and provide security fencing around the buildings and
parking areas.
The Contractor shall supply, calibrate, maintain and service all testing equipment
required in Bill of Quantities as specified for the relevant items or as directed by the
Engineer. The above items shall remain with the Engineer for the duration of the
contract, including the Maintenance Period. This equipment shall be for the exclusive
use of the Engineer who reserves the right to utilize the same on other similar
Contracts for the Employer. All items shall become the property of the Employer at
the end of the Maintenance Period.
The laboratories, furnishings and equipment and all other requirements of this sub-
section shall be provided within 6 weeks of the date for commencement of the
Contract. No element of the permanent works shall be commenced until 2 weeks after
the full and complete compliance of the Contractor with this sub-section.
The Contractor shall insure, secure (including the provision of night watchmen), repair,
clean daily and maintain the Engineer's Laboratory and its contents for the duration of
the Contract.
S105.2
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___
SERIES 100: GENERAL

105.4 Provision of Staff, Equipment and Services for the Engineer (NOT USED IN
CONTRACT)
In addition to staff, equipment and services provided incidentally to the supply of
offices and laboratories, the Contractor shall provide to the Engineer such additional
staff, equipment and services as are specified in Bill of Quantities.
The Engineer may also instruct the Contractor to provide additional staff, equipment
and services during the course of the Contract at agreed rates and prices.

105.1 Provide furnish and equip offices (Type To be stated) for the LS
Engineer
The tendered lump sum shall include full compensation for the supply of office buildings, equipment and
furnishings etc., supplied complete in accordance with and as described in Appendix 105 and accepted
by the Engineer. The payment shall include, at the end of the Contract, dismantling, reinstatement of the
site, disconnection of utilities, reconstruction of buildings and connection of utilities at new location,
transport of all building components, equipment and furniture.
Payment shall be made as follows:

75% of the total lump sum to be paid on acceptance of the completed facilities by the Engineer. The
remaining 25% to be paid upon dismantling, re-instatement of site, disconnection of utilities, and re-
erection of the facilities at the end of the Contract.
105.2 Maintain Offices for the Engineer LS

The tendered rate per month shall include full compensation for full and thorough maintenance of the
Engineer’s facilities including the cost of utilities, provision of janitorial and security staff specified in
Appendix A105, for one month and to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
105.3 Provide furnish and equip laboratory(ies) for the Engineer LS

The tendered lump sum shall include full compensation for the supply of office buildings, equipment and
furnishings etc., supplied complete in accordance with and as described in Appendix 105 and accepted
by the Engineer. The payment shall include, at the end of the Contract, dismantling, reinstatement of the
site, disconnection of utilities, reconstruction of buildings and connection of utilities at new location,
transport of all building components, equipment and furniture.
Payment shall be made as follows:
75% of the total lump sum to be paid on acceptance of the completed facilities by the Engineer. The
remaining 25% to be paid upon dismantling and re-erection of the facilities at the end of the Contract.
105.4 Maintain laboratories for the Engineer month

The tendered rate per month shall include full compensation for full and thorough maintenance of the
Engineer’s facilities including the cost of utilities, the provision of janitorial and security staff specified in
Appendix A105, for one month and to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
S105.3
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___
SERIES 100: GENERAL

SECTION 106: TRANSPORT AND COMMUNICATION FACILITIES FOR THE ENGINEER
(NOT USED IN CONTRACT)
CONTENTS
106.1 Description
106.2 Hired Vehicles
106.3 New Purchased Vehicles and Equipment
106.4 Maintenance of Existing Project Vehicles
106.5 Purchased Communications Equipment
106.6 Maintenance of Purchased Communications Equipment
_________________________________________________________________________
106.1 Description
This section describes the transport and communication equipment to be supplied and
maintained for the use of the Engineer, his staff or staff of the Employer. The facilities
will be disbursed by the use of provisional sums.
The specific requirements in respect of transport and/or communication facilities are

specified in Bill of Quantities.
106.2 Hired Vehicles

Bill of Quantities might require the Contractor to supply to the Engineer hired vehicles
for the all or part of the duration of the Contract. The hired vehicles shall be as specified
in Bill of Quantities. The hire of the vehicles as well as their various maintenance costs
shall be paid for by means of provisional sum items.
106.3 Purchased Vehicles

The Contractor shall furnish to the Engineer Vehicles of the type(s) specified in Bill of
Quantities as instructed by the Engineer. The vehicles shall all be capable of being
centrally locked and shall be fitted with a remote operable alarm and anti-theft system,
all to the approval of the Engineer. The vehicles shall be purchased in the name of the
Employer and upon delivery become the property of the Employer.
S106.1
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___
SERIES 100: GENERAL

SECTION 106: TRANSPORT AND COMMUNICATION FACILITIES FOR THE ENGINEER
The Contractor shall, for the duration of the Contract, be responsible for all running
costs for the purchased vehicles provide licenses, fully comprehensive insurance,
lubricants, fuel, oil, filters, tyres and all other consumables, servicing, repairs and
maintenance as required in respect of purchased project vehicles which shall be paid
by means of provisional sum items.
106.4 Maintenance of Existing Project Vehicles

The Contractor shall, for the duration of the Contract, provide licenses, fully
comprehensive insurance, lubricants, fuel, oil, filters, tyres and all other consumables,
servicing, repairs and maintenance as required in respect of existing project vehicles
as detailed in Bill of Quantities which shall be paid by means of provisional sum items.
106.5 Communication Equipment

Where specified in Bill of Quantities, the Contractor shall furnish to the Engineer new
communication equipment as specified in Bill of Quantities. The Contractor shall
arrange for all licenses, etc. necessary for the installation and operation of the
communication equipment. Reimbursement will be by means of provisional sums.
106.6 Maintenance of Communication Equipment

The Contractor shall, for the duration of the Contract, provide licenses, insurance and
all other services and maintenance as required in respect of purchased or existing
project communication equipment as detailed in Bill of Quantities. Reimbursement
will be by means of provisional sums.
Pay Item Description Unit

No.
106.1 Provide transport facilities for the Engineer Prov. Sum

106.2 Maintain transport facilities for the Engineer Prov. Sum
106.3 Provide communication facilities for the Engineer Prov. Sum
106.4 Maintain communication facilities for the Engineer Prov. Sum
S106.2
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___
SERIES 100: GENERAL

SECTION 107: ACCOMMODATION OF TRAFFIC
CONTENTS
107.1 General
107.2 Public Safety, Access and Traffic Flow to be Maintained
107.3 Public Participation
107.4 Construction Considerations
107.5 Dual Carriageway Rehabilitation Work
107.6 Traffic Control Devices
107.7 Flag persons
107.8 Temporary Policemen
107.9 Removal and Salvaging of Existing Signs and Guideposts
107.10 Roadway Maintenance
107.11 Sequential Arrow boards
107.12 Dust Abatement
107.13 Temporary Construction Signing
_________________________________________________________________________
107.1 General
The Contractor shall make suitable provisions, including the use of detours, to
accommodate all vehicular and pedestrian traffic safely and with a minimum of
inconvenience through or around the Works.
The Contractor shall prepare a Traffic Accommodation Strategy detailing the

measures he proposes for accommodating traffic throughout the project. Specifically,
the Traffic Accommodation Strategy shall consist of drawings detailing the
configuration of temporary construction signs and other traffic control devices in the
work zone(s) and written confirmation of the methods or procedures being used by the
Contractor to address specific traffic safety issues or situations at the work zone.
The Contractor shall submit the Traffic Accommodation Strategy to the Engineer 14
days prior to a date as agreed upon by the Engineer. The Engineer will review the
Traffic Accommodation Strategy and communicate any concerns to the Contractor
within 7 days of the pre-construction meeting.
S107.1
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___
SERIES 100: GENERAL

Any issues or concerns regarding the Contractor’s proposed Traffic Accommodation

Strategy shall be addressed to the mutual satisfaction of the Contractor and the
Engineer prior to the commencement of the Work.
Before commencing with any part of the Works, the Contractor shall first submit to the
Engineer a plan and schedule for any traffic diversion at least seven (7) days in
advance for written approval prior to implementation. This requirement should not be
confused with the requirement for the overall Traffic Accommodation Strategy
mentioned elsewhere.
107.2 Public Safety, Access and Traffic Flow to be maintained

The contractor shall at all times in all his operations and in using his construction plant
take the necessary care to protect the public and to facilitate the flow of traffic. If work
has to be done adjacent to traffic, the contractor shall see to it that his employees are
clearly visible to drivers.
The Contractor shall ensure uninterrupted access to all developments and existing
accesses along the project. As far as possible, the Contractor shall carry out
construction operations in one continuous operation at road crossings, intersections
and entrances for each phase of the work, and control his operations to ensure normal
school bus operations are not interfered with.
The Contractor shall coordinate his traffic accommodation measures with those of
other parties at or adjacent to the Work, as required, to accommodate traffic safely
and conveniently. This shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility for the safe
accommodation of traffic over the whole of the Work.
The Engineer has the right to require the Contractor to modify his operations if, in the
opinion of the Engineer, traffic is being unduly hindered or public safety is being
compromised. The Contractor shall promptly make any modifications to the traffic
accommodation operations deemed necessary by the Engineer. The Engineer may
suspend work in cases where in his opinion, the Contractor fails to adequately provide
for the safety of the public, for re-occurring safety issues or when the Contractor fails
to comply with orders issued by the Engineer regarding traffic accommodation
operations.
S107.2
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___
SERIES 100: GENERAL

Prior to any prolonged shut down of construction, the Contractor shall ensure that any
disturbed roadway surface is restored to a condition suitable for traffic operations
approved by the Engineer.
107.3 Public Participation

The Contractor shall take all reasonable steps to ensure that the public is kept
informed (e.g. through public advertisement) of all proposed traffic diversions, and that
the Public Liaison Officer appointed in terms of the Conditions of Contract is accessible
to the public by the advertisement of his contact details on all project signs and notices.
107.4 Construction Considerations

As far as possible during construction operations, the Contractor shall:
- Employ half-width construction wherever possible.
- Complete construction of adjacent traffic lanes to the same elevation each day,
except that differences up to 40mm, or 75mm with a 3:1 fillet, may be left
overnight with “Uneven Lane” warning signs.
- Complete the construction of shoulders adjacent to traffic lanes to the same

elevation within 2 weeks. Sign shoulder drop offs in excess of 40mm, or 75mm
with a 3:1 fillet, with “Low Shoulder” warning signs.
- Provide minimum lane widths of 3m. Use barricades, traffic cones, or other
approved devices to delineate traffic lanes through areas where the edge of
pavement or pavement or intended path has been obliterated by construction
operations.
- Park equipment at least 9m from the travelled way or behind approved traffic
barriers. Provide parking areas for employees’ personal vehicles in approved
areas.
107.5 Dual Carriageway Rehabilitation Works

It is the intention of this Contract that public traffic using the dual carriageway shall be
diverted from the particular carriageway length that is under construction to the
opposite parallel carriageway to operate as a temporary diversion of two-way traffic
during construction. The Contractor shall construct temporary median cross over
points together with lane channelization as per the requirements of this Specification.
S107.3
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___
SERIES 100: GENERAL

The minimum requirements for diversion of traffic from a dual carriageway system to
a two way traffic system on the opposite carriageway shall be as follows:-
a. Traffic warning signs as indicated.
b. Channelization of traffic to be diverted from two lanes to a single lane.
c. Barriers and directional signs prior to median cross-over.
d. Construction of diversion median crossovers.
e. Two-way traffic lane separation over the length of the diversion on the opposite
carriageway.
f. Barriers and directional signs to the return median cross-over.
g. Channelization and warning system for opposing traffic to converge from a two
lane to single lane system,
h. All necessary lighting systems for night time operation of diversions.
Subject to the approval of the Engineer, detours may be utilized to carry traffic around
the Work.
When traffic is diverted entirely off the right-of-way, the Contractor shall establish and
maintain a detour, which shall be complete with signs at every intersection in
accordance with the Plans and Specifications.
When the Engineer directs that a detour road be constructed, the material used in the
Construction including surfacing will be paid for at the rates for the respective materials
as priced in the “Bills of Quantity’.
When a secondary or local road is used as a detour, the Contractor shall ensure that
it is adequate to carry the proposed traffic which may including localized maintenance
and upgrading if directed by the Engineer, provide sufficient and suitable traffic
signing, maintain the road and signs to the initial standard during the detours use and
leave it in a condition as good as it was, in the opinion of the Engineer, prior to its use
as a detour.
107.6 Traffic Control Devices

The Contractor shall provide, install, maintain and protect traffic control devices such
as signs, barriers, fences, lights, in accordance with the plans and specifications
necessary to accommodate traffic safely through the work site and to protect the
Contractor’s personnel.
S107.4
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___
SERIES 100: GENERAL

In addition, the Contractor shall install, maintain and protect any additional traffic
control devices that the Engineer chooses to provide, The Contractor shall remove or
cover all existing traffic control devices when essential for the safe accommodation of
traffic, in order to eliminate unnecessary inconvenience to the traffic. He shall provide
and use such other methods or equipment as is necessary to accommodate traffic
safely through the work site.
107.7 Flag persons

During all periods of active equipment operations which may affect normal traffic
operations, or when construction operations or work zone conditions require the use
of flag persons, responsible flag persons shall be continuously maintained for the
direction and control of traffic. The Contractor shall ensure that flag persons are
instructed in and use proper traffic control procedures appropriate for the prevailing
conditions.
Flag persons shall be dressed in clean white uniforms or coveralls, orange hardhats
and fluorescent red/orange over vests for maximum visibility, and shall be equipped
with the traffic control paddles specified in the Plans. The fluorescent red-orange over
vests shall have 50mm wide reflective yellow striping with a minimum total length of
60 cm on the front and 120cm on the back.
During hours of darkness, flag persons shall be additionally equipped with a red signal
hand-light of sufficient brightness to be clearly visible to approaching traffic and
flagging stations shall be illuminated by overhead lighting. Signs indicating hazardous
conditions and signs requiring increased attention shall be marked with flashers.
107.8 Temporary Policemen

The Contractor shall make arrangements for the provision of temporary policemen
from the Traffic Department as are necessary for the traffic direction during the course
of construction. The Contractor shall determine the number and distribution of
policemen considered necessary to ensure the control of traffic and shall prepare and
submit this plan to the Engineer for approval. The Engineer shall be empowered to
modify the policemen requirements. The provision of policemen to assist in traffic
control shall in no way relieve the Contractor of his obligations under the heading
“Traffic Safety and Control”. All costs of meeting this provision will be for the
Contractor’s account.
S107.5
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___
SERIES 100: GENERAL

107.9 Removal and Salvaging of Existing Signs and Guideposts

All existing signs and guideposts, which must be removed in the prosecution of the
Work, shall be carefully salvaged by the Contractor. Critical signs necessary for the
protection of traffic such as railroad crossing signs or stop signs shall be maintained.
Maintenance, removal and salvage of signs and guideposts will not be paid for
separately but shall be considered incidental to the Work.
107.10 Roadway Maintenance

When the Work requires disturbance of the surface of any existing roadway which is
carrying public traffic, the Contractor shall, at his own expense keep the disturbed
areas of the travelled lanes well graded, free of potholes and of sufficient width for the
required number of travel lanes.
Prior to any prolonged shut down of construction, the Contractor shall ensure that any
disturbed roadway surface is restored to a condition suitable for traffic operations as
The Contractor will not be responsible for maintenance of those areas of any existing
roadway which are to be constructed or reconstructed but which have not yet been
disturbed by the Contractor’s construction or hauling activities.
107.11 Sequential Arrow boards

When specified or directed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall use a sequential
arrow board for the accommodation of traffic.
The Contractor shall supply a sequential arrow board conforming to the following
specifications:
i. Minimum size 0.75m x 1.52m.
ii. 12-volt solid-state circuitry.
iii. Minimum 25 amber sealed beam, hooded lamps.
iv. Fully adjustable light intensity on all arrow board lights.
v. Operating modes which include:
a. sequential left arrow or chevron
b. sequential right arrow or chevron
c. sequential double arrow or chevron
d. horizon bar
S107.6
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___
SERIES 100: GENERAL

e. all four lamps in the extreme corners of the panel flashing

simultaneously at 35-50 flashes per minute with the flashing lights lit
for 50% of the time.
107.12 Dust Abatement

The Contractor shall keep detours and disturbed areas of existing roadways, which
carry traffic free of excessive dust. The Contractor shall supply and apply all dust
abatement materials at his expense.
If the Contractor fails to promptly undertake dust abatement measures, the Employer
shall make other arrangements to have the work done, and deduct the cost of thereof
from any money owing to the Contractor.
107.13 Temporary Construction Signing

1. General
This specification covers the installation, maintenance and removal of temporary
signing and traffic control devices which are specifically related to construction,
repair or emergency situations and which are generally removed when the Work
is completed or the situation returns to normal.
2. Typical Drawings
The typical drawings for temporary construction signing are contained in the
Detailed Drawings Section of the Specifications entitled Traffic Accommodation
and Safety.
3. Materials
The Contractor shall supply all signing materials including sign posts, weighted
stands, brackets and any required mounting hardware and miscellaneous
materials required for the erection of temporary construction signs.
All signs, barricades and other traffic control devices shall conform to the
requirements for shape, colour and size specific in The Republic of Trinidad and
Tobago Signing manual. The orange portion of all signs, barricades and other
traffic control devices shall be fully reflectorised using high brightness,
retroreflective, and non-metallised, prismatic sheeting material which
incorporates durable, transparent, fluorescent, pigment and meets the following
requirements.
S107.7
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___
SERIES 100: GENERAL

BRIGHTNESS REQUIREMENTS
(90o Rotation Angle)
Observation Angle Entrance Angle Orange
0.2 -4 200
0.2 +30 92
0.5 -4 80
0.5 +30 50
A minimum Coefficient or Retroreflection (RA) cd/fc/ft2 (de. 1x-1 .m-2)
Larger construction signs or oversized signs may be used where conditions

require greater visibility in order to be effective. They shall be used in special
circumstances where more than average attention value is required from the sign.
4. Equipment
The Contractor shall supply all equipment required to complete the Work.
5. Erection of Signs
Work on the project shall not commence until all necessary temporary
construction signs and all other traffic control devices as proposed in the traffic
accommodation strategy are in place.
When signs required frequent moves, portable type signs, mounted on weighted
stands, may be used. Portable signs shall be placed on the shoulder of the road
such that the face of the sign is fully visible to oncoming traffic and the bottom of
the sign is not less than 0.3m above the road surface. The stands shall be
securely weighted and erected to ensure against being blown over by prevailing
winds or gusts from passing vehicles.
Non-portable signs shall be conspicuously posted, and erected at right angles to

the roadway, with the bottom of the sign at a height of 1.5m above the road, and
not less than 2m nor more than 6.0m from the nearest traffic lane.
S107.8
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___
SERIES 100: GENERAL

Traffic signs and devices shall be moved and kept as close to the work area as
practical, as construction proceeds. Objects within or immediately adjacent to the
roadway which constitutes a hazard to traffic shall be marked with alternating
black and orange stripes attached directly to the object or erected immediately in
front of it. The use of signs shall be held to a minimum to prevent confusion.
“STOP” signs shall be installed on all subsidiary roads (local, district, municipal,
service or approach) intersecting a primary highway detour route.
6. Maintenance and Removal of Signs

Poorly maintained, defaced, damaged or dirty construction signs shall be
replaced, repaired or cleaned without delay. Special care must be taken to
ensure that construction materials and dust are not allowed to obscure the face
of a sign.
Signs not in effect shall be covered or removed and all construction signs shall
be removed after the project is completed.
7. Modifications to temporary construction signing

The Contractor shall be totally responsibility for the supply and proper placement
of temporary construction signs. However, in the case of potential danger to the
travelling public or other circumstances where the Engineer determines that
signing is inadequate, the Engineer will require changes to the Contractor’s
operations to remedy the situation. These changes may involve the use of
different types and/or sizes of signs, modifying the number of locations of signs,
and any other modifications or additions required to protect the safety of the
travelling public.
8. Daily recording of temporary construction signing

Each day and as the work area changes, the Contractor shall record the location
of all temporary construction signs and any other traffic control devices used at
the work areas. The Contractor shall record this information on a form suitable to
the Engineer and shall submit it to the Engineer on a weekly basis or when
requested.
S107.9
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___
SERIES 100: GENERAL

9. Compliance
In cases where the contractor is not in compliance with the specifications and, in
the opinion of the Engineer there is imminent danger to the travelling public, the
Engineer has the authority to order the immediately suspension of Work. Such
orders must be made in writing.
In other cases where the Contractor is not in compliance with the specifications
but, in the opinion of the Engineer the infraction is not causing imminent danger
to the travelling public, the Engineer will use the following escalating process to
address the situation:
i. Issue verbal instructions requiring the Contractor to correct the infraction

ii. Issue a written warning instructing the Contractor to correct the infraction
iii. Issue a written order instructing the contractor to suspend Work until the
infraction is corrected to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

No.
107.1 Accommodation of Traffic - Carriageway Rehabilitation Lump Sum

Works
107.2 Accommodation of Traffic – New Carriageway Works Lump Sum
Payment
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for signs, temporary policing, dust
abatement, and all other costs related to the “Accommodation of Traffic’ for the duration of
the project. The preparation of the Traffic Accommodation Strategy and the daily recording
of temporary construction signing will be considered incidental to the Work and will not be
paid for separately.
Payment under new carriageway works shall cover for any temporary diversions of two way
traffic during construction as per 107.5.Where half-width construction is employed, payment
of half of the amount due for the affected length of road will be paid on substantial completion
of the one half of the road, subject to the compliance condition already described.
S107.10
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___
SERIES 100: GENERAL

Where “the Works” consist of the replacement of isolated items of infrastructure e.g. culvert
replacement and the item for traffic accommodation will encompass works that will remain
substantially in the same place for an extended duration the Engineer may make incremental
payments under this item as follows:-
 40% of the cost upon initial approval of the fully functioning Accommodation of
Traffic;
 50% max. of the cost spread as monthly payments (not necessarily equal) during
the anticipated period over which the works will take place;
 10% upon removal of the Accommodation of Traffic and opening of the road to traffic.

No.
107.3 Maintenance of existing accesses and construction of P.S

new accesses
S107.11
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___
SERIES 100: GENERAL

SECTION 108: TEMPORARY DIVERSIONS AND CROSSINGS
CONTENTS
108.1 General
108.2 Diversions
108.3 Temporary Diversion Roadway
108.4 Temporary Bridge Crossings
108.5 Temporary Pedestrian Bridge Crossings
_____________________________________________________________________________
108.1 General
These specifications are intended to provide minimum requirements and guidelines
for temporary diversions specified by the Employer as necessary for the Works. These
minimum requirements may be extended by the requirements contained within
Appendix 108 to the Contract. The Contractor shall be responsible for and is expected
to make full use of his available resources in carrying out all temporary works required
to complete the permanent works subject to the approval of the Engineer. Before
commencement of the works, the Contractor shall submit all necessary details and a
work plan for the temporary works to the Engineer for approval. Temporary works are
to last the duration of the construction of the associated permanent works and at the
same time reflect economy.
108.2 Diversions
The Contractor is responsible for the construction of the temporary diversion route
notwithstanding the suggested minimum specification/guidelines contained herein and
in Appendix 108. He shall construct the route and use materials of such quality as to
avoid any risk, inconveniences and nuisance to the users, the public and residents in
the vicinity of works for the duration of the use of the diversion.
The Contractor shall design, provide and maintain temporary drainage facilities of
adequate size to carry the normal flow of the existing drainage or waterway so as to
maintain as a minimum the waterway areas defined in Appendix 108. It will remain
the Contractor’s responsibility to ensure that the placing of the temporary diversion
over a drainage channel or within a flood plain does not result in damage to any third
parties and he will remain responsible for such damages should they occur.
S108.1
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___
SERIES 100: GENERAL

The areas in the vicinity of the temporary diversion route shall be adequately drained
so as to avoid ponding and stagnation of the water.
The Contractor shall adequately protect any existing utilities, cables, ductings, pipes,
etc. in the areas of the temporary diversion roadways and any accidental damage as
a result of the diverted traffic shall be promptly restored/remedied to the satisfaction
of the Engineer.
The Contractor shall install and maintain advance warning signs of detour routes which
are adequately reflectorized or lit.
The Contractor is responsible for repairs to damage caused by any storm flooding,
accidental/unforeseen damage caused by user public. Such damage shall be
remedied in the shortest possible time with minimum inconvenience to the public
during the contract period.
108.3 Temporary Diversion Roadway

Temporary diversion roadway shall be constructed within the corridor as shown on the
drawings and shall provide a smooth and safe vertical and horizontal alignment to
vehicles that is in keeping with standard of the approach roads to the road section
from which traffic is to be diverted. The roadway shall be of sufficient width to carry
two lanes of traffic with widening provided at bends of small radii to allow for large
vehicles. Where the diversion roadway meets a single lane temporary bridge crossing,
the roadway shall be suitably transitioned with adequate provision for "waiting"/"give
way" vehicle.
The area along the route shall be properly grubbed and cleared of all
deleterious/organic matter. Embankment fill shall be suitable for road works with CBR
not less than 3% and compacted in layers not exceeding 200mm thick.
The base of the roadway shall be formed of well-compacted granular base course
material of compacted thickness not less than 200mm. The finished surface of the
roadway shall be a 40mm minimum thickness of compacted bituminous mixture
surfacing. The roadway shall be maintained at all times so as to minimize
S108.2
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___
SERIES 100: GENERAL

inconvenience and damage to pedestrians, road users, vehicles and the surroundings
during the period of construction.
Where temporary pedestrian walkways are required to be provided, the walkway width
shall be not less than 1.5m and constructed along the same guidelines as for
temporary roadway including capping of surfacing with oil sand or surface dressing.
All required road signs e.g. "directional", "load limits" etc. and reflectorised markings
etc., shall be strategically placed and regularly maintained during the diversions use.
The diversion road shall be suitably lit at night
The temporary diversion shall be removed completely upon completion of the

associated works and the surplus material disposed of to a licensed landfill site, or
with the Engineer’s approval incorporated into the permanent works. The land
affected by the diversion shall be restored to its original condition or as agreed by the
land owner and as approved by the Engineer.
108.4 Temporary Structures

Where temporary structures are necessary, they shall be designed and provided by
the Contractor to be of sufficient strength, width and design to accommodate the
volume and character of traffic using the roadway. Temporary structures crossing
waterways shall provide necessary waterway (hydraulic) openings to adequately
accommodate the water flow which shall normally be defined as the area bounded by
the existing channel at the site of the proposed structure location. The Contractor
shall design, provide and maintain temporary drainage facilities of adequate size to
carry the normal flow of the existing drainage or waterway. The designs of all
temporary structures shall be submitted to the Engineer for review.
Where temporary bridge crossings are required to be constructed by the use of a

Bailey bridge or similar structure, the crossing shall conform to the manufacturer’s and
the Ministry’s guidelines and the design/details of such crossing shall be forwarded to
the Engineer for review prior to the construction of such crossings.
Seatings - Temporary bridge seatings for the Bailey bridges and waterway crossings
shall be constructed as shown on the Drawings. Where details are not given on the
S108.3
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___
SERIES 100: GENERAL

drawings the Bailey bridge seating shall be constructed as guided by the suppliers of
the Bailey bridge and taking into consideration compatibility with local site conditions.
Temporary bridge seating for other types of bridges shall be constructed as shown on
the Drawings.
Bridges shall be constructed in such a way that allows them to be jacked up and
restored to original levels where undue settlements of the seatings occurs during the
contract period.
The embankment fill shall be adequately retained by Gabion baskets of not less than
3m depth across the roadway width and appropriately returned at the ends so as to
avoid slippage and wasting of fill below seatings.
Protective pickets/posts/piles shall be erected in front of the gabion baskets at intervals

not more than 1.0m centres driven (or bored) to sufficient depths so as to avoid
slippage and buckling/bulging of the gabion baskets.
The Bailey bridges shall be erected as per appropriate guidelines supplied by the
manufacturers, including suitable fixings of bearings, timber decking and traffic
planking. Any damage to the bridge parts and paintwork during erection and launching
or during use of the bridge by traffic shall be repaired/rectified to the satisfaction of the
Engineer.
Temporary bridge crossings shall be maintained during the construction period to the
approval of the Engineer. Such maintenance shall accord with the manufacturer’s
guidelines and shall in particular include regular inspection of bridge joints and
connections for security and of bridge members for damage.
At the end of construction period, temporary (Bailey) bridges and their associated
seating, bearings, decking, etc. shall be carefully dismantled, transported to the
Employer's depot and properly marked and stacked as directed by the Engineer.
108.5 Temporary Pedestrian Bridge Crossings

Temporary pedestrian crossings shall be constructed as far as practical from
constructional activities to minimize risk to pedestrians from such activities.
S108.4
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___
SERIES 100: GENERAL

Pedestrian crossings shall be of sturdy nature to avoid vibrations, and shall have a
clear width of 1.2m with proper flooring, protective handrails, etc. to the approval of
the Engineer.
Pedestrian crossings shall be maintained during the construction period to the

approval of the Engineer.
At the end of construction, pedestrian crossings shall be removed from the site as
directed by the Engineer.

The measurement and payment for items under this section will be confined to those
specified and detailed in the Contract. Diversions required to accommodate the
Contractors preferred method of working will not be paid for under this item and will
be assumed to be incorporated into the contractor’s costs and overheads for the
Contract and priced for accordingly.

No.
108.1 Construction of Temporary Road Diversions km

The unit of measurement shall be the kilometre measured along the centre line of each
Diversion.
The tendered rate shall be deemed to cover all costs associated with the construction of
the Diversion in accordance with these Specifications.
An initial payment of 60% of the total amount payable in respect of each Diversion will be
made when the Diversion is satisfactorily completed and operational. The remaining 40%
will be paid when the Diversion has been obliterated, the site reinstated and all other
obligations in respect of the Diversion met by the Contractor.
108.2 Maintenance of Temporary Road Diversions month

The tendered rate shall be deemed to cover all costs associated with the maintenance of
a single Diversion so as to achieve compliance with these Specifications for a period of
one month.
108.3 Provision of Temporary Bridge Crossings No.

The unit of measurement for the temporary bridge crossing shall be the number of such
crossings to be provided, complete.
The tendered rate per bridge crossing shall cover all costs associated with the construction
of the crossing so as to achieve compliance with these Specifications. An initial payment
of 75% of the total amount payable in respect of each crossing will be made when the
S108.5
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___
SERIES 100: GENERAL

crossing is satisfactorily completed and operational. The remaining 25% will be paid when
the crossing has been obliterated, the site reinstated and all other obligations in respect of
the Diversion met by the Contractor.
108.4 Maintenance of Temporary Bridge Crossings month

The tendered rate shall be deemed to cover all costs associated with the maintenance of
a single bridge crossing so as to achieve compliance with these Specifications for a period
of one month.
S108.6
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

EARTHWORKS
S200.0
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___
SERIES 200: EARTHWORKS

SECTION 201: CLEARING, GRUBBING AND DEMOLITION
CONTENTS
201.1 Description
201.2 General
201.3 Demolition and Clearing Buildings and Structures
201.4 Clearing Bush
201.5 Clearing Trees
201.6 Clearing and Grubbing
_____________________________________________________________________________
201.1 Description
The work to be performed under this Section consists in general of:
- The removal and satisfactory disposal from the site, in the way of or otherwise
affected by the works as shown in the drawings or as designated by the Engineer,
of grass, trees and other vegetation including grubbing up of roots;
- The demolishing, breaking up, removing and satisfactory disposal of buildings
(including all building appurtenances), structures, fences, poles, debris and
superficial obstructions on the site in the way of or otherwise affected by the works
as shown in the drawings or as designated by the Engineer. It shall not include
for the demolishing of minor roadside structures such as sign foundations, slipper
drains, kerbs (curbs), sidewalks, and the like, box drains up to 1m deep, or
750mm diameter or less pipe culverts and their headwalls which shall all be
considered general excavation.
- Salvaging and preservation of designated materials and objects and the
backfilling of resultant trenches, holes and pits.
201.2 General
The Engineer shall establish the right-of-way and construction lines defining the limits
of areas to be cleared.
The Employer may withdraw from the Contract any or all of the items, which are
designated for demolition in the Drawings and for which items are included in the Bills
of Quantities.
All buildings, structures and other things to remain are as marked on the Drawings or
as designated by the Engineer. The Contractor shall protect existing features to be
retained and repair damage as specified by the Engineer.
S201.1
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

Any cut or scarred surfaces of trees or shrubs selected for retention shall be neatly cut
back to sound wood.
No land monuments, property, markers or official data points shall be removed until
an authorized agent has witnessed or otherwise referenced their locations and
approved their removal.
The Contractor shall prevent all damage to pipes, conduits, wires, cables or structures
above or below ground. Numerous underground services e.g., pipes, cables, ducts
etc. exist and may be encountered. The services shown on the Drawings are provided
only as a guide to the general location of major services.
The Contractor must consult with the appropriate Utility Authorities to determine these
locations and the extent of all affected services and take the necessary precautions
and measures for their care, protection and diversion. The Contractor will be required
to bear the cost of such precautions and measures unless specifically stated otherwise
on the Drawings.
The Contractor shall give notice in writing to each of the Utility Authorities owning or
controlling any services or appurtenances which may be affected by demolition
sufficiently in advance of demolition to permit ample time for any Utility Authority to
disconnect its services if deemed necessary. This notification must be made prior to
the commencement of demolition of the structures.
The Contractor shall at this time furnish the Engineer with signed copies of the
aforementioned notices. The Contractor shall co-operate with Utility Authorities in
protecting such services and appurtenances as may be exposed to hazard during the
work.
During the work or upon completion of the work, utilities or services shall be protected,
capped or sealed in a manner required by the Utility Authority. The Contractor shall
furnish the Engineer with the necessary compliance certificates.
The Contractor shall clear each part of the site at times and to the extent required or
approved by the Engineer. The sequence of demolition of buildings and major
structures shall have the approval of the Engineer before the work is commenced. The
S201.2
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

Contractor shall not proceed with the demolition of a building or structure without the
Engineer's written approval.
Demolition shall be carried out in such a manner as to cause as little inconvenience

as possible to the owners or the public and the Contractor will be held responsible for
any claims which may arise from the disregard of this clause.
All materials arising from demolition and clearance and declared by the Engineer as
useful shall be the property of the Employer. They shall be carefully stockpiled (in
separate stacks as per each category) at places designated by the Engineer within
the Site. Any surplus material thereof, after reuse on the works, when so ordered by
the Engineer, shall be removed from the Site, transported to the place or places
approved by the Engineer and stockpiled carefully for which the Contractor will be paid
for separately.
All materials arising from demolition and clearance and declared by the Engineer as
unsuitable for reuse shall become the property of the Contractor and he shall be
responsible for its disposal.
Disposal by burning at site is prohibited. Rather, materials should be disposed of at

licensed landfill sites in accordance with environmental requirements. The Contractor
shall obtain written permission of the landfill site owner for the use of the disposal area
and bear any cost involved.
The Contractor shall keep the approach roads, the works and all places occupied by
him clear of refuse and rubbish that may accumulate from his operations and shall
maintain such places in neat condition. When a local inconvenience is caused by
dust, the Contractor shall apply water in such a way to alleviate this condition. The
steps taken shall be approved by the Engineer.
No debris or other material required to be disposed of shall be dumped or placed within

the limits or any existing projected public street or road nor shall any material be
excavated without the written permission of the Engineer.
All surplus materials, earth, sand, rubbish and stone shall be removed from within the
limit of the works as the works progress except such materials that are retained by
S201.3
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

order of the Engineer. During the execution of the works the Contractor shall keep the
site clean. The Contractor must remove from the site all stains and defacements
caused by his operations.
201.3 Demolition and Clearing Buildings and Structures:

Demolition work shall be carried out without damage to parts of the structure or
adjoining property that is to remain. If such damage occurs during the carrying out of
demolition, the Contractor shall reinstate and make good such damage at his own
expense. All reinstatements shall be executed with materials and workmanship to
match in every respect the surrounding work and is to be properly bonded thereto.
The Contractor shall provide all necessary plant, scaffolding, planks, etc. for proper
protection and execution of works.
For the partial demolition of buildings or structures the Contractor shall provide, erect
and maintain all necessary shoring to the satisfaction of the Engineer. The
construction and efficiency of shoring for the purpose for which it is erected shall be
the responsibility of the Contractor. Should any subsidence or any other damage occur
due to the inefficiency of the shoring or any other support provided, the damage shall
be made good by the Contractor at his own expense.
The Contractor shall notify the relevant utilities well in advance of operations to allow
them time to remove their fixtures, fittings or services.
Structures, electrical, telephone, water, sewer or other services that come within the
area to be demolished shall be disconnected or diverted so that they may be entirely
self-contained within any portion of the premises which is to remain.
Where floors of the partially demolished building are exposed to the outside air, the
Contractor shall provide and erect (one) 1.0m from edge of the floor, temporary
frames, and close-boarded screens, with access doors, fastenings, etc.
The Contractor shall make arrangements for the security of the works and the partially
demolished property during these works. This cost is to be borne by the Contractor.
Underground structures and chambers shall be demolished to the level of excavation

S201.4
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

or to the depths shown in the drawings and as designated by the Engineer. They shall
be properly cleaned out and wherever there are to be abandoned shall be filled with
suitable excavated material in layers of not more than 150mm (compacted thickness)
and compacted in compliance with Section 204, Structural Excavation, or as directed
by the Engineer.
All surplus soil and excavated materials unless otherwise ordered by the Engineer,
shall be spread over the ground and sectioned neatly to the lines and grades
designated by the Engineer.
201.4 Clearing Bush

Bushes, undergrowth, hedges, tree stumps less than 150mm in girth and small trees
the trunks of that are up to 150mm girth at 1.5m above ground level shall be classified
as light bush for the purposes of this Section. Bushes, undergrowth, hedges, tree
stumps more than 150mm and up to 300mm in girth and small trees, the trunks of
which are more than 150mm and up to 300mm in girth at more than 1.5m and up to
3m above ground level, are classified as heavy bush for purposes of this section.
The area of the bush to be cleared shall be as shown in the Drawings or as designated
by the Engineer.
The area of bush to be cleared shall be scrupulously uprooted and the material arising
thereof shall be the property of the Contractor and disposed of by him as approved by
the Engineer, at his own expense.
201.5 Clearing Trees

Where shown in the drawings or designated by the Engineer, all trees shall be
uprooted and cut down as near to the ground level as possible. All felled timber
designated by the Engineer as useful shall be the property of the Employer. Such
timber shall be cut in even one metre increments between 2m to 14m in length and
stacked in orderly fashion at places within the site as indicated by the Engineer.
If the Engineer so desires, the surplus useful felled timber shall be transported out of
the site and carefully deposited and stacked in an orderly fashion at places designated
by the Engineer, for which the Contractor will be paid for separately. All felled timber
and other material designated by the Engineer as not suitable for use shall be the
S201.5
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

property of the Contractor to be disposed of, as approved by the Engineer, at his own
expense.
Stumps and tree roots left after felling the trees shall be grubbed up scrupulously. The
material arising thereof shall be the property of the Contractor and shall be removed,
as approved by the Engineer, off of the site at his expense.
Holes left by the stumps and roots shall be filled with suitable excavated material and
compacted in layers of not more than 150mm (compacted thickness) and compacted
in compliance with Section 204, Structural Excavation.
201.6 Clearing and Grubbing

The work to be performed under clearing and grubbing consists of grubbing, cutting
and removal of all grass, vegetation, organic sod, top soil, organic earth, roots and
other objectionable material from the areas to be excavated, filled, graded,
constructed on and other areas designated to be stripped.
The areas for clearing and grubbing shall be as shown in the drawings or as
designated by the Engineer. The total depth to be cleared and grubbed shall be
300mm.
All grass, brush and trash shall be removed together with all roots, stumps, organic
sod and other waste materials shall be the property of the Contractor and disposed of
by him, as approved by the Engineer, at his own expense.
Other materials such as topsoil, earth, sand and stone obtained in the operation of
clearing and grubbing shall be carefully and separately stockpiled on site at places
designated by the Engineer. These materials (other than those identified by the
Engineer for reuse on the works) shall be spread on the ground to the grades and
lines designated by the Engineer and sectioned neatly and the site left clean.
S201.6
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

SECTION 202: GENERAL EXCAVATION
CONTENTS
202.1 Description
202.2 Definitions
202.3 Excavation
202.4 Blasting of Rock
202.5 Excavated Materials
_____________________________________________________________________________
202.1 Description
General Excavation shall comprise excavation, grading and formation of side slopes,
in all soils including rock and existing roadway material as defined below, and
depositing in stockpiles for use within the works or disposal, as approved by the
Engineer, to licensed landfill off site.
It shall not include excavation for structures, box culverts and any other excavation
that can be classified as structural excavation. It shall include for excavation in river
channels and the like, outside of the limits of structures.
It shall not include for excavation for gabion walls, pipe culverts, box drains, and the
like which shall be included in the pay items for these work items.
It shall include for benching specified to meet the requirements of Section 205 –
Embankments.
202.2 Definitions
Definition and classification of Earthworks materials are as follows:
i. `Top Soil' shall mean the top layer of soil that can support vegetation.
ii. `Suitable material' shall comprise all that which is acceptable in accordance with
the Contract for use in the Works.
iii. Ùnsuitable material' shall mean other than suitable material and shall comprise:
- Material from swamps, marshes and bogs;
- Peat logs, stumps and perishable materials;
- Material susceptible of spontaneous combustion;
- Clay of liquid limit (ll) exceeding 90 and/or plasticity index (pi) exceeding
65.
S202.1
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

- Materials having a moisture content greater than the maximum permitted for
such materials in the contract.
iv. `Rock' shall mean those geological strata or deposits which require the use of
blasting techniques for their removal, but excluding individual masses having
volumes of less than 0.2 cubic metre. The criteria to be used to establish the
need for blasting shall be that a Caterpillar 325 excavator or similar in good
working condition with a rock bucket cannot excavate such material when
encountered one metre below ground level.
v. ‘Existing roadway material’ includes all materials contained in the roadway.
Classification under 'Existing roadway material’ shall be by decision of the
Engineer.
vi. ‘River Channel’ excavation shall mean the excavation of material from the sides,
up to the level of the top of the bank forming the channel, and bottom of channels
that contain a constant flow of water throughout the year,
vii. The Contractor shall be at liberty to use any method he wishes to use for
excavating any class of material, subject to the provisions elsewhere in the
Contract, but the method of excavating the material shall not dictate the
classification of the excavation. The Engineer shall decide under which one of
the classes any excavation shall be classified for the purposes of payment. In
the event of disagreement between the Contractor and the Engineer, the
Contractor shall undertake the necessary materials testing required to confirm
the material designations. The decision of the Engineer as to the classification
shall thereafter be final and bidding.
202.3 Excavation
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer not less than 28 days in advance of the
start of excavation, his proposed method of excavation and the type of equipment that
would be used for carrying out the excavation and the Contractor shall not commence
until the Engineer's approval has been given.
The Contractor shall employ only that plant which is suited to the soils to be handled.
He shall not at any time use any plant, which damages or reduces the natural strength
of the soil either in its in-situ state or during handling and placing or in its final
compacted state.
S202.2
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

The Contractor is required to excavate to levels, grades and slopes as described in

the Contract and the finished cut surfaces shall be machine dressed and left with even
surfaces.
Where any material below formation level in cuttings or below the natural ground level
under embankments is required to be excavated, it shall be removed to such depth
and over such areas as are described in the Contract or as directed by the Engineer
and shall be paid for as unsuitable material.
Excavation operations shall be conducted so that material beyond slope limits is

undisturbed.
Naturally occurring unstable subgrade material shall be undercut below normal

subgrade elevation when so indicated on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
It shall be replaced with approved material in accordance with `Section 207
Embankment' at the cost of Employer.
If, in the Engineer's opinion, firm subgrade has become unstable because of the
Contractor's poor practices e.g. failure by neglect to keep cut free of water, the
Contractor shall, at his own expense, by repair or replacement, provide a subgrade
satisfactory to the Engineer.
Construction plant shall not use the surface of the bottom of a cutting or excavation at
a level less than 300mm above formation/subgrade level. Any damage arising from
such use of the surface shall be made good by the Contractor at his own expense with
approved material in accordance with `Section 205 - Embankment.'
Where the excavation base will form the subgrade and is an expansive clay the
300mm layer will be retained in place until such time as the Contractor is ready to
place the capping layer. Once the layer is removed the subgrade shall be treated in
accordance with Section 204 and capping placed over the subgrade within 24 hours.
Excavations areas shall be maintained free of all water at all times during construction.
The Contractor shall arrange for the rapid dispersal of water off the earthworks or
completed formation during construction, and for the disposal of water which enters
the excavation from any source, and when practicable the water shall be discharged
S202.3
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

into the permanent outfall for the drainage system. Adequate measures shall be taken
to prevent the pollution of existing watercourses.
The Contractor shall provide where necessary temporary watercourses, ditches,

drains, pumping or other means of maintaining the earthworks free from water. Such
provision shall include carrying out the works in such a manner that their surfaces
have at all times a sufficient minimum cross fall and where practicable a sufficient
longitudinal gradient to enable them to shed water and prevent ponding. The
Contractor shall construct all such ditches so as to avoid eroding adjacent banks. All
ditches dug by the Contractor shall be maintained and kept free from debris by him
until final acceptance of the Works.
The Contractor shall ensure that excavations in river channels are undertaken so as
to minimise disruption to flow and so as to maintain an adequate water way cross
section for the flows anticipated in the season of year. All excavated material shall be
deposit outside of the river channel and no plant shall remain in the channel overnight
or when the site is unoccupied. No equipment or temporary works will be placed within
the existing channel without the Engineer’s prior approval and the agreement of the
authority responsible for the channel.
Slope adjustments shall be made as shown on the Drawings or as directed by the

Engineer to avoid injury to standing trees, to harmonize with landscape features or to
arrive at a more stable condition. Gradual transitions shall be made to these adjusted
slopes and at intersections between cuts and fills so that a pleasing effect results with
no noticeable breaks in grade.
Material outside the planned roadway or ditch slopes (that is unstable and constitutes
potential slides in the opinion of the Engineer), material from slides which has come
into the roadway or ditches, and material which has slipped out of new or old
embankments shall be excavated and removed. The material shall be excavated to
designated lines or slopes either by benching or in such a manner as directed by the
Engineer.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the location, care and protection of any
underground piping, conduit or cables or any other subsurface lines or structures that
may be encountered and for any damage caused to same by his operations.
S202.4
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

202.4 Blasting of Rock

When the use of explosives is necessary for blasting of rock for the execution of the
work, the Contractor shall exercise the utmost care not to endanger life or property,
including the Works. The Contractor shall be responsible for all the damage resulting
from the storage, handling and use of explosives and shall conform with the
appropriate laws and regulations relating to the handling, transportation, storage and
use of explosives.
The Contractor shall at all times make full arrangement with and inform well in advance
and obtain such permission as is required from all government authorities, public
bodies and private parties whatsoever concerned or affected or likely to be concerned
or affected by blasting operations.
The written consent of the Engineer shall be obtained on each occasion the Contractor
wishes to use explosives. The Contractor shall provide to the Engineer prior to
undertaking any blasting operation copies of the blasting licences of his personnel
responsible for the blasting together with any other legal authority necessary to
undertake blasting.
The Contractor shall not use or bring on to the site any explosives of any kind without
the prior consent of the Engineer in writing. Permission to use explosives given in
accordance with this Clause shall not absolve the Contractor from any liability in
respect of damage to public or private property.
The Contractor shall store explosives in manner in compliance with all laws and
ordinances in a licensed store or magazine provided with a separate compartment for
detonators, approved by the Engineer.
Explosives shall be handled only by currently licensed shot firers. The Contractor shall
ensure that there is no unauthorised issue or improper use of explosives brought on
the Site and shall maintain a strict check on quantities issued and consumed. The
requirements of the Explosives, Factories, Health and Safety Acts and the
requirements of the Local Authority shall be strictly complied with.
Any explosive to be used on the Site shall be removed from the magazine immediately
before it is required and any unused explosive shall be returned to the magazine
S202.5
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

before dark the same day.
All explosives shall be guarded by no less than two armed guards from the time it
leaves the magazine to the time it is fired or is returned to the magazine.
The Contractor shall notify each property owner and public utility company having
structures or facilities in proximity to the site of the work of his intention to use
explosives. Such notice shall be given sufficiently in advance to enable them to take
such steps as they deem necessary to protect their property from injury.
When blasting is to be carried out, the Contractor shall determine the danger zone
likely to be created and ensure, by the use of heavy blasting mats when necessary to
prevent material being projected, that no damage is caused to persons or property on
or off Site. When engaged in blasting operations post sufficient warning flagmen to
the full satisfactory of the Engineer
Plaster shooting shall not be permitted within 400m of any building or structure.
Where blasting is proposed adjacent to a building or other structure, existing or under

construction and being part of or outside the Works, the Contractor shall satisfy the
Engineer, by preliminary site trials, that safe values of vibrational amplitude and
particle velocity will not be exceeded. Unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer the
vibrational amplitude shall not exceed 50mm/s where blasting is confined to single
events and 25mm/s where blasting is frequently repeated. Vibrograph readings shall
be recorded throughout the period of blasting or as required by the Engineer. No
loaded holes shall be left unfired at the close of work.
Costs for permits and related costs and expenses necessary to obtaining, delivering,
using and guarding explosives is a subsidiary obligation of the Contractor and no direct
payment will be made therefore.

All suitable materials arising from any excavation shall be vested in the Employer until
such time as it is defined as surplus to the Employer’s requirements. Until such
material is so defined the Contractor shall remain responsible for the safe keeping of
the material and should such material be lost to the works it shall be replaced by the
S202.6
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

Contractor at his expense.
All the excavated materials shall be deposited or stockpiled (separately as per each
category defined in paragraph 202.1 (c) of this Section) within or adjacent to the Site
at places provided by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer.
All materials arising from the excavation and declared by the Engineer as unsuitable
for use shall become the property of the Contractor to be removed off the site and
disposed of at licensed landfill sites only. The Contractor shall obtain written approval
of the Engineer for the use of disposal locations and bear any costs involved in the
use of that location.
Surplus suitable material, when so ordered by the Engineer, shall be removed from
the Site, transported to a place or places designated by the Engineer and carefully
stockpiled. Otherwise, surplus material shall become the property of the Contractor
to be removed off the site and disposed of at licensed landfill sites.

No.
202.1 Excavation of suitable material and stockpiling at cu.m.

approved locations
202.2 Excavation of unsuitable or suitable material and cu.m.

disposal of surplus off site at a licensed landfill site
202.3 Excavation of rock and disposal off site at a licensed cu.m.

landfill site
a. Measurement
The quantity of Excavation to be paid for under this Section shall be the number
of cubic metres excavated and deposited and stockpiled within the site or as
directed and accepted by the Engineer. The material shall be measured in its
original position. The payment limits of the excavation shall not exceed those
shown on the Drawings.
Original ground cross-sections, prior to the commencement of the excavation,

shall be taken by the Engineer and agreed upon by the Contractor. Secondary
S202.7
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

cross-sections will be taken subsequent to actual excavation. The quantities shall

be computed, using the original and secondary cross-sections, by the average
end area method.
The quantity of Èxcavation of Rock' to be paid for under this Section shall be the
number of cubic metres excavated and stockpiled within the site or as directed
and accepted by the Engineer. Measurements of rock to be excavated shall be
recorded by the Engineer in its original position before commencement of actual
excavation and agreed upon by the Contractor.
After completion of actual excavation and related operations to the satisfaction of

the Engineer, certificate of excavation shall be recorded by the Engineer against
such of the pre-measurements of rock as has been excavated and removed by
the Contractor and the quantities thereof will be paid for.
The quantity of surplus suitable material ordered to be transported off the site to
licensed landfill sites or other approved locations to be paid for under this Section
shall be the number of cubic metres acceptably transported and stockpiled
carefully at the other end. Pre-measurements will be taken at site of the stockpile
of such surplus materials ordered by the Engineer and agreed upon by the
Contractor, who will then be permitted to transport it off site.
After the material is transported to the designated places and stockpiled carefully
at the other end, to the satisfaction of the Engineer, certificate of such
transportation shall be recorded by the Engineer against such of the pre-
measurements of surplus material as has been actually cleared from the Site,
transported to designated places and stockpiled at the other end, to the
satisfaction of the Engineer and the quantities thereof shall be paid for.
b. Payment
Payment for work done under this Section shall be made at the prices tendered
for the items as they appear in the Bills of Quantities.
Payment for the excavation of suitable material shall include full compensation
for furnishing all labour, material, plant and equipment necessary to complete the
excavation, depositing and stockpiling of material at approved locations. This rate
S202.8
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

does not include the cost of removal of surplus suitable materials from the site,
for which a separate payment will be made.
Payment for the excavation of unsuitable or surplus material shall include full
compensation for furnishing all labour, material, plant and equipment necessary
to complete the excavation, double handling, loading, transport and disposal of
material at licensed landfill sites.
Payment for the excavation of rock shall include full compensation for furnishing
all labour, material, plant and equipment necessary to complete the excavation,
depositing and stockpiling of material at approved locations. This rate does not
include the cost of removal of surplus rock from the site, for which a separate
payment will be made.
The disposal off site of surplus suitable material, and rock shall be at licensed
landfill sites.
The rates for general excavation do not include the cost of Clearing and Grubbing
(300mm deep), an operation immediately preceding the general excavation, for
which payment will be made separately under Section 201.
S202.9
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

SECTION 203: EARTHWORKS FOR STRUCTURES
CONTENTS
203.1 Description
203.2 Utilisation of Excavated Material
203.3 Material for Structural Backfill and Foundation Fill
203.4 Construction Requirements
________________________________________________________________________
203.1 Description
Work under this section shall include the earthworks generally required for
construction of building substructures such as footings, retaining walls and other works
in accordance with the Plans or as directed by the Engineer.
Structural earthwork shall include, in addition to the necessary excavation, backfilling

operations to the original ground elevation using the excavated or imported material
as directed by the Engineer.
Unsuitable excavated material shall be disposed only in a location approved by the

Engineer and in a manner that will not contribute to the pollution of the surrounding
area, stream or channel.
This work shall also include the construction of all cribs, cofferdams, dikes, berms or
other devices necessary for the work, the protection, dewatering and maintenance of
the excavated region.
No distinction shall be drawn between wet and dry excavation, the prices being the
same for both.
Clearing and grubbing shall be considered an incidental part of earthworks for

structures excavation and shall be inclusive with the various pay items under this
Section.
203.2 Utilisation of Excavated Material
Excavated material and material recovered from temporary works shall, if suitable, be
stockpiled for use as fill or backfill. Material unsuitable for use as backfill or in excess
of the required quantity, or rock shall be spoiled or utilised as directed by the Engineer.
S203.1
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

203.3 Material for Granular Backfill and Foundation Fill
Selected Granular Material Structural Backfill (Hard-core)

Select granular material to structures shall consist of stone, sand, gravel or other
acceptable granular material, all of which passes the 75mm sieve, with not more than
40% by weight passes the 0.425mm sieve and not more than ten percent by weight
passes the 0.075mm sieve. In addition, the Liquid limit < 27; Plasticity Index < 5; and
the California Bearing Ratio (CBR) > 20
Select Structural Fill

The material used for fill shall yield a minimum 4-day soaked CBR of 10% when
compacted to 95% of the maximum dry density at optimum moisture content of that
material as determined from the Modified Proctor Test.
The gradation will be determined in accordance with AASHTO T11 and T 27 and the
material shall conform to the following:
Sieve Designation Percent Passing

Standard Alternate
75 mm 3” 100 Liquid Limit <30%
37.5 1.5” 70 – 100 Plasticity Index <12%
19 0.25” 50 - 85 Linear Shrinkage <6%
4.75 No. 4 30 - 60
0.075 No. 200 0- 12*
* Based on fraction passing 4.75 mm.
In addition to compliance with the grading requirements, the material shall not be gap-
graded, nor shall the curve of distribution of those particles sized smaller than D60
deviate by more than +3% on any specified sieve from lying parallel with the grading
envelope, we D60 is the sieve size through which 60% by weight of the material
passes
The Coarse aggregate shall have a percentage of wear, as determined by the Los
Angeles Abrasion Test (AASHTO T 96), of not more than 50.
S203.2
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

203.4 Protection and Maintenance
The contractor shall protect and maintain the completed fill layers against damage.
Protection includes protection against rain and floodwater and against any undue wear
and tear of, or damage to unsealed layers by construction or other traffic.
Maintenance shall include, inter alia, the immediate repair of any damage or defects
that may have occurred.

Access and Drainage
The Contractor shall effect all necessary sheeting, bracing and cribs in order to carry
out the works. These and any temporary drainage works shall be removed on
completion of the permanent works.
Special care shall be exercised to keep the Site of all excavation free from water. The
Contractor shall be responsible for the care and protection of any underground piping,
conduit or cable, or any other sub-surface lines or structures that may be encountered,
and for any damage caused to same by his operations. No additional payment will be
made for temporary works.
Excavation
Trenches and pits for structures or structure foundations shall be excavated to the
lines, grades and elevations shown on the Drawings. They shall be of sufficient size
to permit the placing of structures or structure foundations to the full length and width
shown. Boulders, logs, and other objectionable material encountered in excavation
shall be removed.
The sides of excavations shall, where necessary, be battered back or be adequately

shored by timber or by other means, and all such excavations shall be to sizes
sufficient to enable the concrete structures to be laid accurately, and proper refilling
and compacting be carried out.
The Contractor shall take all precautions necessary for the safety of adjoining
structures. Such measures may include shoring, staggered excavation in short
lengths or otherwise as approved by the Engineer.
S203.3
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

The elevation of the bottom of footing, as shown on the Drawings shall be considered
as approximately only and the Engineer may order, in writing, such changes in
dimensions or elevations of footings as may be deemed necessary to secure a
satisfactory foundation. Poor foundation material shall be removed and disposed of
as directed by the Engineer. The resulting additional excavation shall be backfilled
with concrete Class 9 or with concrete of the same class as the footing or foundation
fill, at the Engineer’s instruction.
The Contractor shall notify the Engineer after each excavation is completed and no
blinding, foundation, bedding material or box culvert shall be placed until the Engineer
has approved the depth of excavation and the character of the foundation material.
When the footing is located in a stratum of soil material other than rock, excavation to
final grade shall not be made until just before the blinding concrete is to be placed.
Excavation in hard rock formations should where possible be done without use of
blasting techniques. Pneumatic tools of adequate power may be used as deemed
necessary and as approved by the Engineer.
All rock or other hard foundation material shall be cleaned of all loose material and cut
to a firm surface, either level, stepped or serrated, as shown on the Drawings or
directed by the Engineer. All seams and crevices shall be cleaned out and grouted
with an approved grout. All loose and disintegrated rock and thin strata shall be
removed. When the footing is to rest on material other than rock, excavation to final
grade shall not be made until just before the footing is to be placed.
Select Structural Fill

Structural fill shall be constructed in layers not exceeding 150mm in thickness after
compaction. Each layer shall be moistened or dried to the optimum moisture content
for the material and compacted to a density of not less than 95% of modified AASHTO
density.
Granular Backfill (Hard-core)

Excavated areas around structures shall be backfilled with approved material in
horizontal layers not exceeding 150mm in thickness after compaction, to the level of
the original ground surface.
S203.4
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

Each layer shall be moistened or dried to the optimum moisture content for the material
and then compacted to a density of not less than 90% of modified AASHTO density
for soils and gravels, and not less than 100% of modified AASHTO density for
cohesion less sands, or the density of the surrounding soil, whichever shall be the
less, except that, in the road prism, the material shall be compacted to a density of not
less than 95% of modified AASHTO density
.
In placing backfill or embankment against a column, pier or wall, the material shall be
placed simultaneously to approximately the same elevation on all sides of the
structure. If conditions require placing backfill or embankment appreciably higher on
one side than on the other side, the additional material on the higher side shall not be
placed until permission shall have been given by the Engineer and preferably not until
the concrete or masonry has been in place 7 days or until tests made by the laboratory
establishes that the concrete or masonry has attained sufficient strength to withstand
any pressure created by the methods used in placing of the materials without damage
or strain beyond its safe factor.
Tests on Earthwork for Filling Operations

i. Borrow Material:
- Plasticity Test - 3 tests per 500 m3 of soil.
- Moisture Content Test - One test for every 250 m3 soil.
- CBR Test on materials to be incorporated in the subgrade on soaked
samples - As and when required by the Engineer.
ii. Compaction Control:

Density tests shall be carried out in accordance with AASHTO T-191 unless
otherwise authorised by the Engineer in writing. Control shall be exercised by
taking at least one measurement of density for each 200 square metres of
compacted area, or closer as required to yield the minimum number of test
results for evaluating a day’s work on a statistical basis. Test locations shall be
chosen only through random sampling techniques. Control shall not be based
on the result of any one test but on the mean value of a set of 5 to 10 density
determinations.
The number of tests in one set of measurements shall be 5 as long as it is felt

that sufficient control over uniformity of borrow material and the method of
compaction is being exercised.
S203.5
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

If considerable variations are observed between individual density results, the

minimum number of tests in one set of measurements shall be increased to 10.
The acceptance of work shall be subject to the condition that the mean dry
density equals or exceeds the specified density and the standard deviation for
any set of results is below 0.08 gm/cc.

a. Measurement
The quantity of Excavation to be paid for under this Section shall be the number
of cubic metres excavated and deposited and stockpiled within the site or as
directed and accepted by the Engineer. The material shall be measured in its
original position. The payment limits of the excavation shall not exceed those
shown on the Drawings or in their absence be limited to a volume defined by
vertical planes 600mm beyond the horizontal limits of the foundation and the
underside of the foundation, plus an allowance for any blinding layer.
Original ground cross-sections, prior to the commencement of the unclassified

excavation, shall be taken by the Engineer and agreed upon by the Contractor.
Secondary cross-sections will be taken subsequent to actual excavation. The
quantities shall be computed, using the original and secondary cross-sections, by
the average end area method, or other such method as approved by the
Engineer.
The quantity of Èxcavation in Rock' to be paid for under this Section shall be the
number of cubic metres excavated and stockpiled within the site or as directed
and accepted by the Engineer. Measurements of rock to be excavated shall be
recorded by the Engineer in its original position before commencement of actual
excavation and agreed upon by the Contractor. After completion of actual
excavation and related operations to the satisfaction of the Engineer, certificate
of excavation shall be recorded by the Engineer against such of the pre-
measurements of rock as has been excavated and removed by the Contractor
and the quantities thereof will be paid for.
The quantity of unsuitable or surplus suitable material ordered to be transported

off the site to licensed landfill sites or other approved locations to be paid for under
this Section shall be the number of cubic metres acceptably transported and
S203.6
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

stockpiled carefully at the other end.
Pre-measurements will be taken at site of the stockpile of such surplus materials

ordered by the Engineer and agreed upon by the Contractor, who will then be
permitted to transport it off site. After the material is transported to the designated
places and stockpiled carefully at the other end, to the satisfaction of the
Engineer, certificate of such transportation shall be recorded by the Engineer
against such of the pre-measurements of surplus material as has been actually
cleared from the Site, transported to designated places and stockpiled at the other
end, to the satisfaction of the Engineer and the quantities thereof shall be paid
for.
The quantity of Backfill and Foundation fill to be paid for under this Section shall
be the number of cubic metre of backfill or fill installed in accordance with the
requirements of the drawings and specifications and to the neat dimensions
shown on the drawings.
Payment Items
Pay Item Unit

No. Description
203.1 Access and Drainage LS
203.2 Excavation of material at structures and stockpiling at cu.m.

approved locations
203.3 Excavation of rock at structures and stockpiling at approved cu.m.

locations
203.4 Disposal of unsuitable or suitable surplus material off site at cu.m.

a licensed landfill site
203.5 Backfill using selected structural backfill from stockpile cu.m.
203.6 Backfill using imported selected material cu.m.
203.7 Backfill using selected granular material cu.m.
203.8 Backfill using imported selected granular material cu.m
203.9 Foundation fill cu.m
S203.7
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

The unit of measurement for Access and Drainage shall be a lump sum. The
tendered sum shall include full compensation for provision of all temporary works
and measures required to allow adequate access to and drainage of the
temporary works and compliance with the relevant section of this specification.
The lump sum shall be disbursed in equal monthly instalments over the period of
the contract.
Payment for the excavation of material shall include full compensation for
furnishing all labour, material, plant and equipment necessary to complete the
excavation including for grubbing and clearing as Section 201, dealing with water
flow and supporting the excavation, and depositing and stockpiling of material at
approved locations. This rate does not include the cost of removal of unsuitable
or surplus suitable materials from the site, for which a different payment will be
made.
Payment for the disposal of unsuitable or surplus material shall include full
to complete the excavation, loading, transport and disposal of material at licensed
landfill sites.
Payment for the excavation of rock shall include full compensation for furnishing
all labour, material, plant and equipment necessary to complete the excavation,
depositing and stockpiling of material at approved locations. This rate does not
include the cost of removal of surplus rock from the site, for which a separate
payment will be made.
Payment for the excavation of Backfill and Foundation fill shall include full
to complete the supply and placing of the material including for supporting the
excavation, double handling, working in confined locations, small quantities,
working around pipes and the like as well as for dealing with water flow.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for procurement, transport,
placing, compacting, mixing, and testing the backfill. The rates for structural
excavation include the cost of Clearing and grubbing (300mm deep as Section
201), an operation immediately preceding the excavation.
S203.8
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

SECTION 204: PREPARATION OF SUBGRADE
CONTENTS
204.1 Description
204.2 Materials
204.3 Execution
_____________________________________________________________________________
204.1 Description
The work to be performed under this Section consists of fine grading, proof-rolling and
finishing on embankments and in cuttings, and includes forming repair subgrades for
Pavement Patching, as may be directed by the Engineer at any level within the
unbound construction of the existing pavement, and forming subgrades for Roadway
Reconstruction.
Related Sections include:

Section 201 - Clearing, Grubbing and Demolition
Section 202 - General Excavation
Section 203 - Earthworks for Structures
Section 205 - Embankments
Section 300 – Overall Requirements
Section 413 – Pavement Patching
204.2 Materials
Embankment materials shall conform to the requirements of Section 205.
204.3 Execution
Preparation of Subgrade - Embankments
The subgrade shall be shaped to a true surface conforming to the cross-section shown
on the Drawings and compacted in accordance with the provisions of Section 205. All
depressions shall be filled with suitable material and high spots removed, following
which all areas so treated shall be again compacted and compliance with the criterion
for density of soil within 500mm of subgrade recorded. A tolerance of 25mm above or
below design elevation shall be allowed provided that this 25mm above or below
design elevation is not maintained for a distance longer than 15m and that the required
crown or super elevation is maintained.
S204.1
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

Except where instructed otherwise by the Engineer, immediately before placing any
repair or reconstruction material, the top 150mm of the subgrade shall be compacted
to not less than 97% of the maximum dry density for that material determined from the
Modified Proctor Test at optimum moisture content.
Preparation of Subgrade - Areas without Embankment

Where a sub base or base is to be constructed on Subgrade of natural ground or
existing roadway materials, where there is no embankment, all clearing, grubbing,
demolition, topsoil and unsuitable or roadway materials shall be removed and
disposed of in accordance with the requirements of Sections 201 and 202. Low areas
and other damaged areas of the formation shall be made good by filling with fully
compacted selected materials complying with the requirements of section 205 for the
upper 300mm of embankment material.
The resultant subgrade shall be shaped, treated and compacted in accordance with
‘Preparation of Subgrade – Embankments’ above prior to placing overlying materials
with the exception that, where water mains or other similar equipment are known to
exist or could be reasonable assumed to exist and could in the opinion of the
equipment’s owner or the Engineer be damaged by the use of vibratory rollers the sub-
grade shall be compacted by non-vibrating pneumatic tyred rollers.
Special Treatment for Weak Subgrades

Where the natural material is an expansive clay with a CBR of less than 5% the
material shall be shaped and treated to the required profile. Compaction shall be by
movement of tracked vehicles over the finished surface to bed any loose material. No
other compaction will be required. Within 48 hours of the exposure of the subgrade
and after treatment as herein specified the subgrade will be protected by the placing
and compacting of a layer of capping material of 150mm minimum compacted
thickness.
Should the subgrade not be so protected within the stated time the Contractor shall
excavate to 300mm below subgrade level and treat the subgrade again and protect it
within the above stated time limit by backfilling the excavation with 300mm of capping.
All costs associated with this remedial work including backfilling shall be at the
Contractor’s cost.
S204.2
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

Where small isolated areas (<2% of total area) are not protected within the timescale
stated and show evidence of drying, the Engineer may allow the area to be treated by
lightly spraying the material’s surface with water to replace the lost moisture
immediately before placing the protective layer. Care shall be taken to ensure no
excess of water is applied that will result in softening of the subgrade or ponding of
water. Softened areas will need treatment as the previous paragraph.
Other Area Treatment

Area designated on the Drawings or by the Engineer for grading and finishing shall be
raked or machine-graded to remove all stones over 50mm in diameter and other
unsatisfactory material or debris and the surface finished to a tolerance of 50mm in
15m or as directed.

Section 204 payment items are:
204.1 Preparation of Subgrade Sq.m
a. Measurement
No separate measurement will be made for completion of Subgrade or other work
to the subgrade or elsewhere under this Section except for work done as
described under ‘Preparation of Subgrade - Areas without Embankment’ above.
The quantities of work to be measured shall be the square metres of subgrade
shaped, treated and compacted and complete in place and accepted.
b. Payment
No separate payment will be made for the preparation or other work to the
subgrade or elsewhere under this Section except as described below, otherwise
all costs shall be included in the unit rate for the items to which the work pertains.
For Preparation of Subgrade, (in Areas without Embankment) payment shall be

made at the prices tendered for the item under this Section as it appears in the
Bills of Quantities. The prices and payments shall constitute full compensation for
all labour, materials, tools, equipment and plant necessary to complete the work
as described.
S204.3
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

SECTION 205: EMBANKMENT
CONTENTS
205.1 Description
205.2 Materials
205.3 Execution
205.4 General Fill
205.5 Quality Control Testing
_____________________________________________________________________________
205.1 Description
The work to be performed under this section consists of furnishing, placing, mixing,
shaping and compacting suitable material from general excavation stockpiles,
drainage excavation and the like, structural excavation, approved borrow pits or other
sources outside of the right-of-way required for the construction of embankments or
other areas of filling.
Related Sections include the following:

Section 300 - Overall Requirements for Pavement Layers.
205.2 Materials
a. Embankment Material
Embankments shall be constructed from suitable material obtained from
excavation, stockpile or from borrow areas, free from organic matter (leaves,
grass, roots), topsoil and other detritus. The material shall be able to be readily
spread, shaped and compacted. Embankments may or may not include a capping
layer.
Generally embankments, widening included, shall be constructed from material

yielding a minimum 4-day soaked California Bearing Ratio (CBR) of 10% when
compacted to 95% of the maximum dry density at optimum moisture content of
the material as determined from the Modified Proctor Test.
S205.1
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

Soils shall also conform to the following properties:
Table 205.2a: Embankment Material Properties

GRADING
Sieve Size (mm) Percent Passing
9.5 100
4.75 95-100 4 day soaked CBR ≥10%
0.600 90-100 Liquid Limit <30%
0.300 40-95 Plasticity Index <5%
0.150 10-30
0.075 5-15
The above CBR values of materials to be placed are minimal values. Higher
requirements may be specified elsewhere in the Contract and if so they shall be met
as specified. Values for liquid limit and plasticity index are maximum values.
205.3 Construction
Before starting the work of this Section the Contractor shall have completed the work
under Clearing, Grubbing and Demolition and shall have removed unsuitable material
for any particular embankment. He shall also have received the Engineer's approval
in writing for the compaction equipment proposed to be used on the works. The use
of tractors, trucks, scrapers or other equipment designed primarily for purposes other
than compaction and being used for purposes other than solely compaction will not be
considered as compaction equipment, but traffic of such vehicles shall be distributed
over this fill in such a manner as to take advantage of the additional compaction
afforded thereby.
Each embankment foundation shall be scarified to a depth of 150mm and, at the

proper moisture content, it shall be re-compacted to the following requirements
- If the top of foundation is within 600mm of the subgrade - to a minimum of 95%
of the maximum dry density for that material as determined by the Modified
Proctor Test;
- If the top of foundation is not within 600mm of the subgrade to a minimum of
93% of the maximum dry density for that material as determined by the
Modified Proctor Test.
S205.2
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

Material shall be spread over the entire embankment width, in layers of uniform loose
thickness not to exceed 150mm, and each layer shall be compacted to a density as
follows:
- The lower layers of material in any embankment shall be compacted to 90%
of the maximum dry density at the optimum moisture content of that material
as determined from the Modified Proctor Test.
- Any material within 600mm of subgrade level in any embankment, shall be
compacted to 95% of the maximum dry density at the optimum moisture
content of that material as determined from the Modified Proctor Test;
- Capping layer (which shall be placed in layers of no greater than 150mm
thickness) shall be compacted to 95% of the maximum dry density at the
optimum moisture content of that material as determined from the Modified
Proctor Test. However, where capping is to be placed to an overall thickness
greater than 200mm over moisture sensitive and weak clays the first layer,
which may be up to 2/3 of the total layer thickness or 200mm, may be
compacted to 90% of the maximum dry density at the optimum moisture
content of that material as determined from the Modified Proctor Test.
Where material is to be compacted in an area where water mains or other similar

sensitive equipment are known to exist or may reasonably be assumed to exist, all
compaction shall be by the use of non-vibrating pneumatic tyred rollers. Vibratory
rollers shall not be used until the Engineer is satisfied that no damaged will be caused
to the main or equipment by such rollers.
Compaction trials shall be carried out to determine the number of passes and best
operating methods to be used with the available plant to achieve these levels of
compaction. Proof rolling of finished layers shall be carried out as instructed by the
Engineer prior to placing any overlying material. Costs of carrying out compaction trials
and proof rolling shall be included in the rates for embankment construction and no
additional payment will be made for these operations.
If the material is too moist to permit suitable compaction, it shall be dried or allowed to
dry. To assure the moisture content being uniform throughout the depth of the layer,
it shall be diced, harrowed, bladed and aerated to reduce the moisture content. If the
material as placed is too dry, water shall be added and uniformly mixed by disking the
layer to its full depth.
S205.3
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

The moisture content of the material immediately before compaction shall not vary
more than two percentage points plus or minus from the optimum moisture, that is, if
the optimum moisture is 8%, the moisture content shall be not less than 6% nor more
than 10% before compactive effort is applied. The embankment shall be crowned at
all stages of construction to permit ready run-off of rain water.
As soon as the proper consistency and moisture content are obtained, the layer shall
be thoroughly compacted before the condition of the material is changed appreciably
by either rain or evaporation. Embankments shall be made of sufficient height and
width so that after shrinkage, sloughing or slopes, or subsidence of the foundation
area the elevation and width will conform to cross-sections shown on the Drawings.
When the embankments are to be constructed on hillsides or placed against existing

embankments, the slopes of which are one vertically to three horizontally or steeper,
they shall be benched as the fill is constructed in layers. The width and depth of the
bench shall be as ordered by the Engineer. Suitable material from the benches shall
be recompacted in the new fill.
Shoulders are an integral part of the embankment and shall be formed and compacted
to the elevation of the top subgrade for the full width of the cross section.
Rock shall not be placed in embankments before the Contractor has discussed his
plans with and obtained the approval of the Engineer for the related excavation and
embankment operations. Rock if approved for use shall be placed to form the base of
embankments for the full width of the cross section.
Rock shall be placed in uniform loose layers not exceeding in depth the approximate
average size of the larger rocks, but limited to a maximum depth of 750mm. However,
rock shall not be dumped in final position, but shall be distributed by blading or dozing
in a manner that will ensure proper placement in the embankment so that voids,
pockets, and bridging will be eliminated. The top layer in rock embankments shall be
limited to a maximum depth of 300mm with all voids filled with smaller pieces of
granular material or soil.
All rock embankment shall be placed with care so that the larger pieces are well
distributed and the voids filled to the extent that is practicable and so that rock placed
S205.4
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

on side slopes will, within reasonably close conformity, meet the lines shown on the
Drawings and cross sections. Rock embankment shall not be placed in localized
areas where piles are to be driven nor adjacent to masonry or brick structures or any
pipe lines. At bridge abutments rock shall not be placed within 3m of any foundation.
The finer material being incorporated within the rock shall be spread and compacted
in lifts not to exceed those specified above. Occasional boulders may be combined
with soil or granular material to form random mixtures. They shall be carefully placed
and surrounded by finer material, spread and compacted in lifts not to exceed those
specified above.
No rock or boulders larger than 150mm in its greater dimension shall be allowed within
600 mm of the pavement structure.
Where permitted by the Engineer, embankments, that are to be constructed across

ground that will not support the weight of the construction equipment, the first layer of
the fill may be constructed by placing successive loads of material in a uniformly
distributed layer of a minimum thickness required to support the construction
equipment.
The maximum thickness for such layer shall be one metre. This exception to normal
procedure will not be permitted where the embankments could be constructed in the
approved manner by the use of lighter or modified equipment after proper ditching and
draining have been provided.
If embankments can be deposited on only one side of abutments, wing walls, piers or
culvert head walls, care shall be taken that the area immediately adjacent to the
structure is not compacted to the extent that it will cause overturning or excessive
pressure against the structure. When noted on the Drawings, the fill adjacent to the
end bent of a bridge shall not be placed higher than the bottom of the back wall of the
bent until the superstructure is in place. When embankment is to be placed on both
sides of a concrete wall or box type structure or multi plate structure, operations shall
be so conducted that the embankment is always at approximately the same elevation
on each side of the structure.
Material placed adjacent to structures in areas inaccessible to the usual compaction

S205.5
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

equipment, shall be compacted with mechanical tampers of a type approved by the

Engineer.
Where old pavement is encountered within 600mm of the pavement structure, it shall
be thoroughly broken up or scarified. No direct payment will be made for any extra
work or expense, which may be necessary to fulfil this requirement.
The Contractor shall prevent fill material from escaping beyond the embankment slope
stakes by the construction of toe ditches or by the erection of rock, boulder, earth or
log barriers at the toes of embankments or by other suitable means satisfactory to the
Engineer.
All stump holes and surface irregularities caused by the Contractor in the area
between the roadway slope lines and the outside boundary of clearing and grubbing
shall be filled and otherwise corrected as directed by the Engineer.
Sufficient work shall be performed on the top surface and side slopes of the
embankments that they will be left in a neat and workman like condition and in close
conformity with the lines and grades shown on the Drawings. Wherever shown on the
Drawings, the Contractor shall perform the designated rounding at the top and bottom
of slopes and elsewhere as shown. The embankment shall be maintained in
completed condition until final acceptance.
The top of any embankment shall be shaped and finished to the required line, level
and cross section in accordance with Section 204: Preparation of Subgrade.
205.4 General Fill

General fill shall include the placing and compacting of suitable material in accordance
with 205.3 as appropriate in open area commencing generally at existing ground level.
Such works shall include the raising of land in front of retaining walls, the filling of river
channels and the like where the works will not be directly support the roadway.
Widening of existing embankments shall be considered to be Embankment works.

General
The materials supplied and works carried out by the Contractor shall conform to the
S205.6
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

specifications as prescribed in the appropriate Clauses.
For ensuring the requisite quality of construction, the materials and Works shall be
subjected to quality control tests, as described hereinafter, or as directed by the
Engineer. The testing frequencies set forth are the desirable minimums and the
Engineer shall have the full authority to carry out tests as frequently as he may deem
necessary to satisfy himself that the materials and works comply with the appropriate
specifications.
Test procedures for the various quality control tests are indicated in the respective
Sections of the Specifications or for certain tests within this Section. Where no specific
testing procedure is mentioned, the tests shall be carried out as per the prevalent
accepted engineering practice to the directions of the Engineer.
Tests on Earthwork for Embankment Construction

i. Borrow Material:
- Plasticity Test - 3 tests per 500 m3 of soil.
- Moisture Content Test - One test for every 250 m3 soil.
- CBR Test on materials to be incorporated in the subgrade on soaked
samples - As and when required by the Engineer.
ii. Compaction Control:

Density tests shall be carried out in accordance with AASHTO T-191 unless
otherwise authorised by the Engineer in writing. Control shall be exercised by
taking at least one measurement of density for each 1000 square metres of
compacted area, or closer as required to yield the minimum number of test
results for evaluating a day’s work on a statistical basis. Test locations shall be
chosen only through random sampling techniques. Control shall not be based
on the result of any one test but on the mean value of a set of 5 to 10 density
determinations. The number of tests in one set of measurements shall be 5 as
long as it is felt that sufficient control over uniformity of borrow material and the
method of compaction is being exercised.
If considerable variations are observed between individual density results, the

minimum number of tests in one set of measurements shall be increased to 10.
The acceptance of work shall be subject to the condition that the mean dry
S205.7
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

density equals or exceeds the specified density and the standard deviation for
any set of results is below 0.08 gm/cc.
For earthwork in shoulders and in the top 500 mm portion of the embankment
below the subgrade, at least one set of density measurement shall be taken for
every 500 square metres of the compacted area and the number of tests in each
set of measurements shall be at least 10. In other respects, the control shall be
similar to that described above.

a. Measurement
The quantity of Embankment or Fill to be measured under this Section will be
the number of cubic metres complete compacted in place and accepted which
shall include material placed in benching. No additional payment will be made
for the provision of sub-capping material which will be included in the overall
measurement and rates for Embankment.
The quantity shall be measured after operations under clearing and grubbing
have been completed and cross-sectioned, and cross-sections taken after
subgrade elevation is reached and compacted, by the average end area
method. No allowance will be made for settlement. No payment will be made
for quantities outside of the typical sections.
b. Payment
Payment shall be made at the prices tendered for the items under this Section
as they appear in the Bills of Quantities. The prices and payments shall
constitute full compensation for furnishing material from general excavation,
stockpile or borrow, drying, watering, compacting and grading in accordance
with clause 204 including labour, tools, equipment, transport and all else
necessary, to complete the work described herein in strict conformance with
these Specifications and as approved by the Engineer.
S205.8
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

Payment items are as follows: -

205.1 Embankment from selected borrow material cu.m.
205.2 Embankment from general excavation or stockpile cu.m
material
205.3 Capping cu.m.
205.4 Fill from general excavation or stockpile (general cu.m
location/use noted)
S205.9
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

SECTION 206: TOPSOIL AND LANDSCPING
CONTENTS
206.1 Description
206.2 Materials
206.4 Maintenance and Defects Liability
_________________________________________________________________________
206.1 Description
This section covers the landscaping of designated areas, the planting of grass, shrubs
and trees for functional and aesthetic purposes on cut and fill slopes, landscaped
areas and such other areas where it may be required.
206.2 Materials
Topsoil
Topsoil obtained from stripping and excavation shall be utilised. The topsoil shall
consist of natural, friable, surface soil without admixtures of undesirable sub-soil,
refuse or foreign materials. It shall be reasonably free from roots, hard clay, and
coarse gravel, stones larger than 50mm in any diameter, noxious weeds, tall grass,
brush sticks, stubble or other litter and shall have indicated by a healthy growth of
crops, grasses, trees and other vegetation that it is free-draining and non-toxic. Topsoil
shall be clean, friable soil of medium texture to BS 3882 with adequate humus content
obtained from approved sources, it shall have a pH value of between 6.0 to 7.0 and
be low in stony matter. Topsoil will not be spread until inspected and approved by the
Engineer.
Should the quantity of topsoil obtained from stripping and excavation be inadequate
then approved topsoil shall be obtained from borrow or any other approved sources.
The Contractor shall notify the Engineer sufficiently in advance of opening any borrow
areas so that the borrow material can be tested before being used.
Soil Ameliorants and Fertilisers

i. Grassed Areas; shall be fertilised with urea or ammonium sulphate at the
recommended rates.
ii. Bedded areas and Shrubs; shall be fertilised with granular NPK fertilizer such as
12-12-17-2 at the recommended rates.
S206.1
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

SECTION 206: TOPSOIL AND LANDSCAPING
iii. Trees; shall be fertilised with specially manufactured fertiliser spikes that allow for
slow release fertilisation of a tree or palm for up to 1 year. Fertiliser spikes are to
be approved by the Engineer prior to use.
iv. Organic material; shall be thoroughly decomposed, finely shredded and have a
carbon to nitrogen ratio of less than 40:1.
Hydro-seeding Materials;
i. Wood Fibre Mulch: shall consist of virgin wood fibre mulch specifically
manufactured for the purpose of hydro-mulching. The mulch shall have a wood
fibre content of 85% and shall be applied at the rates specified within this
document.
ii. Organic Tackifier: shall be specially formulated for hydro-mulch stabilisation and
erosion control and shall be applied at a rate of 100 kg/hectare.
iii. Grass Seed: Common Hulled Bermuda grass (Cynodon dactylon) seed shall be
used at a rate of 100 kg/hectare. The seed shall have a viability of over 90% and
be free of noxious weed seed.
Drainage fill
Where specified drainage fill shall consist of washed, 10mm pea gravel.
Mulch
Where specified shall be chipped teak bark or similar, of a uniform size and spread in
a 50mm thick layer.
Erosion Control Blanket

Where specified, light weight erosion control blankets shall be biodegradable,
revegetative blankets specifically manufactured to allow for the growth of grass through
it.
Groundcovers, shrubs and trees

All plants shall be well-rooted, healthy nursery stock, free from pests and diseases and
will be available for inspection. Plants will be of the approved condition and size
specified, prior to importation to the site. Plants for massing or hedging shall be uniform
in every respect.
S206.2
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

Plant material required will be in the following categories:-

i. Groundcovers, 150-200mm high and well branched.
ii. Standard nursery size, 300-450mm high, stocky and well branched.
iii. Top quality nursery size, 900-1000mm high, well branched.
iv. Specimen plants- full grown and large in size with a good shape.
v. Palms- as specified.
vi. Trees- as specified.

Topsoil
All areas that are to receive topsoil shall be graded smooth and compacted. The
topsoil shall be evenly spread on the designated areas to a depth that, after settlement
and compaction, shall be 150mm. Spreading shall not be done when the ground is
excessively wet or otherwise a condition detrimental to the work. The roadway
surfaces shall be kept clean during hauling and spreading operations. After spreading
has been completed, large clods, stones, larger than 50 mm in any diameter, roots,
stumps, and other litter shall be raked up and removed and the areas fine graded. Flat
areas shall have an even fall of 1:75, and soil levels shall be finished 25mm above
curbs and paving unless otherwise specified in Engineer’s drawings.
Hydro-seeding
Surface preparation:
i. The related work including grading of surface shall be inspected before
proceeding with works and the Engineer notified in writing on conditions which
may prevent the proper execution of this work. Failure to report unsuitable
conditions will require the contractor to rectify unacceptable work at no
additional cost.
ii. All areas to be seeded shall be thoroughly watered to saturate upper layers of
soil prior to the hydro-seeding operation.
iii. The soil surface of the planting areas shall be allowed to dry out for one day
only, prior to the hydro-seeding application. Care shall be exercised not to allow
the soil surface to be overly saturated with water prior to the hydro-seeding
installation. At the same time the soil surface should not become too dry during
this period. There should be some residual moisture within the first 10mm of the
soil surface.
iv. The Engineer must be notified forty eight (48) hours in advance prior to starting
S206.3
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

the hydro-seeding operation in order to be present.
Hydro-seeding Application:
i. Apply the hydro-seeding in the form of a slurry consisting of, specified grass
seed, organic tackifier, wood fibre mulch, commercial fertilizer, and any other
soil ameliorants that are specified. When hydraulically sprayed onto the soil, the
mulch shall form a blotter-like material. Direct the spray operation so that this
procedure will drill and mix the slurry components into the soil, the slurry spray
will also penetrate the soil surface, thus ensuring maximum impregnation and
coverage. The impregnation and mixing of the components will help in retaining
moisture while stabilizing soil surface from superficial erosion.
ii. Wood fiber mulch application rates shall be as follows;
a. Flatter than 1:4 slopes 1,500 kg/hectare
b. 1:4 to 1:2 slopes 3,000 kg/hectare
iii. The hydro-seeding slurry components shall not be left in the hydro-seeding
machine for more than two (2) hours because of possible seed destruction. If
slurry components are left for more than two hours in the machine, 50% more
of the originally specified seed mix shall be added to the slurry mixture. 75%
more of the original seed mixture shall be added to any slurry mixture which has
not been applied eight (8) hours after mixing. All mixtures more than eight (8)
hours old, shall be disposed, off-site.
iv. Special care shall be taken to prevent any of the slurry from being sprayed onto
any hardscape areas including concrete walks, fences, walls, building, etc. All
slurry sprayed onto these surfaces must be immediately removed.
v. Contractor shall save all seed and fertilizer tags and fibre mulch bags for the
Engineer to verify compliance with the drawings and specifications.
vi. The Engineer shall be present during the hydro-seeding operation and has final
determination if conditions are acceptable for hydro-seed application.
Erosion Control Blanket

All grassed slopes steeper than 1:2 shall be hydro-seeded and then covered with an
erosion control blanket. The blanket must be installed in the direction of the slope and
the edges shall have at least 150mm overlap. The blanket must be installed and
staked as per detailed landscape drawing using approved stakes.
S206.4
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

Planting
Groundcover, Shrubs
i. All plants shall be planted in accordance with the detailed landscape drawings
and the following specifications.
ii. Planting holes shall be dug about 150mm wider than the full root spread and in
addition the bottom of the hole broken up for about one third hole depth
iii. Containers or wrappings not intended to rot, shall be removed without damaging
roots.
iv. The roots shall be placed in the planting hole and spread out at the same time as
adding planting soil. The plant shall be gently shaken to loosely work the soil
around the roots. The depth of planting shall be such that the original root collar
level on the stem will be ground level after settlement. The roots shall be
progressively firmed in by adding planting soil as necessary. The hole shall be
treaded or hand rammed until full and the roots very firmly planted.
v. Any plants that need stem support and/or protection from wind damage shall be
staked. Stakes shall be selected of a size to securely support the plant and driven
well into undisturbed ground if possible. If necessary, two or more stakes per plant
shall be provided. Each plant shall be secured with at least two adjustable ties.
vi. Each individual specimen plant shall be identified with its specified botanical
name clearly marked on a waterproof durable label tied to the stem clear of the
ground.
vii. Pruning, if necessary, shall be undertaken by a skilled horticulturist. Prune to
shape up plants, to remove unwanted growth and roots, and to promote healthy
growth.
Tree planting
i. All trees shall be planted in accordance with the detailed landscape drawings and
the following specifications.
ii. Tree pits shall be 1000mm wide and 1000mm deep or 300mm larger than the root
ball of the tree being planted, whichever is the larger. In planting trees loose
topsoil shall be carefully worked between the roots, each layer being firmed so
that the roots will be fixed and there will be no air pockets. After an area of
planting has been completed the surface soil shall be lightly pricked over with a
fork.
iii. All trees shall be planted at the same depth, as they were grown in the nursery,
allowing for settlement of soil after planting. All plastic and imperishable
S206.5
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

containers shall be removed before planting and any broken or damaged roots
will be cut to sound growth.
iv. Trees shall be secured to a straight pointed stakes 75mm x75mm. The stakes
shall be driven into the ground before the tree is planted to a depth of 750mm.
The stakes shall be cut off just below the first crotch after the tree has been
planted and burrs removed. The tree stakes shall remain in place until the trees
are self-supporting. Staking patterns shall be as specified in the landscape
drawings.
v. Each tree shall be secured at a point just below its lowest branch and also 100
mm above ground level. The ties will be strapped around the tree and nailed to
the stake with galvanized nails. Ties shall be of adjustable plastic or rubber strips
of sufficient pliability to not cause bark damage. Landscape Contractor to submit
ties for the Engineers approval.
vi. Palms shall be braced in accordance to the detailed landscape drawings and the
ALCA standard for bracing palms. Palms shall be braced with a minimum of three
(3) appropriately sized braces.
206.4 Maintenance and Defects Liability

The entire landscape shall be maintained to the satisfaction of the Engineer, for the
defects liability period as specified, after the practical completion. During this period
all defects, due to materials or workmanship shall be rectified. Maintenance schedule
shall be included/coordinated with the Employer
.
Grassed Areas
i. Irrigation: Approximately 24 hours after hydro-seeding the irrigation cycle shall be
initiated. The newly hydro-seeded areas shall be irrigated long enough to moisten
the soil thoroughly to the depth of the slurry mulch taking care not to super
saturate or wash away the slurry and seed. The areas shall frequently irrigated
depending on the weather conditions until the seed has germinated. Thereafter
the grassed areas shall be irrigated throughout the entire period of the
maintenance, defects and liability period on an as needed basis. Irrigation
frequency and the quantity of irrigation water shall be such so as to promote
optimum grass growth.
ii. Fertilisation: Fertilise all hydro-seed areas with fertiliser as specified in item 206.2,
30 calendar days from the start of the maintenance period and continuing once
every 60 calendar days until the completion of the maintenance period. Fertilizer
S206.6
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

applications will be made when the grass is dry and irrigated immediately
afterwards.
iii. Weeding: All concentrated developments of weed growth appearing in the hydro-
seeded areas during the maintenance period shall be removed at two (2) week
intervals. The contractor may elect to remove such concentrations of weeds
manually or by an approved herbicide program.
iv. Mowing; all grassed areas shall be mowed once the grass has established and is
30mm to 45mm high. Mature grassed areas shall be mowed every 2 to 3 weeks
based on the rate of grass growth.
v. Washout repair; all washouts and eroded areas in the landscaped area shall be
repaired immediately and reseeded.
Maintenance of Groundcovers, Shrubs and Trees

i. All plants shall be thoroughly irrigated immediately after planting and thereafter
throughout the entire period of the maintenance, defects and liability period on an
as needed basis. Irrigation frequency and the quantity of irrigation water shall be
such so as to promote optimum plant growth.
ii. Shrubs, borders and tree pits shall be hand forked and hand weeded at regular
intervals
iii. Depression shall be brought back to grade using approved topsoil.
iv. Groundcovers, Shrubs and Trees shall be pruned by a skilled horticulturist.
Pruning shall be carried out in order to shape up plants, to remove unwanted
growth and to promote healthy growth
v. Plants shall be firmed up, re-staked or tied and adjusted as necessary. Climbing
plants will be tied to supports at suitable intervals.
Plants shall be treated with the appropriate fungicides/insecticides when
necessary.
vi. Plants will be inspected at suitable intervals and ensured that they are maintained
in a healthy condition.
vii. Fertilizer Dressings: Quarterly applications of fertilizer shall made to
groundcovers and shrubs during the maintenance period. The fertilizer shall be
as specified in the materials section 206.2.
Defects Liability Period

The Landscape Contractor will be responsible for the entire landscape works during
the stipulated defects liability and maintenance period.
S206.7
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

Over 95% mature turf cover shall be required at the end of the defects liability and
maintenance period. The Contractor shall undertake to carry our all repairs and
reseeding as required to achieve an acceptable turf cover. All plants that perish during
the defects liability and maintenance period due to poor planting material and faulty or
inadequate maintenance shall be replaced at no extra cost.
206.1 Top soiling using topsoil from excavation or stockpile Sq.m.

206.2 Top soiling using imported topsoil Sq.m.
206.3 Hydro-seeding to disturbed areas up to 1:4 slopes Sq.m.
206.4 Hydro-seeding to disturbed slopes greater than 1:4 Sq.m.
206.5 Erosion Control Blanket to slopes steeper than 1:3 Sq.m.
206.6 Supply and plant areas with Groundcovers and Sq.m.
shrubs
206.7 Supply and plant shade trees Ea.
206.8 Supply and plant palm trees Ea.
206.9 Maintenance, Defects Liability Period Mths
The quantities to be paid for under this Section shall be number of square metres of
horizontal area actually top soiled or landscaped as directed and accepted by the
Engineer. The area will be computed to the nearest 0.5 square metres.
The tendered rate shall constitute full compensation for all labour, materials, tools,
equipment, soil ameliorants and all else necessary to carry out the works as described
in these Specifications and as approved by the Engineer.
S206.8
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

SECTION 207: SURCHARGING EMBANKMENTS
CONTENTS
207.1 Description
207.2 Materials
207.3 Construction
207.4 Use of Surfaces by Constructional Traffic
207.5 Instrumentation
_____________________________________________________________________________
207.1 Description
The work to be performed under this Section consists of furnishing, placing, shaping
and compacting material from approved sources over areas to be surcharged and any
associated berms as shown on the Drawings or as instructed by the Engineer.
Work shall be carried out in accordance with Section 205, Embankment, with the
following additional or overriding provisions.
207.2 Materials
Surcharging embankments and berms shall consist of material obtained from
excavation or borrow, free from detrimental quantities of organic matter (leaves, grass,
roots, etc.), topsoil and other debris. The material shall be readily spreadable, shaped
and compacted. Material shall comply with the requirements of Section 205 for
embankment material. The material shall be compacted to 90% of the maximum dry
density of that material at its optimum moisture content determined from the Modified
Proctor Test.
If the surcharge is to be trafficked, the upper 300mm shall be constructed of material

complying with the requirements of Section 205 for capping layer material. The
material shall be compacted to 95% of the maximum dry density at the optimum
moisture content of that material as determined from the Modified Proctor Test.
Compaction trials shall be carried out to determine the number of passes and best
operating methods to be used with the available plant to achieve these levels of
compaction. Proof rolling of finished layers shall be carried out as instructed by the
Engineer prior to placing any overlying material.
S207.1
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

The costs of carrying out compaction trials and proof rolling shall be included in the
rates for embankment construction and no additional payment will be made for these
operations.
207.3 Construction
Generally top soil shall not be removed prior to commencing work. Before
commencing work on embankments and berms, the Contractor shall install settlement
plates and piezometers. Shrubs, bushes, tall grass and trees shall be carefully cut to
ground level before the formation of embankments and berms commences. Their
roots shall not be grubbed up.
The initial embankment layer may be up to 900mm thick and shall be formed by end
tipping over the full embankment width to avoid disturbance of the upper crust of the
alluvium. The layers after tipping shall be spread and compacted as required.
The alluvial crust on the site of the works shall be disturbed as little as possible before
the embankments are constructed. The Contractor shall have regard to the following
requirements.
a. No wheeled vehicle heavier than 1.5 tonnes laden weight will be allowed to run
on the ground surface and the Engineer will have the right to re-route or restrict
the use of such vehicles if it appears that undue disturbance is being caused to
the crust.
b. Wheeled vehicles and plant may be used at the discretion of the Engineer who
will have the right to restrict or forbid their use if it appears that damage is being
caused to the crust or the embankment layers.
c. Wheeled vehicles, except those tipping the initial 900mm depth of embankment,
will be allowed to run on top of the embankment only when it has attained a
height of 900mm above ground level.
d. Once the embankment has reached a height of 900mm the Contractor may have
unrestricted use of it for construction purposes subject to the provision that he
shall so regulate the weight of this plant and vehicles and their method of
operation that no damage is being incurred. In the event that damage is
incurred, the Engineer may require the Contractor to suspend his operation until
plant or vehicles of an appropriate kind are available.
S207.2
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

Berms shall be constructed of the same material and in the same manner as adjacent
embankments, to the dimensions as shown on the drawings or as directed by the
Engineer. In no case shall the rate of filling of embankments and berms exceed
300mm per week except the initial 900mm as described in sub-paragraph 207.3b of
this Clause.
The main carriageway embankments shall be surcharged with an additional 1.2m of

fill meeting the requirements of Clause 207.2 (soaked CBR of 3% minimum) and shall
be constructed in the same manner as underlying embankment. It is anticipated that
the primary consolidation of the surcharged embankments will be completed in
approximately 3 months after which, with the prior approval of the Engineer, the
remaining surcharge material above formation level may be removed and the batters
reshaped to the lines shown in the Contract to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
If the Engineer decides that the primary consolidation of the surcharged embankments
is not complete at the end of 3 months, then he may order the surcharge material to
be left in position for a further period of time before removal may be ordered. If the
Engineer instructs the surcharge to remain for a period up to 12 weeks after the 3
months settlement period then the time for completion of the Works shall be extended
by the amount which this period exceeds 12 weeks.
No claims shall be brought against the Employer during the extended 12-week period.
All fill material used for surcharging shall become the property of the Employer.
Surplus fill material excavated from surcharged areas shall be stored for use by the
Employer, or removed to a site approved by the Employer. All storage heaps shall be
graded to falls to facilitate rain water run-off and the top surface be compacted to
ensure the material remains suitable and the heaps stable.
Where unavoidable landslides or slips occur in the embankment or berm construction

the slide material shall be removed and disposed of as directed by the Engineer. The
material removed shall be considered as unclassified excavation. The Engineer will
be the sole judge as to what constitutes unavoidable landslides or slips and the
occurrence of such landslides and slips will not be considered as grounds for any
claim. Landslides and slips that are avoidable shall be dealt with in the same way but
at no additional costs to the Employer.
S207.3
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

When the embankments are completed to the satisfaction of the Engineer the
Contractor shall establish reference stations consisting of pegs adequately concreted
in at 30m intervals along the centre line and the two outer edges of the top surface of
the embankment. Having established approved temporary benchmarks the Contractor
shall take levels on these pegs and submit a return to the Engineer. This procedure
shall be repeated weekly at a time to be agreed with the Engineer.
When ordered by the Engineer, the Contractor shall at once remove all or part of the
surcharge material to such limits as the Engineer may determine and shall reshape
the batters as shown on the Drawings to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
Only small compacting plant shall be used in the vicinity of settlement plates and other
test apparatus, subject to the approval of the Engineer.
207.4 Use of Surfaces by Constructional Traffic:

Only constructional traffic as approved by the Engineer that does not cause damage
to the subgrade or other material already constructed shall be used on pavement
layers under construction. The wheels or tracks of plant moving over the various
pavement courses shall be kept free from deleterious materials.
Bituminous base course materials shall be kept clean and uncontaminated for so long
as it remains uncovered by a wearing course of surface treatment. The only traffic
permitted access to a constructed base course shall be that engaged in laying and
compacting the wearing course or where base course is to be tack coated, blinded or
surface dressed, that engaged on such surface treatment. Should the base course
become contaminated the Contractor shall make good by cleaning it to the satisfaction
of the Engineer and if this proves impracticable by removing the layer and replacing
it.
207.5 Instrumentation
General
Before placing embankment material in any area, control instruments shall be installed
as shown on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer. The contractor shall use
the utmost care to ensure that none of the instruments are damaged or disturbed in
any way and he shall erect warning markers, fences etc. to protect them.
S207.4
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

Any instruments damage or disturbed by construction operations shall be replaced at

the Contractor’s expense. At the end of the observation period, the instruments shall
be cut off at subgrade level, unless directed otherwise by the Engineer.
Surface Settlement Plates

Surface settlement plates shall be installed on a 100mm thick level sand base in such
a way that the top of the base plate is approximately level with the elevation to which
the ground has been stripped. Before placing any embankment material the Engineer
will inspect the complete installation and take initial elevations on the top of the base
plate and the top of the pipe. Adjustment in the height of gauges shall be made when
the fill reaches a level of 450mm below the top of the gauge. The size of base plate
to be used should not be less than 900mm square. When the Contractor intends to
extend any settlement plate he must inform the Engineer immediately prior to doing
so.
The Contractor shall protect rod gauges from damage by plant and vehicles and shall
repair any such damages to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Should any rod gauge
be damaged in such a way as to make it useless for its purpose, the Engineer shall
assess the settlement for measurement purposes and this assessment shall be
accepted by the Contractor as final. The Contractor shall replace any damaged rod
gauges within five (5) days.
The Contractor shall exercise great care in placing and compacting fill material around
rod gauges and shall satisfy the Engineer that the methods adopted will in no way
damage them. Similar care shall be taken when the surcharge material is removed.
Should a rod gauge be damaged or should the Contractor fail to extend the gauge
when required, he shall stop all filling in the vicinity of the gauge and the Contractor
shall be liable for any delay in his programme or any additional work that has to be
done as a result of his not complying with these requirements.
The Contractor shall take levels on all the gauges and shall submit a schedule of the
levels to the Engineer. This shall be done at intervals of not less than one (1) week or
as agreed by the Engineer.
S207.5
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

Piezometers
Piezometers shall be supplied and installed by the Contractor. The Engineer will
observe the pore water elevations in the piezometers, until, in his opinion, the
elevations have stabilized. No embankments shall be placed until authorized by the
Engineer.

a. Measurement
The quantity of embankment surcharge to be measured under this Section will be
the number of cubic metres complete in place and accepted. The quantity shall
be measured by the average end area method, after operations under clearing
and grubbing have been completed (and cross-sections taken), and after
subgrade elevation is reached and compacted (and cross-sections taken). No
allowance will be made for settlement. No payment will be made for quantities
outside of the typical sections.
The quantity of settlement plates and piezometers to be measured under this

Section will be the actual number furnished, installed and accepted.
b. Payment
Payment for embankment surcharge under this Section will be made at the prices
tendered for the items as they appear in the Bills of Quantities which prices and
payments shall constitute full compensation for furnishing material (if borrowed),
drying, watering, compacting and grading including labour, tools, equipment and
all else necessary to complete the work described herein in strict conformance
with these Specifications and as approved by the Engineer.
Payment for settlement plates and piezometers under this Section will be made
at the prices tendered for the items as they appear in the Bills of Quantities which
prices and payments shall constitute full compensation for furnishing the units and
other materials, labour, tools, equipment and all else necessary to complete the
work described herein in strict conformance with these Specifications and as
approved by the Engineer. The rates and prices shall also include for: extensions;
replacement of damaged gauges; monitoring and reading; and the supply two
copies of readings to the Engineer.
S207.6
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

Payment items that may appear in this Section of the Bills of Quantities are:

207.1 Approved borrow surcharge fill Cu. m
207.2 Fill for surcharge and berms Cu. m
207.3 Surface Settlement Plates No.
207.4 Piezometer. No.
S207.7
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

SECTION 208: SHOULDER REHABILITATION
CONTENTS
208.1 Description
208.2 Materials
208.3 Execution
_____________________________________________________________________________
208.1 Description
Shoulder rehabilitation will be performed as required to provide a smooth, unrutted
and safe stopping area off the travelled surface, to allow for free flowing drainage off
the road surface and through the road base, and to remove and dispose of unsuitable
material and to prevent the growth of any turf, sod, or other vegetation on the shoulder.
208.2 Materials
The following materials will be supplied and used by the Contractor depending upon
the type of shoulder base and surface:
- granular base course aggregate in accordance with Section 304 of the
Specifications
- asphalt materials in accordance with Section 401 of these Specifications, and
- other materials as acceptable to the Engineer.
208.3 Execution
The following repair methods shall be used to rehabilitate the roadway shoulders:
a. Asphalt paved shoulders
Paved shoulders will be rehabilitated in accordance with the Specification for
Roadway Pavement Patching – Section 413.3
b. Gravel shoulders
Gravel shoulders on roadways will be constructed as follows:
i. The shoulder shall be graded to correct any surface deficiencies such as sod
and vegetation growth, loss of line, grade and crossfall, pavement edge drop-
offs, loose shoulder gravel and soft shoulder gravel. The following will be
carried out:
- The shoulder side will be re-shaped by grade blade pulling up any loose
uncompacted material.
S208.1
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

- Any material carried onto the travelled lanes during the execution that
contains sod and vegetation it will be removed for disposal.
- Any remaining material will be spread across the shoulder top, re-
establishing the proper cross-section with a 4% cross-fall, and;
- Shoulders will be compacted using industry standard compaction
equipment to a minimum density of 95% of the maximum dry density for
that material as determined by AASHTO T– 80. If there is insufficient
moisture present, the surface will be watered before compaction.
ii. Shoulders should be gravelled to correct any shoulder surface deficiencies
such as settlements and eroded areas. The following will be carried out:
- Scarify existing compact surfaces as necessary. Spread granular base
course material in accordance with section 304, the material will be
added to a minimum depth of 50mm and a maximum depth of 150mm.
- Shape the shoulder to establish the proper cross-section with a 4%
crossfall, and compact the surface adding water if necessary to achieve
to a minimum density of 95% of the maximum dry density for that
material as determined by AASHTO T- 180, an each subsequent
150mm lift added will be compacted, to a minimum density of 95% of the
maximum dry density for that material as determined by AASHTO T –
180.
c. Earth Shoulder
If the Earth Shoulders are part of a resurfacing project, the original shoulders and,
if required, the adjacent fore slopes shall be scarified to provide adequate bond.
On new work, the surface on which the shoulders are to be constructed shall be
scarified when so directed by the Engineer.
The material used for Earth Shoulders shall be that designated on the drawings
and shall be obtained from sources approved by the Engineer. The material shall
be free from weeds, roots or other material that will not compact readily.
The material shall be deposited and spread in uniform layers not to exceed
200mm (loose measurements) in thickness and compacted in accordance with
the provisions of the Section on Compaction of Earthwork, for the type of
compaction, material, the Moisture Range and CBR, if any, specified or
designated on the drawings.
S208.2
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

Where owners of property adjacent to roadways maintain a lawn up to the edge

of the pavement and where this lawn does not impede drainage of the roadway
surface, the Contractor will not undertake shoulder rehabilitation.
d. Grade Existing Shoulder

Refer to (b), (i) before.

a. Measurement
The quantity of shoulder rehabilitation to be measured under this Section will be
the number of square meters complete in place and accepted.
b. Payment
Asphalt materials used to rebuild shoulders, edges failures, rutting or drop-offs
will be paid for under Section 404.
Payment will be made at the prices tendered for the item under this Section at it
appears in the Bills of Quantities. The prices and payment shall constitute full
compensation for furnishing material, excavation, drying, watering, compacting and
grading including labour, tools, equipment and all else necessary, to complete the
work described herein in strict conformance with these Specifications and as approved
by the Engineer.
Payment items that may appear in the Bills of Quantities are as follows: -

208.1 Asphalt Paved Shoulder Sq.m.
208.2 Shoulder Rehabilitation Gravelling Sq.m.
208.3 Shoulder Rehabilitation Earthen Sq.m.
208.4 Grade Shoulder Sq.m.
S208.3
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

SECTION 212: INVESTIGATIVE EXCAVATION
CONTENTS
212.1 Description
212.2 Definitions
212.3 Excavation
212.5 Backfilling
212.6 Pavement Reinstatement
_____________________________________________________________________________
212.1 Description
Investigative excavation shall comprise excavation in a confined area, in all soils
including rock and existing roadway material as defined below, and depositing in
stockpiles for re-use, the uncovering of equipment, such as water mains, the recording
of information regarding the excavation and the materials encountered, providing for
the inspection of the excavation by the Engineer and the subsequent backfilling of the
excavation and the temporary reinstatement of the roadway with new or recovered
pavement material
212.2 Definitions
Definition and classification of materials shall comply with the Section 202, and Series
300 and 400 of this specification.
212.3 Excavation
The Contractor shall excavate a trial pit or trench either to a level below the surface
as defined in the Contract or as instructed by the Engineer or to the level of an item of
equipment buried within the excavation and to expose that item. Excavation may take
place within the roadway or elsewhere within the road reserve or on land owned by
others. The width of each excavation shall be 900mm, for the full depth as measured
from existing ground level or the underside of the bituminous pavement courses where
they exist. The length of each excavation shall initially be 2m. Where such an
excavation is to locate buried equipment, the excavation may need to be lengthened
until the equipment is located.
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer not less than 14 days in advance of the
start of excavation, his proposed method of excavation and the type of equipment that
S212.1
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

would be used for carrying out the excavation and the Contractor shall not commence
until the Engineer's approval has been given. The proposed method shall allow for
the use of excavation methods suitable for use in the vicinity of pipes and mains and
other equipment buried in the excavation.
The Contractor shall employ only that plant which is suited to the soils and materials
to be handled. He shall not at any time use any plant, which damages or reduces the
natural strength of the soil or granular pavement materials excavated either in their
in-situ state or during handling and placing or in its final compacted state. Materials
excavated shall be stockpiled for re-use in backfilling the excavation. Different classes
of material shall be stockpiled separately.
The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that the excavation limits are the
minimum required for the purposes of the excavation and that the sides of the
excavation are properly supported to prevent over break or damage to the adjoining
roadway surface, the associated pavement and structures. The Contractor shall be
responsible for keeping the excavation free of water and ensuring that any exposed
material in the base of the excavation is maintained in its natural state until tested and
inspected by the Engineer. Similarly, the contractor shall be responsible for the
protection from damage and supporting of any equipment exposed within the
excavation.
If, in the Engineer's opinion, the base of the excavation has become unusable for
testing because of the Contractor's poor practices e.g. failure by neglect to keep cut
free of water, the Contractor shall, at his own expense, excavate a further test pit at a
new location specified by the Engineer.
Upon completion of the excavation to the depth specified or upon exposure of the
equipment the Contractor shall inform the Engineer that the excavation is available for
inspection. The Contractor shall maintain the excavation both in a safe state and in
accordance with the foregoing paragraphs. The Contractor shall provide assistance
to the Engineer to safely access and enter into the excavation and shall attend upon
the Engineer during his inspection and tests to assist in obtaining measurements and
samples of materials from the excavation.
S212.2
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

Upon receiving instruction from the Engineer that all necessary tests and inspections
have been completed the Contractor shall proceed to backfill the excavation.
The Contractor shall remain responsible for the care and protection of any
underground piping, conduit or cables or any other subsurface lines or structures that
may be encountered and for any damage caused to same by his operations.

All materials arising from the excavation shall be vested in the Employer until such
time as it is defined as surplus to the Employer’s requirements. Until such material is
so defined the Contractor shall remain responsible for the safe keeping of the material
and should such material be lost to the works it shall be replaced by the Contractor at
his expense.
All the excavated materials shall be deposited or stockpiled (separately as per each
category defined in paragraph 202.1 (c) of this Section) within or adjacent to the Site
at places provided by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer.
All materials arising from the excavation and declared by the Engineer as unsuitable
for use shall become the property of the Contractor to be removed off the site and
disposed of at licensed landfill sites only. The Contractor shall obtain written approval
of the Engineer for the use of disposal locations and bear any costs involved in the
use of that location.
Surplus suitable material, when so ordered by the Engineer, shall be removed from
the Site, transported to a place or places designated by the Engineer and carefully
stockpiled. Otherwise, surplus material shall become the property of the Contractor
to be removed off the site and disposed of at licensed landfill sites.
212.5 Backfilling
Unless otherwise directed by the Engineer backfilling up to subgrade level shall be
undertaken using the stockpiled excavated materials. The different materials
excavated shall be generally replaced in the same depth in the excavation as from
which they were excavated.
S212.3
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

Excavated unbound pavement materials shall only be reused for general backfill, or
may be used for reinstatement of the pavement when approved for such use by the
Engineer but they shall only be used to form the capping and sub-base layers.
Excavated bound pavement material shall not be re-used for backfilling or
reinstatement.
Where the excavation is within the roadway the upper layers shall be reinstated as the
following paragraph. Where the excavation is outside of the roadway but within the
road reserve or within the adjoining private land the reinstatement shall match that
which existed before access to the area was made and the excavation was
commenced.
212.6 Pavement Reinstatement

Where the immediately surrounding pavement is to be overlaid, the existing pavement
structure shall be reinstated in accordance with the requirements of Section 413 of the
specification.
Where the immediately surrounding pavement is to remain as is, the existing

pavement structure shall be reinstated in accordance with the requirements of Section
413 of the specification but with the following additional requirement. Unless already
shown as required by Appendix 300 for full depth patching, the reinstatement shall
include for a 50mm thick surface course to Section 404 to be inlaid into the pavement
over the binder course top layer of the patch.
This surface course shall be extended beyond the limits of the deep patch into the
adjoining pavement surface layer by a minimum distance of 300mm on all sides by
saw cutting and excavating the existing surface layer. The excavated surface shall be
thoroughly cleaned and tack coated, along with the vertical joint face in accordance
with Sections 401 and 409.
Where the immediately surrounding pavement is to be deep patched or reconstructed,

the existing pavement structure shall be temporarily reinstated to provide a minimum
thickness of each layer as follows:
S212.4
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

PAVEMENT COURSE* THICKNESS

Surface Course Section 404 35mm -
Slurry Seal Section 411 - Nominal
Granular Base course Section 304 100mm 150mm
Sub base Section 301 150mm 150mm
NOTE * each layer to fully conform to the requirements of the specification section noted
The temporary reinstatement shall be maintained fully to the satisfaction of the

Engineer until removed completely as a part of the deep patching or reconstruction
process, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer to remain.

Payment Items
Pay Item No Description Unit

212.1 Investigative excavation in roadway for buried equipment to a No.
maximum depth (specified).
212.2 Extension of investigative excavation in roadway for buried m.
equipment to a maximum depth (specified) (Provisional).
212.3 Investigative excavation outside of roadway for buried No.
equipment to a maximum depth (specified).
212.4 Extension of investigative excavation outside of roadway for m.
buried equipment to a maximum depth (specified) (Provisional).
212.1 Investigative excavation in roadway for testing and sampling to No.
a maximum depth (specified).
212.3 Investigative excavation outside of roadway for testing and No.
sampling to a maximum depth (specified).
a. Measurement
The quantity of investigative excavation to be paid for under this Section shall be
the number of excavations made and backfilled as directed and accepted by the
Engineer.
The quantity of extension of investigative excavation to be paid for under this

Section shall be the linear metres of excavations made and backfilled as directed
and accepted by the Engineer measured along the centre line of the final
excavation from end to end, less 2m.
b. Payment
Payment for work done under this Section shall be made at the prices tendered
S212.5
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

for the items as they appear in the Bills of Quantities.
Payment for investigative excavation and extensions thereof shall include full
to complete the excavation in all materials except rock but including for clearing
and grubbing, and its backfilling and reinstatement either permanent or temporary
and shall include for the cost of protection of and safe access into the excavation
and separation, stockpiling and double handling of materials. This rate shall
include the cost of removal of surplus suitable materials from the site, and
transport and disposal of material at licensed landfill sites.
Where excavations are to uncover buried equipment the payment shall

additionally include full compensation for taking all necessary precautions to
locate such equipment within the excavation and for the prevention of damage to
such equipment, including for liaison with the owners of the equipment and any
costs associated with requirements for attendance by the owners and restrictions
resulting there from.
Where excavations are for the testing and sampling the payment shall additionally
include full compensation for protecting the excavation while awaiting the
attendance of the Engineer and for providing attendance upon the Engineer in
undertaking his tests, measurements and sampling, and shall include the costs
of de-mobilising and re-mobilising labour, plant and equipment.
S212.6
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

PAVEMENT LAYERS OF GRAVEL
OR GRANULAR MATERIAL
S300.0
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___
SERIES 300: PAVEMENT LAYERS OF GRAVEL OR GRANULAR MATERIAL

SECTION 300: OVERALL REQUIREMENTS
CONTENTS
300.1 Description
_____________________________________________________________________________
300.1 Description
This Section describes the overall requirements for the pavement layers, both gravel
or granular and bituminous. It gives the required tolerances for horizontal alignment,
surface levels and surface regularities of pavement courses and describes methods
of rectification where those tolerances are exceeded. It gives overall requirements for
use of the surfaces by construction traffic, as well as defining the layer thicknesses
required for the road pavements included in the Contract.

Section 401 - Bituminous Mixes
Section 402 - Bituminous Base Course
Section 403 - Bituminous Binder Course
Section 404 - Bituminous Surface Course

Horizontal Alignments
Horizontal alignment shall be determined as shown on the Drawings. The edges of
all carriageways as constructed shall be correct within a tolerance of +13mm
horizontally as shall the edges of all bituminous or concrete layers. The tolerances for
unbound underlying layers shall be +25mm.
Surface Levels of Pavement Courses

The levels of all pavement courses shall be determined from the true pavement
surface which shall be the surface of the surface course, calculated from the
carriageway vertical profile and crossfall as shown on the Drawings. The vertical
tolerance of any point on the surface of the formation or pavement courses shall be in
the range given in Table 300.1.
S300.1
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

Table 300.1 - Vertical Tolerances of Pavement Courses and Formation

Surface Vertical Tolerance
Subgrade ±25mm
Sub-base ±20mm
Non-Bituminous Roadbase ±12mm
Bituminous Layers ±6mm
The finished level of the laid surface course shall not deviate vertically at any point
from the true pavement surface by more than + 6mm. However, the combination of
permitted tolerances in different pavement levels shall not result in a reduction in
thickness of the wearing course of more than 5mm from that specified for a bituminous
road, nor a reduction in the thickness of the whole pavement, above the sub-base, of
more than 15mm from the specified thickness.
For checking compliance with Table 300.1, measurements of surface levels will be
taken at 10m centres longitudinally and at 2m centres transversely, starting 1 metre
from the edge of the carriageway. In any length of carriageway, compliance with the
requirements of Table 300.1 shall be regarded as met when not more than one
measurement in ten exceeds the tolerances permitted in Table 300.1, but this one
measurement shall not exceed 5mm more than the tolerances for the layer concerned.
Surface Regularity
Longitudinal irregularities of the surfaces of constructed surface courses and base and
binder courses shall be within the relevant tolerances stated in the Table 300.2. An
irregularity is a variation not less than 4mm or 7mm of the profile of the road surface
as measured by a rolling straightedge, set at 4mm or 7mm as appropriate.
Table 300.2 - Maximum Permitted Number of Surface Irregularities

Surface Course of Base and Binder Course of
Carriageway Carriageway, Surface
Course of Hard Shoulders
Irregularity 4mm 7mm 4mm 7mm
Traverse Length 300m 75m 300m 75m 300m 75m 300m 75m
Mainline Roadway 20 9 2 1 40 18 4 2
Other Pavements
40 18 4 2 40 27 6 3
(Access Roads)
S300.2
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

Compliance with Table 300.2 shall be tested by a rolling straightedge of the type
designated by the British Transport Research Laboratory (BTRL) or an approved
wedge and straightedge device operated parallel to the centre line of the carriageway
and 1.2m from the near side edge of each lane of the carriageway. If a rolling straight
edge is used, it should be maintained and used as recommended by the BTRL.
The traverse length of 300m and its associated numbers or irregularities shall apply
wherever the continuous length of completed carriageway is 300m or more, whether
or not it is constructed to shorter lengths.
For lengths less than 75m, the laid pavement surface and the surface of the
bituminous base and binder courses shall be tested with a 3m straightedge placed
parallel and at right angles to the centre line of the road. The laid surface and binder
course surfaces and the surface of the bituminous base course shall have no greater
depression under the straightedge than 3mm and 6mm, respectively.
Rectification
Where any tolerance is exceeded, the Contractor shall determine the full extent of the
area that is out of tolerance and shall make good by rectifying the surface of the
pavement course or formation in the manner described below:
i. Formation Level
If the surface is too high, it shall be re-trimmed and recompacted in accordance
with Section 300. If the surface is too low, the deficiency shall be corrected by
the addition of fresh suitable materials of the same classification, laid and
compacted to specification.
ii. Granular Base course and Sub base

Where these consist of unbound material, the top 75mm shall be scarified,
reshaped with added material as necessary and recompacted, all to these
specification. The area treated shall normally be not less than 30m long and 2m
wide, or such area to be determined by the Engineer as necessary to obtain
compliance with the Specification.
The Contractor may at his own expense and only with the approval of the
Engineer, make up low areas with the material of the layer immediately above the
one being rectified.
S300.3
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

iii. Courses of Bituminous Mixtures

Rectification of surface level errors shall be by replacement of the full layer depth
for the full lane, or layer width if less for a minimum length of 15m for the final
surface course and 5m for all other courses.
Rectification of surface irregularities in excess of the specification shall be by

replacement of the full lane width over either the full 300m or 75m length over
which the out of specification irregularities occur, or such lesser length as the
Engineer may direct to bring the surface into conformity with the specification.
Use of Surfaces by Construction Traffic

Construction traffic using pavements under construction shall be suitable in relation to
the thickness of the courses it traverses so that damage is not caused to the subgrade
or the materials already constructed
The wheels or tracks of plant moving over the various pavement courses shall be kept
free from deleterious materials.

a. General
The materials supplied and works carried out by the Contractor shall conform to
the specifications as prescribed in the appropriate Clauses.
For ensuring the requisite quality of construction, the materials and Works shall
be subjected to quality control tests by the Contractor, as described hereinafter,
detailed in the ‘Quality Control Manual’ produced by the Contractor (Ref. Clause
102.5), or as directed by the Engineer. The testing frequencies included in these
Specifications are the desirable minimums.
The Engineer shall have the full authority to carry out additional tests as frequently
as he may deem necessary to satisfy himself that the materials and works comply
with the appropriate specifications and the Contractor shall allow reasonable time
within his works programme for this to be done.
Test procedures for the various quality control tests are indicated in the respective
Sections of the Specifications or for certain tests within this Section. Where no
S300.4
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

specific testing procedure is mentioned, the tests shall be carried out as per the
prevalent accepted engineering practice to the directions of the Engineer.
b. Compaction Control
Insitu density tests of granular and cement and lime stabilized materials shall be
carried out in accordance with AASHTO T-191 (Sand replacement/cone method)
unless otherwise authorised by the Engineer in writing. The intensity of testing
shall be such as to give a minimum of 5 tests for a section of work constructed
with essentially the same materials and plant with a minimum of one
measurement of density for each 1000 square metres of compacted area, or 5 for
evaluating a day’s work. Test locations shall be chosen only through stratified
random sampling techniques. Control shall not be based on the result of any one
test but on the mean value of a set of 5 to 10 density determinations.
The number of tests in one set of measurements shall be 5 as long as it is felt

that sufficient control over uniformity of borrow material and the method of
compaction is being exercised. If considerable variations are observed between
individual density results, the minimum number of tests in one set of
measurements shall be increased to 10. The acceptance of work shall be subject
to the condition that the mean dry density equals or exceeds the specified density
and the standard deviation for any set of results is below 0.08 gm/cc.
c. Tests on Sub-bases and Bases (excluding bitumen bound bases)

The tests, using AASHTO test procedure numbers, and their frequencies for sub
base and base shall be as given in Table 300.3. The intensity of testing and
evaluation of density results for compaction control shall be as given in the
preceding paragraphs (b) Compaction Control
S300.5
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

Table 300.3 - Control Tests and their Frequency for Sub-Bases and Bases
(Excluding Bitumen Bound Bases)
Types of
Test Frequency
Construction
Granular sub- (i) Grain Size Analysis; T311-00 & T11 One test per 500 m3
base
(ii) Atterberg Limits; T89 & T90 using One test per 500 m3
wet preparation T146
(iii) Resistance to Degradation (LAA) T96 One test per 1000 m3
grading A
(iv) Moisture-Density Relationship T180- One set per 1000 m3
01, Method D no reuse with T224-01
correction for >19mm
(v) CBR test on a set of 3 specimens at One set per 1000 m 3
T180 OMC, T193 without
replacement >19mm
Unbound Base (i) Grain Size Analysis; T311-00 & T11 One test per 250 m3
Course
(ii) Atterberg Limits; T89 & T90 using One test per 250 m3
wet preparation T146
(iii) Flakiness Index BS 812 One test per 250 m3
(iv) Resistance to Degradation (LAA) T96 One test per 500 m3

grading A
(v) Moisture-Density Relationship T180- One set per 500 m3
01, Method D, no reuse with T224-01
correction for >19mm
(vi) CBR test on a set of 3 specimens at One set per 500 m 3
T180 OMC, T193 without
replacement >19mm
d. Tests on Bituminous Material Constructions

The tests and their frequencies for the different types of bituminous
constructions shall be as given in Table 300.4.
S300.6
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

Table 300.4 - Control Tests and their Frequency for Bituminous Construction
Types of
Test Frequency
Construction
Tack Coat or (i) Quality of binder As required. QA certificates from
Prime Coat manufacturer.
(ii) Binder temperature for application At regular close intervals
(iii) Rate of spread of binder Two tests per day
Layers of (i) Quality of binder As required. QA certificates from

bituminous manufacturer.
mixtures (ii) Resistance to Degradation (LAA) One test per 500 m3 of aggregate
T96 grading C
(iii) Flakiness Index of Aggregate BS 812 Two tests per day from sample (v)
(iv) Stripping Value One test at start and as instructed

by Engineer.
(v) Grading of aggregates in Cold Feed One set of tests on individual
Hoppers and Hot Bins and combined constituents and mixed aggregates
plant mix grading. T27 & T11. for each 100 tonnes of mix subject
to a minimum of two sets per plant
per day.
(vi) Control of temperature of binder in At regular close intervals.
boiler, aggregate in the dryer and
prior to mixing and mix at the time of
laying and rolling
(vii) Marshall design mix properties (vide A set for each 100 tonnes of mix
ASTM: D-1559 & T245) set produced, subject to a minimum of
comprising: two sets per mix type per plant per
Compact Marshall Briquettes, Bulk day.
SG, & voids (set of 8) T245, T166, &
T269.
Max Theoretical SG set of 2 from
Marshall Briquettes, T209
Marshall Stability and flow and
immersion index (2 sets of 3) T245
(viii) Binder content and gradation in the One test for each 100 tonnes of mix
mix, T164 & T30. subject to a minimum of two tests
per day per plant.
(ix) Rate of spread of mixed material Regular control through checks on
the weight of mixed material and
layer thickness.
(x) Relative compaction of compacted Minimum of a set of 5 cores per
layer from cores. Bulk SG core day’s production with minimum 1
compared to Marshall SG core per 500 m2 laid.
determined in (vii), T166 & T230.

No separate payment will be made for the requirements of this Section, all costs being
deemed to have been included in the unit rates of the work items to which they relate.
S300.7
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

CONTENTS
301.1 Description
301.2 Materials
301.3 Execution
_____________________________________________________________________________
301.1 Description
1. The work to be performed under this Section consists of furnishing, placing and
compacting Select material to form a sub base as shown on the Drawings.
2. Related Sections include the following:
Section 205 - Embankment
Section 204 - Preparation of Subgrade
301.2 Materials
The material used for sub base shall yield a minimum 4-day soaked CBR of 30% when
compacted to 95% of the maximum dry density at optimum moisture content of that
material as determined from the Modified Proctor Test.
The gradation will be determined in accordance with AASHTO T11 and T 27 and the
material shall conform to the following:

Standard Alternate
75 mm 3” 100 Liquid Limit <30%
37.5 1.5” 70 – 100 Plasticity Index <12%
19 0.25” 50 - 85 Linear Shrinkage <6%
4.75 No. 4 30 - 60
0.075 No. 200 0- 12*
* Based on fraction passing 4.75 mm.
S301.1
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

In addition to compliance with the grading requirements, the material shall not be gap-
envelope, we D60 is the sieve size through which 60% by weight of the material
passes.
The Coarse aggregate shall have a percentage of wear, as determined by the Los
Angeles Abrasion Test (AASHTO T 96), of not more than 50.
The material shall have a ten percent fines value of 50kN or more when tested in
compliance with BS 812: Part 111. The sample shall be in a soaked condition at the
time of testing.
The aggregate shall have a soundness value greater than 65 when tested in
compliance with BS 812: Part 121.
301.3 Execution
Sub base material shall be placed on subgrade only after the subgrade has been
inspected by the Engineer, immediately prior to the proposed start of sub base laying
execution and it is found to be in conformance with the specification. The subgrade
shall be maintained in acceptable condition while sub base is being placed.
Deformations, ruts, etc., caused by haulage vehicles or other plant and equipment
shall be restored at Contractor's expense.
The Contractor shall take care to load and haul the material to the Works so that it
arrives in an un-segregated condition.
The material shall be spread in layers by power graders or from towed spreader boxes
and no compacted layer shall exceed 150mm thickness. When more than one layer
is required, each layer shall be spread, shaped, compacted and be approved prior to
the placement of a succeeding layer.
The surface of each layer shall be maintained in acceptable condition at all times.
Deformation, ruts, etc., caused by hauling vehicles and other equipment or plant shall
be restored at Contractor's expense.
S301.2
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

The material shall be brought to the proper moisture content and each layer shall be
compacted to 95% of the maximum dry density when tested in accordance with
AASHTO T-180. Where water mains or other similar equipment are known to exist or
could be reasonable assumed to exist and could in the opinion of the equipment’s
owner or the Engineer be damaged by the use of vibratory rollers the sub base shall
be compacted by non-vibrating pneumatic tyred rollers.
Compaction shall continue until the surface is even and true to the proposed lines and
grades within the tolerances defined in Section 300. The finished layer shall be proof
rolled using a fully loaded haulage vehicle as directed by the Engineer.
Any specific area of sub base that, after being compacted does not form a satisfactory,
solid, stable pavement layer (regardless of test results) shall be removed, replaced
and compacted to the Engineer's satisfaction at the Contractor's expense.

The contractor shall protect and maintain the completed pavement layers against
damage. Protection includes protection against rain and floodwater and against any
undue wear and tear of, or damage to unsealed layers by construction or other traffic.
In addition, payment may be withheld at the sole discretion of the engineer for any
pavement layers on a particular section of the road, until the trimming of the sides of
cuts and fills, the construction of side drains, including subsurface drainage where
specified through cuttings. The installation of culverts other than low height culverts,
etc., have all been completed for that section.
Where paved side drains are specified and the geometric shape of such drains do not
permit the completion thereof before the construction of the sub base or subsequent
layers a temporary profile will be permitted for the side drain provided that such profile
shall effect positive drainage of the surface water with no water allowed to pond on
and/or against structural layers of the pavement.
S301.3
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___


a. Measurement
The quantity of Sub base to be paid for under this Section will be measured as
the number of cubic metres complete in place and accepted within the paylines
shown on the Drawings or directed by the Engineer.
b. Payment Items
Section 301 payment item which may appear in the Bills of Quantities are:

301.1 Sub base cu.m
Payment will be made at the prices tendered for the item under this Section as
they appear in the Bills of Quantities. The prices and payments shall constitute
full compensation for the select material, handling, hauling, placing, compacting
and correcting, proof rolling and maintenance and protection, including all labour,
tools, materials, equipment and all else necessary to complete the work described
herein in strict conformance with these Specifications and as approved by the
Engineer.
S301.4
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

SECTION 303: GRANULAR SURFACE COURSE
CONTENTS
303.1 Description
303.2 Materials
303.3 Execution
_____________________________________________________________________________
303.1 Description
The work to be performed under this Section shall consist of furnishing, placing and
compacting processed or natural granular material to form a pavement surface as
defined on the Drawings.
Related Sections include the following: -

Section 205 - Embankment
Section 204 - Preparation of Subgrade
Section 300 - Overall Requirements
Section 301 – Sub-base
Section 304 – Granular Base Course
303.2 Materials
General
The requirements for materials for granular surface course is that they should have
sufficient cohesion to bind the particles and prevent the surface from ravelling and
corrugating in dry weather yet, the amount of fines and the plasticity should be limited
so as to avoid the occurrence of slippery surfaces in wet weather. The material shall
consist of inert, hard, durable stone, sand and fines. It shall be free of loam, clay
surface coatings and other deleterious materials.
Grading
To minimize the effects that compaction-induced crushing of soft materials may have
on the quality of the materials used, samples for grading shall be obtained after
compaction. Gradation will be determined in accordance with AASHTO T11 and T27,
the results of which shall conform to Table 303.1 and not be gap-graded, nor shall the
curve of distribution of those particles sized smaller than D60 deviate by more than
+3% on any specified sieve from lying parallel with the grading envelope, where D60
is the sieve size through which 60% by weight of the material passes.
S303.1
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

Plasticity
The material shall have a plasticity index of not more than 6% and a liquid limit of not
more than 27% when tested in accordance with AASHTO T89 and T90.
Table 303.1: Grading for Gravel for Surfacing (After Compaction)
Sieve Size (mm) Percent Passing

Class 1 Class 2
37.50 100 100
28.00 100 85 - 100
19.00 95 - 100 85 - 100
12.50 80 - 100 65 - 100
9.50 65 - 100 55 - 100
4.75 45 - 85 35 - 90
2.00 30 - 68 23 - 77
1.00 25 - 55 18 - 62
0.425 18 - 44 14 - 50
0.075 12 - 32 10 - 40
Bearing Strength
The Material shall have a minimum CBR of not less than 30%, after 4 days soak, at
95% maximum dry density as measured in accordance with modified AASHTO.
303.3 Execution
The subgrade or sub-base shall be inspected by the Engineer immediately prior to the
start of the surface operations and surface materials will only be placed if the base or
sub-base is found to be in conformity with the specification.
The subgrade or sub-base shall be maintained in an acceptable condition while

surface is being placed and any areas of moving materials, deformations, ruts or other
damage caused by haulage vehicles or other plant equipment shall be restored by the
Contractor at his expense.
arrives in an un-segregated condition.
If gravel as dug is excessively coarse and outside the gradation envelop it may be
processed and broken down using an appropriate roller. Oversize particles that
cannot be broken down shall be removed.
S303.2
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

Generally, spreading shall be by self-spreading vehicles or towed spreader boxes, the

surface material being deposited on the base/sub-base at a uniform quantity per linear
meter, which quantity will provide the required compacted thickness without resorting
to spotting, picking-up or otherwise shifting the aggregates.
Each layer shall have a maximum compacted thickness of 150mm. When the required
compacted thickness more than 150mm, the material shall be spread and compacted
in two or more layers of approximately equal thickness such that no layer shall exceed
150mm. Each layer shall be spread and compacted in a similar manner.
When more than one layer is required, each layer shall be spread, shaped, compacted
and be approved prior to the placement of a succeeding layer. The surface of each
layer shall be maintained in acceptable condition at all times. Deformation, areas of
moving materials, ruts or other damage caused by hauling equipment or other plant
or equipment shall be restored at Contractor's’ expense.
compacted to 97% of the maximum dry density at the optimum moisture content of the
material as determined by the Modified Proctor Test.
grades within a tolerance of 15mm above or below the required cross-sectional
elevations, and to maximum irregularity not exceeding 15mm in three meters
longitudinally.
Any specific area of surface that, after being compacted, does not form a satisfactory,
solid, stable surface (regardless of test results) shall be removed, replaced and re-
compacted, to the Engineer’ satisfaction, at Contractor’s expense. Proof rolling by
fully loaded haulage trucks shall be carried out as instructed by the Engineer to ensure
that the finished surface is compacted.

a. Measurement
The quantity of Gravel Surface to be paid for under this Section will be measured
as the number of cubic metres complete in place and accepted within the pay
limits shown on the Drawings and directed by the Engineer.
S303.3
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

b. Payment
Section 305 payment items that may appear in the Bills of Quantities are:

303.1 Granular Surface Course Cu.m
Payment will be made at the prices tendered for the items under this Section as
full compensation for materials, hauling, handling, spreading, compacting, proof
rolling, trimming, protecting and correcting, including labour, tools, equipment and
all else necessary to complete the work described herein in strict conformance
S303.4
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

SECTION 304: GRANULAR BASE COURSE
CONTENTS
304.1 Description
304.2 Materials
304.3 Execution
_____________________________________________________________________________
304.1 Description
The work to be performed under this Section shall consist of furnishing, placing and
compacting crushed rock, stone or gravel to form a pavement base. Related Sections
include the following:
Section 300 - Overall Requirements
Section 301 – Sub base
304.2 Materials
Crushed stone for base shall consist of one or the other of the following material:
a. Durable crushed rock consisting of angular fragments obtained by breaking and
crushing solid or shattered natural rock.
b. Durable crushed gravel stone obtained by mechanically crushing gravel boulders
or stones with a minimum diameter before crushing of 200mm.
Crushed stone shall have a maximum percentage of wear of 40 as determined by the
Los Angeles Abrasion Test (AASHTO T 96) as follows:
- Gradation requirements for crushed stone will be determined in accordance with
AASHTO T 27 and shall conform to the table 304.1 below:
Table 304.1 - Requirements for Granular Base Course

Standard Alternate Grading
mm No. A B
50 - 100
37.5 - 90-100
25 100
19 70-90 50-85
12.5 55-80
4.75 4 35-60 25-45
2.36 8 25-50
0.600 30 12-30 10-25
0.075 200 5-10 2-9
S304.1
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

In addition to conforming to the grading requirements, the material shall not be gap-
envelope, where D60 is the sieve size through which 60% by weight of the material
passes.
Material shall also have the following properties.
- The material shall have a ten percent fines value of not less than 100kN when
tested in compliance with BS 812: Part III. The sample shall be in a soaked
condition at the time of test.
- The aggregate shall have a soundness value greater than 65 when tested in
compliance with BS 12: Part 121.
- Aggregate Impact Value <30
- Flakiness Index <39%
- Plasticity Index <6%
- CBR in the 4-day soaked test of not less than 80% when compacted to 97% of the
maximum dry density at optimum moisture content of that material as determined
from the Modified Proctor Test.
304.3 Execution
Base material shall be placed on sub base only after the sub base has been inspected
by the Engineer, immediately prior to the proposed start of base laying execution and
it is found to be in conformance with the specification. The sub base shall be
maintained in acceptable condition while base is being placed. Deformations, ruts,
etc., caused by haulage vehicles or other plant and equipment shall be restored at
Contractor's expense.
arrives in an unsegregated condition.
The material shall be spread be by self-spreading vehicles or towed spreader boxes

and no layer shall exceed 150mm compacted thickness. A grader must not be used
to spread the material. The material shall be deposited on the sub base at a uniform
quantity per linear metre, which quantity will provide the required compacted layer
thickness without resorting to spotting, picking-up or otherwise shifting the aggregates.
When the required compacted thickness is more than 150mm, the material shall be
spread and compacted in two or more layers of approximately equal thickness. Each
S304.2
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

layer shall be spread and compacted in a similar manner and be approved prior to the
placement of a succeeding layer.
The surface of each layer shall be maintained in acceptable condition at all times.
Deformation, ruts, etc., caused by hauling vehicles and other equipment or plant shall
be restored at Contractor's expense.
compacted to 97% of the maximum dry density when tested in accordance with
AASHTO T-180.
grades within the tolerances defined in Section 300. The finished layer shall be proof
rolled using a fully loaded haulage vehicle as directed by the Engineer.
Any specific area of base that, after being compacted does not form a satisfactory,
solid, stable pavement layer (regardless of test results) shall be removed, replaced
and compacted to the Engineer's satisfaction at the Contractor's expense.
Proof rolling by fully loaded haulage trucks shall be carried out as instructed by the
Engineer to ensure that the finished surface is compacted.

The contractor shall protect and maintain the completed pavement layers against
damage. Protection includes protection against rain and floodwater and against any
undue wear and tear of, or damage to unsealed layers by construction or other traffic.
In addition, payment may be withheld at the sole discretion of the engineer for any
pavement layers on a particular section of the road, until the trimming of the sides of
cuts and fills, the construction of side drains, including subsurface drainage where
specified through cuttings. The installation of culverts other than low height culverts,
etc. have all been completed for that section.
Where paved side drains are specified and the geometric shape of such drains do not
permit the completion thereof before the construction of the sub base or subsequent
layers a temporary profile will be permitted for the side drain provided that such profile
S304.3
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

shall effect positive drainage of the surface water with no water allowed to pond on
and/or against structural layers of the pavement.

a. Measurement
The quantity of Granular Base Course to be paid for under this Section will be
measured as the number of cubic metres complete in place and accepted
included within the pay limits shown on the Drawings or directed by the Engineer.
b. Payment

304.1 Granular Base Course cu.m
full compensation for materials, hauling, handling, spreading, compacting, proof
rolling, trimming, protecting and maintenance, including labour, tools, equipment
and all else necessary to complete the work described herein in strict
conformance with these Specifications and as approved by the Engineer.
S304.4
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

PAVEMENT LAYERS OF
BITUMINOUS MATERIAL
S400.0
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___
SERIES 400: PAVEMENT LAYERS OF BITUMINOUS MATERIAL

SECTION 401: BITUMINOUS MIXES
CONTENTS
401.1 Description
401.2 Materials
401.3 Requirements
401.4 Job-mix Formula
401.5 Bituminous Mixture Production Equipment
401.6 Bituminous Mixture Production
401.7 Transportation of Bituminous Mixtures
401.8 Placing Bituminous Mixtures
401.9 Compaction of Bituminous Mixtures
401.10 Joints
401.11 Trimming Edges
401.12 Additional General Requirements
401.13 Confirmation of Layer Thickness and Field Densities
_____________________________________________________________________________
401.1 Description
This Section consists of specifications and general requirements that are applicable
to all types of bituminous mixtures of the plant mix type irrespective of gradation of
aggregate, kind and amount of bituminous material used. The work shall consist of
one or more courses of bituminous mixture constructed on a prepared foundation in
accordance with these Specifications and the specific requirements of the type of
bituminous mixture required under the contract, and in close conformity with the lines,
grades, thickness, and typical cross sections shown on the Drawings or established
by the Engineer.

Section 300 - Overall Requirements for Pavement Layers
Section 402 - Bituminous Base Course
Section 403 - Bituminous Binder Course
Section 404 - Bituminous Surface Course
Section 407 - Bituminous Materials (Binders)
Section 408 - Bituminous Prime Coat
S401.1
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

Section 409 - Bituminous Tack Coat and Joint Sealer

Section 413 - Pavement Patching
Contractors are referred to the requirements of Section 300 which shall also apply as
appropriate to Series 400 of the specification.
401.2 Materials
Materials shall be in accordance with the requirement of each specific type of
bituminous mixture included in the contract.
The bituminous mixture (asphalt) shall be composed of a mixture of sound aggregate,

inert and active filler, if required, and bituminous material. The several aggregate
fractions, the coarse components of which shall comprise particles whose shapes
shall satisfy the criterion for flakiness, shall be sized, uniformly graded and combined
in such proportions that the resulting mixture meets the grading requirements of the
job-mix formula.
a. Bituminous Material
Bituminous materials (binders) shall be in accordance with the requirement of
each specific type of asphalt included in this Specification and/or shown on the
Drawings. Bituminous material shall consist of penetration grade bitumen
complying with AASHTO M20, a blend of penetration grade bitumen and Lake
Asphalt or emulsified bitumen.
b. Aggregates for Bituminous Mixtures

Coarse Aggregate - The portion of the aggregate retained on the 4.75mm sieve
shall be known as coarse aggregate. The coarse aggregate shall consist of
crushed un-weathered rock or crushed boulders and gravel approved by the
Engineer. Only one type of coarse aggregate shall be used except by written
permission from the Engineer.
The crushed aggregates shall be produced by crushing fresh un-weathered rock,

which is free from geological defects, such as zones of decomposition,
weathering or inclusions of strata of Shales, Phyllite or other mudstones.
S401.2
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

When crushed boulders and gravel are used, not less than 75% by weight of the
particles retained on a 4.75mm sieve shall have at least two fractured faces.
Quarry and crusher sites, loading points and trucks shall be kept clean and the
Contractor shall provide access roads at his own expense to insure the sites
remaining clean.
The aggregate retained between 12.5mm and 4.75mm shall have a percentage
of wear of not more than 30 at 500 revolutions for ‘surface course’ and not more
than 35 at 500 revolutions for binder and base course, as determined by the Los
Angeles Abrasion Test (AASHTO T 96 grading C).
The aggregate shall have a value of water absorption of not greater than 1.0%
when tested in accordance with AASHTO T-85. The flakiness index of the
aggregate shall not be greater than 30% for surface course and 35% for binder
and base course as determined by the procedure in accordance with BS
812:1992.
Fine Aggregate - The portion of the aggregate passing a 4.75mm sieve shall be
known as fine aggregate and shall consist of stone screenings or a combination
of stone screenings and natural sand with a maximum percentage of natural sand
of 20%. Fine aggregates shall be composed of clean tough, rough surfaced, and
angular grains approved by the Engineer, free from lumps or balls of clay or of
clay and sand, or other objectionable material. Stone screenings shall be
produced from rock or boulders meeting the above requirements for coarse
aggregate.
Aggregate Soundness - Except when otherwise authorized by the Engineer, fine

aggregate when subjected to five cycles of the soundness test (AASHTO T 104)
shall have a weight loss not greater than 10% when sodium sulphate is used or
15% when magnesium sulphate is used.
Coarse aggregate when subjected to five cycles of the soundness test, using the
samples described as “Alternate B” of AASHTO T 104, shall have a weight loss
not greater than 12% when sodium sulphate is used, or 18% when magnesium
sulphate is used.
S401.3
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

Mineral filler – The material finer than 0.075mm in the coarse and fine aggregate
shall be considered as inert mineral filler. It shall have a PI (T89 and T90) of no
more than 4 when prepared by washing through the 0.075mm sieve as in T146
method B.
Active filler, where required as an adhesion-anti-stripping agent, shall consist of

fresh hydrated lime, approved in writing by the Engineer. Filler shall be free from
foreign or other objectionable material. It shall be dry and free from lumps and
when tested by laboratory sieves shall meet the following grading requirements:
Sieve Designation
Percent Passing
Standard (mm) Alternate (No.)
0.6 30 100
0.3 50 95 – 100
0.15 100 90-100
0.075 200 65 – 100
Combined Aggregate Grading - The combined grading (including mineral filler)

for the ‘Job Mix’ formula shall be within the grading limits, and as close as practical
to median values of the requirements of the table below while conforming to the
requirements of clause 401.4. 6.
S401.4
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

Aggregate Gradation Limits for ‘Job-Mix’/Thickness Requirements for

Various Types of Bituminous Mixtures
Sieve Designation Percent Passing (by weight)

Type
Standard Alternate Surface & Surface &

Binder &
(mm) (“/ No.) Base Binder & Binder &
Levelling
Levelling Levelling
37.5 1½” 100
25.4 1” 72 - 92 100
19.1 ¾” 60 - 80 76 – 96 100
12.6 ½” 50 – 70 60 – 80 70 – 90 100
9.5 ⅝” 42 – 62 50 - 70 60 – 80 75 - 95
4.75 4 30 – 48 35 -54 44 – 60 50 - 70
2.36 8 20 – 36 25 – 40 30 – 45 35 - 50
1.18 16 14 – 28 16 – 33 22 – 35 26 – 37
0.600 30 10 – 23 12 – 26 15 – 27 35 - 50
0.300 50 7 – 20 7 – 20 10 – 24 13 - 23
0.150 100 5 - 13 5 -15 6 - 15 8 - 16
0.075 200 Determined from Filler/Binder Ratio requirements of 1/1 to

1.5/1
Layer Thickness; 65/125 50/100 40/65 25/50
min/max (mm)
The gradation of the material retained on the 1.18mm sieve shall be uniform within
the limits shown and shall not vary from the low limit on one sieve size to the high
limit on the adjacent sieve size, nor from the high limit on sieve size to the low
limit on the adjacent sieve size.
S401.5
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

401.3 Requirements
Prior to the start of bituminous work, the Contractor shall submit:-
 A job mix formula for each bituminous mixture required
 a paving plan for approval to shall include the following:
- The width of laydown of each course.
- The numbers and full particulars of spreading, compacting and hauling
equipment.
- The proposed rate of laydown.
- Additional information requested by the Engineer.

1. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to prepare bituminous mix designs and to
submit the same to the Engineer’s for his verification and to obtain his approval
in writing before any mixtures are produced for incorporation into the permanent
works. The Contractor shall make due allowance in his programme for obtaining
approvals for each pavement course mixture and for mixtures having differing
nominal stone sizes. All mix designs shall be prepared explicitly for the project
and for each aggregate source and each bitumen supplier.
In addition to the production and agreement of the initial mix designs described
herein, the Contractor shall be required to repeat the procedure at intervals
consequent upon changes in the source, supplier, or method of production of
constituents of the mix or of the mix itself. These will be additional to the regular
mix assessments required to be undertaken by the Contractor (Cl 300.3) to
ensure conformity of the mixtures with the requirements of the specification with
respect to the ‘Job-mix’.
2. The Contractor shall use a qualified professional engineering service and a

qualified testing laboratory licensed to practice in the Republic of Trinidad and
Tobago, to assess the aggregate materials proposed for use and to carry out the
design of the bituminous mixtures.
All costs incurred in preparation and testing associated with the mix designs are
the responsibility of the Contractor. Shipping costs for samples sent to the
Engineer for verification and approval are the responsibility of the Contractor.
S401.6
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

3. Before the preparation of any mix designs are undertaken, representative

samples of the various nominal sized aggregates, along with confirmation of the
source of the aggregates, shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval.
4. The submission shall also include the results of laboratory tests undertaken on
the individual and combined aggregate components to confirm conformity with
the relevant Sections and requirements of the Specification. The submission shall
be in a manner approved by the Engineer and also include the value for VMA that
was recorded on a representative portion of the combined aggregates to be used
in the laboratory trials. Representative samples of the bitumen proposed for use
in the mix designs together with a QA certificate from the manufacturer reporting
the parameters required in AASHTO M20 shall also be submitted for approval.
5. Upon the approval of the Engineer to the proposed aggregates and bitumen, the
Contractor shall commence the mix design trials (laboratory trial mixes) for each
type and nominal size of asphalt included in the contract. The trial mixes shall be
undertaken to derive a ‘Job-mix’ formula that complies with the requirements in
sub clause 6 below. The Contractor shall supply to the Engineer copies of all
worksheets and test results produced during the laboratory trials. From the
laboratory trial mixes the Contractor shall propose for each mix a ‘Job-mix’
formula giving definite single values for:
 A - Percentage of aggregate passing each specified sieve.
 B - Percentage of bituminous material to be added on the total aggregate
basis.
 C - Temperature of the aggregate when mixed with the bituminous material
(alternatively mixture leaving the mixer).
 D - Temperature of the mixture delivered on the road.
 E – Temperature for start of compaction.
 F – Temperature below which no further compaction should be done.
 G – Type of bituminous material (penetration grade or Lake Asphalt
blended bitumen).
The Contractor shall supply the Engineer with a certificate obtained from the
original supplier of the bitumen, giving specified test results to confirm the quality
of the bitumen.
S401.7
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

6. The Engineer will agree a job-mix formula with single values for A, B, C, D, E, F
and G above for each type of asphalt from the results of laboratory trial mixes
and so notify the Contractor in writing. None of the material will be incorporated
into the permanent works until the Engineer’s approval has been given. The
bituminous mixtures furnished by the Contractor shall conform to the agreed
relevant job-mix formula within the following range for tolerances:
Aggregates:
Aggregate passing maximum size sieve 0%
Aggregate passing the 4.75 mm and larger sieves +7%
Aggregate passing the 2.36 mm through 0.150 mm sieves +5%
Aggregate passing the No. 0.075 mm sieves +2%
Bituminous mixture:
Binder Content (%) Surface Course +0.3%
Binder Content (%) Base and Binder Course +0.4%
Temperature leaving the mixer +10°C
Temperature delivered on the road +10°C
Temperatures for start and completion of compaction +/-50C
Failure of the asphalt laid in the pavement to conform to any of the tolerances
above or any requirements in the table of Marshall requirements in 7 below is
deemed sufficient cause for the asphalt to be rejected, and not approved for
payment.
7. Mix Properties - Marshall Properties

Marshall Tests
When tested in accordance with AASHTO T 245 - 74 (Marshall Method) the
bituminous mixes shall conform to the following limiting criteria:
S401.8
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

Binder &
TEST REQUIREMENT Base Surface
Levelling
75 75
Number of Compaction Blows
(Test on (Test on 75
(Top and Bottom)
<19mm agg) <19mm agg)
Stability, KN. (min.) @ 60°C 6.0 6.0 8.0
Flow (mm) 2-4 2-4 2 – 3.5
Voids, Total Mix (percent) 4-7 3-5 3-5
Aggregate Voids Filled (percent) 65 - 75 65 - 75 65 - 75
Binder content in total mix (% by weight) 4.5%-7% 4.5%-7% 4.5%-7%
Marshall Quotient, (min.) (kN/mm) 2 2 2
Immersion Index, (min.) (24 hrs. at 60OC) 75% 85% 85%
Filler - Bitumen ratio 1.5 - 1 1.5 - 1 1.5 - 1
Voids in Mineral Aggregate (VMA) ≥12 ≥13 ≥14
The job-mix shall also be subjected to AASHTO T283, Resistance of

Compacted Asphalt Mixtures to Moisture-Induced Damage, which result shall
over-ride the immersion index.
401.5 Bituminous Mixture Production Equipment

All production plant used by the Contractor for the preparation of bituminous mixtures
shall be well maintained, in conformity with the manufacturer’s recommendations and
recognised international standards, and shall incorporate a quality control and/or
quality assurance system all such that they are fully capable of producing mixtures
fully in compliance with the Specification. It will be the Contractor’s responsibility to
ensure compliance with the foregoing.
The Contractor is required to provide the Engineer with free and unhindered access
to the production plant and associated building and structures, to allow him to inspect
them in accordance with the procedures set out in AASHTO T-172 and to assess for
his own purposes the adequacy or not of the plant, etc. and the associated quality
systems.
Such assessment shall not relieve the Contractor of any of his responsibilities under
the Contract, but the Engineer will have the authority to recommend improvements to
the plant, systems, etc. and to refuse acceptance of any mixtures produced by the
S401.9
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

plant until such time as either the recommendations have been put in place to his
satisfaction or the Contractor can show by the production and testing of test batches
of the mixtures that the plant and the systems can consistently produce mixtures in
compliance with the Specification.
In assessing the production plant the Engineer will assess the plant, systems, etc.
against the following requirements under A below, except that scale requirements
shall apply only where weight proportioning is used; and, in addition, for batch mixing
plants the special requirements under B and for continuous mixing plants the special
requirements under C.
a. Requirements for all Plant

1. Uniformity - Plant shall be so designed, maintained, co-ordinated and operated
as to produce a mixture within the job-mix tolerances.
2. Measuring and metering devices – All measuring and metering devices shall
be the subject of a quality control/quality assurance system which shall define
the time periods for and standard and type of checks to be applied to ensure
that the devices record accurately the measurement for which they are
intended. Such systems shall be in place and fully operative before any
mixtures, whether for test purposes or for incorporation into the permanent
works, are produced under the Contract. A record of all test and calibrations,
and adjustments made resulting there from, shall be submitted to the Engineer
before any mixtures are produced. No mixtures shall be produced until the
Engineer has approved the sufficiency of the tests, calibrations and
adjustments made. The Contractor shall not be relieved of any of his
responsibilities under the Contract as a result of the approval and shall
continue to undertake all tests required under the system or directed by the
Engineer and supply within one working day full records of the tests and the
adjustments made.
3. Plant scales - Scales for any weight box or hopper may be of the beam or
spring-less dial type or electronic and shall be of a standard make and design
accurate to within 0.5% of the maximum load that will be required. They shall
be regularly checked for accuracy and calibration and records of the checks
recorded, as well as the action taken to remedy any deficiencies to assure their
continued accuracy; at least every two months.
S401.10
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

The Contractor shall provide and have at hand sufficient standard calibrated
weights for the testing of all scales. Testing shall be done by the Contractor
or other authorised body under supervision of the Engineer.
When scales are of the beam type, there shall be a separate beam for each
size of aggregate. There shall be a "tell-tale" dial attached which shall start to
function when the load being applied is within 45 kg (100 pounds) of that
desired. Sufficient vertical movements shall be provided for the beams to
permit the "tell-tale" dial to function properly. Each beam shall have a locking
device designed and so located that the beam can easily be suspended or
thrown into action. The weighing mechanism shall be balanced on knife edges
and fulcrums and shall be so constructed that it cannot be easily thrown out of
alignment and adjustment.
When spring-less dial scales are used, the end of the pointer shall be set close
to the face of the dial and shall be of a type that will be free from excessive
parallax. The scale shall be provided with adjustable pointers for marking the
weight of each material to be weighted into the batch. The scales shall be
substantially constructed, and those that get out of adjustment easily shall be
replaced. All dials shall be so located that they will be in plain view of the
operator at all times.
Scales for weighing bituminous material shall conform to the specifications of

scales for aggregate except that each beam scale shall be equipped with a
tare beam and a full capacity beam. The value of the minimum gradation in
any case shall not be greater than one (1) kg. Dial scales for weighing the
bituminous material shall not have a capacity of more than twice the weight of
the material to be weighed and shall read to the nearest kilogram. Beam
scales shall be equipped with a "tell-tale" device which will start to function
when the load being applied is within five (5) kg of that desired.
4. Equipment for preparation of bituminous material - Tanks for storage of

bituminous material shall be equipped for heating the material under effective
and positive control, at all times, to a temperature within the range specified.
The heating shall be accomplished by steam coils, electricity, or other means
such that no flame shall come in contact with the heating tank. The circulating
S401.11
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

system for the bituminous material shall be of adequate size to insure proper
and continuous circulation during the entire operating period.
Suitable means shall be provided, either by steam jackets or other insulation,

for recording and maintaining the specified temperature of the bituminous
material in the pipe lines, metres, weigh buckets, spray bars, and other
containers or flow lines. The storage tank capacity shall be sufficient for at
least one day's run. Upon written approval of the Engineer, bituminous
material may be partially heated in the tanks and brought to the specified
temperature by means of booster heating equipment between the tanks and
the mixer.
5. Feeder for drier - The plant shall be provided with an accurate mechanical
means for uniformly feeding the mineral aggregate into the drier so that
uniform production and uniform temperature are maintained.
6. Drier - A rotary drier of any satisfactory design for drying and heating the
aggregate shall be provided. The drier shall be capable of drying and heating
the aggregate to the specified temperature and recording the temperature.
7. Screens - Plant screens, capable of screening all aggregates to the specified

sizes and proportions and having normal capacities slightly in excess of the
full capacity of the mixer, shall be provided. They shall have an operating
efficiency such that the aggregate deposited in any bin shall not contain more
than ten percent of oversize and undersize material.
8. Bins - The Plant shall include storage bins of sufficient capacity to supply the
mixer when it is operating at full capacity. Bins shall be divided into at least
three compartments and shall be arranged to ensure separate and adequate
storage of appropriate fractions of the aggregate, not including mineral filler.
Each compartment shall be provided with an overflow pipe that shall be of such
size and at such location as to prevent any backing up of material into other
bins. Bins shall be so constructed that samples can be readily obtained.
S401.12
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

9. Bituminous control unit - Satisfactory means, either by weighing or metering,

shall be provided to obtain the proper amount of bituminous material in the mix
to better than the tolerance specified for the job-mix.
A metering device for bituminous material shall be a rotating, positive

displacement, asphalt-metering pump, with a satisfactory spray nozzle
arrangement at the mixer. For use with batching plants, the device shall
provide the designated quantity of bituminous material for each batch.
For continuous mixing plants, the operating speed of the pump shall be
synchronized with the flow of aggregate in the mixer by an automatic locking
control, and the device shall be easily and accurately adjustable. Means shall
be provided for checking the quantity or rate of flow of bituminous material into
the mixer at the anticipated temperatures.
10. Thermometric equipment - An armoured thermometer reading from 40

degrees to 200 degrees C shall be fixed in the bituminous feed line at a suitable
location near the discharge valve at the mixer unit.
The plant shall be further equipped with approved dial-scale, mercury-actuated

thermometer, an electric pyrometer, or other approved thermometric
instrument so placed at the discharge chute of the drier and in the hot
aggregate storage bins as to register automatically or indicate the temperature
of the heated aggregates immediately prior to mixing.
For better regulation of the temperature of the aggregates, replacement of any

thermometer by an approved temperature-recording apparatus may be
required by the Engineer, and he will require that daily temperature charts are
completed and supplied to him whenever mixtures are being produced.
11. Dust collector - The plant shall be equipped with a dust collector and storage silo
so constructed as to waste and return measured amounts of inert filler
uniformly back into the elevator or mixer in order that the plant mix complies
with the filler requirements of the ‘Job-mix’ formula and tolerances.
S401.13
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

12. Control of mixing time - The plant shall be equipped with positive means to
govern the time of mixing and to maintain it constant unless changed at the
direction of the Engineer.
13. Scales for the weighing of trucks transporting asphalt - The Contractor shall
furnish platform scales and a weigh house. The scales shall be satisfactory to
the Engineer and shall be tested and sealed as often as the Engineer shall
deem it necessary to insure their accuracy.
The weigh house shall be constructed in such a manner as to protect the

recording device of the scales and to provide space for storage of testing
equipment. It shall be weather-proof and not less than three (3) metres by four
(4) metres in plan, and shall have one sliding window facing the scale platform,
one end window, and a shelf desk at least one (1) metre wide and two (2)
metres long. It shall include water and electric facilities.
A monitoring system of delivery notes shall be operated indicating mass of

truck before loading, mass of truck and asphalt after loading and time of
dispatch.
14. Safety requirements - Adequate and safe stairways to the mixer platform and
guarded ladders to other plant units shall be placed at all points required for
accessibility to all plant operations. Accessibility to the top of truck bodies shall
be provided by means of a platform or other suitable device to enable the
Engineer to obtain sampling and mixture temperature data.
To facilitate handling scale calibration equipment, sampling, equipment, etc.,

a hoist or pulley system shall be provided to raise or lower the equipment from
the ground to platform or vice-versa.
All gears, pulleys, chains, sprockets, and other dangerous moving parts shall
be thoroughly guarded and protected. Ample and unobstructed passage shall
be maintained at all times in and around the truck loading space. This space
shall be kept free from drippings from the mixing platform.
S401.14
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

b. Special requirements for batching plants

1. Weigh box or hopper - The equipment shall include a means for accurately
weighing each bin size of aggregate in a weigh box or hopper suspended on
scales, ample in size to hold a full batch without hand raking or running over.
2. The weigh box or hopper shall be supported on fulcrums and knife-edges so
constructed that they will not be easily thrown out of alignment or adjustment.
All edges, ends, and sides of weighing hoppers shall be free from contact with
any supporting rods or columns or other equipment that will, in any way effect
the proper functioning of the hopper. There shall be, also, sufficient clearance
between hoppers and supporting devices to prevent accumulations of foreign
materials. The discharge gate of the weigh box shall be so hung that the
aggregates will not be segregated when dumped into the mixer and shall close
tightly when the hopper is empty so that no material is allowed to leak into the
batch in the mixer during the process of weighing the next batch.
3. Mixer - the batch mixer shall be an approved twin pugmill type capable of
producing a uniform mixture within the job-mix tolerances. It shall be
heat-jacketed with steam, hot oil, or other means approved by the Engineer.
It shall be of such design as to permit visual inspection of the mix. The mixer
capacity shall not be less than a 1,000 kg batch and shall be so constructed
as to prevent leakage of contents. If not enclosed, the mixer box shall be
equipped with a dust hood to prevent loss of dust by dispersion. The mixer
shall have an accurate time lock to control the operation of a complete mixing
cycle by locking the weigh box gate after the charging of the mixer until the
closing of the mixer gate at the completion of the cycle. It shall lock the
bitumen bucket throughout the dry mixing period and shall lock the mixer gate
throughout the dry and wet mixing periods. The dry mixing period is defined
as the interval of time between opening of the weigh box gate and the start of
application of bitumen. The wet mixing period is the interval between the time
the bituminous material is spread on the aggregate and the time the mixer gate
is opened. The control of the timing shall be flexible and capable of being set
at intervals of not more than five seconds throughout cycles up to three
minutes. A mechanical batch counter shall be installed as a part of the timing
device and shall be so designed as to register only completely mixed batches.
Bituminous material shall not be added if the temperature of the aggregate
exceeds the temperature of the bitumen by more than 10°C at the typical
mixing temperatures defined for the mix.
S401.15
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

The mixer shall be equipped with a sufficient number of paddles or blades with
proper arrangements to produce a proper and uniformly mixed batch. The
clearance of blades from all fixed and moving parts shall not exceed 20mm
except in the case of aggregates having a nominal maximum size of over
25mm. in which case the clearance shall be so adjusted as to prevent undue
breakage of the coarse aggregate during the mixing operation.
c. Special Requirements for continuous mixing plants

1. Gradation control unit - the plant shall include a means for accurately
proportioning each size of aggregate either by weighing or by volumetric
measurement. Multi screening of crushed aggregates shall not be permitted.
When gradation control is by volume, the unit shall include a feeder mounted
under the compartment bins. Each bin shall have an accurately controlled
individual gate to form an orifice for volumetrically measuring the materials
drawn from each respective bin compartment. The orifice shall be rectangular
of dimensions about 200mm by 230mm, with one dimension adjustable by
positive mechanical means provided with a lock. Indicators shall be provided
for each gate to show the respective gate opening.
2. Weight calibration of aggregate feed - The plant shall include provision for
calibration of the gate openings by means of weight test samples so that each
of the materials fed out of the bins through individual orifices may be bypassed
satisfactorily to suitable test boxes, each bin material being confined
separately.
The plant shall be equipped to handle, conveniently, test samples weighing

150kg or more, or combined weight of samples from all bins, and not less than
50kg for any one bin sample an accurate platform scale having a capacity of
150 kg or more shall be provided.
3. Synchronization of aggregate and bitumen feed - satisfactory means shall be

provided to afford positive inter-locking control between the flow of aggregate
from the bins and the flow of bitumen from the metre or other proportioning
source. This control shall be accomplished by inter-locking mechanical means
or by any positive method satisfactory to the Engineer.
S401.16
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

4. Mixer unit for continuous method - the plant shall include a continuous mixer
of an approved twin pugmill type, steam-jacketed, capable of producing a
uniform mixture within the job-mix tolerances. The paddles shall be of a type
adjustable for angular position on the shafts and reversible to retard the flow
of the mix.
The mixer shall carry a manufacturer's plate giving the net volumetric contents
of the mixer at the several heights inscribed on a permanent gauge and charts
shall be provided by the manufacturer giving the rate of feed of aggregate per
minute at plant operating speed.
Determination of the mixing time shall be by weight method, using the following
formula (the weights shall be determined for the job by the test made by the
Engineer).
Mixing time in seconds = Weight of Pugmill Dead Capacity

Weight of Pugmill Output per Second
5. Hopper - the mixer shall be equipped with a hopper at the discharge end, of
such size and design that no segregation of mix occurs. Any elevator used
for loading the mixture into vehicles shall have an equally satisfactory hopper.
401.6 Bituminous Mixture Production

Preparation of Bituminous Material - The bituminous material shall be heated to the
specified temperature in kettles or tanks so designed as to avoid local overheating and
provide a continuous supply of the bituminous material to the mixer at a uniform
temperature at all times.
Preparation of Aggregates - The aggregates for the mixture shall be dried and
heated at the asphalt plant before being placed in the mixer. Flames used for drying
and heating shall be adjusted properly to avoid injury to the aggregate and to avoid
forming a coating of soot on the aggregate. The aggregates, immediately after heating,
shall be screened into three or more fractions and conveyed into separate bins ready
for batching and mixing with bituminous material.
S401.17
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

Preparation of Mixture - The dried aggregates, prepared as described above, shall

be combined in the plant in the amount of each fraction of aggregate required to meet
the job-mix formula for the particular mixture. The bituminous material shall be
measured or gauged and introduced into the mixer in the amount approved by the
Engineer. When a batching plant is used, the combined aggregate shall be thoroughly
dry mixed, after which the proper amount of bituminous material shall be distributed
over the aggregate. The whole shall be thoroughly mixed for a period calculated in
accordance with the mix design but for at least 45 seconds, to produce a
homogeneous mixture in which all particles of the aggregate are coated uniformly.
The total mixing time shall be agreed by the Engineer and regulated by a quitable
locking means. For a continuous mixing plant, the mixing time shall be 45 seconds as
determined above and may be regulated by fixing a minimum gauge in the mixer unit
and/or by other mixing unit adjustment.
The heated ingredients shall be combined in such a manner as to produce a mixture

which, when emptied from the mixer, is at a temperature not be lower than is required
to obtain complete coating and uniform distribution of the aggregate particles and to
provide a mixture of satisfactory workability.
401.7 Transportation of Bituminous Mixtures

Trucks - Trucks for hauling bituminous mixtures shall have tight, clean and smooth
metal beds that have been sprayed with a minimum amount of soapy water, thinned
fuel oil, paraffin oil, or lime solution to prevent the mixture from adhering to the beds.
Each load shall be covered with a canvas or other suitable material securely fastened
and of such size as to protect the mixture from the weather. Any truck causing
excessive segregation of material by its spring suspension or other contributing
factors, or that shows oil leaks in detrimental amounts, or that causes undue delays,
shall upon direction of the Engineer, be removed from the work until such conditions
are corrected.
Transportation and Delivery of Mixture - The mixture shall be transported from the
mixing plant to the point of use in vehicles conforming to the above. No loads shall be
sent out so late in the day as to prevent completion of the spreading and compaction
of the mixture during daylight hours.
S401.18
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

401.8 Placing Bituminous Mixtures

Spreading and finishing equipment - The equipment for spreading and finishing
shall be approved mechanical, self-powered pavers, capable of spreading and
finishing the mixture true to the line, grade and crown required.
The pavers shall be equipped with hoppers and distributing screws of the reversing
type to place the mixture evenly in front of adjustable screeds. They shall be equipped
with quick and efficient steering devices and shall have reverse as well as forward
travelling speeds. The pavers shall be so equipped as to allow the placing of layers
from 1.5 to 4.0 metres in width special side attachments may be used to the extent
The pavers shall employ mechanical devices such as equalizing runners, straightedge
runners, evener arms, or other compensating devices, to maintain trueness of grade
and to confine the edges of the pavement to true lines without the use of stationary
side forms. The equipment shall include blending or joint levelling devices for
smoothing and adjusting longitudinal joints between lanes. The assembly shall be so
adjustable to give the cross-section shape prescribed and shall be so designed and
operated as to place the thickness or weight per square metre of material required.
Pavers shall be equipped with activated screeds and devices for heating the screeds
to the temperature required for the laying of the mixture without pulling or marring.
The term "screed" includes any cutting, crowding, or other practical action that is
effective in producing a finished surface of the evenness and texture specified, without
tearing, shoving or gouging.
If, during construction, it is found that the spreading and finishing equipment in
operation leaves tracks in the pavement surface or indented areas or other
objectionable irregularities that are not satisfactorily corrected by scheduled
operations, the use of such equipment shall be discontinued and other satisfactory
spreading and finishing equipment shall be provided by the contractor.
Spreading and Finishing – The mixed material shall as soon as possible after arrival
at the site, be supplied continuously to the paver and laid without delay. The rate of
S401.19
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

delivery of material to the paver shall be so regulated as to enable the paver to be

operated wherever practicable
The mixture shall only be laid upon a clean and approved surface free from standing
water, and only when weather conditions are suitable and can be reasonably assumed
to remain so for the immediate future. At the onset of rain, instructions shall be given
by the Contractor to delay or suspend mixing of further supplies. Material already
mixed may be laid only with the approval of the Engineer.
Wherever practicable, bituminous materials shall be spread, levelled and tamped by

self-propelled pavers conforming to the above and capable of laying to the required
width, profile, camber and crossfall. The rate of travel of the paver and its method of
operation shall be adjusted to ensure an even and uniform flow of material across the
full laying width, freedom from dragging or tearing of the material and minimum
segregation
Joints in one layer shall offset that in a layer immediately below by at least 150 mm,
all as described in paragraph 401.10.
In areas where irregularities or unavoidable obstacles make the use of the mechanical
spreading and finishing equipment impracticable, in the determination of Engineer, the
mixture shall be spread, raked, and luted by hand.
Hand laying of any bituminous material will only be permitted in the following
circumstances:
i. In confined spaces where it is impracticable for a paver to operate;
ii. At the approaches to expansion joints at bridges;
iii. For laying regulating courses of irregular shape and varying thickness in small
areas;
iv. On footways.
Hand laid work shall conform to all Specification requirements of this Clause except
those relating to the manner of operating pavers. The mixture shall be placed on steel
dump boards and spread and screeded to leave the thickness or weight of material
required.
S401.20
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

Immediately after any course is placed and before rolling is started, the surface shall
be checked and all defects and irregularities in alignment, grade or texture, corrected
by the addition or removal of mixture.
However, hand raking of base course, binder and/or wearing course materials that
have been laid by a paver and the addition of such material by hand spreading to
adjust the level of the paved area will be permitted only in the following circumstances:
i. At the edges and at longitudinal and transverse joints and at gullies and
manholes;
ii. For laying regulating courses of irregular shape and varying thickness;
iii. At the approaches to expansion joints at bridges;
iv. Where otherwise directed by the Engineer.
Small tools - The Contractor shall provide suitable means for keeping all small tools
clean and free from accumulations of bituminous material. He shall provide and have
ready for, use at all times enough tarpaulins or covers as may be directed by the
Engineer for use in any emergency such as rain or unavoidable delays or for the
purpose of covering or protecting any material that may have been dumped and not
spread.
An adequate supply of hand tools shall be to hand before paving commences. Such
tools might include:
Rakes; Shovels; Lutes;
Cleaning Equipment; Small vibrating compactor; Hand Tampers;
Cans of spray paint ; 3m straight edge; Thermometers;
Builders lines and line level; Spirit level; Saw cutting machine
with water dispenser.
401.9 Compaction of Bituminous Mixtures

Rollers - Rollers shall be in good condition capable of reversing without backlash.
Steel wheel rollers
- Three wheel steel rollers shall weigh not less than 9070 kilograms with a
compression on the rear wheels of not less than 60 kg per linear centimetre of
wheel width.
- Three axle steel wheel tandem rollers shall weigh not less than 9070 kilograms.
- Two axle steel wheels tandem rollers shall weigh not less than 9070 kilograms.
S401.21
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

Rollers used for initial or breakdown rolling shall be equipped with rolling wheels
having a diameter of 1,000mm or more.
Pneumatic tyre rollers – These shall be of the oscillating type having a width of not
less than 1.2m and equipped with pneumatic tyres of equal size and diameter, having
tracks satisfactory to the Engineer. Wobble-wheel rollers will not be permitted. The
tyres shall be so spaced that the gap between adjacent tyres will be covered by the
tread of the following tyre, or shall be so spaced that any resulting uncovered gap will
not exceed four centimetres in width when the tyres are inflated to 6.3kg. f. per square
centimetre and the operating weight is 900kg per tyre.
When the pneumatic-tyre roller furnished by the Contractor is so constructed that there
is an uncovered resulting gap between tyre tracks as permitted in the preceding
paragraph, the complete coverage of the bituminous material with the roller required
shall be increased by one complete coverage for each one centimetre or fraction
thereof, of the maximum uncovered gap between any two tyre tracks.
The tyres shall be inflated to 6. kg. f. per square centimetre, or such lower pressure
as designated by the Engineer, and maintained so that the air pressure will not vary
more than 0.35kg. f. per square centimetre from the designated pressure.
Pneumatic-tyre rollers shall be so constructed that the total weight of the roller can be
varied to produce an operating weight per tire of not less than 900kg. The total
operating weight of the roller shall be varied as directed by the Engineer.
Minimum equipment provision - The Contractor will be required to furnish a

minimum of 9070 kilogram three-wheel roller, or tandem roller, one pneumatic-tyre
roller, and 7260-kilogram 2-axle tandem roller for each asphalt paver.
The required minimum rolling equipment specified above may be reduced to one
two-axle, tandem roller, weighing at least 9070 kilograms for each paver under the
following conditions, provided it is demonstrated to the satisfaction of the Engineer
that one roller can satisfactorily compact the laid material within the constraints of the
specification:
 When bituminous mixture is placed at a rate of 50 metric tons, or less per hour
at any location.
S401.22
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

 When bituminous mixture is placed at a rate of 100 metric tons, or less, per
hour and at the following location and conditions:
- Placed in miscellaneous areas as determined by the Engineer.
- When the width to be placed is less than three metres.
- When the total thickness to be placed is less than thirty millimetres.
 When the total amount of bituminous mixture included in the contract is 1,000
metric tons, or less.
When rolling equipment is reduced as provided in this sub-clause, the rolling

requirements as provided in Section 401.5h may be reduced as directed by the
Engineer.
At least two rollers shall be used, one of which shall be a three-wheel roller and the
other a tandem roller, for every 1600 square metres of bituminous concrete placed per
day.
The equipment in operation shall be sufficient to compact the mixture to the required
density while it is in a workable condition. The use of equipment, which results in
crushing of the aggregate, will not be permitted.
Compaction Procedure
Immediately after the mixture has been spread and struck-off, the surface shall be
checked and any inequalities adjusted, and then compacted thoroughly and uniformly
by rolling. The layer shall be rolled when the mixture is in proper condition and when
the rolling does not, in the opinion of the Engineer, cause undue displacement,
cracking, or shoving.
Initial or breakdown rolling shall consist of one complete coverage of the layer
performed by a two-axle or three-axle tandem or a three-wheel roller. Such rollers
shall conform to the provisions above.
Rolling shall commence at the lower edge and shall progress toward the highest
portion. Under no circumstances shall the centre be rolled first. Rolling shall be
performed with the drive wheel of the tandem roller forward with respect to the
direction of spreading operations, unless otherwise permitted.
S401.23
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

The initial or breakdown rolling shall be followed by additional rolling consisting of three
complete coverages with a pneumatic-tyred roller as soon as the rollers can be used
without excessive distortion of the material. All compaction must be completed before
the mat cools to less than 80°C. The final rolling of the uppermost layer shall be
performed with a tandem roller.
The surface of the mixture after compaction shall be smooth and true to the
established crown and grade within the tolerances specified. Any mixture that
becomes loose and broken, mixed with dirt, or which is defective in any way, shall be
removed immediately and replaced. Any area of 0.80 square metres or more, showing
an excess or deficiency of bituminous material shall be removed and replaced. All
high spots, high joints, depressions, and honeycombs shall be adjusted.
Any ridges, indentations or other objectionable marks left in the surface of the asphalt
concrete by blading or other equipment shall be eliminated by rolling or other means.
The use of any equipment that leaves ridges, indentations, or other objectionable
marks in the asphalt concrete shall be discontinued and other acceptable equipment
shall be furnished by the Contractor.
To prevent adhesion of the mixture to the roller, the wheel shall be kept properly
moistened but excess water will not be permitted.
Along forms, curbs, headers and walls, and at other places not accessible to the roller,
the mixture shall be thoroughly compacted with hot hand tampers or with mechanical
tampers giving equivalent compression. Each hand tamper shall weigh not less than
ten kilograms and shall have a tamping face area of not more than 300 square
centimetres.
401.10 Joints
Spreading shall be as nearly continuous as possible and the roller shall pass over the
unprotected end of the freshly laid mixture only when authorized by the Engineer. In
all such cases, including the formation of joints as hereinafter specified, provisions
shall be made for proper bond with the new surface for the full specified depth of the
course.
S401.24
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

A joint in a successive pavement layer shall be offset by 150mm from the parallel joint
position in the preceding layer. The position of a longitudinal joint in the surface course
shall be at the road centreline, or located at or immediately adjacent to a lane dividing
line in wide pavements. Joints in the centre of lanes shall be avoided and will only be
allowed with the Engineer’s approval. No joint shall be located in the anticipated wheel
tracks of vehicles using the finished surface.
No mixture shall be placed against previously rolled bituminous material or an existing

pavement material (e.g. pavement widening or patching) unless the edge, either
lateral or longitudinal, is vertical or has been cut back to a vertical face. A brush coat
of bitumen used for contact surfaces shall be applied to the face just before additional
mixture is placed against the prepared joint.
401.11 Trimming Edges

The edges of the pavement shall be straight and true to the required lines. Any excess
material shall be cut off square after final rolling and disposed of by the Contractor to
a licensed landfill or recycled within the works.
401.12 Additional General Requirements

Temperature Requirements of Bitumen - The maximum temperature of the bitumen
as delivered to the mixer shall be that at which it has a Saybolt-Furol viscosity of 75
seconds. Bitumen shall not be used while foaming nor shall it be heated above one
hundred seventy five degrees Celsius (175°C) at any time.
The Engineer will set the job-mix temperature with due consideration of the above
factors but in no case shall the specified maximum temperature be exceeded.
Layer Thickness - The thickness of any layer shall not exceed, after compaction, the
thickness given in 401.2 for the particular mixture unless a greater thickness is allowed
by the Engineer in writing. When the required thickness of any one course (base,
binder, surface) exceeds the allowable thickness for the material, that course shall be
placed in equal layers, such that each layer remains within the thickness limits defined.
Surface Preparation and Protection - Immediately before placing successive layers,

the underlying course shall be cleaned of loose or deleterious material by sweeping
with a power sweeper equipped with blower, supplemented with hand brooms if
S401.25
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

necessary, or as ordered by the Engineer. A tack coat shall be applied when ordered
by the Engineer at a rate directed by Engineer but not to exceed 0.5 litre of undiluted
material per square metre.
The surfaces of base and binder layers shall be kept clean and uncontaminated for so
long as they remain uncovered by a successive layer. The only vehicles permitted
access to the layer shall be those engaged in preparation for or required for the
placement of the successive layer. The Contractor is reminded of the requirement to
cover base and binder course layers within a limited time after laying. Any
contaminated surface shall be cleaned to the satisfaction of the Engineer or if
impracticable, will the layer will be removed and replaced at the Contractor’s expense.
The Contractor shall plan his operations so as to minimise the use of underlying layers
of levelling, wedging or initial layers of thick surface courses by traffic and such use
will be subject to the Engineers approval.
Regulating or Levelling Existing Pavements - Where the existing carriageways are

to be overlaid, material for regulating or levelling shall be of the courses as described
in the Contract and shall be subject to specific mix designs to accommodate the range
and variations of layer thicknesses required.
401.13 Confirmation of Layer Thicknesses, Field Densities and Voids in the Mix
Field densities and layer thicknesses will be determined using 102mm diameter cores
(150mm for base course) taken by the Contractor as directed by the Engineer. The
thickness of each bituminous layer shall not vary by more than that specified in the
Section pertaining to that layer.
102mm diameter cores of the full thickness of the bituminous pavement courses will
be taken by the Contractor following final compaction of the surface course. A series
of a minimum of 5 cores shall be taken by the Contractor for each day’s production
with a minimum of one core per 500 square metres of asphalt laid. The test locations
shall be determined along and across the laid width using stratified random sample
techniques.
Cores will be correctly referenced to the road location and made available for
inspection by the Engineer either at the time of initial coring or within 24 hours thereof.
S401.26
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

The cores taken will be immediately upon removal be referenced and photographed
and stored in a manner to retain their integrity, yet such that they can be readily
inspected.
The Contractor shall arrange for tests to be undertaken on all the cores to establish
the field densities of the various pavement layers in the cores. Where required the
tests will be undertaken in the Engineers presence or additional cores will be taken for
testing at his laboratory. No additional payment will be made to the Contractor for core
taking and refilling and compacting the core holes, nor for the cost of testing.
Remedies for Non Compliance.

Notwithstanding the Engineers right to condemn any work or material not in
compliance with the specification and require it’s removal and replacement with
conforming works, the Engineer may decide in the interest of expediency to allow such
work to be accepted subject to payments to the Employer being made in accordance
with sub-paragraphs a, b, and c below. Until such payments have been received in
full by the Employer, the Engineer may still require the removal of the work. In addition,
such accepted works will remain the responsibility of the Contractor throughout the
defects liability period and should the works exhibit defects during such period these
defects will be corrected to the Engineer’s satisfaction, at the Contractors expense.
a. Thickness
i. The thickness of each bituminous layer, except the levelling course shall not vary
by more than that specified in the Section pertaining to that layer.
ii. Cores of the full thickness of the asphaltic concrete courses will be taken
following final compaction of the surface course. A series of a minimum of 5
cores shall be taken by the Contractor as detailed in clauses 300.3 (d) and 401.13
above or as directed by the Engineer and correctly labelled. Each series shall
represent not more than 2500 square metres of pavement.
iii. The actual total thickness of asphaltic concrete will be determined by the
Engineer using the cores and will be compared with the required thickness as
prescribed on the Drawings or ordered by the Engineer. If the actual thickness
is:
- Greater than the prescribed thickness - the prescribed thickness shall be
used to calculate the volume of material laid.
- Between 90% of and the prescribed thickness - the prescribed thickness
S401.27
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

shall be used to calculate the volume of material laid.

- Between 80% and 90% of the prescribed thickness - 80% of the
prescribed thickness shall be used to calculate the volume of material
laid.
- For courses, other than surface course, where the thickness is less than
95% of the specified layer thickness, the thickness shall be made up to
the total thickness of the combined courses, with material of the next
course. However, the additional material will be paid for at the rate for
the material of the deficient course.
- If the surface course is less than 80% of the prescribed thickness it shall
either be removed and replaced or overlaid with a further 25mm plus the
deficient amount to meet the acceptable tolerances of this Clause. All
costs associated with providing and accommodation the overlay will be
paid for by the Contractor.
b. Density
The density of the completed asphalt layer shall be measured on cores taken at
locations determined as indicated above for thickness.
Where the average density of a set of results does not conform to the density
requirement detailed for the type of asphalt layer in the relevant section of this
specification, a cash payment to the Owner in lieu of replacement may be applied
as indicated in the relevant section.

There are no measurement or payment items under this Section, the cost of all
requirements being deemed to be included in the various Sections covering specific
types of bituminous mixtures and their supply and placement.
S401.28
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

SECTION 402: BITUMINOUS BASE COURSE
CONTENTS
402.1 Description
402.2 Materials
402.3 Execution
_____________________________________________________________________________
402.1 Description
The work to be performed under this Section consists of furnishing, placing and
compacting hot, plant-mixed bituminous material to form a pavement base course as
defined on the Drawings.
Related sections are:

Pavement Layers from Gravel or Granular Material;
Section 300: - Overall Requirements
Pavement Layers from Bituminous Material;

Section 401; - Bituminous Mixes
Section 407 - Bituminous Materials
402.2 Materials
1. Bituminous cement shall be of Penetration Grade 60/70 or 80/100 Bitumen and
shall conform to the requirements of Section 407.
2. Aggregates shall be obtained by crushing fresh durable rock, boulders or gravel
and sand that conforms to the requirements of Section 401.2.
3. The maximum aggregate size for the base – levelling - wedging layer shall be
chosen to be consistent with the thickness to be laid as detailed in the table in
clause 401.2
402.3 Execution
1. Execution shall proceed in conformance with the requirements of Section 401.
2. A prime coat, in accordance with Section 408, Bituminous Prime Coat, shall be
applied to the surface of the under lying layer where the layer is a granular or
cement stabilised.
S402.1
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

In addition to the prime, and where the surface is a bituminous mix a tack coat, in
accordance with Section 409, Bituminous Tack Coat shall be applied before
laying the base course.
3. The completed thickness of the course or each layer comprising the course shall
not vary from the thickness shown on the Drawings or as ordered by the Engineer
by more than 10 millimetres. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to establish
the thickness of uncompacted material to be placed in order to obtain the required
thickness when compacted to the specified density. Areas of pavement failing to
meet the tolerance stated above shall be corrected as directed by the Engineer.
Attention is directed to Sections 401 concerning total pavement thickness.
4. The degree of compaction determined in accordance with AASHTO T 230 shall

be determined from the bulk SG and Maximum Theoretical SG measured on
cores. A minimum of 5 cores shall be taken for a day’s production. The average
degree of compaction of all cores taken from a day’s work shall be between 92%
and 97%. Where the average relative compaction is less than 92% the layer will
be rejected and no partial payment considered.
5. Any area of approved material that remains uncovered by the next layer for more
than 7 days after the date of laying shall receive a single surface treatment of
bitumen that is in conformity with Clause 406, to which shall be applied washed
sand of approved maximum size and grading, the application rates of which shall
be approved by the Engineer.

a. Measurement
The quantity of Bituminous Base Course to be paid for under this Section will be
measured as the number of cubic metres complete in place and accepted.
b. Payment
Payment will be made at the price tendered for the items under this Section as
they appear in the Bill of Quantities. The prices and payment shall constitute full
compensation for furnishing aggregates, bitumen cement and all other materials,
hauling, mixing, handling, heating, placing, spreading, grading, compacting and
correcting, including labour, tools equipment, Bituminous Prime Coat as per
S402.2
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

Section 408, Bituminous Tack coat as per section 409, and all else necessary to
complete the work described herein in strict conformance with these
Specifications and as approved by the Engineer.
Additionally, for levelling and wedging, payment shall include for the cost of supply
and placing material in thin layers of varying thickness, multiple layers and
handling, and working with small quantities.
Section 402 payment item which may appear in the Bill of Quantities are:
402.1 Bituminous Concrete Base Course cu.m

402.2 Levelling and Wedging in Bituminous Concrete Base Course tonnes
S402.3
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

SECTION 403: BITUMINOUS BINDER COURSE
CONTENTS
403.1 Description
403.2 Materials
403.3 Execution
_____________________________________________________________________________
403.1 Description
compacting hot, plant mixed bituminous mixtures to form a bituminous binder course
as defined on the Drawings.


403.2 Materials
1. Bituminous cement shall be of Penetration Grade 60/70 or 80/100 Bitumen and
shall conform to the requirements of Section 407.
3. The maximum aggregate size for the binder course layer shall be chosen to be
consistent with the thickness to be laid as detailed in the table in clause 401.2
403.3 Execution
A prime coat, in accordance with Section 408, Bituminous Prime Coat, shall be
applied to the surface of the under lying layer where the layer is a granular or
cement stabilised. In addition to the prime, and where the surface is a bituminous
mix a tack coat, in accordance with Section 409, Bituminous Tack Coat shall be
applied before laying the binder course.
S403.1
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

by more than 7.5 millimetres. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to establish
3. The average degree of compaction as determined by comparing the Bulk SG

measured on cores (minimum 5 per day) with the average Bulk SG measured on
Marshall Briquettes (minimum 16 per day) shall be not less than 97% of the
Marshall Bulk SG when determined in accordance with AASHTO T 280 and T
245-74.
4. Where the average density of a set of results does not conform to the density
requirement above, and provided there is no other cause for rejection, a cash
payment to the Client in lieu of replacement may be applied (refer clause 401.13) as
indicated below..
Average Density Percent Cash Payment in lieu

97 or higher No payment
96 to 96.99 20% of in place mix cost
<95 Full replacement at Contractor’s expense
5. Any area of approved material that remains uncovered by the next layer for more
than 7 days after the date of laying shall receive a single surface treatment of
bitumen that is in conformity with Clause 406, to which shall be applied washed
sand of approved maximum size and grading, the application rates of which shall
be approved by the Engineer.

a. Measurement
The quantity of Bituminous Binder Course to be paid for under this Section will be
measured as the number of cubic metres complete in place and accepted as
S403.2
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

prescribed in Section 401.6, sub-clause b through g and Section 405.6 (a).
b. Payment
Payment will be made at the price tendered for item under this Section as they
appear in the Bills of Quantities. The prices and payments shall constitute full
compensation for furnishing aggregate, bituminous cement and all other materials,
heating, mixing, handling, hauling, placing, spreading, grading, compacting and
correcting, including labour, tools, equipment, Bituminous Prime Coat as per
Section 408, Bituminous Tack Coat as per Section 409 and all else necessary to
complete the work described herein in strict conformance with these Specifications
and as approved by the Engineer.
Additionally, where used for levelling and wedging, payment shall include for the
cost of supply and placing material in thin layers of varying thickness, multiple
layers and handling, and working with small quantities.
Section 403 payment items, which may appear in the Bills of Quantities are:
403.1 Bituminous Concrete Binder Course cu.m

403.2 Levelling and Wedging in Bituminous Binder Course tonnes
S403.3
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

SECTION 404: BITUMINOUS SURFACE COURSE
CONTENTS
404.1 Description
404.2 Materials
404.3 Execution
404.4 Saw Cut Construction Joints
_____________________________________________________________________________
404.1 Description
compacting hot, plant mixed bituminous mixture to form a bituminous surface course
as defined on the Drawings.


404.2 Materials
1. Bituminous cement shall be of Penetration Grade 60/70 Bitumen or Bitumen/Lake
Asphalt Blend as indicated in the Contract and shall conform to the requirements
of Section 407.
3. The maximum aggregate size for the surface course layer shall be chosen to be
consistent with the thickness to be laid as detailed in the table in clause 401.2
404.3 Execution
2. A prime coat, in accordance with Section 408, Bituminous Prime Coat, shall be
applied to a granular or stabilised surface to receive bituminous surface material.
S404.1
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

In addition to the prime, and where the existing surface is bituminous a tack coat,
in accordance with Section 409, Bituminous Tack Coat, shall be applied. Prior to
placing of an asphaltic surface course on existing pavement the surface is to be
cleaned of dust, dirt and all deleterious material using a mechanical broom or
compressor or any appropriate tool or equipment, to the approval of the Engineer
before the tack coat is applied to the surface.
by more than 5 millimetres. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to establish
4. The average degree of compaction as determined by comparing the Bulk SG

measured on cores (minimum 5 per day) with the average Bulk SG measured on
Marshall Briquettes (minimum 16 per day) shall be not less than 97% of the
Marshall Bulk SG when determined in accordance with AASHTO T 166, T 280 and
T 245-74.
5. Where the average density of a set of results does not conform to the density
requirement above, and provided there is no other cause for rejection, a cash
payment to the Client in lieu of replacement may be applied (refer clause 401.13) as
indicated below.
Average Density Percent Cash Payment in lieu

97 or higher No payment
<95 Full replacement at Contractor’s expense
404.4 Saw Cut Construction Joints

To ensure the best possible construction joints the Contractor shall “tie“ into the
existing pavement surfacing at the start and end of the project and at intersecting
S404.2
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

roadways and streets, and at any other location as determined by the Engineer as
follows.
The Contractor shall saw cut into the existing pavement for a trench to a minimum
depth of 30mm across the full width of the existing bitumen pavement. The width of
the trench between the saw cuts shall be 2m.
The trench shall carry across the entire existing asphalt surface. It shall at be at an
angle of 45 degrees to the traffic flow and the angle shall either continue unchanged
across the road or of break through 90 degrees at the centreline as directed by the
Engineer. The direction of the angle shall be such that water is shed to the road edges.
The existing pavement material shall be carefully removed from the area of the trench.
The material shall become the property of the Contractor and be disposed to a
licensed landfill or recycled into the works.
Once the excavation is complete and before the application of the bituminous surface
course, the entire cut area shall be swept clean and a coating of bituminous tack coat
applied to the vertical saw edges and the base of the excavation.
Where the Engineer indicates a saw cut is required at an intersecting roadway, the cut
will normally begin 25m from the centreline of the project roadway measured along
the intersecting roadway centre line.
Where there is to be a longitudinal joint between the existing pavement and the new
asphalt the existing pavement will be saw cut at the approved construction joint.

a. Measurement
The quantity of Bituminous Surface Course to be paid for under this Section will be
measured as the number of cubic metres completed in place and accepted
measured as the square area of the top surface placed to the limits defined in the
contract multiplied by the course thickness defined in the contract.
The quantity of the saw cutting/construction joint will be in square metres of

roadway pavement removed for the joint.
S404.3
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

The saw cutting of longitudinal joint of roadway pavement shall be inclusive of the
works associated with the rehabilitation of the existing pavement.
b. Payment
Payment will be made at the prices tendered for the item under this Section as they
appear in the Bills of Quantities. The prices and payment shall constitute full
compensation for furnishing aggregates, bitumen cement and all other materials,
heating, mixing, handling, hauling, placing, spreading, grading, compacting and
correcting, including labour, tools, equipment Bituminous Tack Coat as per Section
409 and all else necessary to complete the work described herein in strict
Payment for saw cut construction joint shall be made at the bid price per square
metres for saw cutting as specified in the “Bills of Quantities”. This payment shall
be full compensation for saw cutting the existing asphalt, sweeping the cut out area,
removal and disposal of the material and preparing the surface with bituminous
tack coat.
404.1 Surface Course (specify bitumen grade/TLA blend) Cu. m

404.2 Saw Cut Construction Joint Sq. m
S404.4
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

SECTION 405: OVERALL REQUIREMENTS FOR ASPHALTIC CONCRETE
CONTENTS
405.1 Scope
405.2 Materials
405.3 Requirements
405.4 Job-Mix Formula
405.5 Execution
405.6 Measurement & Payment
_____________________________________________________________________________
405.1 Scope
This Section consists of specifications and overall requirements that are applicable to
all types of asphaltic pavements of the plant mix type irrespective of gradation of
aggregate, kind and amount of bituminous material, or pavement layer applied to.
The work shall consist of the application of a prime or tack coat, and one or more
courses of asphaltic concrete constructed on a prepared foundation in accordance with
these Specifications and the specific requirements of the type of mix specified, and in
close conformity with the lines, grades, thickness, and typical cross sections shown on
the Drawings or established by the Engineer.
The asphaltic concrete shall be composed of a mixture of aggregate, filler, hydrated

lime if required, and bituminous material. The several aggregate fractions shall be
sized, graded and combined in such proportions that the resulting mixture meets the
grading requirements of the job-mix formula.
This Section shall be read in conjunction with Section 401 - Quality Control of Road
works.
405.2 Materials
a. Bituminous Material
Materials shall be in accordance with the requirement of each specific type of
pavement material included in this Specification and/or shown on the Drawings.
Bituminous material shall consist of straight run bitumen, a blend of straight run
bitumen and Lake Asphalt or emulsified bitumen.
S405.1
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

b. Aggregates for Asphaltic Concrete

The aggregate shall consist of crushed stone or crushed gravel approved by the
Engineer.
i. Coarse Aggregates
The portion of the aggregate retained on the 2.36mm Sieve shall be known
as coarse aggregate. Only one type of coarse aggregate shall be used except
by written permission from the Engineer. The rock from which the crushed
stone is obtained shall be free from geological defects such as decomposition
or strata of shale, and shall be free from contamination by overburden, clay,
vegetable matter or other objectionable material. Quarry and crusher sites,
loading points and trucks shall be kept clean and the Contractor shall provide
access roads at his own expense to insure the sites remain clean.
When crushed gravel is used, not less than 60% by weight of the particles
retained on a 4.75mm sieve shall have at least two fractured faces.
The aggregate shall have a percentage of wear of not more than 40 at 500
revolutions as determined by AASHTO T-96, however, depending upon
sufficient test results the Engineer may permit an increase in the percentage
wear up to 50.
The aggregate shall have a water absorption of not greater than 1.0% when
tested in accordance with AASHTO T-85.
The flakiness index of the aggregate shall not be greater than 30 as

determined by the procedure in accordance with BS 812:1992.
When tested for soundness (AASHTO T-104) it shall have a maximum loss
of 12% by weight if sodium is used or 18% by weight if magnesium is used.
ii. Fine Aggregates

The portion of the aggregate passing a 2.36mm sieve shall be known as fine
aggregate and shall consist of natural sand or stone screenings, or
combination thereof. Fine Aggregates shall be composed of clean tough,
rough surfaced, and angular grains approved by the Engineer, free from
lumps or balls of clay or of clay and sand, or other objectionable material.
S405.2
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

Stone screenings shall be produced from stones meeting the above

requirements for coarse aggregate.
Except when otherwise authorised by the Engineer, fine aggregate when

subjected to five cycles of the soundness test (AASHTO T 140) shall have a
weight loss not greater than ten percent when sodium sulphate is used or 15%
when magnesium sulphate is used. Coarse aggregate when subjected to five
cycles of the soundness test, using the samples described as “Alternate B” of
AASHTO T 104, shall have a weight loss not greater than 12% when sodium
sulphate is used, or 18% when magnesium sulphate is used.
iii. Mineral Filler

Mineral filler, where required, shall consist of limestone, Portland cement, or
other non-plastic mineral matter approved by the Engineer. It shall be free
from lumps and foreign or other objectionable material.
iv. Filler and Cover Aggregates for Surface Treatment

Cover aggregates shall meet the requirements of Clause 405.2 (i) to (iii)
above.
In addition it shall meet the following:

Bitumen retained after subjection to stripping test
(AASHTO T182) 95% minimum
Soft fragments (AASHTO T112) 5% maximum
c. Reclaimed asphalt pavement (RAP):

Crush and screen the asphalt pavement material so that 100% of the reclaimed
asphalt pavement (RAP) material passes the 37.5mm screen before mixing.
405.3 Requirements
Prior to the start of asphaltic concrete work, the Contractor shall submit a paving plan
for approval. The plan shall include the following: -
- The width of laydown of each course; the numbers and full particulars of
spreading; compacting and hauling equipment; the proposed rate of laydown
and the proposed series of trial mixes.
S405.3
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

Additional information may be requested by the Engineer.
Related Sections include the following: -

Section 406 - Asphaltic Concrete Levelling and Base course
Section 407 - Asphaltic Concrete Wearing Course
Section 409 - Bituminous Material.
Section 411 - Bituminous Tack Coat
- Where the Contractor proposes to sub-contract the supply of asphaltic concrete

he shall submit to the Engineer the name of the Sub-contractor and the address
of the asphaltic mix plant which will supply the material to the Works. Only one
supplier shall be used per road contract and should a new supplier be proposed
a new inspection of the plant and job mix formula will need to be carried out.

Before starting work, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer a proposed job-mix
formula, in writing, for the mixture to be supplied for the project. The formula, based
upon criteria defined in Sections pertaining to specific types of pavement materials shall
propose definite single values for:
A. - Percentage of aggregate passing each specified sieve.
B. - Percentage of bituminous material to be added on the total mass of
aggregate basis.
C. - Temperature of the mixture leaving the mixer.
D. - Temperature of the mixture delivered on the road.
E. - Grade of bitumen or penetration of Lake Asphalt blended bitumen.
Values shall be proposed within the limits specified for the particular type of asphaltic
concrete called for. The Engineer will agree a job-mix formula with single values for
each type of pavement material from the results of laboratory trial mixes and so notify
the Contractor in writing.
S405.4
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

The mixture furnished by the Contractor shall conform to this job-mix formula within
the following range for tolerances:
Aggregate passing the 4.75 mm and larger sieves + 7%

Aggregate passing the 2.36 mm through 0.150 mm sieves + 4%
Aggregate passing the No. 0.075 mm sieves + 2%
Bituminous material + 0.5%
Temperature leaving the mixer + 10 o C
Temperature delivered on the road + 10 o C
When tested in accordance with AASHTO T 245 - 93 (Marshall Method) the asphaltic
concrete shall conform to the following limiting criteria:
Levelling
&
Base course Binder Wearing
Number of Compaction Blows
per face 75 75 75
Stability, (min.)
(kN at 60 ° C) 6.0 6.0 6.0
Flow, (mm) 2-4 2-4 2-4
Marshall Quotient, (min.)
(kN/mm) 2 2 2
Immersion Index (max.)
(24 hrs. at 60 ° C) 75% 75% 75%
Voids, Total Mix (%) 5-7 5-7 3-5
Bitumen (or Lake Asphalt
Blend) Content in total mix (%) 6.5 ± 0.6 6 ± 0.5 7.8 ± 0.6
Filler: Bitumen ratio 1 - 1.5 1 - 1.5 1 - 1.5
The mix design shall also be subjected to AASHTO Test T 165 - Effect of water
cohesion of Compacted Bituminous Material.
The mix may contain up to a maximum of 10% by mass of RAP without a special mix
design. The Engineer may approve a higher proportion of RAP if the Contractor
demonstrates an ability to produce a mix, which meets the requirements of the
specification.
405.5 Execution
a. Requirements for all Plant
All plant used by the Contractor for the preparation of asphaltic concrete shall
conform to all of the requirements under (1) below, except that scale
requirements shall apply only where weight proportioning is used; and, in
S405.5
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

addition, batch mixing plants shall conform to the special requirements under
(2) and continuous mixing plants shall conform to the special requirements
under (3) below.
Plant for reclaimed asphalt pavement shall conform to the special requirements
under (4) below.
1. General:
All plants will be subject to inspection in accordance with the procedures
set out in AASHTO T-172.
i. Uniformity - Plant shall be so designed, co-ordinated and operated as
to produce consistently a mixture within the job-mix tolerances.
ii. Plant scales - Scales for any weight box or hopper may be either of
the beam or spring-less dial type and shall be of a standard make and
design accurate to within 0.5% of the maximum load that will be
required.
When scales are of the beam type, there shall be a separate beam
for each size of aggregate. There shall be a "tell-tale" dial attached,
which shall start to function when the load being applied is within 45
kg (100 pounds) of that desired. Sufficient vertical movements shall
be provided for the beams to permit the "tell-tale" dial to function
properly. Each beam shall have a locking device designed and so
located that the beam can easily be suspended or thrown into action.
The weighing mechanism shall be balanced on knife edges and
fulcrums and shall be so constructed that it cannot be easily thrown
out of alignment and adjustment.
When spring-less dial scales are used, the end of the pointer shall be
set close to the face of the dial and shall be of a type that will be free
from excessive parallax. The scale shall be provided with adjustable
pointers for marking the weight of each material to be weighted into
the batch. The scales shall be substantially constructed, and those
that get out of adjustment easily shall be replaced. All dials shall be
so located that they will be in plain view of the operator at all times.
S405.6
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

Scales for weighing bituminous material shall conform to the

specifications of scales for aggregate except that each beam scale
shall be equipped with a tare beam and a full capacity beam. The
value of the minimum gradation in any case shall not be greater than
one (1) kg. Dial scales for weighing the bituminous material shall not
have a capacity of more than twice the weight of the material to be
weighed and shall read to the nearest kilogram. Beam scales shall
be equipped with a "tell-tale" device, which will start to function when
the load being applied is within five (5) kg of that desired.
Scales shall have been approved by the Engineer and shall be tested
and "sealed" as often as the Engineer may deem necessary to assure
their continued accuracy; but at least every two months. The
Contractor shall submit a copy of the test certificate to the Engineer
immediately after the scales are “sealed.”
The Contractor shall provide and have at hand not less than 10 - 25
kg standard weights for frequent testing of all scales. Testing shall be
done by the Contractor under the supervision of the Engineer.
iii. Equipment for preparation of bituminous material - Tanks for storage

of bituminous material shall be equipped for heating the material
under effective and positive control, at all times, to a temperature
within the range specified. The heating shall be accomplished by
steam coils, electricity, or other means such that no flame shall come
in contact with the heating tank. The circulating system for the
bituminous material shall be of adequate size to insure proper and
continuous circulation during the entire operating period.
Suitable means shall be provided, either by steam jackets or other

insulation, for maintaining the specified temperature of the bituminous
material in the pipe lines, metres, weigh buckets, spray bars, and
other containers or flow lines. The storage tank capacity shall be
sufficient for at least one day's run. Upon written approval of the
Engineer, bituminous material may be partially heated in the tanks
and brought to the specified temperature by means of booster heating
S405.7
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

equipment between the tanks and the mixer.
iv. Feeder for drier - The plant shall be provided with an accurate
mechanical means for uniformly feeding the mineral aggregate into
the drier so that uniform production and uniform temperature are
maintained.
v. Drier - A rotary drier of any satisfactory design for drying and heating
the aggregate shall be provided. The drier shall be capable of drying
and heating the aggregate to the specified temperature.
vi. Screens - Plant screens, capable of screening all aggregates to the

specified sizes and proportions and having normal capacities slightly
in excess of the full capacity of the mixer, shall be provided. They
shall have an operating efficiency such that the aggregate deposited
in any bin shall not contain more than ten percent of oversize and
undersize material.
vii. Bins - The plant shall include storage bins of sufficient capacity to
supply the mixer when it is operating at full capacity. Bins shall be
divided into at least three compartments and shall be arranged to
ensure separate and adequate storage of appropriate fractions of the
aggregate, not including mineral filler. Each compartment shall be
provided with an overflow pipe that shall be of such size and at such
location as to prevent any backing up of material into other bins. Bins
shall be so constructed that samples can be readily obtained.
viii. Bituminous control unit - Satisfactory means, either by weighing or

metering, shall be provided to obtain the proper amount of bituminous
material in the mix within the tolerance specified for the job-mix.
A metering device for bituminous material shall be a rotating, positive

displacement, asphalt metering pump, with a satisfactory spray
nozzle arrangement at the mixer. For use with batching plants, the
device shall provide the designated quantity of bituminous material for
each batch. For continuous mixing plants, the operating speed of the
S405.8
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

pump shall be synchronised with the flow of aggregate in the mixer by

an automatic locking control, and the device shall be easily and
accurately adjustable. Means shall be provided for checking the
quantity or rate of flow of bituminous material into the mixer.
ix. Thermometric equipment - An armoured thermometer reading from

40 degrees to 200 degrees C shall be fixed in the bituminous feed line
at a suitable location near the discharge valve at the mixer unit.
The plant shall be further equipped with either an approved dial-scale,

mercury-actuated thermometer, an electric pyrometer, or other
approved thermometric instrument so placed at the discharge chute
of the drier as to register automatically or indicate the temperature of
the heated aggregates.
For better regulation of the temperature of the aggregates,

replacement of any thermometer by an approved temperature-
recording apparatus may be required by the Engineer, and he may
further require that daily temperature charts be filled with him present.
x. Dust collector - The Plant shall be equipped with a dust collector so

constructed as to waste or return uniformly to the elevator all or any
part of the material collected as directed by the Engineer.
xi. Control of mixing time - The plant shall be equipped with positive
means to govern the time of mixing and to maintain it constant unless
changed at the direction of the Engineer.
xii. Field laboratory - The Contractor shall furnish and maintain a field
laboratory in accordance with the requirements of Spec. 105.
xiii. Scales and weigh house - The Contractor shall furnish platform scales
and a weigh house. The scales shall be satisfactory to the Engineer
and shall be tested and sealed as often as the Engineer shall deem it
necessary to insure their accuracy. The weigh house shall be
constructed in such a manner as to protect the recording device of the
S405.9
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

scales and to provide space for storage of testing equipment. It shall

be weather-proof and not less than three (3) metres by four (4) metres
in plan, and shall have one sliding window facing the scale platform,
one end window, and a shelf desk at least one (1) metre wide and two
(2) metres long. It shall include water and electric facilities.
xiv. Safety requirements - Adequate and safe stairways to the mixer

platform and guarded ladders to other plant units shall be placed at all
points required for accessibility to all plant operations. Accessibility to
the top of truck bodies shall be provided by means of a platform or
other suitable device to enable the Engineer to obtain sampling and
mixture temperature data. To facilitate handling scale calibration
equipment, sampling, equipment, etc., a hoist or pulley system shall
be provided to raise or lower the equipment from the ground to
platform or vice-versa.
All gears, pulleys, chains, sprockets, and other dangerous moving

parts shall be thoroughly guarded and protected. Ample and
unobstructed passage shall be maintained at all times in and around
the truck loading space. This space shall be kept clean and free from
drippings from the mixing platform.
2. Special requirements for batching plants:

i. Weigh box or hopper - The equipment shall include a means for
accurately weighing each bin size of aggregate and a weigh box or
hopper suspended on scales, ample in size to hold a full batch without
hand raking or running over. The weigh box or hopper shall be
supported on fulcrums and knife edges so constructed that they will
not be easily thrown out of alignment or adjustment.
All edges, ends, and sides of weighing hoppers shall be free from
contact with any supporting rods or columns or other equipment that
will, in any way effect the proper functioning of the hopper. There shall
be, also, sufficient clearance between hoppers and supporting
devices to prevent accumulations of foreign materials.
S405.10
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

The discharge gate of the weigh box shall be so hung that the
aggregates will not be segregated when dumped into the mixer and
shall close tightly when the hopper is empty so that no material is
allowed to leak into the batch in the mixer during the process of
weighing the next batch.
ii. Mixer - The batch mixer shall be an approved twin pugmill type
capable of producing consistently a uniform mixture within the job-mix
tolerances. It shall be heat-jacketed with steam, hot oil, or other
means approved by the Engineer. It shall be of such design as to
permit visual inspection of the mix. The mixer capacity shall not be
less than a 1,000 kg. batch and shall be so constructed as to prevent
leakage of contents. If not enclosed, the mixer box shall be equipped
with a dust hood to prevent loss of dust by dispersion. The mixer shall
have an accurate time lock to control the operation of a complete
mixing cycle by locking the weigh box gate after the charging of the
mixer until the closing of the mixer gate at the completion of the cycle.
It shall lock the bitumen bucket throughout the dry mixing period and
shall lock the mixer gate throughout the dry and wet mixing periods.
The dry mixing period is defined as the interval of time between
opening of the weigh box gate and the start of application of bitumen.
The wet mixing period is the interval between the time the bituminous
material is spread on the aggregate and the time the mixer gate is
opened. The control of the timing shall be flexible and capable of being
set at intervals of not more than five seconds throughout cycles up to
three minutes. A mechanical batch counter shall be installed as a part
of the timing device and shall be so designed as to register only
completely mixed batches. Bituminous material shall not be added if
the temperature of the aggregate exceeds 160°C.
The mixer shall be equipped with a sufficient number of paddles or

blades with proper arrangements to produce a proper and uniformly
mixed batch. The clearance of blades from all fixed and moving parts
shall not exceed 2cm. except in the case of aggregates having a
nominal maximum size of over 2.5cm. in which case the clearance
S405.11
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

shall be so adjusted as to prevent undue breakage of the coarse

aggregate during the mixing operation.
3. Special Requirements for continuous mixing plants:

i. Gradation control unit - The plant shall include a means for accurately
proportioning each size of aggregate either by weighing or by
volumetric measurement. Multi screening of crushed aggregates shall
not be permitted.
When gradation control is by volume, the unit shall include a feeder

mounted under the compartment bins. Each bin shall have an
accurately controlled individual gate to form an orifice for
volumetrically measuring the materials drawn from each respective
bin compartment. The orifice shall be rectangular of dimensions
about 20 cm. by 23 cm. with one dimension adjustable by positive
mechanical means provided with a lock. Indicators shall be provided
for each gate to show the respective gate opening.
ii. Weight calibration of aggregate feed - The plant shall include

provision for calibration of the gate openings by means of weight test
samples so that each of the materials fed out of the bins through
individual orifices may be bypassed satisfactorily to suitable test
boxes, each bin material being confined separately. The plant shall
be equipped to handle, conveniently, test samples weighing 150 kg.
or more, or combined weight of samples from all bins, and not less
than 50 kg. for any one bin sample an accurate platform scale having
a capacity of 150 kg. or more shall be provided.
iii. Synchronisation of aggregate and bitumen feed - Satisfactory means

shall be provided to afford positive inter-locking control between the
flow of aggregate from the bins and the flow of bitumen from the
metre or other proportioning source. This control shall be
accomplished by inter-locking mechanical means or by any positive
method satisfactory to the engineer. Bituminous material shall not be
added if the temperature of the aggregate is above 160°C.
S405.12
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

iv. Mixer unit for continuous method - The plant shall include a
continuous mixer of an approved twin pugmill type, steam-jacketed,
capable of producing a uniform mixture within the job-mix tolerances.
The paddles shall be of a type adjustable for angular position on the
shafts and reversible to retard the flow of the mix.
The mixer shall carry a manufacturer's plate giving the net volumetric
contents of the mixer at the several heights inscribed on a permanent
gauge and charts shall be provided by the manufacturer giving the
rate of feed of aggregate per minute at plant operating speed.
Determination of the mixing time shall be by weight method, using the
following formula (the weights shall be determined for the job mix and
approved by the Engineer).
Mixing time in seconds =Weight of Pugmill Dead Capacity

Weight of Pugmill Output Per Second
i. Hopper - The mixer shall be equipped with a hopper at the discharge

end, of such size and design that no segregation of mix occurs. Any
elevator used for loading the asphaltic concrete into vehicles shall
have an equally satisfactory hopper.
4. Special Requirements for Reclaimed Asphalt Pavement:

i. Using a batch or continuous mixing plant.
- The feed shall be from a separate cold feed bin specially
designed to minimise any consolidation of the material. A
37.5mm scalping screen on the cold feed shall be used to
remove oversized pieces of RAP.
- To ensure a positive and accurate control of the cold feed of the
RAP a hydraulic motor or electric clutch shall be used and the
belt shall be equipped with an anti-rollback device to prevent
material from sliding backwards.
- Combine RAP and new aggregates in the proportions as
required. Dry the mix thoroughly, until a uniform temperature
within plus or minus 5°C of the mix temperature is achieved prior
to adding new bituminous material.
S405.13
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

ii. Using a drier drum mixing plant.

- Where RAP to be incorporated into a mix, the dryer drum mixer
shall be designed to prevent direct contact of RAP with the burner
flame or with exhaust gases hotter than 180°C.
- The aggregates shall be fed to the burner end of dryer drum by
means of a multi-bin cold feed unit and blended to meet the job-
mix requirements by adjustments of a variable speed feed belts
and gates on each bin.
- RAP shall be fed from a separate cold feed bin designed to
maximise reconsolidation of material.
- Screens or other suitable devices shall be provided to reject
oversize particles or lumps of aggregate and RAP from the cold
feed prior to them entering the drum.
- The total flow of aggregate and RAP shall be metred by an
electronic weigh belt system with an indicator that can be
monitored by the plant operator and which is interlocked with
the bitumen pump so that proportions of aggregate and RAP
and bitumen entering the mixer shall remain constant.
- Provision shall be made for conveniently sampling full flow of
materials from the cold feed.
- Provide a system interlock, which will stop all feed
components, if either bitumen or aggregate from any bin stops
flowing.
iii. Equipment for Hauling and Placing

Trucks - Trucks for hauling asphaltic concrete shall have tight, clean
and smooth metal beds that have been sprayed with a minimum
amount of soapy water, thinned fuel oil, paraffin oil, or lime solution
to prevent the mixture from adhering to the beds. Each load shall
be covered with a canvas or other suitable material securely
fastened and of such size as to protect the mixture from the weather.
Any truck causing excessive segregation of material by its spring
suspension or other contributing factors, or that shows oil leaks in
detrimental amounts, or that causes undue delays, shall upon
direction of the Engineer, be removed from the site until such
conditions are corrected.
S405.14
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

iv. Spreading and finishing equipment - The equipment for spreading

and finishing shall be approved mechanical, self-powered pavers,
capable of spreading and finishing the mixture true to the line, grade
and crown required.
The pavers shall be equipped with hoppers and distributing
screws of the reversing type to place the mixture evenly in front of
adjustable screeds. They shall be equipped with quick and
efficient steering devices and shall have reverse as well as
forward travelling speeds. The pavers shall be so equipped as to
allow the placing of layers from 1.5 to 4.0m in width. Special side
attachments may be used to the extent approved by the Engineer.
The pavers shall employ mechanical devices such as equalising

runners, straightedge runners, evener arms, or other compensating
devices, to maintain trueness of grade and to confine the edges of
the pavement to true lines without the use of stationary side forms.
The equipment shall include blending or joint levelling devices for

smoothing and adjusting longitudinal joints between lanes. The
assembly shall be so adjustable to give the cross-section shape
prescribed and shall be so designed and operated as to place the
thickness or weight per square metre of material required.
Pavers shall be equipped with activated screeds and devices for

heating the screeds to the temperature required for the laying of the
mixture without pulling or marring.
The term "screed" includes any cutting, crowding, or other practical

action that is effective in producing a finished surface of the
evenness and texture specified, without tearing, shoving or gouging.
If, during construction, it is found that the spreading and finishing

equipment in operation leaves tracks in the pavement surface or
indented areas or other objectionable irregularities that are not
satisfactorily corrected by scheduled operations, the use of such
equipment shall be discontinued and other satisfactory spreading
S405.15
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

and finishing equipment shall be provided by the Contractor.
v. Rollers - Rollers shall be in good condition capable of reversing

without backlash. Three-wheel steel rollers shall weigh not less than
9070 kilograms with a compression on the rear wheels of not less
than 60 kg. per linear centimetre of wheel width.. The three axle
steel wheel tandem rollers shall weigh not less than 9070 kilograms.
The two axle steel wheel tandem rollers shall weigh not less than
9070 kilograms.
Rollers used for initial or breakdown rolling shall be equipped with

rolling wheels having a diameter of l00 cm. or more.
Pneumatic tyre rollers shall be of the oscillating type having a width

of not less than 1.2 metres and equipped with pneumatic tyres of
equal size and diameter, having tracks satisfactory to the Engineer.
Wobble-wheel rollers will not be permitted. The tyres shall be so
spaced that the gap between adjacent tyres will be covered by the
tread of the following tyre, or shall be so spaced that any resulting
uncovered gap will not exceed four centimetre in width when the
tyres are inflated to 6.3 kgf. per square centimetre and the operating
weight is 900 kg. per tyre.
When the pneumatic-tyre roller furnished by the Contractor is so

constructed that there is an uncovered resulting gap between tyre
tracks as permitted in the preceding paragraph, the complete
coverage of asphalt concrete with the roller required shall be
increased by one complete coverage for each one centimetre or
fraction thereof, of the maximum uncovered gap between any two
tyre tracks.
The tyres shall be inflated to 6.3 kgf. per square centimetre, or such
lower pressure as designated by the Engineer, and maintained so
that the air pressure will not vary more than 0.35 kgf. per square
centimetre from the designated pressure. Pneumatic-tyre rollers
shall be so constructed that the total weight of the roller can be
S405.16
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

varied to produce an operating weight per tyre of not less than 900
kg. The total operating weight of the roller shall be varied as directed
by the Engineer.
The Contractor will be required to furnish a minimum of one 9070

kilogram three-wheel roller, or tandem roller, one pneumatic-tyre
roller, and one 7260-kilogram 2-axle tandem roller for each asphalt
paver.
The required minimum rolling equipment specified above may be

reduced to one two-axle tandem roller, weighing at least 9070
kilograms and one pneumatic-tyre roller for each paver under the
following conditions and provided it is demonstrated to the
satisfaction of the Engineer that two rollers can perform the work:
- When asphalt concrete is placed at a rate of 50 metric tons,
or less per hour at any location.
- When asphalt concrete is placed at a rate of 100 metric
tons, or less, per hour and at the following location and
conditions:
1. Placed on miscellaneous areas as determined by the
Engineer.
2. When the width to be placed is less than three metres.
3. When the total thickness to be placed is less than
30mm.
vi. When the total amount of asphalt concrete included in the contract
is 1,010 metric tons, or less. When rolling equipment is reduced as
provided in this sub-clause, the rolling requirements as provided in
Section 405.5h may be reduced as directed by the Engineer.
At least two rollers shall be used, one of which shall be a pneumatic-

tyre roller and the other a three-wheel roller or a tandem roller, for
every 1600 square metres of asphaltic concrete placed per day.
The equipment in operation shall be sufficient to compact the

mixture to the required density while it is in a workable condition.
S405.17
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

The use of equipment, which results in crushing of the aggregate,

will not be permitted.
vii. Small tools - The Contractor shall provide suitable means for keeping
all small tools clean and free from accumulations of bituminous
material. He shall provide and have ready, for use at all times, enough
tarpaulins or covers as may be directed by the Engineer for use in
any emergency such as rain or unavoidable delays or for the purpose
of covering or protecting any material that may accidentally have
been dumped and not spread.
b. Preparation of Bituminous material

The bituminous material shall be heated to the specified temperature in kettles or
tanks so designed as to avoid local overheating and provide a continuous supply
of the bituminous material to the mixer at a uniform temperature at all times.
c. Preparation of Aggregates
The aggregates for the mixture shall be dried and heated at the asphalt plant
before being placed in the mixer. Flames used for drying and heating shall be
adjusted properly to avoid injury to the aggregate and to avoid forming a coating
of soot on the aggregate. The aggregates, immediately after heating, shall be
screened into three or more fractions and conveyed into separate bins ready for
batching and mixing with bituminous material.
d. Preparation of asphaltic concrete

The dried aggregates, prepared as described above, shall be combined in the plant
in the amount of each fraction of aggregate required to meet the job-mix formula
for the particular mixture. The bituminous material shall be measured or gauged
and introduced into the mixer in the amount determined by the Engineer. When a
batching plant is used, the combined aggregate shall be thoroughly dry mixed,
after which the proper amount of bituminous material shall be distributed over the
aggregate.
The whole shall be thoroughly mixed for a period calculated in accordance with
Clause 405.5(a)3(iv) but for at least 45 seconds, to produce a homogeneous
mixture in which all particles of the aggregate are coated uniformly. The total
S405.18
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

mixing time shall be agreed by the Engineer and regulated by a quitable locking
means. For a continuous mixing plant, the mixing time shall be 45 seconds as
determined above and may be regulated by fixing a minimum gauge in the mixer
unit and/or by other mixing unit adjustment.
e. Transportation and delivery of asphaltic concrete

The asphaltic concrete shall be transported from the mixing plant to the point of
use in vehicles conforming to clause 405.5b. The bituminous material shall as
soon as possible after arrival at the site, be supplied continuously to the paver and
laid without delay. The rate of delivery of material to the paver shall be so regulated
as to enable the paver to be operated wherever practicable. No loads shall be sent
out so late in the day as to prevent completion of the spreading and compaction of
the mixture during daylight hours.
f. Spreading and finishing

Upon arrival at the point of use, the asphaltic concrete shall be spread and struck
off to the grade, elevation, and cross-section shape intended, either over the entire
width or over such partial width as may be practicable or specified. Asphaltic
concrete pavers conforming to the above shall be used for this purpose unless
otherwise directed by the Engineer for levelling courses. The asphaltic concrete
shall be laid upon an approved surface, but only when weather conditions are
suitable.
The longitudinal joint in one layer shall offset that in a layer immediately below by
at least 150 mm and the joint in the top layer shall be at the centreline of the
pavement if the roadway comprises two lanes of equal width, or as directed by the
Engineer.
Hand laying of any bituminous material will be permitted only in the following
circumstances:
- For laying levelling courses of irregular shape and varying thickness in
small areas;
- In confined spaces where in the opinion of the Engineer it is impracticable
for a paver to operate;
- For footways;
- At the approaches to expansion joints at bridges.
S405.19
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

The asphaltic concrete shall be spread, raked, and luted by hand. On such areas
the asphaltic concrete shall be dumped on steel dump boards and spread and
screeded to leave the thickness or weight of material required.
g. Compaction
Immediately after the bituminous mixture has been spread and struck-off, the
surface shall be checked and any inequalities adjusted, and then compacted
thoroughly and uniformly by rolling.
The work shall be rolled when the asphaltic concrete is in a proper condition and
when the rolling does not, in the opinion of the Engineer, cause undue displacement,
cracking, or shoving.
All initial or breakdown rolling shall consist of one complete coverage of asphaltic
concrete and shall be performed with a two-axle or three-axle tandem or a
three-wheel roller. Such rollers shall conform to the provisions of Section 405.5b
(iii).
The asphaltic material shall be rolled in a longitudinal direction. Rolling shall

commence at the lower edge and shall progress toward the highest portion. Under
no circumstances shall the centre be rolled first. Rolling shall be performed with the
drive wheel of the tandem roller forward with respect to the direction of spreading
operations, unless otherwise permitted.
The initial or breakdown rolling shall be followed by additional rolling consisting of at

least three complete coverages with a pneumatic-tyred roller while the temperature
of the mixture is between 65 o C and 80 o C. The final rolling of the uppermost layer
of asphaltic concrete shall be performed with a tandem roller.
The surface of the asphaltic concrete after compaction shall be smooth and true to
the established crown and grade within the tolerances specified. Any asphaltic
concrete that becomes loose and broken, mixed with dirt, or which is defective in
any way, shall be removed immediately and replaced. Any area of 80 square
centimetre or more showing an excess or deficiency of bituminous material shall be
removed and replaced. All high spots, high joints, depressions, and honeycombs
shall be adjusted. Any ridges, indentations or other objectionable marks left in the
S405.20
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

surface of the asphaltic concrete by blading or other equipment shall be eliminated

by rolling or other means. The use of any equipment that leaves ridges,
indentations, or other objectionable marks in the asphaltic concrete shall be
discontinued and other acceptable equipment shall be furnished by the Contractor
immediately.
To prevent adhesion of the asphaltic concrete to the roller, the wheels shall be kept
properly moistened but excess water will not be permitted.
Along forms, curbs, headers and walls, and at other places not accessible to the
roller, the asphaltic concrete shall be thoroughly compacted with hot hand tampers
or with mechanical tampers giving equivalent compression. Each hand tamper shall
weigh not less than ten kilograms and shall have a tamping face area of not more
than 300 square centimetre.
h. Joints
Spreading shall be as nearly continuous as possible and the roller shall pass over
the unprotected end of the freshly laid asphaltic concrete only when authorised by
the Engineer. In all such cases, including the formation of joints as hereinafter
specified, provisions shall be made for proper bond with the new surface for the full
specified depth of the course.
All joints shall be offset at least 150mm from parallel joints in the layer beneath and
longitudinal joints in the wearing course shall correspond to an interface between
traffic lanes.
No asphaltic concrete shall be placed against previously rolled material unless

the edge, either lateral or longitudinal, is vertical or has been cut back to a vertical
face. A brush coat of the bituminous material used for contact surfaces shall be
applied just before additional asphaltic concrete is placed against the previously
rolled material.
i. Trimming edges
The edges of the pavement shall be straight and true to the required lines. Any
excess material shall be cut off square after final rolling and disposed of by the
Contractor off of Government land and to a recognised depository.
S405.21
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

j. Additional General Requirements: -

The maximum temperature of the bituminous material as delivered to the mixer shall
be that at which it has a Saybolt-Furol viscosity of 75 seconds. Bituminous material
shall not be used, while foaming nor shall it be heated above one hundred seventy
five degrees Celsius (165°C) at any time.
The Engineer will set the job-mix temperature with due consideration of the above
factors but in no case shall the specified maximum temperature be exceeded.
The heated ingredients shall be combined in such a manner as to produce an

asphaltic concrete which, when emptied from the mixer, is at a temperature between
120° and 175° C at any time. The temperature shall not be lower than is required to
obtain complete coating and uniform distribution of the aggregate particles and to
provide a mixture of satisfactory workability.
The thickness of any layer shall not exceed 70mm. after compaction unless a greater
thickness is allowed by the Engineer in writing. When the required thickness of any
one course (Levelling, Base, Binder, Wearing) exceeds 70mm. the material of that
course shall be placed in layers of equal thickness but a single layer shall not exceed
70mm.
Immediately before placing successive layers, the underlying course shall be

cleaned of loose or deleterious material by sweeping with a power sweeper
equipped with blower, supplemented with hand brooms if necessary, or as ordered
by the Engineer. A tack coat shall be applied when ordered by the Engineer at a
rate directed by Engineer but not to exceed 0.5 litre of undiluted material per square
metre.
At the onset of rain, instructions shall be given by the Contractor to suspend

mixing further supplies. Material already mixed may be laid only with the approval
of the Engineer.
k. Widening and Regulating or Levelling Existing Pavements

Where the existing carriageways are to be widened, the sides shall be trimmed as
described in the Contract or as required by the Engineer. The asphaltic courses
S405.22
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

shall be cut back to a clean vertical face which shall be completely coated with the
bituminous material as used for tack coats immediately before laying new asphaltic
material adjacent to it. The material for regulating or levelling shall be as described
in the Contract and shall be made and laid in accordance with the appropriate
Clauses of the Specification.

There are no Section 405 measurement or payment items. Asphaltic Concrete will be
paid for under the appropriate types of asphaltic concrete given in relevant Sections by
the cubic metre for the quantity actually placed, compacted and accepted by the
Engineer.
a. Thickness
i. The thickness of each asphaltic concrete layer, except the levelling course shall
not vary by more than that specified in the Section pertaining to that layer.
ii. Field densities and layer thicknesses will be determined by the Engineer using
102mm. diameter cores taken by the Contractor as directed by the Engineer.
iii. 102mm. diameter cores of the full thickness of the asphaltic concrete courses
will be taken following final compaction of the surface course. A series of cores
shall be taken by the Contractor within 15m of the beginning of the paving
project at the centre and near each edge every 100 m and alternating from
centre to side to side as directed by the Engineer and correctly labelled. Each
series shall represent not more than 2500 square metres of pavement.
iv. No additional payment will be made to the Contractor for core taking and refilling
and compacting the core holes.
v. The actual total thickness of asphaltic concrete will be determined by the
Engineer using the cores taken as described in Section 405.6(a) (ii) above.
vi. No payment will be made for the weigh house required under 405.5(a) l (xiii),
but the cost thereof shall be a subsidiary obligation under this Section.
vii. The actual total thickness arrived at as described in 405.6(v) above will be
compared with the required thickness as prescribed on the Drawings or ordered
by the Engineer. If the actual thickness is:
- Greater than the prescribed thickness - the prescribed thickness shall
be used.
- Within 90% of the prescribed thickness - the prescribed thickness shall
be used.
- Within 80% of the prescribed thickness - 80% of the prescribed
S405.23
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

thickness shall be used.

- Where courses, other than surface course, is less than 95% of the
specified layer thickness it shall be made up to the total thickness of the
combined courses, with material of the next course however, the
additional material will be paid for at the rate of the material of the
deficient course.
- If the surface course is less than 80% of the prescribed thickness it shall
be replaced with a further 25mm plus the deficient amount, at the
Contractors expense, to meet the acceptable tolerances of this Clause.
b. Density
The pavement shall be compacted such that the density shall be not less than 97%
of the maximum density obtained in a laboratory. There must be a minimum of 5
specimens with the average of the 5 equal to or greater than 97%.
The above payment schedule does not preclude a payment reduction based on
imperfect work relating to some other aspect of the specifications.
Density values regarding the above table will be based on the average value of the
tests made on the samples taken in accordance with section 405.6 (a).
c. Voids, Total Mix

The pavement mix shall be such that the voids shall be within the limits of the voids
obtained in a laboratory. There must be a minimum of 5 specimens with the
average of the 5 equal to or greater than 95%.
The above payment schedule does not preclude a payment reduction based on
imperfect work relating to some other aspect of the specifications.
Air voids values regarding the above table will be based on the average value of
the tests made on the samples taken in accordance with section 405.6 (a).
d. Payment
The unit price tendered for cubic metre of asphaltic concrete under appropriate
Sections mentioned above shall constitute full compensation for furnishing all
labour, aggregates, bituminous material and all other materials, equipment and
S405.24
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

plant and all else necessary to complete the work. The quantity of asphaltic
concrete to be paid for under the appropriate Sections 406 and 407 will be
measured as number of cubic metres complete in place as shown on the drawings
and as accepted by the Engineer.
S405.25
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

SECTION 406: BITUMINOUS SURFACE TREATMENT
CONTENTS
406.1 Description
406.2 Materials
406.3 Equipment
406.4 Execution
_____________________________________________________________________________
406.1 Description
This work shall consist of either one or two applications of bituminous material and
spreading of cover aggregate as single or multi-coat surface seals on existing
bituminous surfaces or on primed aggregate base courses to the widths and
locations shown on the Drawings or as directed by Engineer.


406.2 Materials
Aggregate shall conform to the requirements of Section 401 and have the following
gradation. They shall consist of clean, tough and durable fragments of crushed
gravel or crushed stone, free from dirt, clay, dust or other matter that might prevent
thorough coating with bituminous material.
S406.1
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

Gradation Limits for Crushed Stone to be used in Bituminous Surface

Treatments
Nom. Size of Aggregate 20mm 14mm 10mm 6.3mm

Grading Limits
BS test sieve Percentage Passing
28 100
20 85-100 100
14 0-35 85-100 100
10 0-7 0-35 85-100 100
6.3 0-7 0-35 85-100
5.0 0-10
3.35 0-35
2.36 0-2 0-2 0-2 0-10
0.6 0-2
0.075 0-1 0-1 0-1 0-1
Minimum Percentage Retained by Mass on BS Test Sieve

BS test sieve 14 10 6.3 3.35
Percentage Retained 65 65 65 65
Maximum Flakiness Index

Max. Index 25 25 25 n/a
(if ADT <250 vehicles) 35 35 35 n/a
In double bituminous surface treatments, the larger size aggregate shall be

approximately twice the size of the smaller size.
The percentage of flat or elongated stone (pieces in which the ratio of the maximum
to minimum dimensions of its circumscribing rectangular prism is greater than five)
retained on the 9.5mm sieve shall not be greater than 10% by weight of the total
sample.
S406.2
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

Additional criteria for cover aggregates are:
Loss by abrasion (AASHTO T96) 30% maximum
Loss of weight by sodium sulphate (AASHTO T 104) 12% maximum
Bitumen retained after subjection to stripping test 95% minimum

(AASHTO T182)
Soft fragments (AASHTO T 112) 5% maximum
When crushed gravel is used, the portion by weight retained 60% minimum
on a 4.75 mm sieve having at least two fractured faces
Aggregate crushing value (BS 812) 22% maximum
Liquid bitumen shall be a 400/500 pen bitumen or an alternative as approved by the

Engineer, and conforming to the requirements of Section 407.
An adhesive or anti-stripping agent shall be added to the bituminous material as

directed by the Engineer. The additive shall be a type approved by the Engineer and
the required amount shall be thoroughly mixed into the bituminous material in
accordance with the manufacturer's instructions or as directed by the Engineer.
406.3 Equipment
1. Unless otherwise instructed by the Engineer the equipment to be used shall
include spreading equipment and a pressurized bitumen distributor that can be
adjusted to accurately and uniformly spread aggregates and spray bitumen at
the required rates.
2. The bitumen distributor shall be so designed, equipped, maintained and

operated that bituminous materials within the limits of temperatures as specified
may be applied uniformly on variable widths of surface up to 4.5 metres at
readily determined and controlled rates of from 0.27 to 3 litres per square metre,
with uniform pressure and without atomisation. Allowable variation from any
specified rate shall not to exceed 0.1 litre per square metre.
3. Bitumen distributor equipment shall include the following:

a. pneumatic tyres of such width and number that the load produced on the
road surface shall not exceed 100 kgs per centimetre of tyre width.
S406.3
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

b. a fifth wheel speed tachometer registering metres per minute so located as

to be visible to the driver thus enabling him to maintain the constant speed
required for application at the specified rate.
c. pressure gauges and accurate volume measuring devices or a calibrated
tank.
d. a bitumen spray pump powered by a separate power unit or a by truck
power unit.
e. full circulation spray bars that shall be adjustable laterally and vertically.
The spray bars on the distributor shall be controlled by a bootman riding at
the rear of the distributor in such position that operation of all sprays are in
his full view.
f. a thermometer for measuring the temperature of the bitumen at all times.
The thermometer shall be placed so as not to be in contact with a heating
tube.
4. Before the commencement of spraying operations the distributor shall be

tested and calibrated as follows:
 Uniformity of Transverse Distribution; Depot Tray Test, BS1707:1989.
 Distributor Speed Control Calibration; Method A or B as defined in TRL

ORN 31.
Where the Contractor can show by quality assured records that the required
tests and calibration have been recently undertaken for the particular item(s)
of equipment and they are to the Engineers satisfaction, he may approve the
use of the equipment without further testing, at that time.
406.4 Execution
1. If the surface treatment is to be applied to a bituminous surface, the surface
shall be repaired and cleaned as needed and approved by the Engineer who
will then decide if a prime or tack spray is required. After compaction and
approval of non-bituminous base courses, and when needed on bitumen
surfaces, a prime coat conforming to Section 408 shall be applied.
2. After curing of any prime or tack coat the bitumen layer shall be sprayed by
means of a pressure distributor. The distributor shall be as described in Clause
406.3 and shall be equipped and operated so that the bitumen shall be
circulated or agitated throughout the entire heating process to secure uniform
heating of the entire contents and immediately, prior to application, shall be
S406.4
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

brought to a temperature as directed by the Engineer. The Contractor shall

provide all necessary facilities for determining the temperature of the bitumen
during heating and prior to its application.
Spray rates will vary with the size and shape of cover aggregate, climate, traffic
density, surface texture on which the spray is to be placed and the slope of
the road. Spray rates will be as instructed by the Engineer based on estimates
of the rates when cover aggregate shape and size is known and trial sections
are carried out. Further adjustments in the rate of application may be made by
the Engineer, if needed, during the course of work. Basic bitumen spray rates
and aggregate spread rates are given below for tender purposes, along with
bitumen spray temperatures. These assume that the spray material will be hot
cutback bitumen. An allowable tolerance of 0.1 litres per square metre either
way shall apply to these rates.
Single Surface Treatments

Aggregate size Bitumen spray rate Aggregate spread Rate
(nominal), mm kg/sq.m.
litres/sq.m
Cut - back Emulsion
6/10 1.10 - 1.20 1.65 - 1.80 11.00 - 12.00

10/14 1.30 - 1.50 1.95 - 2.25 17.00 - 19.00
This assumes that there is 90% residual bitumen in cut-back bitumen and that
there is 60% residual bitumen in the emulsion. Aggregates are assumed to
have a loose density of 1.35 Mg./cu.m. and if actual loose density varies from
this figure the aggregate spread rate shall be varied accordingly, e.g. actual
loose density x spread rate/1.35.
S406.5
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

Double Surface Treatments
Aggregate Size Bitumen spray rate Aggregate spread

(nominal), mm litres/sq.m Rate kg/sq.m.
Cut – back Emulsion
1st. course, 10/14 1.10 1.65 15.00 - 17.50
2nd. course, 6/10 1.00 1.50 9.50 - 11.00
1st. course, 6/10 1.00 1.50 11.00 - 12.50
2nd. course, 4/6 0.80 1.20 8.00 - 9.50
This assumes that there is 90% residual bitumen in cut-back bitumen that
there is 65% residual bitumen in the emulsion. Aggregates are assumed to
have a loose density of 1.35 Mg./cu.m. and if actual loose density varies from
this figure the aggregate spread rate shall be varied accordingly, e.g. actual
loose density x above spread rate/1.35. Bitumen density may be taken as 0.91
Mg./cu.m.
3. Spraying temperature for 400/500 pen bitumen shall be between 160 - 170
degrees centigrade when the spray truck is equipped with whirling spray jets
and between 140 - 150 degrees centigrade when the spray truck is equipped
with slot jets.. Temperatures should be kept to the lower parts of these ranges.
Temperatures shall be adjusted for different grade bitumens, where their use
is approved by the Engineer.
4. In order to prevent lapping at the end junction of two applications, the

distributor shall be shut off promptly and, if necessary to prevent dripping, a
drip pan shall be inserted under the nozzles when the application is stopped.
Before continuing application, building paper shall be spread over the treated
surface for a sufficient distance back so that the sprayers are operating at full
force when the untreated surface is reached.
When applying material adjacent to the completed surface course, paper shall
be used longitudinally if directed by the Engineer. The building paper shall
then be removed and destroyed. A narrow spout pouring pot, or hand spray
shall be used to apply the bitumen necessary to touch up all spots unavoidably
missed by the distributor.
S406.6
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

5. Immediately after the bitumen has been applied to the base course, and while
it is still warm, a single layer of filler stone shall be spread over its surface
using an approved pneumatic tyred spreader box and spreading the aggregate
in just sufficient quantity to prevent the roller wheels from sticking. As soon as
the aggregate has been spread the entire surface shall be rolled with one
complete coverage of a steel wheel roller.
The surface shall then be broomed and additional aggregate shall be added
as required and rolling shall continue with steel wheel and pneumatic rollers
until the aggregate is thoroughly embedded in the bituminous material. Care
shall be taken to ensure that the surface interstices between the aggregate
fragments are filled.
The rolling shall continue until the pavement is firmly bound together and the
surface is hard and smooth and shows no movement under the roller.
6. Upon completion of the pavement, no loose aggregate shall be allowed to

remain on the surface. The finished surface shall be uniform, free from porous
areas, ruts or irregularities in contour, and to the established crown and grade.
7. After application of the surface treatment, and provide it is dry, the finished
pavement shall be rolled until the cover aggregate is firmly embedded in the
bitumen. Pneumatic tyred rollers, with minimum wheel loading of 1 tonne and
tyre pressures of 0.55 N/sq.mm are preferred. If power-driven three wheel
rollers are used for rolling they shall not exceed 8 tonnes in weight.
When required to ensure an even distribution of aggregate, the surface shall

be broom dragged after the initial rolling, except that if the broom has any
tendency to dislodge aggregate, the Engineer may direct that light hand
brooming be substituted. The rolling shall be continued on subsequent days
when the pavement temperatures are highest, as directed by the Engineer, for
as long as is needed to ensure thorough embedment of the aggregate into the
binder. Rollers shall operate at a speed of not more than five kilometres per
hour.
S406.7
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

8. Immediately after the binder has hardened to the stage that, in the opinion of
the Engineer, no more aggregate can be pressed into it by rolling, any
remaining loose particles shall be removed from the pavement and shoulders.
9. The surface of the finished pavement shall be free from variations exceeding
5mm as measured with a three metre straightedge parallel to the centre line
of the road.
10. During the period between initial compaction and completion of the surface
treatment, the surface course shall be protected from all traffic other than that
absolutely essential to its construction.
406.5 Measurement and payment
a. Measurement
The quantity of Bituminous Surface Treatment measured for payment under this
Section will be the number of square metres complete in place and accepted
within the payment limits shown on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
When a double bituminous layer is used the two layers will be measured
separately.
b. Payment
they appear in the Bills of Quantities. The prices and payment shall constitute
full compensation for all labour, aggregate, bitumen cement and all other
materials, tools, equipment, plant and all else necessary to complete the work
described herein in strict conformance with these Specifications and as
approved by the Engineer. The prices and payments for a single or first
Bituminous Surface Treatment shall also cover the cost of applying a Bituminous
Prime Coat in accordance with Section 408 or a Bituminous Tack Coat in
accordance with Section 409.
S406.8
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___


No.
sq.m
406.1 Bituminous Surface Treatment, single or first layer.
sq.m
406.2 Bituminous Surface Treatment, second layer.
litre/sq.m
406.3 Extra over rates for items 406.1 and 406.2 for decreasing
or increasing bitumen spray rates by 0.1 litres/sq.m. To be
added if the rate is increased or subtracted if the rate is
decreased. (Provisional Sum)
S406.9
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

SECTION 407: BITUMINOUS MATERIALS
CONTENTS
407.1 Description
407.2 Materials
407.3 Execution
_____________________________________________________________________________
407.1 Description
The work to be performed under this Section consists of furnishing bituminous cement.
Throughout these Specifications the terms bitumen and asphalt are interchangeable.
407.2 Materials
a. This Specification covers quality and characteristics the following bituminous
materials:
i. Penetration Grade Bitumen Cement
ii. Rapid Curing Liquid Bitumen
iii. Medium Curing Liquid Bitumen
iv. Slow Curing Liquid Bitumen
v. Emulsified Bitumens
vi. Waterproofing Materials
vii. Bitumen/Lake Asphalt Blends
b. Descriptions and Requirements

i. Penetration Grade Bituminous Cement
Bituminous cement shall be of the Penetration Grade 60-70 (pen) bitumen
and shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 20.
ii. Rapid Curing Liquid Bitumen
Rapid curing liquid bitumen shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO
M81
iii. Medium Curing Liquid Bitumen
Medium curing liquid bitumen shall conform to the requirements of
AASHTO M82
iv. Slow Curing Liquid Bitumen
Slow curing liquid bitumen shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO
M141
S407.1
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

SECTION 407: BITUMINOUS MATERIALS
v. Emulsified Bitumens
Emulsified bitumens shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M140
Cationic emulsified bitumens shall conform to the requirements of
AASHTO M208
vi. Bitumen/Lake Asphalt Blend
Bitumen Lake Asphalt Blend shall contain at least 25% Lake Asphalt and
shall conform to ASTM D 5710 and the following requirements: -
Requirements Min. Max
Penetration at 77 OF (25 OC) 100 g. 5s, mm 60 75
Viscosity at 275 OF (135OC) cst. 275 -
Flashpoint of (Cleveland open cup),OF 450 -
Ductility at 77 OF (25 OC) 5 cm/min, cm 100 -
Solubility in trichloroethylene, % 77 90
Retained penetration after thin-film oven test, % 52 -
*Ductility at 77 OF (25OC) 5 cm/min, cm after thin film 50 -

oven test
Inorganic matter (ash) % 7.5 19.0
* If ductility is less than 100 cm, the test shall be repeated on the extracted bitumen containing not
more than 5 % inorganic matter ash. If ductility at 77 OF. (25C) is still less than 100 cm, material will be
accepted if ductility at 60 OF (15.5 OC) is 100 cm minimum at the pull rate of 5 cm/min.
407.3 Execution
Execution shall proceed in conformance with the general requirements of Sections
401 and Specifications for the appropriate layers.

No separate measurement or payment will be made for Bituminous Materials under
this section. All costs thereof shall be included in the unit rate for the items under the
appropriate Sections to which the Bituminous Cement pertains.
S407.2
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

SECTION 408: BITUMINOUS PRIME COAT
CONTENTS
408.1 Description
408.2 Materials
408.3 Execution
_____________________________________________________________________________
408.1 Description
The work to be performed under this Section consists of applying bituminous prime
coat material to a previously prepared aggregate road bed.
408.2 Materials
Bituminous material to be used shall be medium curing liquid bitumen MC-30 and shall
conform to the requirements of Section 407.
Sand shall be clean coarse sand with the following grading:-
Sieve Size Percent Passing Sieve
6mm 100
0.3mm <15
0.15mm <2
408.3 Execution
1. Immediately before applying the bituminous prime coat material, all loose dirt and
other objectionable material shall be removed from the surface with a power
broom and/or blower as required. If the Engineer so orders, the surface shall be
lightly bladed and rolled immediately prior to the application of bituminous
material, in which case brooming or blowing may not be required. When so
ordered by the Engineer, a light application of water shall be made just before the
application of bituminous material.
2. The bituminous material shall be applied by means of a distributor at the
temperature and at the rate of up to 1.5 litres per square metre such that the
bitumen penetrates into the base approximately 5mm, or such rate otherwise
specified or ordered by the Engineer.
S408.1
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

The application shall be divided into two applications when necessary to prevent
flowing off the surface, and additional bituminous material shall be applied where
surface conditions indicate it to be necessary. When applied in two or more lanes,
there shall be a slight overlap of bituminous material along adjoining edges of
lanes.
3. The surface of structures and trees adjacent to the areas being treated shall be
protected in such manner as to prevent their being spattered or marred. No
bituminous material shall be discharged into a borrow pit or gutter.
4. The distributor shall have pneumatic tyres of such width and number that the load
produced on the road surface shall not exceed 100 kgs. per centimetre of tyre
width, and shall be so designed, equipped, maintained and operated that
bituminous material at even heat may be applied uniformly on variable widths of
surface up to 4.5 metres at readily determined and controlled rates of from 0.27
to 3 litre per square metre, with uniform pressure and with an allowable variation
from any specified rate not to exceed 0.1 litre per square metre. Distributor
equipment shall include a tachometer, pressure gauges, accurate volume
measuring devices or calibrated tank, and a thermometer for measuring
temperatures of tank contents.
Distributors shall be equipped with a separate power unit for the pump and full
circulation spray bars, which shall be adjustable laterally and vertically. The spray
bars on the distributor shall be controlled by a bootman riding at the rear of the
distributor in such position that operation of all sprays are in his full view.
5. Traffic other than that engaged in the pavement construction will not be permitted
on the primed surface until it has cured.
6. The Contractor shall maintain the primed surface for a minimum of two days
before covering it with the surfacing or next course. Any areas containing an
excess or deficiency of priming material shall be corrected by the addition of
blotter material or bitumen as directed by the Engineer. Prior to the application
of the surfacing or next course, any surface breaks shall be patched and all
excessive blotter material, dirt and other objectionable materials shall be removed
by sweeping.
7. To accommodate the Contractors programme he may propose by way of trials
alternative bitumen materials and methodologies to enable the surface to be
satisfactorily primed and either opened to traffic or overlain within a shorter period
S408.2
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

than the requirements of the foregoing paragraph. Sand for protection of the layer
shall comply with the requirements of paragraph 2 above.

No separate measurement or payment will be made for Bituminous Prime Coat under
this Section. All costs thereof shall be included in the unit rate for the item under the
appropriate Section 402, Bituminous Base Course, Section 403, Bituminous Binder
Course, Section 406, Bituminous Surface Treatments, etc.
S408.3
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

SECTION 409: BITUMINOUS TACK COAT AND JOINT SEALER
CONTENTS
409.1 Description
409.2 Materials
409.3 Execution
_____________________________________________________________________________
409.1 Description
The work to be performed under this Section consists of applying a tack coat and a
joint sealer if required, to paved surfaces prior to overlaying with bituminous concrete
pavement material.
409.2 Materials
1. Bituminous material to be used shall be rapid curing liquid bitumen RC-70 or
cationic emulsified bitumen CSS-1h and shall conform to the requirements of
Section 407.b.
2. Sand shall be clean coarse sand with either of the following gradings:-
Sieve Size Percent Passing Sieve (by weight)
9.5mm 100 -
4.75mm 98-100 100
2.36mm 75-95 90-100
1.18mm 50-75 55-85
0.6mm 20-53 20-55
0.3mm 6-25 55-35
0.15mm 1-17 21-15
0.075mm 0-3 0-5
409.3 Execution
1. When directed by the Engineer, immediately before placing the bituminous
concrete pavement courses, the existing underlying course shall be cleaned of
loose or deleterious materials by sweeping with a power sweeper equipped with
a blower, supplemented by hand brooms, if necessary in the opinion of the
Engineer.
S409.1
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

SECTION 409: BITUMINOUS TACK COAT AND JOINT SEALER
2. When in the opinion of the Engineer the underlying layer requires treatment, all
joints and cracks shall be sealed with bituminous material and a sand covering.
The bituminous material shall be allowed to penetrate the cracks and joints in any
old existing surface and any surplus shall be squeezed back and forth over the
area to fill cracks, etc., fully, the sealed surface shall be covered with
approximately 2.7 kg. of sand per square metre.
3. The distributor shall be so designed that bituminous material may be sprayed at

readily determined and controlled rates, at even temperatures and uniformly on
variable widths of surface up to 4 metres. The application rate shall be 0.45 to
0.70 litres per square metre unless otherwise ordered by the Engineer.
4. The surface shall be allowed to dry until it is in a proper condition of tackiness to

receive the binder or wearing course. Tack coat shall be applied only so far in
advance of binder or wearing course placement as is necessary to obtain this
proper condition of tackiness. Until the next course is placed, the Contractor shall
protect the tack coat from damage. The tack coat shall only be applied when the
surface is dry.

No separate measurement or payment will be made for Bituminous Tack Coat and
Joint Sealer under this Section. All costs thereof shall be included in the unit rate for
the items under the appropriate Sections.
S409.2
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

SECTION 410: BITUMINOUS PENETRATION SEAL
CONTENTS
410.1 Description
410.2 Materials
410.3 Execution
_____________________________________________________________________________
410.1 Description
The work to be performed under this Section consists of applying low viscosity
bituminous material as penetration seal coat to a previously prepared aggregate
road-bed.
410.2 Materials
Bituminous material to be used shall be MC-30 or other low viscosity bituminous
material and shall conform to the requirements.
410.3 Execution
Immediately before applying the bituminous penetration seal material, all loose dirt
and other objectionable material shall be removed from the surface with a power
broom and/or blower as required. If the Engineer so orders, the surface shall be
lightly bladed and rolled immediately prior to the application of bituminous material,
in which case brooming or blowing may not be required. When so ordered by the
Engineer, a light application of water shall be made just before the application of
bituminous material.
The bituminous material shall be applied by means of a distributor at the

temperature and at the rate of 1.2 litres per square metre unless otherwise
specified or ordered by the Engineer. The application shall be divided into two
applications when necessary to prevent flowing off the surface, and additional
bituminous material shall be applied where surface conditions indicate it to be
necessary. When applied in two or more lanes, there shall be a slight overlap of
bituminous material along adjoining edges of lanes. The surfaces of structures and
trees adjacent to the areas being treated shall be protected in such manner as to
prevent their being spattered or marred. No bituminous material shall be
discharged into a borrow pit, gutter or other watercourse.
S410.1
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

The distributor shall have pneumatic tyres of such width and number that the load
produced on the road surface shall not exceed 100 kg. per centimetre of tyre width,
and shall be so designed, equipped, maintained and operated that bituminous
material at even heat may be applied uniformly on variable widths of surface up to
4.5 metres at readily determined and controlled rates from 0.27 to 10 litres per
square metre, with uniform pressure and with an allowable variation from any
specified rate not to exceed 0.1 litre per square metre. Distributor equipment shall
include a tachometer, pressure gauges, accurate volume measuring devices or
calibrated tank, and a thermometer for measuring temperatures of tank contents.
Distributors shall be equipped with a separate power unit for the pump and full
circulation spray bars, which shall be adjustable laterally and vertically. The spray
bars on the distributor shall be controlled by a bootman riding at the rear of the
distributor in such position that operation of all sprays are in his full view.
Traffic will not be permitted on the primed surface until the bituminous material has
cured to the satisfaction of the Engineer. The seal shall be dressed with a layer
fine material prior to trafficking.
Any areas containing an excess or deficiency of seal material shall be corrected by

the addition of blotter material or bitumen as directed by the Engineer. Surface
breaks shall be patched and all excessive blotter material, dirt and other
objectionable materials shall be removed by sweeping.

a. Measurement
The quantity of bituminous penetration seal coat to be measured under this
Section will be the number of square metres of surface area completed in place
and accepted as prescribed in Section 401.6, sub-clauses b to h.
b. Payment
Payment will be made at the price tendered for the item under this Section as
it appears in the Bill of Quantities. The price and payment shall constitute full
compensation for furnishing bituminous material and fine aggregate including
transportation, spraying and spreading, including labour, tools, equipment,
materials and all else necessary to complete the work described herein in strict
S410.2
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

conformance with the Specifications and Conditions of Contract and as

Section 410 items that may appear in the Bill of Quantities is:

410 Penetration seal sq. m
S410.3
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

SECTION 411: BITUMINOUS SLURRY SEALS AND CRACK FILLING
CONTENTS
411.1 Description
411.2 Materials
411.3 Execution
_____________________________________________________________________________
411.1 Description
The work to be performed under this Section consists of filling cracks in the existing
pavement that are equal to or greater than 3mm wide by applying a bituminous
emulsion slurry. The mixture will consist of fine aggregate, mineral filter and emulsified
bitumen with water added to produce a slurry consistency. The liquid slurry is to be
poured directly into the crack or applied over the affected surface area by the use of a
squeegee or stiff bristle broom.
411.2 Materials
Bituminous material to be used shall be cationic emulsified bitumen CSS-1or CSS-1h
and shall conform to the requirements of Section 407.b.
Fine aggregate shall consist of clean crushed aggregate or coarse sand or a

combination of both such that it shall conform to the following grading requirements:
Sieve Size Percent Passing Sieve (by weight)
9.5mm 100 -
4.75mm 98-100 100
2.36mm 75-95 90-100
1.18mm 50-75 55-85
0.6mm 20-53 20-55
0.3mm 6-25 55-35
0.15mm 1-17 21-15
0.075mm 0-3 0-5
Mineral filler shall conform to the requirements of Section 401.
S411.1
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

411.3 Execution
When directed by the Engineer existing pavement cracks shall be filled with an in-situ
mixture of slow setting asphalt emulsion, fine aggregate, mineral filler and water. They
may be mixed in a conventional plaster mixer or in small quantities in a wheelbarrow.
The mixture should be prepared in the form of a slurry and applied directly in individual
cracks or spread over the surface of the affected area in an average thickness of 1.5
to 3.0mm.
The mixture should form a creamy-textured slurry, which will easily flow in a wave
ahead of the strike-off squeegee. This will allow the slurry to flow down into pits and
cracks and fill them before being struck-off with a squeegee.
The following proportions will serve as a guide in making a trial batch of slurry seal:
- Aggregate, including mineral filler 50kg
- Asphalt emulsion 7.5 – 15 kg
- Water 5 – 7.5 kg or as required.
As soon as the emulsion breaks the material must be covered with fine sand or rock
dust to prevent possible tracking of the asphalt onto adjacent surfaces. A neat
inconspicuous appearance of filled the cracks is required to meet the Engineer’s
approval.
Preparation of Cracks:
The surface of each crack should be scrubbed vigorously with a stiff bristle broom.
Special tools may be needed to remove dirt and other loose matter from wider cracks.
Small cracks should be cleaned thoroughly by compressed air to remove all loose
particles prior to filling with bituminous slurry.

a. Measurement
The quantity of crack filling by slurry seal to be paid for under this Section will
be measured as the number of linear metres along isolated single cracks or in
the case of a network of cracks, the number of square metres of carriageway
surface treated as prescribed in this Specification.
S411.2
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

b. Payment
they appear in the Bill of Quantities. The prices and payment shall constitute full
compensation for the preparation of cracks, furnishing aggregates, bitumen
cement, fine aggregate, filler and all other materials including mixing, handling,
placing, blinding off with fine sand or rock dust. These rates shall include all
labour, tools, equipment and overheads and all else necessary to complete the
work described herein all in strict conformance with these Specifications and as
Payment for crack filling by slurry seal shall be made at the bid price per linear
metres along isolated single cracks or the number of square metres of
carriageway surface, where a network of close cracks occurs, as specified in
the “Bills of Quantities”. These payments shall be full compensation for cleaning
and then filling cracks in the existing asphalt pavement.

411.1 Crack seal – Single cracks lin.m.
411.2 Slurry seal – Multiple cracks sq.m.
S411.3
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

SECTION 413: PAVEMENT PATCHING
CONTENTS
413.1 Scope
413.2 Materials
413.3 Execution
_____________________________________________________________________________
413.1 Scope
This work shall consist of excavation in existing pavements and the supplying and
placing of granular and/or bituminous pavement layers as patches to existing
roadways


413.2 Materials
The following materials will be supplied and used by the Contractor. These and other
materials will be in accordance with these standard specifications.
 Section 404 Bituminous Surface Course.
 Sections 408 and 409, Bituminous Prime Coat and Bituminous Tack Coat and
Joint Sealer.
 Sections 301 and 304 Gravel Sub-base and Granular Base Course materials.
413.3 Execution
Two repair methods may be specified to correct the pavement deficiencies as
indicated in the contract. The method of execution of each is described below.
All supply, placing, spreading and compacting of gravel sub base, granular base
course and bituminous courses concrete shall be carried out in accordance with the
S413.1
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

relevant Sections 301, 304 and 404, unless designated by the Engineer to be a small
area in which case the Contractor shall obtain the Engineer’s approval to his work
method with the prior to commencement of the Work.
a. Replacement Patch
Replacement patching shall be used to correct bituminous pavement layer
deficiencies such as potholes, shoving, etc. The construction method shall be as
follows:
 Define the perimeter of the pavement deficiency and make a vertical cut
through the existing pavement 300mm beyond the perimeter. Remove all
failed bituminous pavement material down to the top of an underlying
undamaged structural layer and arrange for its inspection by the Engineer.
If the underlying layer is a granular base, remove any contaminated and
foreign material and recompact any loose material. Vertical cuts through
multiple lifts of pavement shall be staggered horizontally by a minimum of
150 mm.
 Where in the opinion of the Engineer the granular base should be replaced,
he will instruct its replacement with granular base to the specifications and
the cost of the same will be additional to the cost of the patch.
 Prepare the area by applying a tack coat to all asphaltic concrete pavement
surfaces and a prime coat to all granular base surfaces.
 Place bituminous mix material in the prepared area and layout with a shovel,
or other mechanical means.
 Compact in layers not to exceed the compacted thickness specified for the
mixture to the densities specified for that mixture. The compaction of small
areas shall continue until all particles are well keyed into place using industry
standard asphalt mix vibratory compacting equipment.
 The finished patch shall be consistent with the line, grade, and crossfall of
the adjacent pavement and ready to receive an overlay of bituminous surface
course.
b. Full Depth Patch

Full depth patching shall be used to correct base or total bearing capacity failure
pavement deficiencies. The depth of excavation and pavement layer construction
S413.2
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

for patches if required, shall be defined in Appendix 108 (contained in Volume III
of the Contract). Where no depth is defined the excavation and construction shall
be as follows:
SUBGRADE
PAVEMENT LAYER
Cohesive Clay Non-Cohesive
Bituminous Surface
50mm 50mm
Course
Granular Base Course 250mm 150mm
Granular Subbase 300mm 200mm
Total Excavation Depth 600mm 400mm
The construction method shall be as follows:
 Define the perimeter of the pavement deficiency and make an initial vertical
cut through the existing pavement 300 mm beyond the perimeter. Remove
all pavements, base and any contaminated and unsuitable material to the
depth and/or pavement layer defined in the Contract or such lesser depth as
instructed by the Engineer upon inspection.. Shape and compact the base of
the excavation to 95% maximum dry density or to the method approved by
the Engineer. Where the base of the excavation is an expansive clay material
ensure that it is protected and capping material placed over it in accordance
with the requirements of Section 204. Place and compact capping and
granular sub base in accordance with the relevant sections of the
specification to the compacted thickness as stated. Offset excavation vertical
cuts through multiple lifts of pavement by staggering horizontally by a
minimum of 150mm.
 Place and compact Granular Base Course material to a compacted thickness

as stated in lifts not to exceed 150mm in thickness compacted in accordance
with the specification. Finish top surface to allow for surface course.
 Prepare the area by applying a tack coat to all asphaltic concrete pavement
surfaces and a prime coat to Granular Base Course surfaces in accordance
with Section 408 Bituminous Prime Coat and Section 409 Bituminous Tack
Coat and Joint Sealer.
 Place and compact Bituminous Surface Course in the prepared area in

accordance with Section 404, unless it is a designated small area where
S413.3
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

spreading shall be by other means agreed with the Engineer and compaction
of the layer shall continue until all particles are well keyed into place using
industry standard asphalt mix vibrator compacting equipment.
 The finished patch shall be consistent with the line, grade, and cross fall of
the adjacent pavement and ready to receive an overlay of Bituminous
Surface Course in accordance with Section 404.

a. Measurement
Measurement for Roadway Pavement Patching will be the square metres of
roadway patching, measured at the existing road surface to include the 300mm
offset from the damaged area but excluding additional offsetting of excavation
edges to tie in successive pavement layers, actually placed and accepted by the
Engineer.
Additional excavation and granular base course material instructed by the

Engineer to Replacement Patches shall cubic metres measured over the volume
of base course material placed and accepted into the base of the patch.
b. Payment
The unit bid price per square metre for roadway patching shall constitute full
compensation for furnishing of all labour equipment and plant, bituminous
mixtures, granular sub base and base course, excavation, subgrade, disposal of
all materials to licensed landfills and all else necessary to complete the work
including prime and tack coats.
The unit bid price per cubic metre for granular base course to replacement
patching shall constitute full compensation for furnishing of all labour equipment
and plant, bituminous mixtures, granular base course, excavation and additional
excavation, subgrade, disposal of all materials to licensed landfills, double
handling and waiting time, and all else necessary to complete the work including
prime coats.
S413.4
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

Payment Items under this Specification, which may appear in the Bills of
Quantities, are as follows:

No
413.1 Replacement Patch max. depth (specified as Sq. m

follows)
50mm or less
75mm or less
100mm or less
413.2 Granular Base Course to Replacement Patch Cu.m
413.3 Full Depth Patch (type or depth specified) Sq.m
S413.5
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

SECTION 414: COLD MILLING OF ASPHALT PAVEMENT
CONTENTS
414.1 Scope
414.2 Execution
_____________________________________________________________________________
414.1 Scope
This section refers to those portions of the Work that are unique to the milling and
patching for overlay of existing asphalt pavement. This section must be referenced to
and interpreted simultaneously with all other sections pertinent to the Works described
herein. The work is essentially to assist with the restoration of the carriageway cross-
section.

414.2 Execution
a. Equipment
The milling machine must be track mounted with a minimum cutting width of 1.37
metres and be capable of milling 100mm in one pass with automatic longitudinal
and crossfall control. No substitute equipment will be permitted.
b. Milling
The existing pavement shall be milled to a minimum depth of 50mm or as directed
by the Engineer. Tapers from existing pavement grade to full depth milling shall
not exceed 25mm vertically per metre. The widths to be milled will be determined
in the field by the Engineer.
Cold milling asphalt shall be performed in a manner, which prevents the tearing
and breaking of underlying and adjacent pavement and the contamination of the
milled bituminous material with granular, subgrade or deleterious materials. All
milled bituminous material shall be loaded directly to trucks from the milling
machine and hauled to stockpile or disposed of at licensed landfill sites or in an
approved manner.
S414.1
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

The travelled roadway shall be kept clean of all loose material during the milling
operation, and the newly milled surface shall be swept clean of all loose material
prior to reopening for traffic use. The manner of sweeping shall minimise the
production of dust.
Milling work shall be restricted to one travelled lane to accommodate traffic. At

the end of a milling shift or at the end of each full lane section to be milled the
pavement shall be tapered up at a rate of 15:1 longitudinally.
The milled surface shall have a uniform textured appearance, free from
longitudinal and transverse irregularities and capable of allowing smooth passage
of traffic. The Contractor shall provide and maintain approved signing warning
traffic using the milled surface of the degraded surface condition until the milled
surface has been surfaced.
c. Preparation for Patching

Following the completion of the milling process the surface shall be inspected and
any indications of weakness in the underlying layers shall be patched in
accordance with Section 413 and payment made under that section.
Should the milled surface becomes pot holed as a result of unnecessary delays
between the milling operations and subsequent paving, repairs shall be carried
out at once under the direction of the Engineer in accordance with Section 413.
No additional payment will be made under Section 413.
d. Drainage
The Contractor shall make provisions, subject to the approval of the Engineer, to
ensure that milled or partially milled sections will adequately drain water runoff in
a manner ensuring safety to the travelling public and the roadway. This may
require some alternating of the side of the roadway being milled to accommodate
unhindered drainage.
414.3 Measurement for Payment

a. Measurement
Cold milling of existing asphalt pavement will be measured in square metres, per
depth of cut in increments of 50mm.
S414.2
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

b. Payment
The unit price per square metre of cold milling shall include the cost of furnishing
all labour, material and equipment necessary to complete the work, including
achieving the required smoothness, grade and crossfalls. The cost of preparation
for milling that may be required shall be included in the unit bid price.
No additional payment will be made for work involved in or delays resulting from
inadequate drainage.
Where a second or additional milling is instructed by the Engineer to remove

further pavement material, payment will be at the unit price bid per square metre.
No payment will be made where the additional pass is necessary to remedy non-
compliance with the specification.
Payment item may appear in the Bills of Quantities is as follows:
Pay Item No Description Unit

414.1 Cold Milling (0-50mm, 50-100mm, etc) Sq.m
S414.3
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

STRUCTURAL WORKS
S500.0
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___
SERIES 500: STRUCTURAL WORKS

SECTION 500: PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE
CONTENTS
500.1 Description
500.2 Classes of Concrete
500.3 Constituent Materials for Concrete and Mortars
500.4 Ancillary Materials for Concrete
500.5 Concrete Mix Design
500.6 Quality Control
500.7 Mixing Equipment
500.8 Mixing and Delivery
_____________________________________________________________________________
500.1 Description
This Section specifies the general requirements for Portland cement concrete,
including the selection, sampling and testing of materials to be used, the composition
of concrete and the mixing, transporting and testing of concrete.
Portland cement concrete shall be understood to mean an intimate mixture of Portland

cement, fine aggregate, coarse aggregate and water, with admixtures as allowed or
required, of the qualities herein specified. It shall be proportioned, mixed and
transported as herein specified.
Also specified are requirements for the selection, testing, and use of ancillary materials
such as curing materials, concrete grouts, epoxy compounds, joint fillers and sealants,
water stops and the like.
500.2 Classes of Concrete:

Classes of concrete shall be designated by a numeral indicating the minimum 28-day
compressive strength in megapascal as determined by ASTM C39. The classes of
concrete included in this section are:
Class 9, Class 12, Class 20, Class 25, Class 30 and Class 35.
S500.1
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

Each class of concrete may consist of one or more mixes determined by the maximum
size and type of aggregate, intended location and use, cement admixtures or special
aggregates used. Types shall not be varied within a given structural element.
Each mix within a class will require approval of the design mix prior to use.
500.3 Constituent Materials for Concrete and Mortars

The materials and ancillary requirements to be used for Portland cement concrete and
mortar manufacture are given in the following sub-clauses. General provisions for the
selection, sampling and testing, handling and use of these materials are also given.
a. Portland cement.
General
Only one brand or type of cement shall be used in any part of a structure. Cements
of the same type but from different mills shall not be mixed in any part of a structure
except with the written permission of the Engineer. The use or presence of calcium
chloride is prohibited.
Specifications
Cement may be Portland cement to ASTM C. 150; air-entraining Portland cement
to ASTM C. 175; Portland-Pozzolin cement to ASTM C. 340 or C 91 and shall be
as specified on the drawings or by the Engineer.
Types Permitted
1. Type I Portland cement may be used in general concrete construction where
low heat of hydration is not required and where no sulphate action is
anticipated.
Type II Portland cement may be used for general concrete construction. Either
Type I or II may be used in the contract unless stated differently on the
Drawings or elsewhere in the specifications.
Type III cement may be used in all concrete provided that a retardant
admixture is used in concrete for bridge decks and for cement concrete
pavement or approach slabs.
S500.2
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

2. Type I-P cement will be allowed as an alternate to Type I in all classes of

concrete subject to the following conditions:
Type I-P Portland Pozzolin Cement shall meet the requirements of ASTM C-
595 except that the Pozzolin (fly ash) constituent shall not exceed 20% by
weight.
The Pozzolin shall conform to ASTM C 618 Type F, except that the loss on
ignition shall not exceed 6%.
Type I-P cement will not be permitted in prestressed concrete members.
The minimum time for removal of forms shall be extended by two days over
that required with use of Type 1 and Type II cement.
3. Only Portland cements containing less than 0.6% alkali, calculated as Na 2 0

(% Na 2 0 plus 0.658 K 2 0), shall be used with any alkali reactive aggregate.
Storage
Cement may be delivered in bags or in bulk. All cement shall be stored in suitable
weatherproof buildings that will protect the cement from dampness. These buildings
shall be placed in locations approved by the Engineer. Provisions for storage shall be
ample and the shipments of cement as received shall be separately stored in such a
manner as to provide easy access for the identification and inspection of each
shipment. Storage buildings shall have a capacity for the storage of a sufficient
quantity of cement to allow sampling at least 12 days before the cement is to be used.
Stored cement shall meet the test requirements at any time after storage when a retest
is ordered by the Engineer.
On small jobs storage in the open may be permitted by written authorization from the
Engineer, in which case a raise platform and ample waterproof covering shall be
provided. The Contractor shall keep accurate records of the deliveries of cement and
of its use in the work. Copies of these records shall be supplied to the Engineer in
such form as may be required.
S500.3
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

Transportation of Loose Cement

When under the provisions of these Specifications, it becomes necessary to transport
loose cement, it shall be kept in a weatherproof compartment, separate from other
aggregates, otherwise the cement shall be deposited directly from the container, as
shipped, into the mixer skip, or dumped directly on the batch of aggregates just
previous to the batch being deposited into the mixer skip.
Sampling and Testing

Tests for chemical and physical properties shall be in accordance with test method
stipulated by ASTM C 150.
1. Cement may be sampled either at the mill or at the site of the batch plant.
The contractor shall notify the Engineer of dates of delivery so that there will
be sufficient time for sampling the cement, either at the mill or upon delivery.
If this is not done, or if additional tests are necessary, the contractor may be
required to rehandle the cement in the storehouse for the purpose of obtaining
the required samples.
2. Samples removed for testing shall conform to the requirements for cement
above. Cement that does not meet the test requirements, has been
damaged, is partially, set or which is lumpy or caked, shall not be used, and
the entire contents of the sack of cement or the container of bulk cement, that
contains failed, damaged, partially set or lumps of cement, will be rejected for
use.
b. Aggregate for Concrete

General
1. The contractor shall furnish aggregates for use in Portland cement concrete
in conformance to the requirements specified herein.
2. Aggregate for use in concrete that will be subject to wetting, extended
exposure to humid atmosphere or contact with moist ground, shall not
contain any materials that are deleteriously reactive with the alkalis in the
cement in an amount sufficient to cause excessive expansion of mortar or
concrete, except that if such materials are present in injurious amounts, the
fine aggregate may be used with a cement containing less than 0.6% alkali
as measured by percentage of sodium oxide plus 0.658 times percentage of
S500.4
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

potassium oxide, or with the addition of a material that has been shown to
prevent harmful expansion due to the alkali-aggregate reaction.
3. The nominal size of aggregate used in each mix shall be appropriate for the
purpose of the mix and correct placement and compaction. The particular
use of concrete mixes having a particular nominal size of aggregate in each
element of the works shall be subject to the Engineer’s prior approval.
Sampling and Testing

1. Representative samples of aggregates proposed for use in Portland cement
concrete shall be selected for laboratory testing as directed by the Engineer.
Aggregates may not be used until the samples are approved as a result of the
testing, and their use authorized by the Engineer.
2. Sampling and testing shall be in accordance with the following standard
methods of the American Society for Testing and Materials. Tests to be
performed on a particular sample shall be determined by the Engineer.
Designation ASTM
a. Unit Weight of Aggregate C 29
b. Concrete Aggregates C 33
c. Organic impurities in Sands for Concrete C 40
d. Surface Moisture in Fine Aggregate C 70
e. Measuring Mortar-Making Properties of Fine Aggregate C 87
f. Soundness of Aggregates C 88
g. Material Finer than No. 200 Sieve in Aggregate C 117
h. Lightweight Pieces in Aggregate C 123
i. Definitions (Fineness Modulus) C 125
j. Specific Gravity and Absorption of Coarse Aggregate C 127
k. Specific Gravity and Absorption of Fine Aggregate C 128
l. Abrasion of Course, Aggregate (Los Angeles) C l3l
m. Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates C 136
n. Clay Lumps in Natural Aggregates C 142
o. Tensile Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars C l90
p. Scratch Hardness of Coarse Aggregate (Soft Particles) C 235
q. Sampling D 75
r. Potential Alkali Reactivity (Mortar Bar Method) C 227
s. Potential Reactivity (Chemical Method) C 289
t. Potential Volume Change (Linear Expansion) C 342
3. The required tests shall be made on test samples that comply with
requirements of the designated test methods and are representative of the
grading that will be used in the concrete. The same test sample may be used
for sieve analysis and for determination of material finer than the No. 200
sieve. Separated sizes from the sieve analysis may be used in preparation of
S500.5
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

samples for soundness or abrasion tests. For determination of all other tests
and for evaluation of potential alkali reactivity where required, independent test
samples shall be used.
4. The fineness modulus of an aggregate is the sum of the percentages of a
sample retained on each of a specified series of sieves divided by 100, using
the following standard sieve sizes (or an acceptable equivalent):
No.100, No. 90, No. 30, No. 16, No. 8, No. 4, 3/8", 3/4", 1½" and larger,
increasing in the ratio of 2 to 1. Sieving shall be done in accordance with
ASTM Method C 136.
5. Soundness
Except as provided in paragraphs 2 and 3, aggregates subjected to five cycles
of the soundness test shall show a loss, weighted in accordance with the
grading of a sample complying with the limitations set forth herein, not greater
than the following percentages:
Aggregate Sodium Sulphate Magnesium Sulphate
Fine 10% 15%

Coarse 12% 18%
Aggregate failing to meet the requirements of paragraph 1 may be accepted,

provided that concrete of comparable properties, made from similar aggregate
from the same source has given satisfactory service when exposed to
weathering similar to that to be encountered.
Care and Storage of Concrete Aggregate

1. Aggregates shall be handled in a manner to prevent segregation or lack of
uniformity of grading or the intrusion of foreign materials. Coning of stockpiles
will not be permitted.
2. Fine and coarse aggregates shall be stored separately so as to prevent the
two materials from becoming intermixed. Fine or coarse aggregates of
different gradings shall, similarly, be stored separately from one another. A
minimum of 50 cubic metres of fine and coarse aggregates, in excess of the
requirements of the daily concrete operations, shall be maintained in
stockpiles at the batching plants to allow continuity of the works with tested
and approved aggregates. Aggregates shall be stored in an approved manner
S500.6
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

at the allocated area. As aggregates are removed from stockpiles for batching,
a blanket of at least 1 metre of each material shall be left on the ground unless
the material is stored on a proper platform.
3. Coarse aggregate stockpiles shall be maintained in a continuously wet
condition during batching operations, such as to assure uniformity of concrete
consistency.
Coarse Aggregates
1. Coarse aggregate shall consist of crushed stone, gravel, or a combination
thereof, or subject to the approval of the Engineer, other inert materials with
similar characteristics, having hard, strong, durable pieces, free from adherent
coating and shall conform to the requirements of this Specification.
Gravel shall be composed of tough, clean, durable quartz. The loss when the
material is subjected to the Los Angeles Abrasion Test (ASTM C 131) shall be
no more than 50%. The dry-rodded weight per cubic metre of gravel, tested
according to ASTM C-29, shall be not less than 1,440 kg.
Stone shall be composed of clean durable rock. The loss when the stone is
subjected to the Los Angeles Abrasion Test ASTM C 131) shall not exceed
45%.
2. Gradation
The permissible gradation of coarse aggregates shall comply with the
standard sizes of processed aggregate defined in Table 1 of AASHTO M43 for
the relevant size number proposed for the specific mix.
The above gradations represent the extreme limits for the various sizes
indicated that will be used in determining the suitability for use of coarse
aggregate from all sources of supply. For any grade from any one source, the
gradation shall be held reasonably uniform and not subject to the extreme
percentages of gradation specified above.
3. Deleterious Substances
All coarse aggregate shall be washed and shall be free from disintegrated
pieces, salt, alkali, vegetable matter and adherent coatings.
S500.7
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

Deleterious substances in the coarse aggregate shall not exceed the following:
Substances Percent by Weight

Clay lumps and friable particles 0.25
Soft Particles 5.0
Chert that will break down in 5 cycles of the soundness test 1.0
Material finer than No. 200 sieve 1.0
Coal and Lignite when surface appearance is of importance 0.5
Coal and Lignite, all other concrete 1.0
Fine Aggregates
1. Fine aggregate shall consist of sand composed of hard, strong, durable quartz,
or subject to the approval of the Engineer, other inert materials with similar
characteristics. Lightweight aggregate shall not be used.
2. The permissible gradation of fine aggregates is as follows:

Sieve Size Percent by Weight
Passing
9.5mm (3/8") 100
4.75mm (No. 4) 95 to 100
2.36mm (No. 8) 80 to 100
1.18mm (No. 16) 50 to 85
0.60mm (No. 30) 25 to 60
0.30mm (No. 50) l0 to 30
0.15mm (No. 100) 2 to 10
The minimum percentages shown above for material passing the 0.30mm (No.
50) and 0.15mm (No. 100) sieves may be reduced to 5 and 0, respectively, if
the aggregate is to be used in air-entrained concrete containing more than 250
kg of cement per cubic metre or in non-air-entrained concrete containing more
than 310 kg of cement per cubic metre or if an approved mineral admixture is
used to supply the deficiency in percentages passing these sieves. Air-
entrained concrete is here considered to be concrete containing air-entraining
cement or an air-entraining agent and having an air content of more than 3%.
S500.8
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

The fine aggregate shall have not more than 45% retained between any two
consecutive sieves of those shown above and its fineness modulus shall be
not less than 2.3 nor more than 3.1.
For walls and other locations where smooth surfaces are desired, the fine
aggregate shall be graded within the limits shown in the above table, except
that not less than 15% shall pass the 0.30 mm (No. 30) sieve and not less than
3% shall pass the 0.15 mm (No. 100) sieve.
To provide uniform grading of fine aggregate, a preliminary sample

representative of the material to be furnished shall be submitted at least 10
days prior to actual deliveries. Any shipment made during progress of the work
which varies more than 0.20 from the fineness modulus of the preliminary
sample shall be rejected or, at the option of the Engineer, may be accepted
provided suitable adjustments are made in concrete proportions to
compensate for the difference in grading.
3. Deleterious Substances
All fine aggregates shall be reasonably free from lumps of clay, soft or flaky
particles, salt, alkali, organic matter, topoil or other extraneous substances.
The amount of deleterious substances in the fine aggregate shall not exceed
the following limits:
Substances Percent by Weight of

Total Sample, Maximum
Clay lumps and friable particles 3.0
Material finer than No. 200 sieve;
Concrete subject to Abrasion 3.0
All other concrete 5.0
Coal and lignite: where surface appearance of
concrete importance 0.5
All other concrete 1.0
Cinders and clinkers 0.5
In addition, the sum of the percentages of all material listed above shall not
exceed 5%. Organic Impurities
Fine aggregate shall be free of injurious amounts of organic impurities. Except,

as herein provided, aggregates subjected to the test for organic impurities and
producing a colour darker than the standard shall be rejected.
S500.9
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

A fine aggregate failing in the test may be used, provided that the discoloration
is due principally to the presence of small quantities of coal, lignite, or similar
discrete particles.
A fine aggregate failing in the test may be used, provided that, when tested for
mortar-making properties, the mortar develops a compressive strength at 7 and
28 days of not less than 95% of that developed by a similar mortar made from
another portion of the same sample which has been washed in a 3% solution of
sodium hydroxide followed sufficient to produce a colour lighter than standard
with the washed material.
Mortar Strength
Fine aggregate shall be of such quality that when made into a mortar and
subjected to the mortar strength test prescribed in ASTM Method of Test, C 87,
the mortar shall develop a compressive strength not less than that developed by
a mortar prepared in the same manner with the same cement and graded
standard sand having a fineness modulus of 2.40 ± 0.10. The graded sand shall
consist of approximately equal parts by weight of standard Ottawa sand and
graded Ottawa sand as defined in ASTM Method of Test, C l90 and C 109,
respectively.
Mortar Sands
Mortar sands for masonry shall meet all requirements for fine aggregates above,
except that the material shall be uniformly graded from coarse to fine with all
passing 2.36 mm (No. 8) sieve.
c. Water for Concrete

Water for use in concrete and for use with cement shall be clean and practically
free of oil, acid, alkali, chlorides, organic matter, and other deleterious substances.
Water from city water supplies or other sources approved by a public health
department as potable may be accepted without being tested.
S500.10
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

Water from other sources shall be tested and approved before use and shall not
contain impurities in excess of the following limits:
Acidity or alkalinity calculated in terms of calcium carbonate 0.05%
Total organic solids 0.05%
Total inorganic solids 0.08%
Total Chlorides as sodium chloride 0.05%
d. Admixtures for Concrete

Admixtures shall not be used in concrete without the approval of the Engineer, who
may require that tests be conducted before the admixtures may be used to prove
their suitability.
Admixtures, if their use is allowed, shall comply with the following requirements:
i. Admixtures shall be used only in liquid form and shall be batched in solution in
the mixing water by mechanical batcher capable of dispensing the admixture
in quantities accurate to within 5% of the required quantity.
ii. All admixtures shall comply with the requirements of ASTM C494 or AASHTO
M194 and shall be of an approved brand and type.
iii. Air entraining agents shall comply with the requirements of ASTM C260 or
AASHTO M154.
iv. Admixtures shall not contain any chlorides.
Retarding Agents:
In order to permit the retarding of the set and extend the finishing time of concrete, a
retarding agent shall be used when specified on the plans or may be used when
permission for its use is requested by the Contractor in writing, and such approval is
given. The retarding agent shall be a Type B or Type D admixture. The Contractor
shall support his request with a manufacturer's certified formulation of the proposed
agent and with sufficient evidence that the proposed agent has given satisfactory
results on other similar work. Permission to use the agent may be withdrawn at any
time when unsatisfactory results are obtained.
When air-entrained concrete is specified, the air-entraining agent and the retarding
agent shall be so incorporated that the air content of the concrete shall fall within the
percentage range stipulated in the specifications. When air-entrained concrete is not
specified, the concrete to which the retarding agent has been added shall have an air
content no greater than 3% except as recommended for bridge decks.
S500.11
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

No compensation will be made for furnishing and incorporating the agent in the mix.
No additional compensation will be made for furnishing, placing, finishing, and curing
the concrete involved.
Superplasticizers
Superplasticizers may be utilized for the purpose of water/cement ratio reduction or
for increasing workability With the Engineer’s approval. Only superplasticizers of the
sulphonated melamine formaldehyde or sulphonated naphthalene formaldehyde
condensate types may be utilized.
The required entrained air may be reduced by the Engineer if no loss of durability will
result.
500.4 Ancillary Materials for Concrete

The materials and ancillary appurtenances to be used for concrete construction are
given in the following sub-clauses. General provisions for the selection, sampling and
testing, handling and use of these materials are also given.
a. Curing Materials
The objective of the curing method shall be to restrict the loss of water to no more
than 0.55 kg per square metre of surface in 72 hours.
1. Burlap for curing concrete shall consist of two layers weighing 0.30 to 0.55
kilograms each per square metre or of four layers of 0.18 to 0.21 kilograms
each. Burlap that has been used as a container for sugar shall not be used.
Burlap that is being used for the first time shall be thoroughly washed in order
to remove starches used in sizing.
2. Vapour proof sheeting shall be tough, strong, resilient and capable of
withstanding normal use without puncturing or tearing. Sheeting material may
consist of any of the following and conform to the requirements of ASTM C
171 (AASHTO M l7I):
 Waterproof paper
 Polyethylene film
 White burlap-polyethylene sheet
3. Membrane Curing Compound
Curing compound shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C 309 (AASHTO
S500.12
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

M 148) Type 1.
The curing compound shall be delivered to the job in the manufacturer's
original container, labelled with the manufacturer's name, plant location, grade
designation of compound, lot number and quantity.
b. Joint Filler and Sealant

1. Joint filler shall be a non-extruding material such as bitumen impregnated
fibreboard or closed cell flexible polythene sheet. Timber will not be accepted
as joint filler material.
2. Joint sealant shall be one or two part polysulphide or elastomeric sealant.
Joints to be sealed shall be primed with a compound compatible with the
sealant material, as recommended by the sealant manufacturer.
c. Waterstops
1. Waterstops may be extruded PVC or rubber sections placed either centrally in
a concrete section or on the outer face of a concrete section.
2. Rubber waterstops shall have a tensile strength of 17 to 20 Mn/sq.mm, a
minimum elongation at break of 450% and a hardness (IRHD) of 60 to 70.
They shall be capable of accommodating joint movements of up to 50 mm.
3. PVC waterstops shall have a tensile strength of 13 to 15 Mn/sq.mm, an
elongation at break of around 300% and a Shore Hardness (A) of 80 to
90.They shall be capable of accommodating joint movements of up to 10 mm.
d. Concrete Grouting Material

1. Description
This Clause covers grouting material for use in grouting anchor bolts, dowels
and other miscellaneous items in concrete. The material shall be a
non-metallic, non-shrink grout which, when mixed with water will harden
rapidly to produce a permanent anchoring bond. It shall contain no metals or
rust or corrosion promoting agents. The colour shall be light grey, matching
approximately the colour of hardened concrete.
2. Material
The material, when prepared in accordance with the manufacturer’s
instructions, shall be of a trowelable consistency. It shall also have the
following properties: The material shall exhibit no shrinkage on setting but may
S500.13
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

exhibit slight expansion of no more than 0.10%.
The compressive strength of 50 mm cubes of this material, when cured as

shown, shall have the following minimum compressive strengths:
Cure Strength
24 hour air cure at 24 o C 27.5 MPa minimum
7 day air cure at 24 o C 41.0 MPa minimum
7 day air, l0-day water submersion 41.0 MPa minimum
The material shall have a minimum initial set of 30 minutes.
Pull-out Strength: a 16 mm deformed reinforcement bar grouted 150 mm deep

in 22 mm diameter hole in saturated surface dried concrete shall have a pull-
out strength of 44.5 kilonewtons.
The material shall contain not more than 0.05% chlorides or 5% sulphates.
e. Epoxy Compounds
1. Types of Compounds
Epoxy resin compounds for application to Portland cement concrete,
bituminous cement concrete, metals and other type surfaces shall be two-
component systems of the applicable of the following types, as designated.
- Type A - An epoxy resin, for bonding fresh concrete to hardened
concrete.
- Type B - An epoxy resin adhesive, for bonding hardened concrete to
hardened concrete.
- Type C - An epoxy resin adhesive, for bonding traffic markers to
hardened concrete and to asphaltic concrete.
- Type D - A coal-tar, modified epoxy resin for application as a
skid-resistant or protective overlay for cement concrete.
2. Approval of Compound
Samples and literature of epoxy compounds proposed for use shall be
submitted to the Engineer for approval. No material shall be used in the works
prior to the receipt of the Engineer's written acceptance.
S500.14
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

3. Mixing and Application

Types A and B epoxy compounds (for bonding fresh concrete to hardened
concrete or bonding precast concrete parts) shall be mixed, applied, and cured
in accordance with the manufacturer's directions, or as might be directed
otherwise by the Engineer.
Epoxy compounds shall be used only under conditions, which are compatible
with the material being applied in accordance with the specific directions of the
manufacturer.
4. Performance Tests
 For Epoxy Bonding Compounds
The performance test upon which the acceptance or epoxy bonding
compounds is based is described below. Test Specimens shall be cured at
tested for composite cylinder shear (diagonal shear) as specified below.
The test specimen of concrete shall be prepared in a 75 by 150 mm mould.

The first portion of the test specimen may be formed by sawing a full size 75
by 150 mm cylinder on a 45 degree slope from the vertical giving a maximum
height of 108 mm to a minimum height of 30 mm or through the use of an
elliptical insert of the same dimensions. The concrete shall be cast as
described in AASHTO T 23; using Class 34 Concrete with Type III cement.
The specimen shall be cured in the standard manner, and for at least four
days. At the end of this period the half cylinder is to be applied shall be on
which the epoxy resin is to be applied shall be prepared for bonding by
removal of all loose particles and oil film and then coated with a thick coat of
the epoxy compound under test. The portion of the cylinder shall then be
replaced in the mould and plastic concrete of the same mix as before added
to the mould to form the 75 by 150mm cylinder. Reference test cylinders are
prepared with each batch of concrete.
After the composite test cylinder has cured for a three-day period in a moist
cabinet, the compressive strength is determined. This strength is compared
to the strength of the weaker of the two concretes from which the test cylinder
S500.15
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

was made. If the ratio of the compressive strength of the composite cylinder
to the compressive strength of the weaker concrete is less than 0.90, the
epoxy compound is rejected.
 For Epoxy Mortars

The epoxy mortar shall be tested in compression, in the following manner:
Three 50 mm cubes shall be made with epoxy mortar, using the same mix
and materials as described above.
After curing for three days, the cubes shall be tested in direct compression.
The required minimum average of the results for the three cubes is 34 MPa.
 Retesting for non-representative Specimens

In any of the required tests of the epoxy compounds, in the event that a failure
of the specimen occurs in the cement or in the cement mortar, too early to
indicate whether the epoxy material itself will meet the specified
requirements, then new specimens shall be prepared for retest, as is
necessary to complete the test on the epoxy material.
5. Specific Requirements for Type C Compounds

Type C epoxy compounds (for bonding pavement markers to the pavement)
shall be as recommended by the manufacturer of the particular markers used,
and for the particular pavement to which they are to be bonded. Mixing and
application shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's directions.
6. Specific Requirements for Type D Compounds

Type D (coal-tar modified epoxy compounds) shall meet the requirements of
AASHTO M 200. The manufacturer shall furnish six copies of a certification
stating that the material meets this specification.
7. Limitations of Storage
Epoxy materials that have been in storage for more than 12 months, will not
be accepted for use.
500.5 Concrete Mix Design

a. General requirements
1. Concrete mixes shall have minimum water content per cubic metre of concrete
S500.16
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

consistent with required workability, a cement content corresponding to the

appropriate water-cement ratio, the specified maximum size of coarse
aggregate, and the required percentage of fine aggregate. Minimum and
maximum values for key parameters should be as defined in the table below.
2. The design mixes for each class of concrete used shall be as determined by
the Contractor to produce the results as specified herein and accepted by the
Engineer.
3. For each class of concrete there shall be as many design mixes as there are
different combinations or types of ingredients anticipated to cover the
requirements of the work.
4. Design mixes will not be approved when the sum of chloride content of
component materials indicates that the concrete mix derived from those
materials will have a chloride content exceeding 0.24 kilograms per cubic
metre of concrete. When the source of any component material for the
concrete is changed or when the design mix is altered, a chloride content
determination test will be made immediately by the Engineer with new samples
provided by the Contractor.
Description Mix Preference Grade

Ordinary Concrete 20 25 30 35
Type and Class of Cement OPC OPC OPC OPC
Min. Cement Content 280 310 320 350
(kg/cu.m)
Max. Free Water/Cement 0.5 0.45 0.43 0.4
Ratio
Max. Aggregate Size 20 20 20 20
b. Workability
The workability of the concrete shall be suitable for the use for which the concrete
mix is intended. The Contractor shall be responsible for nominating the design
workability and the range of uses for which the mix is proposed.
The workability proposed will be subject to the Engineer’s agreement but it will
remain the Contractor’s responsibility to ensure the concrete can be correctly
placed and compacted into its final position in full conformity with the specification.
S500.17
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

For the guidance of Contractors the following ranges of slump measurements are
indicative of the workabilities anticipated to be required. These should not be
considered as definitive requirements or to be all encompassing of possible
situations.
Non-vibrated Vibrated
LOCATION
Compaction Compaction
Concrete pavement, sidewalk, and
75 to l50 mm 25 to 90 mm
incidental construction:
Un-reinforced concrete other than
75 to l50 mm 25 to 90 mm
above:
Reinforced concrete 75 to l50 mm 25 to 90 mm
Concrete placed by pumping: 75 to l50 mm 25 to 75 mm
Constricted spaces: 0 to l25 mm N/A
c. Admixtures.
The use of admixtures to enhance the properties of any design mix shall only
incorporated into a design if defined in the Contract or if the Engineer agrees that
the use of such admixtures are beneficial to the overall performance of the Contract
and are not a disadvantageous to the permanent works. Mix designs using
admixtures shall only be prepared after mix designs for the same strength and
nominal aggregate size have been prepared without the use of admixtures.
All admixtures shall be incorporated into the mix fully in compliance with the
manufacturer’s recommendations. It shall be the Contractor’s sole responsibility to
prove by testing and trial production and placement that the use of the admixture
-
d. Strength
The strength of each concrete mix shall be designed based on the required over
design factor according to ASTM C94, and assuming a coefficient of variation
appropriate for facilities to be used.
Tests made on the concrete must meet both the following two criteria for each pour
of concrete to be considered acceptable:
1. Not more than 5% of the strength tests shall have values less than specified
strength.
S500.18
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

2. No strength test shall fall below 90% of the specified strength and the average
of any three tests from any pour will be equal to or greater than the specified
strength.
e. Submittal of Mix Design and Samples

1. The contractor shall submit to the Engineer satisfactory details of all mix
designs proposed for use in the work. Accompanying such submittal shall be
satisfactory and representative samples of all materials to be used for each
mix design. Such samples shall include not less than 25 kilograms of each
type of aggregate, handled, packaged and delivered as directed by the
Engineer.
2. Each sample shall be clearly identified by means of an attached tag as to
source, project number and design mix for which it is intended to be used.
3. Upon receipt of the samples and mix data, the Engineer will prepare standard
concrete test cylinders. These cylinders will be broken at various ages up to
28 days to determine the potential strength gain characteristics of the
concrete. If the results do not satisfy the design and the construction
requirements, the contractor shall revise his mix to the Engineer's satisfaction.
No concrete shall be placed in any part of the works until the design mix has
been approved by the Engineer.
4. The approval of the Engineer of any design mix will in no way relieve the
contractor of the responsibility for providing concrete having compressive
strengths specified herein for all concrete used in the work.
5. Once a design for any class of concrete is accepted, it shall not be varied as
to source, quantity, grading of materials, proportioning, or in any other way.
6. Proposed changes in design mixes shall be accomplished by preparing and
having approved a new design mix as specified above.
500.6 Quality Control

a. The Contractor shall implement a full quality control testing regime to ensure all
concrete batched by him conforms to the requirements of the specification, and
such testing will, as a minimum comply with the this section . In addition, the
Engineer shall undertake his own compliance testing under this section, for which
the Contractor shall furnish concrete for casting specimens and for the specified
sampling and testing all as required by the Engineer. Such testing by the
S500.19
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

Engineer will be additional to the Contractor’s testing and shall not relieve the
Contractor of his obligations to test for compliance with the Specifications.
b. Testing: The Contractor shall supply sufficient concrete to enable the Engineer to
perform the following testing for each concrete pour as follows:
1. Slump and air content tests for each 10 cubic metres or fraction thereof,
placed.
2. Yield test and unit weight tests for each 150 cubic metres, or fraction
thereof, placed or as deemed necessary by the Engineer.
3. A minimum of one set of six standard cylinders made and cured in
accordance with ASTM C3l for each 75 cubic metres, or fraction thereof, of
concrete placed, for compressive strength testing.
4. Additionally the Contractor will be expected to provide the results of his
tests, in accordance with C below, undertaken for the same pour which
shall be no less frequent than the foregoing.
c. Materials shall be sampled according to ASTM Cl72 and tested as follows:

1. Air content: ASTM C173.
2. Weight per cubic metre, yield, air content and cement content: ASTM Cl38.
3. Slump: ASTM C143
4. Compressive strength of cylindrical concrete specimens: ASTM C39.
d. Target Mean Strength

The characteristic strength of concrete is the 28 days strength below which not
more than 5% of the test results may be expected to fall. The concrete mix should
be designed to have a mean strength greater than the required characteristic
strength by at least the current margin. The current margin for each particular type
of concrete mix shall be determined; it may be taken as having the smaller of the
values given by (1) or (2) below.
1. 1.64 times the standard deviation of tests on at least 100 separate batches
of concrete of nominally similar proportions of similar materials and
produced over a period not exceeding 12 months by the same plant under
similar supervision.
2. 1.64 times the standard deviation of tests on at least 40 separate batches
of concrete of nominally similar proportions of similar materials and
S500.20
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

produced over a period exceeding 5 days but not exceeding 6 months by

the same plant under similar supervision.
Where there are insufficient data to satisfy (1) or (2) above, the margin for the
initial mix design should be taken as two-thirds of the characteristic strength for
concrete. This margin should be used as the current margin only until sufficient
data are available to satisfy (1) or (2) above. However, when the required
characteristic strength approaches the maximum possible strength of concrete
made with a particular aggregate, a smaller margin may be permitted by the
Engineer for the initial mix design.
e. Testing Plan
Each set of test specimens shall be made from a sample obtained from a
representative batch of concrete. Compliance with the specified characteristic
strength may be assumed if:
1. The average strength determined from any group of four consecutive test
specimen exceeds the specified characteristic strength by not less than 0.5
times the current margin, and
2. Each individual test result is greater than 85% of the specified characteristic
strength.
The current margin should be taken to be two-thirds of the specified
characteristic strength for concrete, unless as mentioned above a smaller
margin has been established to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
If only one test specimen result fails to meet the second requirement then that
result may be considered to represent only the particular batch of concrete from
which that specimen was taken provided the average strength of the group
satisfies the first requirement.
If more than one specimen in a group fails to meet the second requirement or if
the average strength of any group of four consecutive test specimens fails to
meet the first requirement then all the concrete in all the batches represented
by all such specimens shall be deemed not to comply with the strength
requirements. For the purposes of this sub-Section, the batches of concrete
represented by a group of four consecutive test specimens shall include the
S500.21
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

batches from which samples were taken to make the first and the last specimens
in the group of four, together with all the intervening batches.
f. Action to be Taken in the Event of Non-Compliance with the Testing Plan

When the average strength of four consecutive test specimens fails to meet the
first requirement in (F), above, the mix proportions of subsequent batches of
concrete should be modified to increase the strength.
The action to be taken in respect of the concrete which is represented by the test
specimens which fail to meet either of the requirements (or not by correct
statistical proof can be verified to have the required strength) shall be determined
by the Engineer. This may range from qualified acceptance in less severe cases,
to rejection and removal in the most severe cases.
The Engineer may also require the Contractor at his own expenses to prove
statistically the strength, by boring out cores and testing them according to a
programme approved by the Engineer. The age of the concrete and degree of
hardening at the time of the new testing shall be considered.
500.7 Mixing Equipment

a. Batching Plant
The equipment for batching of concrete materials shall conform to the following
requirements except that, with the Engineer's approval, portable batch weighing
equipment of a suitable type and capacity may be used where only small quantities
of concrete or mortar are to be placed.
The batching equipment shall be substantially constructed on a firm foundation and

with sufficient clearance at all points for the weighing hoppers to function properly.
All batching plant structures shall be maintained properly level within the accuracy
required by the design of the weighing mechanisms. A platform with suitable steps
for access shall extend around the weighing hopper for easy means of inspection,
adjustment and weighing.
1. The Batching Equipment

Separate bins or compartments for each size of classification of aggregate and
for each type of bulk Portland cement shall be provide. The compartments
S500.22
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

shall be as follows:
- Compartments shall be of ample size, and constructed so that materials will

be separated under working conditions. The batching plant be so equipped
that when the quantity desired in the weighing hopper is being approached the
material may be added slowly in small quantities and shut off with precision. A
means of removing any overload of any one of the several materials in the
weighing hopper shall be provided.
- Weighing hoppers shall be constructed so as to eliminate accumulations of
tare materials. They shall weigh aggregates in separate weight batches with
individual scales, or cumulatively in one batcher on one scale. They shall
weigh bulk cement on separate scale in a separate weight batcher.
- Where mix water is measured by weight it shall be weighed separately from
other ingredients.
- The hopper discharge mechanism shall be interlocked: against opening until
the full batch is in the hopper and the scale balanced; against opening while
the hopper is being filled; against closing until the hopper is entirely discharged
and the scale back in balance; and against opening if the batch in the hopper
is either overweight or underweight by more than 0.5% of the amount
specified. The weighing hopper discharge gate shall operate in such a manner
as will not affect the scale balance. The discharge chute, boot or other
approved device shall be suspended from the encasement and not from the
weighing hopper and shall be so constructed that the material will not lodge
therein and there will be no loss of material.
- Facilities for obtaining representative samples of aggregate from each of the
bins or compartments for test purposes shall be provided.
2. Water batcher and admixture dispensers

Equipment for batching water and admixtures at the batching plant shall be
provided, except in cases where the mixing has been authorized by the
Engineer to be performed at the job site in paving mixers or in truck mixers.
A device capable of measuring mixing water within the specified requirements

for each batch shall be fitted and also a mechanism for delivering water to the
mixers so that leakage will not occur when the valves are closed.
S500.23
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

The filling and discharge valves for the water batcher shall be interlocked so
that the discharge valve cannot be opened before the filling valve is fully
closed.
The plant shall be equipped with measuring devices for admixtures capable of
ready adjustment to permit varying quantity of admixture to be batched. The
dispenser for admixtures shall be interlocked with the batching and
discharging operations so that the batching and discharging to the mixture will
be automatic.
If non-interlocked dispensers are permitted, the calibration of the dispensers

shall be checked at intervals as required by the Engineer. Results of such
calibration be recorded and made it available for the inspection by the
Engineer.
3. Moisture content
At the time of batching, all aggregates shall be in a saturated surface-dry
condition.
In no event shall the free moisture content of the fine aggregate at the time of
batching exceed 8% of its saturated surface-dry weight. The batch-to-batch
uniformity of all aggregates shall be such that variations in moisture content
within one hour do not exceed 7 kg. in the batch quantity for one cubic metre
of concrete, or that a gradual change does not exceed twice this variation in a
period of four hours.
An electrically actuated moisture metre which will indicate on a readily visible

scale the percentage of moisture in the fine aggregate as it is batched, within
a sensitivity of 0.5% by weight of the fine aggregate shall be installed and
maintained in operating condition.
4. Scales
The scales for weighing aggregates and cement may be of either the horizontal
beam or springless dial type designed as an integral unit of the batching plant,
and shall be of rugged construction to withstand hard usage due to working
conditions. These scales shall be accurate to within the 0.50%.
S500.24
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

If scales are of the dial type, the dial shall be of such size and so arranged that
it may be read easily from the operating platform.
If scales are of the multiple beam type, the scales shall be provided with an
indicator operated by the main beam, which will give positive visible evidence
of over or underweight. The indicator shall be so designed that it will operate
during the addition of the last 90 kilograms of any weighing. The over travel
of the indicator hand shall be at least one-third of the loading travel. Indicators
shall be enclosed against moisture and dust. Poises shall be installed for
locking in any position and to prevent unauthorized removal.
Clearance between scale parts and hopper and bin structures shall be such
as to avoid displacement of, or friction between, parts due to accumulations,
vibrations, or other cause. Pivot mountings shall be designed so that none of
the parts will jar loose and so as to insure unchanging spacing of knife edges
under all conditions. Scales shall be constructed of non-corrosive materials
and so designed that all exposed fulcrums, clevises, and similar working parts
may be kept clean readily scales shall be maintained in proper operating
condition.
Accuracy of Scales:
All scales shall be certified and sealed by the Engineer prior to the delivery of
the material.
Ten 22.5 kgs. weights shall be provided for checking, with a shelf or suitable
provision for attaching them to the weighing hopper.
5. Recorders
An accurate recorder for producing a digital printout of the batch number and
scale readings corresponding to each of the ingredients of each concrete
batch, including zero initial readings shall be fitted. It shall indicate by name or
code the individual ingredient corresponding to each weight. It shall also
indicate by pressure only, each admixture measured by volume.
On each printout shall be shown: the date and time of batching; an

identification number identical to that of the concrete delivery ticket; and codes
S500.25
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

for the mix design and for the project section. The printout shall be prepared
in duplicate and one copy, with its corresponding concrete delivery ticket,
delivered to the Engineer.
Each recorder mechanism shall be housed in a locked, dust-tight cabinet, in a

position convenient for observation.
b. Concrete Mixers
1. General requirements
Concrete shall be machine mixed at the site, using mechanically operated
batch mixers for mixing concrete, unless authorized by the Engineer and for
batches not exceeding one-third cubic metre that may be hand mixed.
Concrete mixers shall be of the revolving drum type or pan type. Truck mixers
shall be of the revolving drum type. Pick-up and throw over blades of revolving
drum mixers shall be replaced when any part or section is worn 25 mm or more
below the original dimensions of the manufacturer's design. A copy of the
manufacturer's design, showing dimensions and arrangements of blades, shall
be available to the Engineer. Batches shall be charged into the mixer so that
some water will enter in advance of cement and aggregates. All water shall
be in the drum by the end of the first quarter of the specified mixing time.
2. On-site mixers
On-site mixing shall be done using paving or stationary type mixers. Mixers
shall be operated at the speeds recommended by the mixer manufacturers,
except that revolving drum mixers shall make not less than 14 nor more than
18 revolutions per minute.
Paving and stationary mixers shall be operated by an automatic timing device

that can be locked by the Engineer. The timing device and discharge
mechanism shall be interlocked so that, during normal operation, no part of the
batch will be discharged until the specified mixing time has elapsed. The total
elapsed time between the intermingling of damp aggregates and the
discharging of the completed mix from the mixer shall not be less than 60
seconds or more than 300 seconds. The minimum allowable mixing time may
be increased in order to produce a more homogeneous mixture.
S500.26
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

The mixer shall be equipped with adequate water storage and a device for
accurately measuring and automatically controlling the amount of water used
in each batch. Mechanical means shall be provided for recording the number
of revolutions for each batch and automatically preventing the discharge of the
mixer until the materials have been mixed the specified minimum time.
3. Truck mixers
Truck mixers shall be of the revolving drum type, watertight, and so
constructed that the concrete can be mixed to insure a uniform distribution of
materials throughout the mass. All solid materials for the concrete shall be
accurately measured in accordance with this Section and charged into the
drum at the proportioning plant. Except as provided below, truck mixers shall
be equipped with a tank for carrying mixing water. Only the prescribed amount
of water shall be placed in the tank unless the tank is equipped with a device
by which the quantity of water added can be readily verified. The mixing water
may be added directly to the batch only when so approved by the Engineer in
writing, in which case a tank shall not be required. Truck mixers may be
required to be provided with means by which the mixing time can be readily
verified by the Engineer.
The maximum size of batch in truck mixers shall not exceed the maximum
rated capacity of the mixer as stated by the manufacturer and stamped on the
mixer. Truck mixing shall be continued for not less than 50 revolutions after
all ingredients, including water, are in the drum.
Mixing shall begin within 30 minutes after the cement has been added to
aggregate.
500.8 Mixing and Delivery

a. General
1. Concrete placed quantities greater than two cubic metres shall be mixed and
delivered in accordance with the requirements of ASTM C94.
2. The entire contents of the mixer shall be removed from the drum before
materials for a succeeding batch are placed therein.
S500.27
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

3. The materials comprising a batch shall be deposited simultaneously in the

mixer. No mixer shall be charged in excess of its rated capacity as stated on
the manufacturer's stamp on the mixer.
4. The first batch of concrete materials placed in the mixer shall contain a
sufficient excess of cement, sand and water to coat the inside of the drum
without reducing the required mortar content of the mix. Upon the cessation of
mixing for a considerable period, the mixer shall be thoroughly cleaned.
5. When a truck mixer, or an agitator provided with adequate mixing blades, is
used for transportation the mixing time at the stationary machine mixer may
be reduced to 30 seconds and the mixing time in the truck mixer or agitator
equipped with adequate mixing blades shall be as specified for truck mixing.
b. Site Mixing
Mixing of batches two cubic metres and more shall continue 60 seconds plus 20
seconds for each cubic metre in excess of two cubic metres. The mixing time may
be reduced to a period of not less than 60 seconds if it is demonstrated to the
satisfaction of the Engineer that a shorter mixing time results in satisfactory mixing.
The mixer shall be operated at the drum speed as stipulated by the manufacturer
of the mixer. Evidence of satisfactory mixing shall consist of the variation in slump
of samples, taken from the first and last quarters of the discharge, being not more
than 20mm from the average of the two slump values.
c. Plant Mixing
Mixing at a central plant shall conform to the requirements for mixing at the site.
d. Hand Mixing
When hand mixing is authorized it shall be done on a watertight platform and in
such a manner as to insure a uniform distribution of the materials throughout the
mass. Mixing shall be continued until a homogenous mixture of the required
consistency is obtained.
e. Time for Hauling and Placing Mixed Concrete

Concrete transported in an agitator, or other similar transportation device shall be
discharged at the job. The maximum volume of mixed concrete transported in an
agitator shall be in accordance with the specified rating. All concrete shall be
S500.28
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

placed in its final position in the forms within 60 minutes after the introduction of the
mixing water to the cement aggregate, or the cement to the aggregate except that
in hot weather or under other conditions contributing to quick stiffening of the
concrete, the maximum allowable time may be reduced by the Engineer
The elapsed time before completion of concrete placement may be exceed if, 24
hours prior to the commencement of the pour the Engineer’s approval had been
granted to the use of a designed mix incorporating a retarding admixture, and the
maximum extension of the above time agreed and approved.
f. Delivery
Suppliers of concrete shall have sufficient plant and transport capacity to insure
continuous delivery at the rate required. The rate of delivery of concrete during
concreting operations shall be such as to provide for the proper handling, placing
and finishing of the concrete. The rate shall be such that the interval between
batches shall not exceed 20 minutes. The methods of delivering and handling the
concrete shall be such as will facilitate placing with the minimum of re-handling and
without damage to the structure or the concrete.
g. Retempering
The concrete shall be mixed only in such quantities as are required for immediate
use and any which has developed an initial set shall not be used. Concrete, which
has partially hardened, shall not be retempered or remixed.

No separate measurement or payment will be made for Portland cement concrete
under this Section. All costs therefore shall be included in the unit price or lump sum
price for the items to which the concrete pertains.
S500.29
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

SECTION 501: CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
CONTENTS
501.1 Description
501.2 Materials
501.3 Mixes
501.4 Form work Materials and Accessories
501.5 Form work Formwork Designs
501.6 Construction of Forms
501.7 Preparation of Form Surfaces
501.8 Falsework
501.9 Removal of Forms and Falsework
501.10 Removal Strength
501.11 Construction Joints:
501.12 Expansion and Contraction Joints
501.13 Waterstops
501.14 Inserts and Other Embedded Items
501.15 Preparation before Placing Concrete
501.16 Conveying
501.17 Placing Concrete
501.18 Consolidation
501.19 Protection
501.20 Bonding
501.21 Finishing Concrete Surfaces
501.22 Concrete Curing and Protection
501.23 Defective Concrete work
501.24 Repair of Surface Imperfections
501.25 Additional Provisions
501.26 Concrete Tolerances
501.27 Sampling and Testing
501.28 Submittals
_____________________________________________________________________________
501.1 Description
The work in this Section shall consist of constructing cast in place concrete slabs, deck
slabs, box culverts, retaining walls, columns, beams, foundations, load bearing walls,
S501.1
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

end walls, paved waterways and other types of Portland cement concrete structures
not specifically covered by other sections of these Specifications to the lines and
grades established by the Engineer and in accordance with the designs and details
shown on the Drawings. The structures may be reinforced or unreinforced concrete.
This Section specifies the requirements for cast-in-place concrete, including

furnishing, placing, curing, protecting, and finishing; designing, furnishing, erecting,
and removing form work; constructing expansion and contraction joints and
waterstops; and furnishing and placing grout and epoxy mortar.
501.2 Materials
a. Cast in place concrete shall be in accordance with Section 500, Portland
Cement Concrete – General Requirements.
b. Concrete reinforcement shall be in accordance with Section 504, Reinforcing
Steel.
c. Requirements for the following materials are as specified in Section 500.3,
Concrete Materials:
A. Portland cement
B. Aggregates for concrete
C. Water for concrete
D. Admixtures for concrete
E. Curing materials for concrete
F. Concrete grouting materials
G. Epoxy compounds
H. Expansion joint filler and sealants
I. Waterstops
501.3 Mixes
a. Cast in place concrete shall be mixed in accordance with Section 500, Portland
Cement Concrete – General Requirements. The class of concrete for any
purpose shall be as indicated in the Contract.
b. Grout for surface repair and bond coats:
1. Mortar for repairs shall consist of one part Portland cement to two parts
mortar sand plus water to produce a stiff mortar. Mortar for bond coats shall
comprise one part Portland cement to one part mortar sand.
S501.2
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

2. Blending of white and grey Portland cement to produce coloured mortar to

match surrounding concrete shall be determined by trials.
3. Up to one percent by weight of catalytic agents for increasing bond and
decreasing water requirements may be used, subject to approval of the
Engineer.
c. Epoxy Mortar shall be an approved two-component product with a three-day
minimum compressive strength 35 megapascals. The two-component product
shall be mixed and applied in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
501.4 Formwork Materials and Accessories:

a. Formwork materials and accessories of permanent and temporary nature shall be
supplied as needed. Materials and accessories shall be non-corroding and non-
staining under conditions of service and storage. Temporary materials that are
to be reused shall be made good to their original condition before reuse.
Damaged and corroded materials and materials that by wear or change during
earlier uses, may cause change in the colour, shape or texture of the concrete
will be discarded.
b. All forms shall be of wood, metal or glass fibre reinforced plastic and shall be built
mortar tight and of sufficient rigidity to prevent distortion due to the pressure of
the concrete and other loads incidental to the construction operations. Form
material shall be of a quality and maintained so as to prevent warping and the
opening of joints due to shrinkage of the lumber.
c. Forms for exposed surfaces shall be made of dressed lumber of uniform
thickness, or satisfactory plywood with waterproof glue with or without a form liner
of an approved type.
d. Metal ties or anchorages within the forms shall be so constructed as to permit
their removal to a depth of at least 50 mm from the face without injury to the
concrete. In case ordinary wire ties are permitted, all wires, upon removal of the
forms, shall be cut back at least 6 mm from the face of the concrete with chisels
or nippers; for green concrete, nippers shall be used. All fittings for metal ties
shall be of such design that upon their removal, the cavities that are left will be of
the smallest possible size. The cavities shall be filled with cement mortar and the
surface left sound smooth even and uniform in colour.
e. Bevel or chamfer strips shall be formed from varnished lumber strips or equally
rigid non-staining plastic, 20mm wide on each leg.
S501.3
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

f. V-Grooves and drip notch forms shall be formed from varnished lumber strips or
equally rigid non-staining plastic, 20mm on each leg.
g. Weep holes shall be formed from 100 mm inside diameter P.V.C. or ABS. pipe,
matching the colour of the concrete. Outlet cut-offs shall project 40 mm from the
wall and shall be in a plane parallel to it.
h. Inserts shall be formed from galvanized cast steel or galvanized welded steel,
complete with anchors to concrete and fittings such as bolts, wedges and straps.
i. Release agent for steel forms shall be an approved material that will not colour,
stain or otherwise affect the finish of the concrete. A natural non-petroleum base,
non-staining, non-retarding, non-dusting low gloss release agent shall be used
for wood forms.
501.5 Formwork Designs

a. Watertight formwork shall be designed and executed in accordance with ACI 347
Chapter 1 and shall withstand pressures resulting from the placement and
vibration of the concrete. It shall be formed from materials that do not stain the
concrete, and shall be sufficiently hard and rigid to resist indentation and
scratching while maintaining tolerances. The maximum deflection between form
supports shall be 1/240 of the span length.
b. Forms shall be designed to provide the indicated finish. The deflection of form
facing materials between studs, as well as the deflection of studs and walers,
shall be limited to 1/240 of the span length while maintaining the tolerances
specified.
c. Forms shall be designed for easy removal without damage to the finished
concrete.
d. Panels in the forms shall be arranged in an orderly fashion, with joints between
panels, expansion joints and rustication laid out equally spaced, symmetrical with
relation to such elements as centreline, corners and major openings.
e. Tie holes shall be placed in rustication or other emphasized joints. Where there
are no rustication or joints, ties shall be placed in orderly vertical and horizontal
lines, evenly spaced at approximately 600mm centres unless otherwise indicated.
f. Earth shall not be used as a form except in case of solid rock that has been
trimmed to the precise profile of the work to be cast.
g. The design, engineering, and construction of the formwork shall be the
responsibility of the Contractor.
S501.4
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

h. The design, engineering and construction of all shoring to be used in conjunction

with formwork shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.
i. The Engineer may at his discretion require the submittal of the design and/or
working drawings of formwork or shoring for his review and approval. This review
shall not be construed of relieving the Contractor of his responsibility for these
designs or their execution.
j. The Contractor is advised that the deck formwork must be adjustable to permit
lowering or raising with respect to the top of the precast elements.
501.6 Construction of Forms

a. The forms shall be substantial and unyielding and shall be so designed that the
finished concrete will conform to the proper dimensions and contours in
accordance with the specified tolerances. All forms shall be set and maintained
true to the line designated until the concrete is hardened. Forms shall remain
in place for periods that shall be determined as hereinafter specified. When
forms appear to be unsatisfactory in any way, either before or during the placing
of concrete, the Engineer shall order the work stopped until the defects have
been corrected.
b. Forms shall be made sufficiently tight to prevent loss of mortar from the
concrete. Tape shall not be used on interior face of forms to achieve water
tightness, except at concrete faces not exposed to view. Form edges shall be
sealed by such means as gasket material or sealant placed in the joints in such
a way that neither fin nor groove is made in the face of the cast concrete. If
forms must be drilled for tie rods, holes shall be made to fit tie tightly so as not
to leak.
c. Bevel or chamfer strips shall be placed on external corners of concrete. Internal
corners of concrete shall not be bevelled unless otherwise indicated.
d. Formwork shall be cambered to compensate for anticipated deflections prior to
hardening of the concrete so as to maintain specified dimensional tolerances.
e. Forms shall be securely braced against lateral deflection and settlement.
Positive means of adjustment of shores, struts and walers, shall be provided by
means of jacks, wedges and adjustable ties, so that deflection and settlement
can be adjusted during concrete placement.
f. Where indicated, ties spaced equally vertical and horizontal shall be provided at
walls and columns. Tie layout shall be centred both vertically and horizontally.
S501.5
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

g. Formwork shall be anchored to shores and other supporting surfaces or

members in such a way that upward or lateral movement of any part of the
formwork during concrete placement and consolidation is prevented.
h. Runways for moving equipment shall be supported on structural members,
shoring or walers.
i. Any warped or bulged lumber must be re-sized before reuse. Forms that are
unsatisfactory in any respect shall not be reused.
j. For narrow walls and columns, where the bottom of tail form is inaccessible, the
lower form boards shall be left loose so that they may be removed for cleaning
out extraneous material immediately before placing the concrete.
k. Circular column forms shall be fabricated of two pieces and clamped watertight
without horizontal joints. Horizontal construction joints shall be installed as
indicated. Circular columns shall be made using flanged steel forms or fibre
forms that leave no impression of spiral winding or joints in the hardened
concrete.
501.7 Preparation of Form Surfaces:

a. Mortar, rust and dirt shall be cleaned from form surfaces before placing
concrete.
b. All forms shall be treated with form release agent or saturated with water
immediately before placing the concrete. For girder members or other members
with exposed faces, the forms shall be treated with an approved oil to prevent
the adherence of concrete. Any material that may adhere to or discolour the
concrete shall not be used.
501.8 Falsework
a. Detailed plans for falsework or centring shall be supplied to the Engineer on
request but, in no case, shall the Contractor be relieved of responsibility for
results obtained by the use of these plans.
b. For designing falsework and centring, a weight of 2400 kg/cu. m shall be
assumed for green concrete. All falsework shall be designed and constructed
to provide the necessary rigidity and to support the loads in order that the profile
of the concrete as cast will be within the dimensional tolerances defined in the
Specification. The Engineer may require the Contractor to employ screw jacks
or hardwood wedges to take up any settlement in the formwork either before or
during the placing of concrete.
S501.6
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

Falsework that cannot be founded on a satisfactory footing shall be supported

on piling, spaced, driven and removed as approved by the Engineer, or
supported on substructure piled footings as approved by the Engineer.
Falsework shall be set to give the finished structure the camber specified or
indicated on the Drawings.
501.9 Removal of Forms and Falsework

a. Methods of form removal likely to cause over stressing of the concrete shall not
be used. In general, the forms shall be removed from the bottom upwards. The
Engineer may direct the delay of removal of forms and their supports at his
discretion. Supports shall be removed in such a manner as to permit the
concrete to uniformly and gradually take the stresses due to its own weight. See
following sub-section also.
b. Forms and shoring used to support the weight of concrete in beams, slabs and
other structural members shall be kept in place until the concrete has reached
the minimum strength or time period specified for removal of forms and shoring.
c. When shores and formwork framing are arranged so that non-load bearing form
facing panels may be removed without loosening or disturbing the shores or
framing, the form facing may be removed at an earlier age as will not damage
the structure.
d. When concrete surfaces are to be repaired or further finished, forms shall be
removed as soon as the concrete has hardened sufficiently to resist damage
resulting from the removal operations.
e. Top forms on sloping surfaces of concrete shall be removed as soon as the
concrete has attained sufficient stiffness to prevent sagging. Repairs shall be
performed at once, followed immediately by curing.
f. Wood forms for wall openings shall be removed as soon as possible without
damaging concrete.
501.10 Removal Strength:

a. Formwork shall remain in place until the concrete has attained the minimum
percentage of indicated design compressive strength or for the period of time
specified in the following table:
S501.7
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

Minimum Compressive
Normal High
Structural Member or Strength for Form
Strength Strength
Condition Removal (% of required
Concrete Concrete
design strength)
Cantilevers 12 days 7 days 90%
Over 20 feet between
12 days 7 days 90%
supports
Centring under girders 10 days 5 days 80%
Stairways 10 days 5 days 80%
Deck slabs, and bottom of

5 days 3 days 80%
caps
Free standing walls,
5 days 3 days 70%
columns and piers
Walls, piers, columns, sides
of beams, footings, slabs on 24-48 hours 12-24 hours 70%
grade and vertical surfaces.
Curb front face forms 6-24 hours 6 hours 70%
501.11 Construction Joints:

a. Construction joints shall be located as indicated on the Drawings. Joints shall be
located so as not to impair the strength and appearance of the Work. Where a
location for a construction joint must be selected, it shall be located, where
possible, at a rusticated joint line in the concrete. Location of construction joints
not shown on the Drawings shall be approved by the Engineer.
b. Prior to placing fresh concrete against a construction joint all laitance shall be
removed, aggregate exposed as required and all reinforcing steel and other
surfaces cleaned of materials foreign to the concrete. Surfaces of horizontal
construction joints, where expansion joint filler or bond breaking compound is to
be placed, shall be cleaned of dirt, sawdust and all other loose material and
debris. Surfaces against which new concrete is to be placed shall be painted with
a 1:1 sand: cement slurry to the satisfaction of the Engineer immediately before
placing the new concrete.
c. When it is necessary to make a construction joint because of an emergency,
additional reinforcing steel shall be placed across the joint at the contractor’s
expense.
S501.8
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

d. When new concrete is shown to be joined to existing concrete by means of steel

dowels mortared in holes drilled in the existing concrete, the holes shall be drilled
to the required depth, blown out, wetted and filled with epoxy mortar, after which
the dowel shall be inserted and left undisturbed until the mortar is hardened.
e. The Engineer may require an epoxy-bonding compound be applied at
construction joints to insure structural integrity. The compound shall be accurately
proportioned, mixed in a clean dry container, and applied in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions. A container that can be disposed of after each batch
is mixed shall be used. The cost of epoxy bonding compound and application, as
required, shall be incidental to price of concrete.
f. See Section 501.20 Bonding
501.12 Expansion and Contraction Joints:

a. No reinforcement or other fixed metal items shall be run continuous through
expansion and contraction joints, unless indicated.
b. Open joints shall be constructed at the locations indicated, by means of a wood
strip, metal plate, or other approved material to be subsequently removed.
501.13 Waterstops:
a. The configuration and location of waterstops in construction joints and
expansion joints shall be as indicated on the Drawings or ordered by the
Engineer. Waterstops shall be provided in the maximum lengths practicable,
with thermal or solvent joints at all cuts, breaks and corners.
501.14 Inserts and Other Embedded Items:

a. Sleeves, inserts, anchors, weepholes and other embedded items needed for
adjoining work or for its support shall be placed before placing concrete.
b. Ample notice shall be given to trades whose work is related to the concrete or a
supported by it so that they have the opportunity to introduce or furnish or locate
embedded items before the concrete is placed.
c. Joint material, waterstops and embedded items shall be supported against
displacement during concrete casting.
501.15 Preparation before Placing Concrete

a. Hardened concrete and foreign material shall be removed from surfaces of
conveying equipment.
S501.9
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

b. Forms shall be cleaned of water, dirt, debris, hardened concrete film and lumps,
bar and wire fragments, and all other deleterious matter before concrete is
placed.
c. Cleaning holes shall be sealed and made fully flush with interior surfaces of
forms. Cleaning holes shall be located so as not to be visible upon completion,
where possible.
d. Moisture barriers shall be placed, where indicated, over granular fill and bare
earth before placing concrete, except at footings. Joints shall have 150 mm laps
e. Debris and deleterious matter shall be removed from the subgrade which shall
then be made smooth, compacted and wetted before placing concrete.
f. Concrete shall not be placed until the forms and the cleanliness thereof,
reinforcement, moisture barriers and embedded items have been inspected and
approved by Engineer.
501.16 Conveying
a. Concrete shall be moved from the mixer to the place of final deposit as rapidly
as practicable by methods that will prevent segregation, undue drying due to
temperature rise, or loss of ingredients, and in a manner that will maintain the
required quality of concrete.
b. Conveying equipment, of size and design to maintain a continuous flow of
concrete at the delivery end may be used if acceptable to the Engineer. The
Engineer may order discontinuance of their use if an inferior quality of concrete
is produced by the use of such conveyors, and institute a satisfactory method of
handling the concrete. Conveying equipment with aluminium parts, such as
chutes, hoppers, or scrapers that could come in contact with the concrete during
conveying shall not be used.
c. Belt conveyors that are horizontal or at a slope that causes neither segregation
nor loss may be used. Baffle boards or other arrangement at the discharge end
shall be used to prevent segregation. Long runs shall be discharged into a
hopper without segregation. Concrete shall not adhere to the return belt.
d. Steel or steel-lined chutes that have a slope not exceeding one vertical to two
horizontal and not less than one vertical to three horizontal may be used.
Chutes more than 6 metres long, and chutes not satisfying slope requirements,
may be used if the chutes discharge into a hopper designed to prevent
segregation, before distribution.
S501.10
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

e. Concrete shall be placed in forms using troughs, chutes or pipes with the end
held not more than a one metre above the surface of the bare form or the
concrete. Troughs, chutes or pipes shall have steel hopper tops with sides
sloping at least 45 degrees.
f. Bottom-drip buckets to place concrete shall be used wherever possible.
Buckets shall permit gradual release and shall have sides sloping at least 45
degrees near discharge.
501.17 Placing Concrete

a. Concrete shall be deposited into the forms as nearly as possible to its final
position, to eliminate segregation of aggregates. Vibrators shall not be used for
extensive moving of the mass of fresh concrete.
b. Layers of concrete shall not taper nor be wedge shaped but shall be built with
squared ends and level tops. Concrete shall be deposited continuously or in
layers of such thickness that no concrete will be deposited on concrete that has
hardened sufficiently to cause the formation of seams or planes of weakness
within the section. If a section cannot be placed continuously, construction joints
shall be located at points as indicated or as approved by Engineer. Concrete
shall be deposited at such a rate that concrete being integrated with fresh
concrete is plastic. Vibrators shall be used to blend the plastic concrete layers.
c. Struts, stays and braces, serving temporarily to hold the forms in correct shape
and alignment pending the placing of concrete at their locations, shall be
removed when the concrete placing has reached an elevation rendering their
service unnecessary. These temporary members shall be entirely removed
from the forms and not buried in the concrete.
d. Concrete shall not be deposited in supported elements until concrete previously
placed in columns or walls is no longer plastic and initial shrinkage has occurred.
e. Concrete that does not reach its final position in the forms within the time
stipulated under Specification Section 500 shall be rejected.
f. Concrete shall be placed so as to avoid segregation of the materials and the
displacement of the reinforcement.
g. Concrete shall be placed in horizontal layers not more than 300 mm. thick
except as hereinafter provided. When less than a complete layer is placed in
one operation, it shall be terminated at a vertical bulkhead. Each layer shall be
placed and compacted before the preceding batch has taken initial set to
prevent injury to the green concrete and avoid surfaces of separation between
S501.11
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

the batches. Each layer shall be compacted so as to avoid the formation of a

construction joint with a preceding layer, which has not taken initial set.
h. All chutes, troughs and pipes shall be kept clean and free from coatings of
hardened concrete by thoroughly flushing with water after each run. Water used
for flushing shall be discharged clear of the structure.
i. When placing operations would involve dropping the concrete more than 1
metre, it shall be deposited through sheet metal or other approved pipes. As far
as practicable, the pipes shall be kept full of concrete during placing and their
lower ends shall be kept buried in the newly placed concrete. After initial set of
the concrete, the forms shall not be jarred and no strain shall be placed on the
ends of reinforcement bars, which project.
j. When the placing of concrete is temporarily discontinued, the concrete, after
becoming firm enough to retain its form shall be cleaned of laitance and other
objectionable material to a sufficient depth to expose sound concrete. To avoid
visible joints as far as possible upon exposed faces, the top surface of the
concrete adjacent to the forms shall be smoothed with a trowel. Where a
"feather edge" might be produced at a construction joint, as in the sloped top
surface of a wingwall, an inset form shall be used to produce a blocked out
portion in the preceding layer that shall produce an edge thickness of not less
than 150 mm in the succeeding layer. Work shall not be discontinued within
450 mm of the top of any face, unless provision has been made for a coping
less than 450 mm thick, in which case, if permitted by the Engineer, the
construction joint may be made at the underside of the coping.
k. Immediately following the discontinuance of placing concrete, all accumulations
of mortar splashed upon reinforcement steel and the surfaces shall be removed.
Dried mortar chips and dust shall not be puddled into the inset concrete. If the
accumulations are not removed prior to the concrete becoming set, care shall
be exercised not to injure or break the concrete-steel bond at and near the
surface of the concrete, while cleaning the reinforcement steel.
501.18 Consolidation
a. Concrete shall be consolidated until voids are filled and free mortar appears on
the surface. With the exception of concrete placed under water, concrete shall
be consolidated by means of internal vibrators unless special authorization is
given by the Engineer or as provided herein.
S501.12
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

b. Vibrators shall have a minimum frequency of 5,000 vibrations per minute and
massive heads with sufficient amplitude to effectively consolidate concrete. The
intensity of vibration shall be such as to visibly affect a mass of concrete of 25
mm slump over a radius of at least 450 mm.
c. A sufficient number of vibrators shall be used so to consolidate the concrete
within 15 minutes after depositing in forms. At least one spare vibrator shall be
available at the site of each structure during concrete placement. Vibrators shall
not be held against the forms or against the reinforcing steel.
d. The location, manner, and the duration of vibration shall be such as to secure
maximum consolidation of the concrete without causing segregation of mortar
and coarse aggregate and without causing water or cement paste to flush to the
surface. Particular care in this regard shall be exercised during placement of
concrete mixes with high slumps. The thickness of the layers shall not be greater
than can be satisfactorily consolidated by vibrators. Vibrators shall vertically
penetrate into the previous layer at regular intervals.
e. Vibrators must not be kept in one area long enough to create a cavity. They shall
be plunged into concrete rapidly so as not to spatter forms or create depressions
in the lift and removed slowly.
f. Vibrators shall be manipulated so as to thoroughly work the concrete around the
reinforcement, embedded fixtures and into the corners and angles of the forms.
They shall not be used for the extensive moving of the mass of fresh concrete.
g. Vibrators shall be applied at points uniformly spaced and not farther apart than
twice the radius over which the vibration is visibly effective.
h. Vibration shall be supplemented by such spading as is necessary to insure
smooth surfaces and dense concrete along form surfaces and in corners and
locations impossible to reach with the vibrators.
501.19 Protection
a. Arrangements for cooling and shading concrete in advance of placement,
adequate to maintain the required temperature and moisture conditions without
injury due to concentration of heat, shall be made.
b. Concrete shall have a maximum placing temperature that will not cause difficulty
from loss of slump, flash set, or cold joints.
c. The temperature of concrete as placed shall not exceed 35°C, except the
temperature of concrete placed in walls and slabs one metre or greater in
thickness shall not exceed 32°C. When the temperature of reinforcement is
S501.13
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

greater than 50°C, it shall be sprayed with water and any free water removed
from the forms all immediately prior to placing the concrete.
d. Protection during inclement weather:
Concrete pouring shall be stopped when the quantity of rain falling on the
surface is sufficient to wash the cement paste from the concrete surface.
501.20 Bonding
a. Longitudinal keys at least 40 mm deep or inclined dowels at least 300 mm long
shall be provided at all joints in walls and slabs footing, unless otherwise
indicated. Other construction joints may be made without keys, except where
keys are indicated. Where keys are indicated, they shall be formed to
dimensions indicated. See Section 501.11 Construction Joints.
b. When indicated or permitted, surface bond shall be attained by use of an
approved chemical retarder that delays but does not prevent setting of the
surface mortar. Retarded mortar shall be removed within 24 hours after placing
to produce a clean, exposed coarse aggregate bonding surface.
c. After placement has been completed to the construction joint and before placing
fresh concrete, clean reinforcing steel and the surfaces of horizontal and vertical
construction joints of surface laitance, curing compound and other materials
foreign to the concrete, and expose clean coarse aggregate of at least 10 mm
in size. Hardened concrete surfaces shall be cleaned by abrasive blast methods
to expose coarse aggregate, after the curing period or immediately before
placing concrete at the joint. Surfaces of concrete, that have been in place not
more than eight hours may be cleaned with air and water jets if surface laitance
is removed and clean coarse aggregate is exposed. Surfaces of horizontal
construction joints, where expansion joint filler or bond breaking compound is to
be placed, shall be cleaned of dirt, sawdust, and other loose materials. Surfaces
on which concrete is to be placed shall be moistened immediately before placing
concrete.
d. When new concrete is shown to be joined to existing concrete by means of steel
dowels mortared in holes drilled in the existing concrete, the holes shall be
drilled at least 300 mm, blown out, wetted and filled with epoxy mortar after
which the dowel shall be inserted and left undisturbed until the epoxy mortar is
hardened.
S501.14
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

501.21 Finishing Concrete Surfaces

a. General
1. Finishing of concrete surfaces shall generally be in accordance with the
following clauses. Finishes indicated on the Drawings, if different, shall have
precedence. Surface finishes shall be classified as follows:
Class 1Ordinary surface finish
Class 2 Rubbed finish
Class 3 Tooled finish
Class 4 Floated surface finish
2. All concrete shall be given Class 1, Ordinary Surface Finish, and in addition, if
further finishing is required, such other type of finish as is specified. If not
otherwise indicated, the following surfaces shall be given at Class 2 Rubbed
Finish: the exposed surfaces of piers, abutments, wing walls and retaining
walls; the outside faces of girders, T-beams, slabs, columns, brackets, curbs,
headwalls, railings, arch rings, spandrel walls and parapets; but not on
unexposed portions of the tops and bottoms of deck slabs, bottoms of beams
and girders, sides of interior beams and girders, backwalls above bridge seat
or the underside of copings. The surface finish on piers and abutments shall
include all exposed surfaces below bridge seat to 300 mm below the finish
slope lines on the outside face and shall be finished on top and for a depth of
300 mm below the top of the back sides.
3. Where Class 3, Tooled Finish is applicable, the Contractor shall provide a
small sample panel, and shall provide several groups of bush hammered
finishes, in order to permit the Engineer to select the particular finish to be
incorporated in the work.
4. Tops of sidewalks shall be given a Class 4 Floated Finish. Bridge concrete
approach and deck slabs shall be given a Class 4 Floated Finish.
b. Class 1, Ordinary Surface Finish

1. Immediately following the removal of forms, all fins and irregular projections
shall be removed from all surfaces except from those that are not to be
waterproofed. On all surfaces, the cavities produced by form ties and all other
holes, honeycomb spots, broken corners or edges and other defects shall be
thoroughly cleaned and, after having been kept saturated with water for a
period of not less than three hours, shall be carefully pointed and trued with a
mortar of cement and fine aggregate mixed in the proportions used in the
S501.15
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

grade of the concrete being finished. Mortar used in pointing shall be not more
than one hour old. The mortar patches shall be cured as specified under
Specification Section 501.15.
2. All construction and expansion joints in the completed works shall be left
carefully tooled and free of all mortar and concrete. Joint filler shall be cut
back not less than 25 mm from the exposed face for its full length and the
depth filled with caulking compound approved by the Engineer to a smooth
and sightly appearance.
3. The resulting surfaces shall be true and uniform. All repaired surfaces, the
appearance of which is not satisfactory to the Engineer, shall be "rubbed" as
specified under Specification Section 501.21.3.
c. Class 2 Rubbed Finish

1. After removal of forms, the rubbing of concrete shall be started as soon as its
condition will permit. Immediately before starting this work the concrete shall
be kept thoroughly saturated with water for a minimum period of three hours.
Sufficient time shall have elapsed before the wetting down to allow the mortar
used in the pointing of rod holes and defects to thoroughly set. Surfaces to be
finished shall be rubbed with a medium coarse Carborundum stone, using a
small amount of mortar on its face. The mortar shall be composed of cement
and fine sand mixed in proportions used in the concrete being finished.
Rubbing shall be continued until all form marks, projections and irregularities
have been removed, all voids filled and a uniform surface is attained. The
paste produced by this rubbing shall be left in place at this time.
2. After all concrete above the surface being treated has been cast, the final finish
shall be obtained by rubbing with a fine carborundum stone and water. This
rubbing shall be continued until the entire surface is of a smooth texture and
uniform appearance and colour.
3. After the final rubbing is completed and the surface has dried, it shall be rubbed
with burlap to remove loose powder and shall be left free from all unsound
patches, paste, powder and objectionable marks.
d. Class 3, Tooled Finish

Finish of this character for panels and other like work may be secured by the
use of a bush hammer, pick, Crandall, or other approved tool. Air tools shall be
employed unless another method is approved by the Engineer. No tooling shall
S501.16
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

be done until the concrete has set for at least 14 days and as much longer as
may be necessary to prevent the aggregate particles from being picked out of
the surface. The finished surface shall show a grouping of broken aggregate
particles in a material of mortar, each aggregate particle being in slight relief.
e. Class 4, Floated Surface Finish

1. Striking Off
After the concrete is compacted as specified under Clause 501.18, the surface
shall be carefully rodded and struck off with a strike board to conform to the
cross section and grade shown on the Drawings. Proper allowance shall be
made for camber, if required. The strike board may be operated longitudinally
or transversely and shall be moved forward with a combined longitudinal and
transverse motion, the manipulation being such that neither end is raised from
the side forms during the process. A slight excess of concrete shall be kept in
front of the cutting edge at all times.
2. Floating
After striking off and consolidating as specified above, the surface shall be
made uniform by a longitudinal or transverse floating, or both. Longitudinal
floating will be required except in places where this method is not feasible.
3. Longitudinal Floating
The longitudinal float, operated from foot bridges, shall be worked with a
sawing motion while held in a floating position parallel to the road centreline
and passing gradually from one side of the pavement to the other. The float
shall then be moved forward one half of its length and the above operation
repeated. Care shall be taken to preserve the crown and cross-section of the
pavement.
4. Straight edging
After the longitudinal floating has been completed and the excess water
removed, but while the concrete is still plastic, the slab surface shall be tested
for trueness with a straightedge. For this purpose the contractor shall furnish
and use an accurate 3 metre straightedge swung from handles 1 metre longer
than one half the width of the slab.
The straightedge shall be held in successive positions parallel to the surface

centreline and in contact with the surface and the whole area gone over from
one side of the concrete to the other as necessary. Advancement along the
S501.17
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

deck shall be in successive stages of not more than one half the length of the
straightedge. Any depressions found shall be immediately filled with freshly
mixed concrete, struck off, consolidated and refinished. High areas shall be
cut down and refinished. The straightedge testing and refloating shall continue
until the entire surface is found to be free from observable departures from the
straightedge and the surface has the required grade and the contour until there
are no deviations of more than 3 mm under the 3 metre straightedge.
5. Final Finishing
When the concrete has hardened sufficiently, the surface shall be given a
broom finish. The broom shall be of an approved type. The strokes shall be
square across the surface, from edge to edge with adjacent strokes slightly
overlapped and shall be made by drawing the concrete, but so as to produce
regular broom without tearing the concrete, but so as to produce regular
corrugations not over 3 mm in depth. The surface as thus finished shall be
free from porous spots, irregularities, depressions and small pockets or rough
spots such as may be caused by accidental disturbance during the final
brooming of particles of coarse aggregate embedded near the surface. Any
areas intended for pedestrian traffic shall be given a wood float finish. In no
case shall a smooth steel trowel finish be allowed.
f. Daylight Finishing
Unless approved lighting facilities are provided by the contractor, the placing of
deck concrete shall commence at such time that will permit finishing during
daylight hours.
501.22 Concrete Curing and Protection

a. Beginning immediately after placement, concrete shall be protected from
premature drying, temperatures above 38 degrees C and mechanical injury. A
method statement defining the materials and methods of curing and protection
shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval 7 working days in advance of each
proposed pour. The pour may not commence until such approval is granted.
b. For surfaces on which forms are kept continuously in place without loosening, for
a period of five days or more, no further curing will be required. All other surfaces
will be cured as described below.
c. Concrete shall be kept continuously under cure until the accumulated time is at
least five days for bottom slabs and footings and seven days for all other concrete.
S501.18
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

d. The Contractor shall have adequate equipment and material on hand before
placement of concrete beams to ensure that satisfactory curing is assured. Water
if required for curing shall be as specified for concrete.
e. One of the following methods shall be used as approved by the Engineer.
1. Ponding: the surface shall be kept submerged at all times for the required
curing period. Water must not be allowed to flow to erode the surface. Water
shall be kept clean and free of dirt and debris.
2. Continuous fogging: this shall be accomplished by fogging with a nozzle that
so atomizes the water flow that a mist and not a spray is formed. Water must
not be allowed to erode the surface. The concrete shall be fogged regularly,
without allowing any part of the surface to dry.
3. Wet burlap and vapour barrier curing: this shall consist of covering the
concrete surface with wet burlap as soon as the concrete has set sufficient to
support the burlap without marking. Once burlap has been placed it shall be
thoroughly wetted down and covered with vapour proof sheeting. Both the
burlap and vapour proof sheeting shall be furnished in pieces large enough to
extend at least 450 mm beyond the edge of the concrete. Sheets for vapour
barrier shall be lapped a minimum of 150 mm. Sheets shall be adequately
weighed to prevent displacement by billowing. The contractor shall be
responsible for the condition of the vapour proof sheeting at all times during
the curing period and any damaged pieces shall be patched immediately to
the satisfaction of the Engineer. Materials used for this curing method shall
be as approved by the Engineer.
4. Membrane curing compound: curing compound shall be mixed and applied in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, except that the rate of
application shall be at least one litre per square metres of exposed surface to
be cured. The membrane curing compound shall be continuous, flexible and
without defects. It shall retain the required moisture in the concrete.
f. If in the opinion of the Engineer, unsatisfactory results will be or are being

achieved by methods 1, 2 or 3 above, the Engineer may instruct the use of a
membrane-curing compound, the cost of which shall be borne solely by the
Contractor.
g. Protection from Injury:
1. During the curing period, the concrete shall be protected from damaging
mechanical disturbances, such as load stresses, impact, and heavy vibration.
S501.19
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

Concrete surfaces shall be protected from damage by construction equipment,

materials and methods, by curing methods, rain, or running water.
2. Self-supporting structures shall not be loaded in such a way as to over stress
the concrete.
3. Drilled metal shielded bolts only shall be used for fastenings. Explosive or
other power driven fasteners must not be used in concrete.
501.23 Defective Concrete work:

a. The Contractor shall provide advance warning of any formwork stripping to the
Engineer’s Representative in sufficient time as to allow inspection of the finished
concrete prior to remedial work being carried out. No remedial works shall be
carried out without the approval of the Engineer’s Representative.
b. Porous areas, open or porous construction joints and honeycombed concrete
will be considered to indicate that the requirements for mixing, placing and
handling have not been complied with and will be sufficient for rejection of the
members of the structure thus affected.
c. Defective work exposed upon removal of forms shall be entirely removed or
repaired within 48 hours after forms have been removed.
d. Repaired areas will not be accepted if:
1. The structural requirements have been impaired by reducing the net section
of compression members;
2. The bond between the steel and concrete has been reduced; and
3. The area is not finished to conform in every respect to the texture, contour,
and colour of the surrounding concrete.
e. If the above requirements are not satisfied, the Engineer may require that the
members or unit involved be entirely removed and satisfactorily replaced at no
additional expense.
501.24 Repair of Surface Imperfections:

a. As soon as possible after stripping forms, holes left by form ties and other
temporary inserts, shall be thoroughly cleaned and filled and corrective work
carried out.
b. Surfaces generally shall be of uniform appearance with regard to colour and
texture and shall have a smooth finish.
c. Small surface holes caused by air bubbles, normal joint form marks, minor chips
and spalls may be tolerated in limited areas, but no major or unsightly
S501.20
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

imperfections, honeycombs or structural defects will be permitted without

carrying out remedial work, if and as approved by the Engineer, to remove such
imperfections.
d. In general, pin holes and holes smaller than 10mm in diameter and not more
than 10 mm deep may be left unfilled if their distribution is random, if they do not
form unsightly clusters and if they are not rusty or discoloured.
e. Imperfect texture, laitance, fins and roughness shall be removed by rubbing
affected areas with concrete blocks or carborundum stones until smooth and
uniform.
Holes 10 to 20mm in their greatest dimension, that are not more than 20mm
deep, shall be cleaned of loose and staining material and filled with grout
formulated to match the colour of the concrete when dry. Deeper holes shall be
repaired only after the Engineer is satisfied that they do not affect structural
integrity.
If other defects do not cause rejection, holes, honeycombed areas, spalls, and
discoloured areas of oily, or bond-breaking substances shall be cleaned out.
The surface of each defect shall be roughened or keyed and the bottom and
sides coated with a non-staining acrylic or epoxy-bonding agent.
Spalled, loose, porous material shall be cut back until coarse aggregate will
break under chipping rather than fall out. A bonding agent shall be applied and
the defect filled with non-shrinking grout or epoxy-Portland cement intrusion
grout that has been formulated to match the colour of the concrete when dry.
The grout shall be tamped and struck off flush with the surrounding concrete
without smearing. The grout shall be confined until cured, keeping it damp when
exposed to sun or other rapid drying.
Efflorescence
If on completion of the work, there is a marked efflorescence at any point on the
surface, it shall be removed as directed by washing with 10% solution of Muriatic
Acid and thoroughly rinsed off with water from a hose when the acid has ceased
foaming.
S501.21
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

501.25 Additional Provisions

a. Deck and approach Slabs
1. General
The Contractor shall place the deck concrete on precast beam spans in one
continuous operation for the full length of the span or between pour lines as
shown on the Drawings. When the deck width exceeds 15 metres, one
longitudinal joint near the centre of the slab may be permitted, subject to the
Engineer's approval regarding location and details. Pours shall be made in the
sequence indicated on the Drawings and no transverse joints shall be permitted
at alternate locations.
Deck surfaces shall be finished using a mechanical deck finisher of the

"Bidwell", "Gomalo", or "Borges" type or equivalent acceptable to the Engineer.
However, the final finish shall be Class 4 Floated Surface Finish. The Contractor
shall furnish a work bridge having a span at least equivalent to that of the deck
finisher. It shall be of rigid construction, easily moved and free of excessive
wobble and springing when in use. Concrete shall be placed on a uniform
heading parallel to the substructure.
2. Construction Method and Equipment

Immediately upon award of the contract, the Contractor shall submit, to the
Engineer for approval a complete description of the method and equipment
proposed for the handling, placing and finishing of the concrete.
It shall include the equipment for mixing, transporting, distributing and vibrating
the concrete, the concrete deck finisher and guide rails and complete details for
the support of such equipment and the location of same for inspection purposes.
All equipment shall be subject to inspection by the Engineer and only approved
equipment will be accepted for use.
Regardless of previous approval, equipment may be rejected during operation

if it is unsatisfactory. Mixers having an accumulation of hard concrete or mortar
or having any part of section of a blade worn 25mm or more below the original
height of the manufacturer's design will not be approved for use.
S501.22
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

At the same time the Contractor shall submit a list of all personnel who will be
working on the placing and finishing of concrete, with a brief resume of their
experience. Any approval given by the Engineer will not relieve the Contractor
of the responsibility of a satisfactory performance for his method and equipment.
3. Initial Set
The initial set of all concrete in place in a section shall take place at about the
same time and after the deck surface has been machined finished. This
condition shall be obtained by the use of a set-retarding agent ("Plastiment" or
approved equal).
4. Handling and Placing Concrete

Concrete shall be delivered and distributed at a uniform and adequate rate
ahead of the deck finisher such that not less than 7.5 cubic metres of concrete
shall be placed per hour for the full width of the deck. The concrete shall be
vibrated by mechanical vibrators in accordance with Clause 501.13. Standby
plant and equipment must be available in case of breakdown.
Concrete shall be placed so as to avoid segregation of materials and the

displacement of reinforcement. Special care shall be taken to distribute the
concrete to each part of forms by depositing concrete directly as near the final
position as possible. Concrete shall not be moved by means of vibrators.
Concrete shall not be dropped a distance of more than 600mm.
5. Finishing Machine Guide Rails

The contractor shall furnish and install finishing machine guide rails to suit the
transverse profile of the deck as shown on the drawings and the longitudinal
profile, with due allowance for dead load deflection and creep. Guide rails shall
be adequately supported outside the curb line of the bridge and shall be
completely in place and firmly secured prior to the placing of concrete in each
span.
6. Deck Finish at Curbs

Cement grout that builds up in areas adjacent to curbs that cannot be machine
finished shall be removed. Concrete shall be hand screeded and floated to
conform with the machine-finished deck.
S501.23
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

7. Surface Defects and Tolerances in Bridge Deck and Approach Slabs

The finished surface of the slab shall conform to the longitudinal and transverse
profiles as indicated on the drawing or ordered by the Engineer.
The surface shall be free from open texturing, plucked aggregate and local
projections.
Except across the crown, the surface shall be such that when tested with a 3
metre long straight edge placed anywhere in any direction, on the surface there
shall not be a gap greater than 9.5 mm. The surface shall be checked as
described above immediately after screeding. The surface shall again be
checked at the end of the curing period in the same manner and to the same
tolerance.
Areas that do not meet the required surface accuracy shall be clearly marked
out and the Contractor shall build them up or grind them down at his own
expense as required by the Engineer.
If the surface is damaged in any way by construction operations, or if the deck

shows sign of distress or scaling prior to the final acceptance of the deck, it shall
be cut out and replaced by the Contractor at his own expense.
b. Box Culverts
1. In general, the base slab or footings of box culverts shall be placed and
allowed to set before the remainder of the culvert is constructed. In this case
suitable provision shall be made for bonding the sidewalls to the culvert base,
preferably by means of raised longitudinal keys so constructed as to prevent
as far as possible, the percolation of water through the construction joint.
2. Before concrete is placed in the sidewalls, the culvert footings shall be
thoroughly cleaned of all shavings, stocks, sawdust, or other extraneous
material and the surface carefully chipped and roughened in accordance with
the method of bonding construction joints as specified herein.
3. In the construction of box culverts 1.2 metre or less in height, the sidewalls
and top slab may be constructed as a monolith. When this method of
construction is used, any necessary construction joints shall be vertical and at
right angles to the axis of the culvert.
S501.24
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

4. In the construction of box culverts more than 1.2 metre in height, the concrete
in the walls shall be placed and allowed to set before the top slabs are placed.
In this case, appropriate keys shall be left in the sidewalls for anchoring the
cover slab.
c. Concrete Placed in Footings or below Ground Level

1. Where concrete can be placed in dry excavation, cribs, cofferdams and forms
may be omitted, subject to compliance with the following limitations and
conditions. This procedure may be used only in locations not exposed to view
from the travelled roadway.
The elevations and dimensions shown in the drawings for the extent of the
footing shall be obtained as a minimum subject to the following requirements for
increased cover to reinforcement. Reinforcement will be placed in its correct
position according to the drawings and the cover to any reinforcement from any
unsupported excavated face shall be increased by 25mm from the minimum
cover stated in the Contract. Such increase shall be achieved by extension of
the minimum concrete dimensions shown on the drawings or elsewhere in the
Contract and all additional costs associated with the increased structures
dimensions shall met by the Contractor.
The sides of the excavations shall be trimmed to a regular shape and as near
vertical as can be obtained and the material remain stable. All loose material
shall be removed from the base of the excavation and from the faces so as to
prevent falls of material and should any material fall into the excavation during
placement it shall be immediately removed along with any contaminated
concrete.
The entire excavation shall be filled with concrete to the required elevation of
the top of the footing. The volume of concrete to be paid for will be determined
from the neat line dimensions shown on the plans.
501.26 Concrete Tolerances

a. Form work, concrete placement and workmanship shall be such that the
following concrete tolerances are achieved.
b. Tolerance classes:
S501.25
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

- Class A: this requires a 4 mm maximum deviation along a 3 metres

straightedge placed anywhere on the surface.
- Class B: this requires an 8 mm maximum deviation along a 3 metres
straightedge placed anywhere on the surface.
c. Locations:
- A Class A tolerance is required on the top surfaces of slabs, and
sidewalks.
- A Class B tolerance is required on all other surfaces.
d. The maximum allowable deviations from dimensions, elevations, slopes and
positions shall be as follows unless otherwise indicated, except that no tolerance
shall be allowed to be combined with another tolerance at any location such that
the overall design of the structure, either structurally or visibly, is impaired
1. Footings:
- Width, depth and length: plus 90mm; minus 15mm.
- Misplacement or eccentricity: 30mm.
- Top elevation: plus or minus 10mm.
2. Top elevation of slabs not otherwise specified: plus or minus 8 mm at each
point. If a slope is indicated: plus or minus 4mm in 3 metres.
3. Top elevation of columns, walls and piers: as necessary to join other surfaces
and not more than plus or minus 8mm.
4. Plumb of columns, piers, walls and joints not exposed to view in finished
structure: 8mm in 3 metres not exceeding 25mm total.
5. Plumb of columns, piers, walls, vertical joints and grooves and other
prominent vertical lines exposed to view in finished structure: 8 mm. in 6
metres not exceeding 20mm total.
6. Level and grade of exposed lintels, sills, parapets, horizontal grooves and
other conspicuous lines: plus or minus 8 mm in 6 metres, not exceeding plus
or minus 20mm in entire length.
7. Cross sectional dimension of columns, beams and slabs: plus or minus
10mm except increase thickness of slabs on grade as necessary to achieve
indicated top elevation and slope.
8. Thickness of walls: plus 20mm, minus 10mm.
9. Location of sleeves, size and location of slab openings and wall openings:
plus or minus 20 mm.
10. Location of sleeves, size and location of slab openings and wall openings:
plus or minus 20 mm.
S501.26
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

11. Misplacement of Work Points with respect to theoretical grid position: 5mm.
12. Dimensional Tolerances of Girder Bearing Areas and Anchor Bolts over
which the girders will be erected shall be constructed with dimensional
tolerances as specified below:
- Elevation of top of bearing area: plus 0, minus 15 mm level.
- Axes of bearing area over contiguous structure: plus or minus 20 mm
longitudinally and transversely from theoretical locations.
- Clear distance between faces of girder supports: plus or minus 40 mm
throughout the transverse width of support.
- Anchor bolt location: 30mm longitudinally, 20 mm transversely. Tolerances
specified are with respect to absolute theoretical locations and not the
actual axes of bearing area.
501.27 Sampling and Testing

a. Sampling and Testing shall be in accordance with the requirements for Section
500 Portland Cement Concrete except that the followings specific requirements
shall take precedence.
b. Core tests: Core samples of in-place concrete will be made when cylinder
crushing strengths are such that there is reasonable doubt that the specified
concrete strengths have been attained in the structure. Tests will be conducted
to determine strength and other characteristics of the in-place concrete in
accordance with ASTM C42, by load testing or analysis as specified in ACI 318,
or other tests as required. The cost of core tests taken to determine the specified
concrete strength in lieu of acceptable cylinders will be borne by the Contractor.
c. Workmanship: Concrete work that does not conform to the specified
requirements, including strength, colour, tolerances and finishes, shall be
corrected or replaced at the contractor’s expense.
501.28 Submittals
Submittals shall conform to requirements of the Engineer.
a. The names and descriptions of the following products, items and accessories:
1. Tie rods and cones.
2. Circular column forms.
3. Flatform material.
4. Release agent.
5. Vibrator frequency and head weight.
S501.27
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

6. Concrete materials per Section 500.
b. At least 24 hours (non-working days excluded) before placing any concrete the
contractor shall submit to the Engineer the following:
1. The exact location and portion of structure to be placed.
2. The date, time, volume and class of concrete is to be placed.
3. Method of conveying and placing of the concrete.
No concrete shall be placed until such time as all inspections and approvals have
been completed by the Engineer.
Within 24 hours of the completion of the pour the Contractor shall submit to the
Engineer signed certification confirming or amending as appropriate items 1,2 and
3 above as they applied to the pour, and the submittal shall additionally include
the commencement and completion times of the pour.

a. Measurement
The quantities to be paid for under this Section will be the number of cubic metres
(except where another basis of payment is indicated in other sections of these
Specifications) of Cast-in-place Concrete, complete in place and accepted in
accordance with these Specifications, within the lines, grades and dimensions
shown on the Drawings or ordered by the Engineer. No deductions will be made
for the volume occupied by bevels, bar reinforcing steel, weep holes, bolts,
dowels, conduits or other openings less than 1000 square centimetres in area or
pile heads embedded in the concrete. Reinforcing steel shall be measured and
paid for as provided in Clause 504.
b. Payment

501.1 Cast-in-Place Concrete Class (to be specified) cu. m
Payment for items under this Section will be at the prices tendered in the Bills of
Quantities for the various types of concrete to be used in the structures and such
prices and payments shall constitute full compensation for furnishing all labour,
S501.28
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

coarse aggregates, fine aggregates, cement, water, formwork, bracing, weep

holes, joint filler, all other materials, tools, equipment, incidentals and all else
involved in constructing the concrete work complete in place, all as shown on the
Drawings, as specified in these Specifications and as directed by the Engineer.
The prices and payments shall also include for furnishing and placing construction
joints, abutment joint materials, Styrofoam or the like, dowels, sleeves, adhesive,
water for curing and including the cost of preparation of all concrete surfaces etc.,
all as shown on the Drawings, as specified in these Specifications and as directed
by the Engineer.
The prices and payments shall also include for furnishing and placing the
following, when they are not included in other items: bearings, sealing materials,
waterstops and waterproofing membranes all as shown on the Drawings as
specified in these Specifications and as directed by the Engineer.
S501.29
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

SECTION 502: PILING
CONTENTS
502.1 Description & General Requirements
502.2 Pre-cast Concrete Piles
502.3 Bored, Cast In situ Piles
502.4 Pile Tests
502.5 Pile Records
_____________________________________________________________________________
502.1 Description & General Requirements
This Section covers the supply and installation of precast concrete and cast in place
concrete piling. Piling shall conform in all respects with the principles contained in
AASHTO Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges.
In addition to submitting the records required under Clause 502.5 the Contractor
shall report immediately to the Engineer any circumstances that indicate that the
ground conditions differ from those expected by the Contractor from his interpretation
of the soil survey so as to affect the bearing capacity of the pile.
Where piles have not been positioned within the limits specified herein no method of
forcible correction will be permitted.
The type of piles to be used at any particular structure shall be as described on the
Drawings. The Engineer may give his approval for the use of alternative types except
where bored cast in place piles are indicated. The length of piles indicated in the
Contract and provided for in the Bills of Quantities are based on information obtained
from the pre-contract soil survey. The attention of the Contractor is drawn to the fact
that suitable founding strata may be encountered at depths that require the actual
installation of different lengths of pile and that give rise to considerable variation
within any particular site or pile group.
At each structure where piling is to be installed the Engineer may select for testing
one or more working piles that the Contractor shall construct or drive in advance of
the remaining piles at the site. Piles selected for this purpose shall be constructed or
driven with the same equipment proposed for the main piling work to the depths
required by the Engineer. The remaining piling at the site shall not proceed until the
testing of the advance piles has been completed to the satisfaction of the Engineer
and meets the requirements of acceptance quoted in Clause 502.4.
S502.1
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

SECTION 502: PILING
The Engineer may also instruct the testing of further piles during the course of the
works. All pile testing shall be carried out in accordance with Clause 502.4.
Safe working loads for piles shall be as shown on the drawings. Pile lengths, to give
the safe working loads for piles, shall be determined by the Engineer in conjunction
with the Contractor, based on the results of pile load tests. Precast concrete piles
shall be cast to the required lengths and no extensions of piles will be allowed after
casting unless agreed by the Engineer prior to casting. No extension of prestressed
concrete piles will be permitted.
Where in the opinion of the Engineer pre-boring through or excavation of existing

material, e.g. rock fill, is required for installation of driven piles, temporary casing or
other approved means shall be used to prevent the collapse of the sides of the boring
or excavations until driving has been completed. After driving, the cavities formed by
pre-boring or excavation shall be backfilled to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
Each pile shall be placed within 75 mm of its correct position and shall be within 1 in
80 of its correct rake as described in the Contract. Piles that have not been
positioned within these limits shall not be corrected by forcible means and any
remedial measures taken shall be subjected to the approval of the Engineer. The
cost of such remedial measures and of the repair or replacement of any pile that may
have been condemned by the Engineer owing to damage, inferior quality or
excessive deflections shall be borne by the Contractor including the cost of any
addition to the pile cap necessitated by the replacement unless the Contractor can
prove that the damage or deflection of the condemned pile was caused by
circumstances beyond his control.
Piling work shall be carried out under the direction of a competent supervisor
experienced in the particular system of piling to be used. He shall be employed full
time for the duration of the piling operations and his appointment shall be subject to
the approval in writing of the Engineer before the commencement of piling work.
Where directed by the Engineer sulphate resisting cement shall be used in concrete
piles.
S502.2
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

SECTION 502: PILING
502.2 Precast Concrete Piles

1. General
The manufacture, storage and handling of reinforced concrete and
prestressed concrete piles shall comply in all respects with Section 500 of the
Specifications with the following amplifications:
i. Piles shall be supported, handled and pitched so as to avoid
damage.
ii. Where piles have to be stored, they shall be placed on sufficient
supports on firm ground to avoid damage by excessive bending.
iii. Each pile shall be marked indelibly to show its identification
number, length and date of casting. Prestressed concrete piles
shall be marked with the prestressing force applicable.
2. Materials
i. All cement aggregates, mixing water and additives for use in the
manufacture of prestressed, precast concrete elements shall conform to
the requirements of Section 500.
ii. Reinforcing Steel: all reinforcing steel shall conform to the requirements of
AASHTO M31 "Specifications for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for
Concrete Reinforcement" and Specificatjion Section 504. All bars shall be
grade 60 and deformed.
iii. Prestressing Steel: pre-tensioning steel shall consist of Grade 270 seven-
wire uncoated, stress-relieved steel strands having a nominal diameter as
called for on the drawings and conforming to the requirements of the
AASHTO M203 "Specifications for Uncoated Seven-wire Stress-Relieved
Strand for Prestressed concrete".
3. Pile Shoes
Shoe bases where required shall consist of 'chilled hardened' cast iron of clean
grey tough metal, free from sand, honey-combing or porous places, air holes
or other defects. Straps shall be of mild steel or wrought iron cast into the base
and shall run continuously through it. All shoes shall be fitted to the
reinforcement as described in the Contract.
4. Anti-Drag Coating of Piles
Where described in the Contract or directed by the Engineer piles shall be
treated with an anti drag-coating.
5. Driving
Piles shall not be driven until at least 28 days after casting unless agreed by
S502.3
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

SECTION 502: PILING
the Engineer. The Engineer shall be notified 24 hours before the

commencement of driving. Piles shall be driven with an approved hammer and
in sequence of driving approved by the Engineer to a set or depth
corresponding to an ultimate bearing capacity of not less than 2.5 times the
required working load as described in the Contract. When driving records
indicate that a pile is close to the required set or depth the Engineer shall be
informed in order that the final set or depth of the pile can be checked and
agreed. The Engineer shall be given at least one hour warning before final pile
driving to set is restarted. Piles shall not be left partially driven.
Followers will not be permitted where piles are driven beyond the bottom lead
without the written approval of the Engineer. Raking piles shall be driven with
leads capable of adjustment to the required angle of rake.
6. Removal of Surplus Length

Any length of pile surplus to that required for incorporation in the structures
shall be cut-off and removed.
7. Risen Piles
Piles that have risen as a result of driving adjacent piles shall be re-driven to
the requirements of the Engineer.
8. Lengthening of Piles
Unless another method of lengthening of piles is approved by the Engineer the
main or splicing reinforcement shall be stripped of concrete for a distance of
40 times its diameter and additional reinforcement securely tied in position.
Alternatively, subject to the Engineer's approval the reinforcement shall be
exposed for a minimum distance of 300 mm and additional reinforcement butt
welded in position (TO BE USED WITH WELDABLE ASTM A706 REBAR).
The quality of materials and workmanship in lengthened piles shall be as

specified in relevant clauses of Section 500. The lengthened part of the pile
shall not deviate from a straight line by more than 6mm in 3m.
Any welding shall be carried out in the presence of the Engineer's

Representative and the workmanship shall conform to the requirements of
AWS D1.1.
Driving shall not be resumed after lengthening until:
i. the compressive strength of the concrete in the extension is at least equal
to the specified 28 day compressive strength of the concrete in the pile;
and,
S502.4
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

SECTION 502: PILING
ii. the approval of the Engineer has been obtained.

9. Stripping of Pile Heads
After the piles have been driven to the required set or depth, the piles shall be
cut off when instructed by the Engineer at a level of one metre above the
underside of the pile cap and the surplus length removed from site. The pile
within the pile cap shall be carefully stripped of concrete for a length of 800
mm to expose the reinforcement for incorporation in the pile cap.
502.3 Bored, Cast In-situ Piles

1. Boring
Boring shall be done by mechanical auger, by percussion, grab type or other
equipment approved by the Engineer. In loose soils and in water bearing strata
temporary or permanent steel casing may be used to support the pile shaft
and/or boring may be carried out under water or bentonite slurry. Casings shall
be drilled far enough into impervious soil layers to maintain the seal until drilling
is competed and concrete placed. Any soil adhering to the sides of a casing
shall be cleaned off prior to installing the casing.
2. Inspection and Testing
During boring soil and rock cuttings shall be inspected on removal and
compared with the material described in the site investigation report. Selected
samples shall be retained as directed by the Engineer.
Shear strength tests shall be made as necessary on undisturbed soil samples

taken from the bottom of selected piles to check design data. Penetration
testing down the shaft shall also be done on selected piles if required by the
Engineer.
Where practical the base of borings large enough to admit a man shall be
inspected to ensure they are clean and free of soft material immediately prior
to placing concrete. Inspection of pile shafts that are too small to admit a man,
and are relatively shallow may be done by shining a light down the shaft. Any
soil adhering to the sides of the borehole or casing wall shall be cleaned off.
Any loose fallen material or soft soil at the base shall be cleaned out. Any water
in the shaft, other than that intended to support the shaft sides, shall be
removed just prior to placing the first layer of concrete. If the water inflow is
such that cement may be washed out from the unset concrete or the soil in the
base or wall of the shaft become unstable, attempts to concrete in the dry shall
S502.5
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

SECTION 502: PILING
be abandoned and underwater methods used.

3. Working in Shafts
If men are required to work at the base of piles, a loosely fitting safety casing
must be suspended in the shaft to protect the men from material falling from
the sides of the shaft. The method of suspension must be absolutely secure,
as slipping might easily cause serious injury to the man working in the shaft.
The top of the casing must project above ground level as a safeguard against
tools or stones being accidentally kicked down the hole.
Men working down the holes must wear safety helmets and harnesses. The
latter are required to enable them to be lifted out quickly should they be injured
or overcome by gas.
While men are working down the hole a 'top man' shall always be in attendance
to ensure that no tools or objects are left lying near the hole, and that any tools
required for use are properly secured before being lowered down the hole.
The top of the hole should be covered while it is left unattended.
Safety lamps and gas detecting devices shall be kept at hand and in proper
working order. Frequent tests for gas shall be made in filled ground or where
pile boreholes pass through beds of peat or organic clays.
4. Concreting
The time interval between completion of boring and placing concrete shall be
as short as possible, and in any case should not be longer than 6 hours.
i. Dry Shafts
In dry boreholes, or in holes where water can be removed piles shall
be concreted by tipping a reasonably workable mix (with a cement
content of not less than 300 kg per cubic metre of concrete) down the
borehole via a tremie pipe. This method can also be used for the shafts
of driven and cast-in-place piles where the drive tube is closed by an
expendable steel plate. A hopper shall be provided at the mouth of the
hole to receive the concrete and to prevent contamination with earth
and vegetable matter on the ground surface. Before any concrete is
placed, the hole shall be baled dry of water and loose or softened soil
shall be cleaned out and the bottom of the hole rammed. If the bottom
of the hole is wet, a layer of dry concrete shall first be placed and well
rammed. The concrete can then be placed using a readily workable
mix (75-100 mm slump), that is self-compacting and does not
S502.6
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

SECTION 502: PILING
segregate.
ii. Concreting in Water Bearing Soils and Squeezing Ground
When the hole is in water bearing ground and cannot be baled or
pumped dry the entire shaft shall be concreted under water using a
tremie pipe. Concrete placed through a tremie pipe shall be easily
workable (125-180 mm slump) and shall have a minimum cement
content of 400 kg per cubic metre. A retarder shall be used if there is
a risk of the concrete setting before the casing is lifted out of the hole.
When using the tremie method it is necessary to keep an adequate
head of concrete in the tremie pipe at all times and to keep it moving
continuously. The finished level of the concrete placed by tremie pipe
shall be higher than the design cut-off level, to permit the removal of
the thick layer of latence that forms on top of the rising surface of
concrete placed by the tremie method.
When bentonite mud is used instead of casing to support the walls of

a pile borehole and concrete placed beneath the bentonite by means
of a tremie pipe, it is very necessary that an adequate head of concrete
is kept in the tremie pipe at all times and that it is kept moving
continuously in order to overcome the pressure of the high density
thixotropic bentonite fluid that is displaced by the out flowing concrete.
Highly workable concrete with a plasticizer and retarder shall be used,
and, if necessary, the tremie pipe shall withdrawn as a single unit
without breaking joints.
Care shall be taken to ensure that the bottom of the casing is not lifted
above the concrete while the shaft is being concreted and the casing
is withdrawn as water may surge into the hole and weaken the
concrete. Water must be prevented from entering the shaft as water
that is carried up the pile shaft will have a serious weakening effect on
the concrete. Care must also be taken to ensure that sand or soft clay
from does not squeeze in and cause 'waisting' or 'necking'.
Conversely concrete that is kept too high in the casing, it is likely to
jam inside the casing. Lifting the casing may then lift the concrete
inside it and the lower part of the pile may also be lifted by the
reinforcing cage. If any such damage is caused it is not repairable and
the only remedy is to remove all concrete and reinforcement, clean out
S502.7
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

SECTION 502: PILING
the hole and start again.
Concrete shall not be placed by means of a bottom-opening bucket

and concreting of bored piles under water by the 'prepacked' or
'preplaced' method will not be permitted due to the likely contamination
of the pre-placed aggregate by silt or clay suspended in the water.
iii. Fissured Rock
When piling in fissured rock strata with high water content, care shall
be taken to prevent surging of water whereby the cement is washed
out of unset concrete in the pile boreholes. This surging may be due
to boring operations in piles adjacent to those already concrete in
which case the boring operations must stop until the concrete has
hardened sufficiently.
5. Stripping of Pile Heads
When concreting is complete the tops of the piles shall be excavated out down
to pile cap underside level. This shall be done in cofferdam or other protective
works if below ground water level, in water courses or for other reasons. Pile
cut off level shall be as shown on the Drawings or as instructed by the
Engineer. Generally a minimum length of one metre from the top of piles
concreted by the tremie method shall be removed to ensure concrete
contaminated and weakened by ground water is removed. All cut off lengths
shall be removed from site. Where pile reinforcement is too embedded in the
pile cap, the pile length shall be carefully stripped of concrete for the required
length, but a minimum of 800 mm, to expose the reinforcement.
502.4 Pile Tests

Piles selected by the Engineer shall be tested by the Contractor as follows:
1. Vertical Load Test
i. The test load shall be applied by a jack by a method approved by the
Engineer and shall be measured within an accuracy of 2%. Settlement
and recovery shall be measured within an accuracy of 0.25mm from a
datum that will not itself be affected by any movement of the ground
due to test loading or other causes. The Engineer may require
independent checks on the level of the datum by an accurate levelling
instrument.
ii. The jack shall be properly calibrated by an approved testing station
and the appropriate certificate produced before any tests commence.
S502.8
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

SECTION 502: PILING
The measuring equipment and supports employed shall be adequately

protected from the sun and elements and the readings of the air
temperature shall be made and recorded at the same time as those on
the gauges of the several measuring instruments used.
iii. Unless otherwise directed by the Engineer the test load shall be
applied in the following sequence:
a. Apply load of 10 Tons.
b. Remove load and set recording instruments to zero.
c. Increase load to the required safe working load as described in the
Contract by four equal increments.
d. Reduce load to zero by similar equal decrements.
e. Increase load to 2 times the required safe working load by eight
equal increments.
f. Reduce load to zero by similar equal decrements.
g. The load shall be kept constant after each increment of settlement
does not exceed 0.25mm per hour.
iv. The safe working load shall be maintained for at least 12 hours and
the full test load of 2 times the safe working load shall be maintained
until the rate of settlement ceases to be apparent but for not less than
48 hours.
v. Between the working load test and full load test the pile shall be kept
unloaded for a period of time sufficient for the pile to attain its full
recovery. The period of time shall be subject to the ruling of the
Engineer.
vi. The amount of settlement or recovery shall be read and recorded
immediately after the change of loading and at 5 to 10 minutes
intervals thereafter. Readings under working load, full test load and
during recovery at zero load need not be taken and recorded more
frequently than at one hour intervals.
vii. The Contractor shall within 24 hours of the completion of the test
submit to the Engineer for each pile tested a detailed record of testing
and in addition graphs prepared to suitable scale showing:
a. Load and settlement plotted above and below a common base line
of time.
b. Settlement and recovery plotted vertically against a base line of
load.
S502.9
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

SECTION 502: PILING
viii. For acceptance the settlement of the pile under the test load and the
recovery of the pile after its subsequent removal shall show permanent
settlement not exceeding the following values:
a. Bored cast-in-place pile: 6 mm.
b. Precast and driven cast-in-place concrete piles: 2.5mm.
c. Driven steel piles: 4mm.
2. Lateral Load Test
Lateral load test if required shall be carried out in accordance with ASTM D
3966-90 (Reapproved 1995) – Standard Method for Piles under Lateral Loads
502.5 Pile Records

1. A record of all piles driven or installed shall be kept by the Contractor and a
copy of the record for the work completed each day shall be given to the
Engineer within 24 hours.
2. The record shall consist of the information as set out in paragraph 5 of this
clause.
3. When instructed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall record the number of
blows for each 300mm of penetration of the piles and submit this information
on graphs.
4. On completion of the piling the Contractor shall deliver to the Engineer a
drawing recording the final depth of all piles relative to datum level.
5. Pile records shall include:
a. Data;
b. Identification;
c. Level of ground at the commencement of preparations;
d. Details of any circumstances previously notified to the Engineer under
Clause 502.1;
e. Any other information required by the Engineer;
f. Dimensions;
g. Depth driven;
h. Sequence of driving in groups;
i. Final set for the last 10 blows;
j. Type and weight of hammer used;
k. Type and condition of the packing on the pile head and the dolly on
the helmet;
l. For a single-acting hammer the final drop;
S502.10
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

SECTION 502: PILING
m. For a double-acting hammer the final frequency of blows;

n. Details of any interruption in driving;
o. Details of re-driving.

a. Measurement
The items to be measured under this Section are as follows:
a. A lump sum item for mobilization/demobilization of pile driving plant.
b. Where precast concrete piles are required the measurement for supplying
piles shall be the number of linear metres of pile accepted at site as
satisfactory for inclusion in the Works.
c. The measurement for driving precast concrete piling shall be the number
of linear metres remaining and accepted in the completed structure.
d. Where bored piles are specified, no separate payment shall be made for
supplying materials to be incorporated in the piles. The cost of supplying
materials shall be included in the linear metre rate for installing the piles.
e. The measurement for installing cast in place concrete piles shall be the
number of linear metres driven and accepted in the completed structure.
f. Cutting of piles and stripping of piles heads shall be measured as the
number of pile heads cut and accepted.
g. Supply and installation of Test Piles ordered by the Engineer shall be
measured for as other piles incorporated in the structure.
h. Each loading test shall be measured as a lump sum.
i. No measurement or payment will be made for the supply and/or installation
of piles that are unauthorized, defective, unsound or unsatisfactory in any
way, or for any cost incurred by the Contractor for such piles.
b. Payment
Payment for piling items under this Section will be made at the prices tendered
in the Bill of Quantities which prices and payments shall constitute full
compensation to carrying out the works as described in these Specifications
and as approved by the Engineer.
Prices and payments will cover:

a. For mobilization/demobilization of pile driving plant: this shall cover the
mobilizing and demobilizing after completion of the piling works, and shall
S502.11
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

SECTION 502: PILING
include all equipment, tools, materials, labour and other items necessary
for piling works. It shall also cover moving piling equipment on site and for
ground preparation works, cofferdams, other operations and all else
needed to carry out the piling works. This lump sum shall be paid in the
following proportions: 40% when equipment is set up and ready to operate;
30% spread over the period on site; and 30% when all equipment is
removed to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
b. The payments and prices for supplying precast concrete piles shall cover
all the requirements to complete this operation and shall include for all
labour, materials and equipment necessary for manufacturing, furnishing,
transporting, handling, storing, the marking of piles and all else needed to
carry out the works.
c. The payments and prices for driving precast concrete piling shall cover all
the requirements to complete this operation and shall include for all labour,
materials and equipment necessary for transporting, handling, erecting,
pitching, driving, lengthening of piles and all else needed to carry out the
works.
d. Where bored piles are specified, no separate payment shall be made for
supplying materials to be incorporated in the piles. The cost of supplying
materials shall be included in the linear metre rate for installing the piles.
e. The payments and prices for supplying and installing bored cast in place
concrete piles shall cover all labour, materials, equipment and casings
necessary for boring, boring work, installing reinforcement and casting
concrete complete in place including transporting, handling, vibrating
concrete, dewatering, fabrication, storing, disposal of excavated materials
and all else needed to carry out the works.
f. The payments and prices for the cutting of piles and stripping of piles heads
shall include all labour, materials and tools necessary to perform the work,
including clearing and disposal off site of broken out concrete piles and all
else needed to carry out the works.
g. Supply and installation of Test Piles ordered by the Engineer shall be paid
for as other piles incorporated in the structure.
h. The payments and prices for each pile load test will be paid for as a lump
sum and shall include for the cost of all material, equipment and labour
incidental to making the loading tests and all else needed to carry out the
works, as directed by the Engineer.
S502.12
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

SECTION 502: PILING
i. No payment will be made for the supply and/or installation of piles that are
unauthorized, defective, unsound or unsatisfactory in any way, or for any
cost incurred by the Contractor for such piles.
Payment items that may appear in this Section of the Bill of Quantities are:

502.1 Mobilization and Demobilization for L.S
piling equipment to site
502.2 Set up at abutment for piling including No.
platform and move
502.3 Supply, transport and deliver abutment piles to site lin.m
502.4 Handle, pitch and drive abutment piles No
502.5 Handle, pitch and drive load test piles lin.m
(vertical & Horizontal)
502.6 Cutting of surplus and stripping pile head No.
502.7 Reinstatement of river bed L.S
502.8 Loading test at abutment No.
502.9 Bored reinforced concrete piles lin.m
S502.13
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

SECTION 503: PRECAST PRESTRESSED CONCRETE GIRDERS AND BEAMS
CONTENTS
503.1 Description
503.2 Materials
_____________________________________________________________________________
503.1 Description
This work shall consist of the manufacture, storage, transportation and erection in its
final location of all beams in accordance with these Specifications and in conformity
with the Drawings.
503.2 Materials
a. Cement
Portland cement shall be Type I, II and III conforming to AASHTO M85,
“Specification for Portland Cement”.
b. Aggregates
Fine aggregate shall conform to AASHTO M6, “Specification for Fine Aggregate
for Portland Cement Concrete”. Coarse aggregate shall conform to AASHTO M80
“Specification for Coarse Aggregate for Portland Cement Concrete”, except that
Clause 4 therein shall be revised to allow 50% maximum wear as determined by
AASHTO T96. Coarse aggregate size shall be 19mm to 4.75mm.
c. Water
Water for use with cement in concrete shall be clean and free from injurious
amounts of oil, acid, alkali, organic matter or other deleterious substances. The
mortar made with the water and approved sand shall develop a compressive
strength at 7 and 28 days of not less than 90% of that developed by the same
mortar when made with water of known satisfactory quality. The mortars and tests
shall be made in accordance with AASHTO T71 “Standard Method of Test for
Effect of Organic Impurities in Fine Aggregates on Strength of Mortar”.
d. Admixtures
Admixtures shall conform to AASHTO M194 “Specifications for Chemical
Admixtures of Concrete”. Admixtures containing chlorides shall not be used.
S503.1
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

e. Storage of Aggregates
Fine and coarse aggregates shall be stored separately except as noted in the
following clause, so as to avoid the two materials from becoming intermixed.
Sufficient aggregates shall be stockpiled to ensure continuity of work and uniformity
of aggregate strength and colours. Minimum sizes of stockpiles are to be approved
by the Engineer.
f. Premixed Aggregates
Premixed aggregates in which the fine and coarse aggregates are combined in
definite proportions will be permitted provided that the aggregates are delivered in
batches direct to the hopper of the concrete mixer. Premixed aggregates shall be
transported and delivered in batches, each containing the correct quantity for one
batch of concrete. At no time after the fine and coarse aggregates are combined
shall any batch come in contact with or intermingle with any other batch.
g. Measurement of Materials
Materials shall be measured by weighing except as otherwise specified. The
apparatus provided for weighing the aggregate and cement shall be suitably
designed and constructed to secure the specified quantities in each batch. Each
size of aggregate and the cement shall be weighed separately. The accuracy of
all weighing devices shall be such that all weights may be determined to within 1%.
The Contractor shall periodically calibrate the weighing devices as required by the
Engineer.
Cement in standard packages need not be weighed, but partial packages and bulk
cement shall be weighed.
The mixing water shall be measured by volume or by weight. An approved water-

measuring device shall be provided upon or in conjunction with the mixer capable
of being set to deliver the specified quantity of water. Such measuring devices
shall be accurate to within one-half of 1% of the capacity of the storage tank.
The surface moisture in fine aggregates shall be determined in accordance with

AASHTO T142 “Standard Method of Test for Surface Moisture in Fine Aggregate”,
and the batch weights of aggregates and water adjusted accordingly.
S503.1
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

h. Reinforcing Steel
All reinforcing steel shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M31
“Specifications for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete
Reinforcement”. All bars shall be graded 40 and deformed.
i. Prestressing Steel
Prestressing steel shall consist of Grade 270 seven-wire, un-coated, stress-
relieved steel strands having a nominal diameter as called for on the Drawings and
conforming to the requirements AASHTO M203 “Specifications for Un-coated
Seven-Wire Stress-relieved Strand for Prestressed Concrete”.
j. Forms
All side and soffit forms shall be of steel construction unless otherwise approved
by the Engineer, and shall be completely mortar-tight and of sufficient rigidity to
prevent distortion due to incidental loadings during the construction operations.
Forms shall be filleted at all sharp corners and shall be given a bevel of draft in the
case of all projections.
The design of the forms shall take into account the effect of vibration of concrete
as it is placed.
k. Bearings
Elastomeric bearings shall comply with Section 507 and be as indicated on the
Drawings or in the absence of any such definition shall comply with the following
requirements or approved equal:
i. Material – “Neoprene” (100% virgin chloroprene);

ii. The compressive strain of any layer shall not exceed 7% at 5.5N/mm2 average
unit pressure;
iii. The hardness shall be 70 durometers;
iv. The shear resistance shall not exceed 0.75 N/mm2 at 25% strain of the total
effective rubber thickness after an extended four (4) day ambient temperature
of - 29o C.
Test certificates shall be submitted to the Engineer to show that the bearings
comply with these requirements.
S503.2
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___


a. Plant and Key Personnel
Plant and equipment used in the manufacture of the beams shall be equivalent
to that used in modern prestressing plants and shall be under the direction of a
suitably qualified engineer.
Key personnel involved in the manufacture of the precast members shall be

experienced in the production of prestressed units. A list of key personnel (with
their relevant experience) plus complete details of plant and equipment shall be
submitted with Tender Documents.
b. Alternative Sections
Alternative prestressed concrete sections to those detailed on the Drawings will
be accepted provided that the variations are approved by the Engineer in writing
and the following criteria met: -
i. The spacing and lengths of the precast members are unchanged.

ii. The overall depth is not increased by more than 5%.
iii. The proposed alternative section is equivalent in strength to the sections
detailed on the Drawings. Loading shall be as shown on the drawings or
in the Brief Description of Works incorporated in Volume III.
iv. The proposed section will not increase the dead weight of the precast
member by more than 5%.
v. Details of the proposed section are subject to the Engineer’s approval.
vi. Any modification to the Drawings and other details shall be carried out by
the Contractor and submitted to the Engineer for acceptance and approval
prior to beam manufacture.
vii. Costs incurred in preparing such modifications will be borne by the
Contractor, whether his Tender is accepted or rejected.
Sufficient details of proposed alternatives shall be included with the Tender to

permit the Engineer to evaluate the acceptability of the proposed alternatives.
S503.3
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

c. Alternate Systems of Tensioning

The prestressed concrete members are detailed on the basis of pre-tensioned
bonded high tensile strand. Other systems including post-tensioning may be
used providing they comply with the following requirements.
i. They have been proved reliable.
ii. They can be used within the space limitations imposed by the concrete
sections.
iii. The prestressing elements for use with such systems can be deflected and
stressed as shown on the Drawings without increasing frictional losses or
without inducing undesirable secondary stresses.
iv. The Contractor undertakes to furnish adequate and complete alternate
anchorage and other prestressing details to be approved by the Engineer.
v. Where wires in a cable are not stressed simultaneously, spacing members
must be sufficiently rigid so as not to be displaced during successive
tensioning operations.
vi. The anchorage shall be securely housed and otherwise protected against
damage.
d. Shop Drawings
i. Shop drawings of the prestressed concrete beams shall consist of detail
drawings, erection diagrams and other working plans showing details,
dimensions, sizes of members and other information necessary for the
complete fabrication and erection of the prestressed concrete beams.
ii. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval, three sets of all
working, erection and detail drawings. These shall be submitted in
sufficient time to allow discussion and correction prior to the beginning of
the work they cover. Any work done, or materials ordered prior to the
approval of these drawings shall be at the Contractor’s risk. One set of
these drawings shall be returned to the Contractor, approved or marked
with the corrections required to be made; the other copies will be retained
by the Engineer.
iii. The drawings shall also include details of the lifting devices required in the
beams, which the Contractor intends to use.
iv. It is expressly understood that the approval by the Engineer of the
Contractor’s working drawings relates to the requirements for strength and
detail and that such approval shall not relieve the Contractor from any
S503.4
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

obligation to furnish acceptable materials or to provide completed

construction that is satisfactory in every way or from responsibility for errors
in dimensions.
v. In addition to the approved sets of drawings specified above, the
Contractor shall furnish the Engineer with four (4) copies of all working
drawings as finally approved for construction purposes. On completion of
the Contract, the Contractor shall furnish the Engineer with a complete set
of “As Constructed” drawings on Mylar matte finish on one side for positive
to positive reproduction.
e. Prestressing Steel
i. All strands used in a beam shall be obtained from one (1) mill. Each reel
of strand shall be identified with a securely attached tag showing the size
of strand, AASHTO or ASTM designation number, heat number and name
or mark of the manufacture.
ii. Each batch of strand shall be identified with a certificate stating all the
relevant data about the batch. A copy of this certificate shall be securely
attached to the batch by the manufacturers before delivery to site. The
Contractor shall supply the Engineer with two (2) sets of 3.60 metre long
test specimens, for each melt number represented.
iii. The Engineer’s approval for the strand shall be obtained before any
prestressing steel is used.
iv. Strands shall be stored in clean conditions and shall be protected at all
times to prevent corrosion and shall be dry and free from loose rust, mill
scale, oil, grease and other injurious materials, immediately before the
concrete is placed.
v. Prestressing shall be carried out under the direction of a competent
supervisor and by personnel who have had approved previous experience
in the use of the type of equipment proposed all of which shall be subject
to the approval of the Engineer. The sub-letting of all or part of this work to
a specialist sub-contractor shall be subject to the prior approval of the
Engineer.
vi. The Contractor shall supply to the Engineer for each heat number
represented, two sets of the standard mill test reports and two 1-metre long
test specimens identified according to heat number. The Engineer’s
approval shall be obtained before any strand is used.
S503.5
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

vii. Strands shall be protected at all times to prevent corrosion and shall be dry
and clean (free from scale, rust, oil, soap, grease and other material)
immediately before the concrete is placed.
f. Stressing
i. Strands shall be located as shown on the Drawings and suitable devices
shall be provided to ensure that the correct positioning of the strands is
maintained during casting. When strands are being placed particular care
shall be taken that the strands shall not come into contact with the oiled
surface of the forms or be otherwise oiled. Any strands so soiled shall be
cleaned with a petrol soaked rag or by other approved method. The
anchorages shall be such as to prevent any slip occurring during the
casting or curing operations.
ii. The tensioning systems to be used shall be equipped with accurate
calibrated gauges that have been calibrated for the specified jack and
controls within the last two (2) months. Before stressing commences,
certified calibration curves shall be furnished to Engineer for the tension
system and any other tensioning devices that may be used.
iii. Gauges shall be recalibrated at three (3) month intervals and if during the
work any gauges give erratic results, the tension system or tension device
shall be recalibrated. The Contractor shall provide a purpose made CCL
proving ring or equal approved with a capacity of 20,000 kg for calibrating
the gauges.
iv. Before commencing the stressing operation, an initial tensioning force shall
be applied to each strand to equalise stresses and eliminate slack. This
force shall not exceed 1350 kg and shall be applied to each tendon by
portable jack or other approved device. After the initial tension forces have
been applied, reference points shall be established for each tendon from
which elongation by final tensioning forces can be measured.
v. All strands in a tendon or cable shall be stressed simultaneously and
loaded equally unless permission to do otherwise is received in writing from
the Engineer. The method of tensioning is to be maintained steady in the
stands until released.
vi. Where any strand in a group of strands stressed together slips the
tensioning of the whole group shall be relaxed, the strands re-set and the
whole group tensioned again.
S503.6
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

vii. Prestressing force shall be determined by reading the jacking load on a

calibrated gauge and by measuring the elongation of strands and
calculating the force required to produce the measured elongation. When
there is a difference of over five percent (5%) between the prestressing
forces measured by both these methods, then the cause of the discrepancy
shall be ascertained and corrected.
viii. To reduce the friction losses in draped strands in beams that are stressed
in lines, the draped strands may be partially stressed in a straight or partly
draped profile and subsequently deflected to the required profile and load
by pulling up or pushing down (deflection) over approved rollers. When this
method of stressing draped strands is used, the loads in selected draped
strands is monitored at all stages by using a purpose made proving ring or
similar device attached to the strands at the ‘dead end’ of the bed. The
final load in the strand shall not be less than ninety-five percent (95%) of
the specified load.
ix. Calculations for elongation shall include appropriate allowances for
possible slippage or relaxation of the anchorages and for the difference in
temperatures of strands when tensioned and when concrete is placed.
x. For temperature difference exceeding 17o C, correction shall be made by
initial overstressing up to a maximum of 75% of the ultimate strength. The
Contractor shall supply the Engineer with a soil testing electronic
thermometer model G-1703 or equal, approved by measuring the
temperature of the strand in the bed.
g. Harping
i. Where called for on the Drawings, strands shall be harped. The method of
deflecting the strands shall be submitted with the working drawings for
approval by the Engineer. The method of harping should be such that
friction losses in the draped strands during stressing are less than 5% and
the final load in the draped strands is not less than 95% of the required
load.
h. Reinforcing Steel
i. All bending diagrams shall be furnished by the Contractor for the approval
of the Engineer and any material ordered before such bending diagrams
have been approved shall be at the Contractor’s risk. The approval of
S503.7
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

bending diagrams by the Engineer shall in no way relieve the Contractor of

responsibility for the correctness thereof.
ii. All reinforcing bars shall be of the lengths called for on the Drawings. Bent
bars shall be cold bent to the shapes shown on the Drawings and all bends
shall be accurately made around pins of minimum diameter of 6 x d for
25mm bars and under, 8 x d for bars larger than 25mm, and 2 x d but not
greater than 4 x d for ties. The extension of free ends on hooks shall be 4
x d.
iii. All steel reinforcement shall be accurately placed in the positions shown on
the Drawings and firmly held during the placing and setting of concrete.
iv. When placed in the work, it shall be free from dirt, detrimental rust, loose
scale, paint, oil or other foreign material. Bars shall be tied at all
intersections except where spacing is less than 300mm in each direction,
where alternate intersections shall be tied. Distance from the forms shall
be maintained by stays, ties, hangers or other approved supports. Before
the placing of concrete in any member commences, the placing and
securing of reinforcement in the forms shall be approved by the Engineer.
v. All reinforcement shall be placed in the full lengths called for on the
Drawings. Splicing of bars, except where shown or indicated on the
Drawings will not be permitted except when authorised in writing by the
Engineer. Splices shall be staggered as far as possible. Unless otherwise
shown or called for on the Drawings, the development length shall be in
accordance with AASHTO 1992 “Standard Specification for Highway
Bridges”, Clause 8.32. The bars shall be placed in contact and wired
together so as to maintain a clearance of not less than the minimum
specified clear distance to other bars and the minimum specified distance
to the surface of the concrete. Welding of reinforcing steel will not be
permitted.
i. Forms
i. All forms shall be set and maintained true to the line designated until the
concrete is sufficiently hardened. When forms appear to be unsatisfactory
in any way, either before or during the placing of concrete, the Engineer
shall order the work stopped until the defects have been corrected.
ii. The shape, strength, rigidity, water-tightness and surface smoothness of
re-used forms shall be maintained at all times. Any warped or bulged
S503.8
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

formwork must be realigned before being re-used. Forms, which are

unsatisfactory in any respect, shall not be re-used.
iii. Exterior forms shall be treated in moderation with an approved oil before
placing the concrete. Any material, which will adhere to or discolour the
concrete, shall not be used. Where plywood forms are permitted, all
exterior beams shall be constructed before construction of interior beams.
iv. Where applicable, forms shall be constructed to permit movement of the
member during transfer of stress.
j. Mix Requirements
i. Minimum compressive strength at time of transfer of stress to the concrete
and at 28 days (as determined by AASHTO T22) shall be as called for on
the Drawings.
ii. Maximum total water cement ratio shall be 0.40.
Maximum slump as determined by AASHTO T119, shall be 50mm unless
otherwise approved by the Engineer.
iii. In order to minimise shrinkage and creep, the quantity of mixing water and
cement shall be kept to a minimum. Not more than 390 kg of Type III, nor
more than 475 kg of Type I or Type II Portland cement, shall be used per
cubic metre of concrete without the written approval of the Engineer.
k. Admixtures
i. The Contractor shall add sufficient plasticizing agent to the concrete to
ensure that all concrete in any individual member has been placed and
consolidated prior to initial set occurring.
ii. The plasticizing agent shall be “Plastiment” as manufactured by Sika
Corporation or approved equal.
l. Mixing
i. Concrete shall be thoroughly mixed in a batch mixer of an approved size
and type, which will ensure a uniform distribution of the materials
throughout the mass. It shall be mixed for the period and drum speed
specified by the manufacturer of the mixer.
ii. The mixer shall be equipped with adequate water storage and a device for
accurately measuring and automatically controlling the amount of water
used in each batch. Mechanical means shall be provided for recording the
S503.9
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

number of revolutions for each batch and automatically preventing the

discharge of the mixer until the materials have been mixed for the specified
minimum time.
iii. The entire contents of the mixer shall be removed from the drum before
materials for a succeeding batch are placed therein. The materials
composing a batch shall be deposited simultaneously in the mixer.
iv. The first batch of concrete materials placed in the mixer shall contain a
sufficient excess of cement, sand and water to coat the inside of the drum
without reducing the required mortar content of the mix. Upon the
cessation of mixing for a considerable period, the mixer shall be thoroughly
cleaned.
v. Mixing shall begin within 15 minutes after the cement has been added
either to the water or aggregate.
vi. Within 30 minutes after the introduction of the mixing water to the cement
and aggregate, or the cement to the aggregate, the concrete shall be
placed in its final position in the forms, except that in hot weather or under
other conditions contributing to quick stiffening of the concrete, the
maximum allowable time may be reduced by the Engineer.
vii. Concrete mixing and transporting equipment shall be capable of placing
concrete in the forms at the rate of 15 cubic meters per hour. Batch delivery
shall be uniform and at a minimum interval of 10 minutes.
viii. The maximum size of the batch shall not exceed the maximum rated
capacity of the mixer as stated by the manufacturer and as stamped on the
mixer.
ix. No concrete shall have a temperature lower than 21o C nor more than 32o
C.
m. Handling and Placing Concrete

i. In preparation for the placing of concrete, all construction debris and
extraneous matter shall be removed from the interior of forms. Struts,
stays and braces, serving temporarily to hold the forms in correct shape
and alignment pending the placing of concrete at their locations, shall be
removed when the concrete placing has reached an elevation rendering
their service unnecessary. These temporary members shall be entirely
removed from the forms and not buried in the concrete.
S503.10
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

ii. Concrete shall be placed in the shortest possible time after mixing is
completed and before it has taken an initial set. It shall be placed as close
as possible to its final position to avoid segregation and displacement of
reinforcement.
iii. Concrete may be deposited provided that without the use of pipes,
suitable measures are taken to prevent segregation and premature
coating of upper reinforcing steel. When pipes are used, they shall, as far
as practicable, be kept full of concrete during placing and their lower ends
shall be kept buried in the newly placed concrete.
iv. After initial set of the concrete, the forms shall not be jarred and no strain
shall be placed on the ends of reinforcing bars, which project.
v. Concrete should be placed in at least two continuous horizontal layers in
I-beams not more than one metre deep and in at least three layers for I-
beams of greater depth. The thickness of the first layer should be such
that the top of the concrete is slightly above the top of the bottom flange
fillet. In three-layer placement, the top of the concrete after the second
layer of concrete has been placed should be slightly above the bottom of
the top flange fillet. The beam forms must be completely filled by the third
layer.
vi. The second and third layers shall follow the preceding layer before any
initial set takes place. Failure to follow the first and second layers closely
with their successive layers might result in a plane of weakness (cold
joint), which would produce an unacceptable beam.
n. Vibration
Concrete, during and immediately after depositing, shall be thoroughly
compacted. The compaction shall be done by mechanical vibration subject to
the following provisions:
i. The vibrations shall be internal for all accessible parts and shall be
external for inaccessible parts only as in the case of bottom flange of I-
beams.
ii. Vibrators shall be of type and design approved by the Engineer. They
shall be capable of transmitting vibration to the concrete at frequencies of
not less than 7,000 revolutions per minute.
S503.11
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

iii. The intensity of vibration shall be such as to visibly affect a mass of

concrete and produce minimum 25mm slump over a radius of at least
450mm.
iv. The Contractor shall provide a sufficient number of vibrators to properly
compact each batch immediately after it is placed in the forms.
v. Vibrators shall be manipulated so as to thoroughly work the concrete
around the reinforcement and embedded fixtures and into the corners and
angles of the forms.
Vibration shall be applied at the point of deposit and in the area of freshly
deposited concrete. The vibrators shall be inserted into and withdrawn
from the concrete slowly. The vibration shall be of sufficient duration and
intensity to thoroughly compact the concrete, but shall not be continued so
as to cause segregation. Vibration shall not be continued at any one point
to the extent that localised areas of grout are formed.
Application of vibrators shall be at points uniformly spaced and not farther

apart than twice the radius over which the vibration is visibly effective.
vi. Vibration shall not be applied directly or through the reinforcement to

sections or layers of concrete, which have hardened to the degree that the
concrete ceases to be plastic under vibration. It shall not be used to make
concrete flow in the forms over distances so great as to cause segregation
and vibrators shall not be used to transport concrete in the forms.
vii. Vibration shall be supplemented by such spading as is necessary to ensure
a smooth surface and dense concrete along form surfaces and in corners
and locations impossible to reach with the vibrators.
viii. Vibrator heads shall be smaller than the minimum distance between
prestressing steel.
o. Removal of Forms
i. The removal of all forms shall conform to Specification Section 501 except
as amended herein.
ii. The Engineer shall be informed in advance when the Contractor intends to
strike any forms.
S503.12
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

iii. The time at which the forms are removed shall be the responsibility of the
Contractor.
iv. The forms may be removed when either: -
a. A cylinder compressive strength of not less than 13.7 N/mm2 has been
attained to the satisfaction of the Engineer, or
b. A minimum of 18 hours has elapsed between the completion of placing
of the concrete and the start of the removal of the forms.
p. Test Cylinders
i. The Contractor shall provide all labour, material, equipment and
transport as may be required by the Engineer for the making of test
slump cylinders (AASHO test T23) and for performing slum tests
(AASHTO test T119) from samples of concrete to be used in casting
beams.
ii. Cylinders shall be made in groups for testing. A group or groups of
cylinders shall be made from each member unless otherwise approved
by the Engineer. Each group of cylinders shall consist of two 28-day
cylinders and an agreed number of release cylinders.
a. Sufficient cylinders shall be cured in the same manner as the

member and tested by the Engineer in the Contractor’s testing
office to assess when the concrete has attained the specified
transfer strength. No strength shall be released until authorised by
the Engineer (AASHTO T22).
b. Two cylinders will be identified as ‘acceptance cylinders’ and tested
by the Engineer in the Contractor’s testing office to determine the
28-day strength.
iii. The strength of the concrete in the member shall be taken as the average
of the compressive strength of the ‘acceptable cylinders’.
q. Concrete Testing Office

i. The Contractor shall provide a building at the location where the precast
prestressed beams are built for the preparation and storing of test
cylinders and concrete testing equipment used by the Engineer. The
building shall be 4 m x 4 m in size and have ample window space. The
S503.13
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

Contractor shall install and maintain satisfactory lighting and cooling

equipment to maintain an inside air temperature of 21o C. He shall also
install a work table with a 20 mm plywood top measuring 1.0 m x 2.5 m
and shall provide a minimum of 2 square metres of shelves as required
by the Engineer. A supply of clean water suitable for washing testing
equipment shall be provided within 30 metres of the building.
ii. The building shall be equipped with a curing tank or tanks of sufficient
capacity to hold 60 standard test cylinders. This curing tank shall be
equipped with thermostatic controls, which will regulate the temperature
of the saturated lime solution in accordance with AASHTO Designation
T23-73.
iii. The Contractor shall maintain and make available to the Engineer a
testing machine suitable for determining compressive strengths up to 70
N/mm2 of moulded concrete cylinders in accordance with AASHTO
Designation T22-74. This machine may be installed in the concrete
testing office or elsewhere on the site at a location acceptable to the
Engineer and shall be available to break all concrete cylinders taken
during the precasting operations.
iv. The Contractor shall provide accurate scales for weighing cylinders to a
tolerance of + 1 gramme.
r. Protection and Curing of Concrete

i. During and after placement of the concrete, the ambient air temperature
surrounding the member shall be maintained between 27o C and 37o C
for as long as required to obtain the design strength.
ii. Timber side forms until removal, and all exposed surfaces shall be kept
continuously wet for a minimum period of five (5) days after the concrete
has been placed. This period may be reduced by the Engineer when
high early release strength is attained. When steel forms are used to
cure the sides of the beams they should not be loosened and the tops
of the beams shall be kept continuously wet.
iii. Prior to the concrete set, exposed surfaces shall be kept damp by
applying water with a nozzle that so atomises the flow, that a mist and
not a spray is formed. The moisture from the nozzle shall not be allowed
to accumulate on the concrete in a quantity sufficient to cause a flow or
wash the surface.
S503.14
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

iv. The protection and curing of the concrete shall conform to Specification
Section 501 except as amended herein, and shall be approved by the
Engineer prior to the manufacture of the beams. The prestressed
precast beams may be cured using water, steam or radiant heat, as
described below.
v. During and after placement of the concrete, the ambient air temperature
surrounding the beam shall be maintained in the range 27o C to 38o C
for as long as required to achieve the design cylinder compressive
strength.
vi. The forms, coverings and exposed concrete surfaces shall be
completely inundated in water for 14 days from completion of placing the
concrete.
vii. Water shall be applied in the form of a mist spray that atomises the flow
of water so that a fine spray is formed. The moisture from the mist spray
shall not be allowed to accumulate on the concrete in a quantity
sufficient to cause damage to the concrete surface.
viii. The initial application of steam shall be four (4) hours after the
completion of placing of the concrete. This period may be reduced if
permitted by the Engineer.
ix. During the period between completion of placing of the concrete and
commencement of steam curing the beam shall be kept moist as
specified in Specification Section 501.
x. An enclosure shall be constructed to contain the live steam with
minimum moisture and heat losses. It shall allow free circulation of
steam and shall not be in contact with the member.
xi. Steam at the outlets shall be at 100% relative humidity and low pressure.
Application of the steam shall not be directly on to the concrete and shall
be from outlets distributed uniformly along the whole length of the
member.
xii. During application of the steam the ambient air temperature shall
increase at a rate not to exceed 22o C per hour until a maximum
temperature of from 60o C to 66o C is reached. The maximum
temperature shall be held until the concrete has reached the desired
strength. In discontinuing the steam, the ambient sir temperature shall
not decrease at a rate to exceed 22o C per hour until a temperature has
been reached about 11o C above the temperature of the air to which the
S503.15
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

concrete will be exposed. The forms shall not be stripped until the
completion of this cooling off period. After stripping of forms, the
concrete surfaces shall be kept continuously moist for a period of at least
24 hours.
xiii. Provision shall be made for regular checking of the ambient air
temperature.
s. Curing with Radiant Heat and Moisture

i. Curing with radiant heat and moisture shall be done by heating of the
casting area in combination with the continuous application of moisture.
ii. Heat shall only be applied by means of pipes circulating steam, hot oil
or hot water. The pipes shall not be in contact with concrete or form
surfaces.
iii. The moisture shall be applied as specified in Specification Section 501.
iv. If in the opinion of the Engineer, the curing of a beam fails to comply with
any part of this Specification then this will be deemed to be sufficient
cause for the beam to be rejected.
t. De-tensioning of Strands
i. Strands shall not be de-tensioned until the Contractor is notified by the
Engineer that the concrete is of satisfactory strength.
ii. Strands shall be released gradually and evenly to the unit and the
sequence of releasing strands shall be approved by the Engineer. No
departure from this procedure shall be permitted without the Engineer’s
approval.
u. Finishing Concrete Surfaces

i. The finish of the concrete surface shall conform to Class 1 Ordinary
Surface Finish as specified in Specification Section 501 except as
amended herein.
ii. Throughout the work, special attention shall be paid to the forms and the
placement of concrete to ensure the production of a dense concrete with a
smooth and uniform surface finish.
iii. Any remedial treatment of the concrete surfaces shall be agreed with the
Engineer following an inspection immediately after removal of the forms
S503.16
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

and shall be carried out without delay. No remedial work will be done
before the agreement of the Engineer is given for the proposed repair.
iv. Only a limited amount of remedial work will be allowed and, if in the opinion
of the Engineer, the surface finish is substandard, this will be sufficient
cause for the rejection of the beam.
v. The top surface of the beam to which the insitu deck slab will be bonded,
shall have its hardened concrete surface roughened, as required by the
Engineer, to remove laitance, etc, in a manner that will not leave loosened
particles of aggregate or damaged concrete at the surface and it shall be
thoroughly cleaned of foreign matter and laitance.
v. Protective Coating for Ends of Strands

i. After de-tensioning and completion of curing, the ends of all high tensile
strands shall be ground flush with the concrete surface and then covered
with two protective coatings of an approved galvanising agent; flame
cutting of strands against the concrete is not permitted.
ii. All materials shall be supplied and applied by the Contractor in accordance
with the manufacturer’s recommendations under the direction of the
Engineer.
w. Alternative Sections
i. Alternative prestressed concrete sections to those detailed on the Drawings
may be accepted providing that:
a. The spacing and lengths of the precast members are unchanged.
b. The overall depth is not increased by more than 5%.
c. The proposed alternative section is equivalent in strength to the
sections detailed on the Drawings.
d. The proposed section will not increase the dead weight of the precast
member by more than 5%.
e. Details of the proposed section are subject to the Engineer’s
approval.
S503.17
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

x. Tolerances
i. Each member shall be so constructed that the following tolerances are
maintained:
Stringers
a. Depths and widths (overall and parts): + 6 mm.
b. Lengths: + 0, -3 mm per 4.6 m length.
c. End angle (deviation from designated angle)
Horizontal: + 6 mm.
Vertical: + 3 mm per 0.3 m of beam height
d. Location of holes and inserts: + 6 mm.
e. Lateral alignment at any point: 0.05 of stringer length.
f. Camber differential between adjacent Beams: 3 mm per 3 m to a
maximum of 12 mm.
g. Centre of gravity of strand group: + 12 mm.
h. Centre of Gravity of deflected strands at end of beam: + 12 mm.
i. Position of hold-down points for deflected strands: + 75 mm.
j. Position of handling devices: + 75 mm.
Items a, d, c and f will be checked when the element is 14 days old.
Girders
a. Depths and widths (overall and parts) + 5mm.
b. Lengths zero to minus 10 mm per 15 metres of length.
c. End angle (deviation from designated angle). Horizontal + 5 mm Vertical
+ 10 mm per metre of beam height.
d. Location of holes and inserts + 5 mm; angle at diaphragm holes to be + 4o.
e. Distance between c/c bearings + 5 mm.
f. Bearing area deviation from designated plane + 2 mm.
g. Lateral alignment at any point 0.05% of member length.
h. Camber differential between adjacent beams 1mm per 1 metre to a
maximum of 10 mm.
i. Centre of gravity of strand group + 10 mm vertically.
j. Centre of gravity of deflected strands at end of beam + 10 mm vertically.
k. Centre of gravity of all strands + 3 mm laterally.
l. Position of hold-down points for deflected strands + 25 mm.
m. Position of handling devices + 75 mm.
S503.18
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

Items (a), (d), and (h) will be checked when the element is 14 days old.
i. The Contractor shall employ an adequate method of checking these

tolerances both before and after placement of concrete. Approval of the
method of checking tolerances by the Engineer will not limit the
Contractor’s responsibility in any way for the accuracy of members.
ii. Tapes used for establishing lengths of beams shall be calibrated when
required by the Engineer at an approved testing laboratory at the
Contractor’s expense.
y. Handling, Transportation and Erecting Beams

i. Beams shall at all times be kept in their normal upright position during
handling and transportation. They shall be picked up only by means of two
vertical forces applied to lifting devices at the end of the beams as shown
on the Drawings or as approved by the Engineer.
ii. Stored beams shall rest on unyielding level supports.
iii. When stored or loaded for transportation, beams shall be supported near
each end at a point between the centreline of bearing and a distance
300mm towards the mid-span and shall not be further supported anywhere
between these supports. Girders over 18 metres long to be transported on
public roads shall be transported on Sundays only unless otherwise
approved by the Police Traffic Branch.
iv. During erection, the Contractor shall avoid subjecting the beams or their
supporting structure to any sudden shock loads. Piers and abutments shall
be suitably protected from damage during erection. Approved lifting
devices shall be burned off or otherwise removed after erection.
z. Elastomeric Bearing
i. Elastomeric bearings shall be placed on the mortar pads to the lines and
levels shown on the Drawings. Bearings shall include dowel holes where
aa. Inspector’s Office

i. Except for “on site” precasting work where an office is already provided
under the general contract, the Contractor shall provide at the point of
manufacture a suitable lock-up office for the sole use of Inspectors. The
S503.19
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

office shall be weatherproof and reasonably soundproof and provided with

ample window area and ventilation. Location of the office shall be
approved by the Engineer. The office shall measure not less than 4 m x 4
m. The Contractor shall install satisfactory lights and a window-type air-
conditioner and provide a portable radio transceiver base station (5 watts),
a drafting table 1.0 m x 2.5 m in size and a plywood top desk 750 mm x 1
metre, two chairs, drafting stool and one square metre of shelves. The
Contractor shall also provide an acceptable Elsan type latrine.
ii. Whether the Inspector’s office is provided during the work, or already
exists, the Contractor shall, during the life of the work, regularly clean and
properly maintain and light the office.

1. The unit of measurement for payment for prestressed precast beams shall
be the number of beams in place and accepted by the Engineer in
accordance with these specifications.
2. The unit price bid per beam for furnishing and erecting precast beams shall
include full compensation for furnishing all labour, materials, tools, equipment
and incidentals, including reinforcing and prestressing steel, concrete,
cement and formwork as required, and for doing all work involved in
construction, furnishing, transporting, storage, sampling, testing and erecting
precast beams as shown on the Drawings, and as specified in these
Specifications including the Inspector’s Office and any special provisions,
and as directed by the Engineer.
3. This unit price shall also include all cost and expenses of any site preparation
works necessary, obtaining Police Permission and conforming with all traffic
requirements associated with erection of the beams. Full compensation shall
also include drilling dowel holes where needed and supplying and placing
dowels, furnishing and placing joint fillers and sealers.
4. Progress payments for prestressed precast beams will be made on the
following basis:
i. 70% cast, stripped and accepted.

ii. 10% for finishing beams.
iii. 15% for transporting and erecting beams.
S503.20
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

iv. 5% when joints and anchor bolts are installed.
Payments items, which may appear in the Bills of Quantities, are as follows:
Supply and Install Prestressed Precast Concrete

Elements for: -
503.1 24-30m span (AASHTO Type IV) No.
503.2 16-24m span (AASHTO Type III) No.
503.3 Channel Beams No.
503.4 Elastomeric bearing (including stainless steel bearing No.

plates, all studs and bolts where applicable).
S503.21
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

SECTION 504: REINFORCING STEEL
CONTENTS
504.1 Description
504.2 Materials
_____________________________________________________________________________
504.1 Description
The work to be performed under this Section consists of furnishing and placing
reinforcing bars of the grade, type and size designated, in accordance with these
Specifications, and in conformity with the locations shown on the Drawings.
504.2 Materials
Bar reinforcement in sizes up to and including 32 mm. shall conform to the
requirements of ASTM 615 Grade 60 from billet steel grades, except that the use of
cold twisted bars is forbidden. Additionally, only metric sized bars shall be used in
the Works.
Welded steel fabric (mesh) shall conform to the relevant AASHTO specification.
Weldable rebar to conform to ASTM A706.
If purchased in small lots from a warehouse, reinforcement may be accepted at the

discretion of the Engineer upon certification that it meets the requirements of the
Specifications listed above and subject to the applicable bending test.
Bar reinforcement for concrete structures, except that 6 mm, which may be round,
shall be deformed bars.
Tying wire for fixing of steel reinforcement shall consist of 1.6mm or 1.25mm
annealed wire.

1. General
The Contractor shall prepare, thoroughly check, and submit to the Engineer
for approval, working drawings, bar lists, and bar bending diagrams as may be
S504.1
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

required for the detailing and placement of reinforcing steel to all reinforced
concrete structures. Weights of steel shall be shown for each structure.
Working drawings shall be 600 mm x 900 mm in size. Bar lists may be on

smaller size sheets.
Four prints of each shall be submitted to the Engineer for his approval.
Approval of these Drawings by the Engineer shall not relieve the Contractor of
any of his responsibilities under the terms of the Contract.
2. Bending
Bars shall be cold bent to the shapes shown on the Drawings and all bends
shall be made accurately around pins of the following sizes:
- Bars 25 mm and under: minimum pin size of 6 times the bar diameter
- Bars larger than 25 mm: minimum pin size of 8 times the bar diameter
- Ties: pin size over 2 times, but not greater than 4 times the bar
diameter.
The extension of free ends on hooks shall be 4 times the bar diameter, but not
less than 60 mm. Bends for stirrups and ties shall have radii on the inside of
the bar of not less than one bar diameter.
3. Fixing
Reinforcement shall be placed accurately in the positions shown on the
Drawings and held securely during the placing and compacting of concrete.
The placing and fastening of reinforcement in each section of the work shall
be approved by the Engineer before any concrete is deposited in the section.
All reinforcement shall be free from dirt, oil, paint, grease, mill scale, and loose
or thick rust before being placed.
Main reinforcing bars carrying determinate stresses shall be spliced only

where shown on the Drawings unless approval is obtained from the Engineer
in writing before the reinforcing steel is ordered. Other reinforcing bars shall
have a minimum length of 6 metres unless otherwise specified in the Drawings
or limited by the physical dimensions of the section being reinforced. Splices
S504.2
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

shall be staggered as far as possible. Welding of reinforcing steel shall not be

permitted. Unless otherwise called for on the Drawings, a minimum lap length
of 40 times the diameter of the bars shall be maintained.
Bars shall be tied at all intersections except where spacing is less than 300
mm in each direction, when alternate intersections shall be tied. On site
welding of reinforcing steel shall not be permitted. Where required to prevent
the movement of the free ends of bars or to provide additional restraint at
bends in bars additional reinforcing bars shall be included by the Contractor at
his expense.
The minimum cover to bars from all forms and the relative position of all bars
shall be maintained by stays, precast concrete/mortar blocks (of strength
greater than the concrete in which they are to be placed), ties, hangers or other
approved supports. Chairs for supporting deck reinforcement steel shall be
either of galvanized steel, approved plastic material, or precast concrete
blocks acceptable to the Engineer. The maximum spacing of the chairs shall
be 1.20 metres.
The location of the top reinforcement steel (with respect to deck surface) shall
be checked by running a full deck width template along the longitudinal
screeds. No main steel shall touch the template nor be more than 6mm distant
from it.

a. Measurement
The quantities of Reinforcing Steel under this Section will be measured as the
number of Kilograms complete in place and accepted as shown on the
approved working Drawings and bar list and not covered by other Tender
items.
The unit weights for deformed bars to be used in determining payment shall
be as follows unless shown otherwise on the Drawings or directed by the
Engineer.
S504.3
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

Size mm Weight per metre (kg)
6 0.222
8 0.395
10 0.616
12 0.888
16 1.579
20 2.466
25 3.854
32 6.313
40 9.864
Clips, ties, separators, spacers or other materials used for positioning or

fastening the reinforcement steel in place, shall not be included in the
weights measured for payment under this item.
b. Payment
it appears in the Bills of Quantities. The prices and payment shall constitute
full compensation for materials, labour, tools, equipment and all else
necessary to complete the work described herein in strict conformance with
There will be no payment for additional steel incurred due to the Contractors
splicing at locations other than those shown on the Drawings or as ordered by
the Engineer.
Payment item that may appear in this Section of the Bills of Quantities is:

504.1 Reinforcing Steel Kg
504.2 Welded Steel Fabric m2
S504.4
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

SECTION 505: STRUCTURAL STEELWORK
CONTENTS
505.1 Materials
505.2 Fabrication Drawings
505.3 Inspection and Marking
505.4 Welding and Flame Cutting Procedure Trails
505.5 Qualification and Testing of Welders
505.6 Supervision of Welding
505.7 Welding Plant
505.8 Welding
505.9 Examination and Testing of Welds
505.10 Camber
505.11 High Strength Friction Grip Bolts
505.12 Fabrication Tolerances
505.13 Erection of Steelwork
_____________________________________________________________________________
505.1 Materials
a. Materials conforming to any of the standard specifications listed below are
approved for use under this specification.
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
A36/A36M-01............... Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel
A53/A53M-01............... Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-
Dipped, Zinc-Coated Welded and Seamless
A123/A123M-02........... Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized)
Coatings on Iron and Steel Products
A242/A242M-01........... Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy
Structural Steel
A307-00 ....................... Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs,
60,000 psi Tensile Strength
A325-02 ....................... Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat
Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength
A490-02 ....................... Standard Specification for Heat-Treated Steel Structural
Bolts 150 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength
A500-01 ....................... Standard Specification for Cold Formed Welded and
Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and
Shapes
A501-01 ....................... Standard Specification for Hot-Formed Welded and
Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing
A572/A572M-01........... Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy
Columbium-Vanadium Structural Steel
A992/A992M-02........... Standard Specification for Structural Steel Shapes
S505.1
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

b. All material surface preparations and treatments to be used in the corrosion

protection of the structural steelwork shall comply with the requirements of
Section 506 of these Specifications.
c. Welding electrodes for manual metal-arc welding or grades of steel shall comply
with the requirements of AWS A5.1and A5.5. Electrode wires and fluxes for
submerged arc welding shall comply with A5.17and A5.23.
505.2 Fabrication Drawings
Two copies of all detailed fabrication drawings prepared by or on behalf of the

Contractor shall be submitted to the Engineer for his approval, but this approval shall
in no way relieve the Contractor of his responsibilities for the work.
505.3 Inspection and Marking
The Contractor shall notify the Engineer when materials are ready for inspection at the
mills and/or fabricated material at the fabricator's shop. After checking or testing at
the fabricator's shop, all members and fittings shall, for the purpose of identification
during erection, have a distinguishing number and letter (corresponding to the
distinguishing number and letter on the approved drawings) painted and where
possible stamped on in two positions.
505.4 Welding and Flame Cutting Procedure Trails
1. When directed by the Engineer and before fabrication is commenced, welding and
flame cutting procedure trials shall be carried out using representative samples of
materials to be used in the work.
2. The samples of materials shall be selected and marked by the Engineer when the
materials for the work are inspected at the mills.
3. Trials on materials 20 mm thick shall be taken to include all materials up to but not
exceeding 20 mm thick. Trials on material 38 mm thick shall be taken to include
material over 20 mm and up to but not exceeding 38 mm thick. Material over 38
mm thick shall be tested for every thickness increment of 6 mm.
4. The welding and flame cutting trials shall demonstrate to the satisfaction of the
Engineer the procedures to be adopted in the fabrication of the work, which shall
include:
S505.2
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

i. Welding in accordance with AWS D1.1. Welds shall be made only by welders
and welding operators who have been previously qualified by tests as
prescribed in AWS D1.1 to perform type of work required.
ii. The heat control techniques required to ensure that the flame cut surfaces of
steel are free from cracks, local hardness and any other defects, which would
be detrimental to the finished work.
5. The trials shall include specimen weld details representative of the actual
construction, which shall be welded in a manner simulating the most unfavourable
conditions liable to occur in the particular fabrication. Where primers are to be
applied to the work prior to fabrication, they shall be applied to sample material
before the procedure trials are made.
6. The following groups of tests shall be carried out.
1. Butt Welds
 Transverse tensile test;
 Transverse and longitudinal bend tests;
 Separate tests shall be performed in each case with the root of the weld in
tension and compression;
 Charpy V-notch impact tests ;
 Macro examination test.
2. Fillet Welds
 Fillet weld fracture test;
 Macro examination test.
505.7 Welding Plant
The welding plant shall be capable of maintaining at the weld, the voltage and current
specified by the manufacturer of the electrodes. The Contractor shall supply
instruments for verifying voltages and current as and when required by the Engineer.
505.8 Welding
1. The temperature of steels shall not be less than 100 deg.C when welding is
commenced.
S505.3
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

2. Electrodes and fluxes shall be used in accordance with the manufacturer's

instructions. The use of welding processes other than those covered by AWS
D1.1 shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer.
3. The general welding programme for shop and site welds including particulars of
the preparation of fusion faces, the method of pre-heating where required, the
methods of making the weld and the types of electrodes shall be submitted to the
Engineer for his approval before the work is put in hand. No departure from the
agreed welding programme or from the details described in the Contract shall be
made without the agreement of the Engineer. Electrodes and fluxes shall be so
chosen that the properties of the deposited metal are not inferior to those of the
parent metal.
4. The procedures for welding and flame cutting established by the procedure trials
under Clause 505.4 shall be strictly followed.
5. Unless otherwise described in the Contract, all butt welds shall be complete
penetration welds made between prepared fusion faces.
6. In fabrication of built-up assemblies, all butt welds in each component part shall
be completed whenever possible before the final assembly.
7. The position of welds required for temporary attachments shall be agreed by the
Engineer before the work commences.
8. Where automatic or semi-automatic processes are used, back gouging of the
deposited weld will not be required where the Engineer is satisfied that the root
run is free from imperfection.
9. Where butt welds are to be ground flush, there shall be no loss of parent metal.
The final grinding shall be in the direction described in the Contract.
10. All shop welding, unless otherwise approved, shall be done in the down-hand or
horizontal-vertical position. Vertical welding shall be done upwards.
11. All parts to be welded shall be accurately prepared so that on assembly, they fit
closely together. After assembly and before the general welding is commenced,
the parts are to be securely welded together with tack welds in the line of the
welded seams. The tack welds shall be strong enough to prevent relative
movement of the parts but small enough to be covered by the general welding.
12. In butt joints, the root edges or root faces shall not be out of alignment by more
than 0.125 times the thickness of the thinner material, for material up to 12 mm
thick or by more than 2 mm for thicker material.
13. Requirements for "run-on plates" and "run-off plates" shall be as follows:
S505.4
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

i. One pair of run-on plates and one pair of run-off plates, all prepared to the same
thickness and profile as the parent metal shall be attached by clamps to the start
and finish respectively on all butt welds. Unless otherwise required by the
Engineer, approximately 1 in 5 pairs of run-off plates for butt welds in tension
flanges and 1 in 10 pairs for other butt welds shall be production test plates.
The combined size of each pair of production test plates shall be either 230 mm
by 330 mm or 380 mm wide by 200 mm long in accordance with Table 505.1
below. Examination and Testing of Welds, the length being measured in the
rolling direction of the metal and at right angles to the weld;
ii. Butt welds shall run the full length of the joint and extend at full weld profile for
a minimum distance of 25 mm into the run-off plates and for minimum distances
of 200 mm, 280 mm and 355 mm respectively into the 230 mm by 200 mm, 300
mm by 200 mm and 380 mm by 200 mm run-off production test plates;
iii) On completion of the welds, the run-off production test plates shall not be
removed until they have been marked in a manner agreed by the Engineer to
identify them with the joints to which they are attached;
iv) When removing the run-on and run-off plates by flame cutting, the cuts shall not
be nearer than 6 mm to the sides of the parent metal and the remaining metal
shall be removed by grinding or other method agreed by the Engineer.
Table 505.1: Examination and Testing of Welds

Combined size (per pair) of production test plates (mm)
Material Plates up Plates from 3mm Plates over
to 3mm thick to 75mm thick 75mmthick
Steel of Grades 36 Sizes to be agreed

225 x 200 300 x 200
and 50B with the Engineer
v) Specimens for the following tests to be carried out in accordance with Clause
505.9 shall be selected from the run-off production test plates by the engineer;
 Transverse tensile test(s) (the number of test pieces shall be sufficient to
cover the full thickness of plate);
 Transverse bend test;
 Three Charpy V-notch tests.
S505.5
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

505.9 Examination and Testing of Welds
1. The Engineer may require the Contractor to prepare and test specimens from time
to time. The Contractor shall provide means for making radiographic examination
of welds in the shop and such portions of welds as the Engineer may direct shall
be so examined. The Contractor shall provide suitable facilities to the Engineer for
viewing the originals of all radiographs as soon as possible after they have been
made. The Engineer will arrange for making radiographic and/or ultrasonic
examinations of welds at Site and such portions of the welds as the Engineer may
direct shall be so examined. Any welds that in the opinion of the Engineer are
shown to have serious defects shall be cut out and renewed to the Engineer's
satisfaction at the Contractor's expense.
2. The Engineer will inspect welding at the Site before and during welding and at his
discretion each run of welding shall be left bare such inspection before the next run
is deposited.
505.10 Camber
Camber applied to steel girders shall be of smooth curvature and shall be in

accordance with the instructions of the Engineer or as described in the Contract.
505.11 Bolts ASTM A325 A490
1. Bolts shall comply with ASTM A325 and A490.

The bolt shall be tightened by a part-torque part-turn method. The part-torque
tightening for bedding down shall be carried out by a calibrated tightening device
such as a torque controlled manual wrench or power operated wrench. The
bedding torque to be applied to the bolts shall be given in Table 505.2.
2. After bedding down of the joints, each nut and the protruding threads of the bolt
shall be permanently marked to record their relative positions. The nuts shall then
be tightened to the approval of the Engineer by a part-turn of the nut method.
S505.6
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

Table 505.2: Preliminary Tightening of Nuts
Nominal Diameter of bolts Bedding Torque + 10%

mm KNm
16 1.75
19 2.55
22 3.65
25 5.11
29 8.03
32 11.31
505.12 Fabrication Tolerances
Fabrication tolerances shall be in accordance with Section 6 of the Code of Standard

Practice for Steel Buildings by AISC March 2000 edition.
505.13 Erection of Steelwork
1. At least one month before the steelwork erection commences, the Contractor shall
prepare and submit to the Engineer for approval, detailed particulars of the method
and procedure he proposes to adopt for the erection of the steelwork together with
such calculations relating to strength and deflection of the structure as the Engineer
may require. If the erection scheme proposed necessitates the attachment of
temporary steelwork, the Contractor shall submit for the approval of the Engineer,
his proposals for making good the permanent steelwork after removing the
temporary steelwork. Approval of fastenings welded to the permanent work will not
normally be given.
2. Èrection procedures shall be in accordance with Section 7 of the Code of Standard
Practice for Steel Buildings by AISC March 2000 edition.
S505.7
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

SECTION 506: CORROSION PROTECTION
CONTENTS
506.1 Description
506.2 Blast Cleaning
506.3 Materials
_____________________________________________________________________________
506.1 Description
The work covered in this Section shall consist of the protection of steelwork against
corrosion as directed by the Engineer or as shown on the Drawings. The work
includes, but is not limited to, the preparation of surfaces to be treated and the
painting of the prepared surfaces.
1. This Specification defines the requirements for the purchase and application
of protective coating systems.
2. All paints shall be obtained only from suppliers approved by the Engineer.
Unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer all paints forming part of any one
painting system shall be obtained from the same source. Paint shall be
supplied in sealed containers of not more than 4.5 litre capacity and shall be
used in strict rotation. Unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer, samples of
paint not less than 2.5 litre capacity shall be submitted for testing to the
engineer or his nominated testing authority or the equivalent approved
standard.
506.2 Blast Cleaning

506.2.1 Concrete Encased Steelwork
Steel to be cleaned to power tool cleaning standard SSPC-SP3.
Low Exposure Environment Referred to as PC3 on the S300 Drawings
Steel to be cleaned to power tool cleaning standard SSPC-SP3.
High Exposure Environment Referred to as PC2 on the S300 Drawings
Steel to be sandblasted to SSPC-SP10 standard.
506.3 Materials
506.3.1 Soluble Salt Remover
Soluble salt remover to be Chlor*rid or approved equal. The soluble salt remover
shall meet the following:
S506.1
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

 Material to organic and non-hazardous

 Material to be non-flammable
 pH shall be 3.3 +or- 0.2
506.3.2 Painting Metal Surfaces

Concrete Encased Steelwork
 The coating to be used shall be one coat of a two part clear solvent less
Epoxy sealer with a theoretical coverage at 38 microns thick of 1060 square
feet per gallon.
Low Exposure Environment Referred to as PC2 on the S300 Drawings
 The coating to be used shall be 100-200 microns of a two part semigloss
Epoxy with a theoretical coverage at 25 microns thick of 1300 square feet
per gallon.
 Abrasion Resistance using ASTM D4060 to be 102mg using 1kg load/1000
cycles with a CS-17wheel.
 Impact Resistance to ASTM D2794- Direct 24 in-lb, Reverse 6 in-lb
 Moisture/Vapour Transmission to ASTM F1249 4gm/sq.m/day
 Adhesion ASTM D4541 1200psi.
High Exposure Environment Referred to as PC2 on the S300 Drawings
The prime coat shall be a 65 micron coat of heavy-duty two component inorganic
–zinc silicate with a coverage at 25 microns of 990 square feet per gallon.
 The prime coat shall comply with the SSPC-Paint 20 standard.
 The prime coat is to be coated with a two part epoxy The coating to be
used shall be 100-200 microns of a two part semigloss Epoxy with a
theoretical coverage at 25 microns thick of 1300 square feet per gallon.
 Abrasion Resistance using ASTM D4060 to be 102mg using 1kg load/1000
cycles with a CS-17wheel
 Impact Resistance to ASTM D2794- Direct 24 in-lb, Reverse 6 in-lb
 Moisture/Vapour Transmission to ASTM F1249 4gm/sq.m/day
 Adhesion ASTM D4541 1200psi.

Preparation of Surfaces to Receive Paint
1. Before paint is applied to any metal surface, the appropriate surface
preparation as described in the Contract shall be carried out in accordance
with the following:
S506.2
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

a. Blast Cleaning
Blast cleaning shall be carried out in accordance with SSPC-SP10 to the
quality of surface finish as described as a near white blast cleaning. Surface
shall be protected within 4 hours of having been blast cleaned. A sample
blast cleaned steel panel measuring not less than 150mm x 150mm x 6mm
adequately protected by sealed cleaned polyethylene wrapping shall be
submitted to the Engineer for approval before any work is put in hand.The
approved sample shall then be retained by the Engineer's inspectors for
comparison with the prepared steelwork.
b. Mechanical Cleaning
Mechanical cleaning shall be carried out in accordance with SSPC-SP3 by
power driven tools such as carborundum grinding discs, chipping hammers
and needle guns, followed by steel-wire brushing and dusting to remove all
loosened material. Excessive burnishing of the metal through prolonged
application of rotary wire brushes shall be avoided. Surfaces shall be
protected within 4 hours of having been mechanically cleaned.
c. Soluble Salt Removal
Soluble Salt removal shall be by pressure washing at a minimum of 2,000
p.s.i. using One gallon of Chlor*Rid or equal for each 100 gallons of potable
water. The pressure washer device is to be equipped with a 0 to 15degree
nozzle, which shall be held 4” to 10” from the surface. Soluble chloride tests
are to be performed in the manner prescribed by the manufacturer every
500 square feet to ascertain cleanliness to meet the required level.
d. Welds and Areas Affected by Welding
Welds and surfaces, which have been affected by welding, shall be
prepared for painting by the same process as for the adjoining metal.
e. Metal Coatings
1. Sprayed metal coatings, which are subsequently to be painted, shall have
a nominal thickness of 100 micrometer unless otherwise specified.
2. Sampling and testing shall be carried out in accordance with BS 729, BS
4921 or BS 2569: Part 1, whichever is appropriate.
3. Where a metal coating is required only on part of an assembled section, it
shall be applied before the rest of the section receives its first priming coat.
S506.3
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

f. Treatment of Surfaces
 Chemical Pollution
1. A protective coating shall not be applied to surfaces bearing
atmospheric corrosion products or other chemicals, which may be
harmful to the coating or succeeding coatings. These contaminants
which include any remaining after surface preparation, as specified
in Sub-Clause 1, and any produced by welding shall be cleaned off
to an extent agreed by the Engineer to be compatible with the
specified protective system.
 Welded Joints
1. Unless otherwise described in the Contract, welds and surfaces,
which have been affected by welding, shall receive the protective
system, which is applied to the parent surfaces.
 Treatment Adjacent to Joints

1. Metal spray shall be kept at least 15 mm clear of areas to be
welded and these areas shall be masked off during spraying.
2. Where paints other than blast primers are to be applied to the
parent surfaces before the making of a joint, they shall be stepped
back at 30 mm intervals commencing at 80 mm from welded joints
and at 10 mm from the perimeter of all other joints.
 Surface Preparation and Painting of Completed Joints

1. Within 14 days of the joints having been made and passed by the
Engineer, the parent and joint material, exposed parts of bolts,
nuts and washers, weld and weld affected areas shall be prepared
and painted.
 Other Treatment at Joints

1. All bolted joints shall be sealed against the ingress of water.
Before painting commences and subject to the approval of the
Engineer, gaps at joints shall be plugged with an approved filler.
The perimeter of all joints shall be sealed with subsequent coats
of paints.
S506.4
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

 Storage of Paint
1. Paint shall be stored in sealed containers in a lock-up store where
it is not exposed to extreme temperatures. The temperature of
the store shall not exceed 35oC. Any special storage conditions
recommended by the manufacturer shall be observed.
2. Paint which has not been used within the 'shelf life' period
specified on the containers or within 12 months of the date of
manufacture, whichever is the lesser, shall be replaced.
3. Paint from painters' kettles shall be returned to store at the end of
each working period, where it shall be kept in a sealed container.
Before it is re-issued for use, it shall be thoroughly mixed and no
fresh paint or thinners shall be added.
 Application of Paint
1. All paint shall be supplied from the store to the painters ready for
application and the addition of thinners or of any other material
shall be thereafter prohibited. Any instructions given by the paint
manufacturer shall be strictly followed.
2. All painting shall be carried out by skilled painters under
competent supervision.
3. Paint shall be applied to dry surfaces, which have been prepared
and cleaned in accordance with Sub-Clause 1.
4. No part of the steelwork shall be painted until the surface has been
approved by the Engineer, and after approval the painting is to be
carried out immediately.
5. Paints shall not be applied under the following conditions:
i. When the relative humidity rises above 90 percent;
ii. During rain or mist;
iii. When condensation has occurred or is likely to occur on the
steel.
6. Two pack paints of the epoxy resin type shall be applied as
required by the paint manufacturer.
7. Each coat of paint shall be applied by a method approved by the
Engineer to produce a continuous film of paint, of uniform and
even thickness. As soon as the first priming coat has dried, an
extra stripe coat of paint shall be applied by brush, to edges,
S506.5
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

corners, crevices, bolt heads, rivet heads and welds, using paint
of a similar composition to the priming coat, but in a contrasting
shade. Successive coats shall have different shades for
identification and each coat shall be thoroughly dry before the
application of a further coat.
8. The total dry paint film thickness of the paint system on bare steel
surfaces and on metal coated surfaces shall not be less than 125
micrometer, except where otherwise specified in the Contract.
The dry paint film thickness shall be measured by an Elcometer
or other instruments approved by the Engineer.
9. In order to obtain the dry film thickness specified the Contractor
shall ensure that the coverage rate given by the paint
manufacturer will enable this thickness to be attained.
10. Wet film thickness gauges may be used for checking but shall not
be permitted as a means of predicting the dry film thickness.
11. Unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer, the paint system with
the exception of one final finishing coat shall be applied under
cover in controlled conditions at the fabricator's works. One final
finishing coat shall be applied at Site.
12. No paint shall be used after the expiration of the 'pot life' stipulated
by the manufacturer and paints of limited 'pot life' shall not be
mixed with fresh paint or have thinners added to them.
13. All tools, brushes, solvents and plant used, shall be such as to
ensure the best possible result and shall be maintained in good
condition both in use and in storage.
14. All paints shall be thoroughly mixed before use and shall be kept
stirred to ensure uniformity of composition and application.
15. Unless otherwise described in the Contract, a coat of paint in a
system shall be applied by one of the following methods:
i. Brush;
ii. Roller supplement by brush were necessary;
iii. Air pressure spraying;
iv. Airless spraying.
16. Solvent used for the removal of oil grease and dirt shall be non-
injurious to both metal and paint and any excess shall be
S506.6
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

cleaned off immediately after use.

17. The thickness of coats of paint shall be checked at frequent
intervals and whenever ordered by the Engineer. Where the
meter shows that the paint film is less than that specified above,
one or more additional coats shall be applied, as ordered by the
Engineer at the Contractor's expense. Special attention shall be
given to corners, sharp edges and similar parts, to maintain the
thickness of the paint film. Care shall be taken to ensure that
each coat is uniform in thickness and not so thick as to cause
defects in the dried surface.
18. Each coat of paint of a specified paint system shall be generally
free from surface defects, particularly cratering, pinholing,
rivelling, sagging, bettiness, dry spray and cissing. The finished
system shall have an even and uniform appearance.
 Storage of Painted Steelwork

1. Painted fabricated steelwork which is to be stored prior to
erection shall be kept clear of the ground and shall be laid out or
staked in an orderly manner that will ensure that no pools of
water or dirt can accumulate on the surfaces. Suitable packing
shall be laid between the layers of stacked materials. Where
cover is provided it shall be ventilated.
2. Prime painted steelwork which is to be stored outdoors or
transported prior to fabrication of erection shall not be exposed
before being over coated for periods longer than the following:
 Outdoors
Red line primers (1 coat) 8 weeks
Metallic lead primers (2 coats) 16 weeks
Calcium plumbate primers 4 weeks
Zinc Chromate primers 2 weeks
Zinc chromate/Red oxide primers 2 weeks
Zinc-rich primers 1/2-1 mil thick 4 weeks
No steelwork shall be loaded for transport until the paint system has been
passed by the Engineer as being sufficiently dry for handling.
S506.7
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

 Repairs to Damaged Surfaces

1. Areas of paint which have been damaged during handling, storing
loading and off-loading transportation, erection and construction,
shall be cleaned to bare metal or metal coating, where this has been
applied and the edges of the undamaged paint levelled with sand
paper.
2. Where a metal coating has been damaged, the affected area shall
be rubbed down to remove excessive roughness, cleaned, and an
additional coat of approved zinc-rich primer applied to a minimum
thickness of 100 micrometer.
3. The fill specified painting system shall then be re-applied and the
new paint shall overlap the existing paint by at least 50mm all
around the affected area.
S506.8
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

SECTION 507: ELASTOMERIC BEARINGS
CONTENTS
507.1 Description
507.2 Materials
507.3 Tolerances
507.4 Quality Assurance
507.5 Installation
_____________________________________________________________________________
507.1 Description
This Section covers the supply and installation of elastomeric bearings to support
bridge decks. These may include plain bearings, consisting of elastomer only and
laminated bearings, consisting of layers of elastomer restrained at their interfaces
by bonded laminates.
507.2 Materials
Elastomer: The elastomer portion of the elastomeric compound shall be 100
percent virgin chloroprene neoprene meeting the requirements of Table 507.1.
Table 507.1: Requirements for Elastomer Bearing Materials
ASTM Physical Properties

Standard 50 Duro 60 Duro 70 Duro
D 2240 Hardness 50 + 5 60 + 5 70 + 5
D 412 Tensile Strength, min

(MPa) 17.237 17.237 17.237
Ultimate elongation, min % 400 350 300

Heat Resistance
Change in durometer
D573: 70 hr hardness, mac. points +15 +15 +15
100o C
Change in tensile strength,
max % -15 -15 -15
Change in ultimate
elongation, max % -40 -40 -40
Compression Set
D395 Method B 22 hours at 100o C, max. % 3 3 3
S507.1
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

Table 507.1: Requirements for Elastomer Bearing Materials (cont)
Ozone
D1149 25 pphm ozone in air

volume, 20 % strain 37.7o C
± 1o C, 48 hours
mounting procedure D518 No No No
Procedure A Cracks Cracks Cracks
Adhesion
D429, B Bond made during

vulcanization 714 714 714
Compounds of nominal hardness between the values shown may be used and the
test requirements interpolated. When test specimens are cut from the finished
product a 10 percent variation in "Physical Properties" will be allowed.
Laminates
These shall be rolled mild steel sheets conforming to AASHTO M 183 (ASTM A36)
or ASTM A245, Grade C or D unless otherwise specified by the Engineer.
Manufacturing Requirements
Plain bearings may be moulded individually, cut from previously moulded strips or
slabs or extruded and cut to length. Cut edges shall be at least as smooth as ANSI
250 finish. Unless otherwise shown on the plans, all components of a laminated
bearing shall be moulded together into an integral unit, and all edges of the
nonelastic laminations shall be covered by a minimum of 3.2 mm of elastomer
except at laminate restraining devices and around holes that will be entirely closed
on the finished structure.
507.3 Tolerances
Flash tolerance, finish and appearance shall meet the requirements of the latest
edition of the Rubber Handbook as published by Rubber Manufacturers
Association, Inc., RMA F3 and T.063 for mounded bearings and RMA F3 for
extruded bearings. For both plain and laminated bearings, the permissible variation
S507.2
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

from the dimensions and configuration required by the plans and these
specifications shall be as follows:-
1. Overall vertical dimensions: -

Average total thickness 32 mm or less -0, + 3 mm
Average total thickness over 32 mm -0, + 6 mm
2. (a) Overall horizontal dimension 914 mm or less -0, + 6 mm
(b) Overall horizontal dimension over 914 mm -0, + 12 mm
3. Thickness of individual layers of elastomer

(laminated bearing only): ± 20% of design value,
but maximum ±3 mm
4. Parallelism with opposite face, top and bottom 0.005 radians
sides 0.02 radians
5. Position of exposed connection members ±3 mm
6. Edge cover of embedded laminates or connection
members -0, + 3 mm
7. (a) Size of holes, slots or inserts ±3 mm
(b) Position of holes, slots or inserts ±3 mm
507.4 Quality Assurance

Whenever practical, the mechanical properties of the finished bearing shall be
verified by laboratory test. Under laboratory testing conditions of full size bearings
compressive strain of any layer an elastomeric bearing shall not exceed 7% at 5.5
MPa average unit pressure, or at the design dead load plus live load pressure if so
indicated on the plans.
On completion of the manufacture of the bearings, the contractor shall submit

bearings selected by the Engineer, or specially manufactured bearings to serve as
samples as authorised by the Engineer, to an independent testing authority for
testing.
The testing facilities of the manufacturer or supplier may be used if so approved

and on condition that the tests are conducted in the presence of the Engineer. The
Engineer will determine which tests are to be conducted, and the tests shall comply
with the appropriate requirements of BS 5400 part 9.2.
S507.3
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

When compression and shear-stiffness tests are conducted on sample bearings or

on only a limited number of bearings in a consignment, the stiffness values as
determined by the tests shall be within 20% of the theoretical values.
Copies of test results and certificates for the above-mentioned tests shall be
submitted by the contractor to the Engineer in good time to enable the Engineer to
assess the information before the bearings are installed.
The dimensional tolerances for the bearings shall comply with the requirements of
507.3 above.
Before the bearings are dispatched to the site of the works, each bearing, with the
exception of large bearings as provided for in the project specifications, shall be
subjected simultaneously to a vertical load equal to 150% of the maximum design
load, and to a shear distortion equal to 150% of the maximum design value. The
bearings shall be visually inspected for defects by the Engineer or his nominee and
shall net at any stage under this test show any cracks visible to the naked eye or
any other defects.
The Engineer may instruct that one bearing of each consignment shall be cut open
with a view to a visual assessment of the bonding and the thickness of layers.
507.5 Installation
Bearings shall be placed on surfaces that are plane within 1.5 mm and horizontal
to within 0.01 radians. They shall be placed on a grout bed the grout having a low
water/cement ratio and a minimum cube crushing strength of 20N/sq.mm. The bed
shall be trowelled onto the bearing plinth or ledge.
When the superstructure is to be concrete cast in-situ the spaces around and
between bearings shall be filled with expanded polystyrene or similar material as
approved by the Engineer. Care must be taken not to disturb the bearings during
casting and to assist in this bearings may be bonded to the substructure using
impact adhesive. The packing material shall be removed after curing of the
concrete by raking and blowing out. The use of solvents for this operation will not
be permitted.
S507.4
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

When precast beams are being installed they shall be carefully lowered onto a thin
(2 to 3 mm) mortar bed to eliminate irregularities and twist in the beams. As beams
are likely to have a pre-camber at this stage of construction that might cause large
rotations of the bearings, the beams shall be propped after installation to prevent
this rotation until the mortar bed has fully set into a wedge.

a. Measurement
Bearings shall not be measured separately for payment under this Section. The
payment for the supply, handling and installation of bearings shall be included
in the payment items for the deck construction, e.g. Section 501, Cast-in-place
Concrete, Section 503 Prestressed Precast Concrete Beams and/or Section
505 Structural Steelwork or the payment item for precast reinforced concrete
beams when these are used. Such payment shall cover the supply, handling
and installation of bearings and shall include for mortar bedding, all labour,
materials equipment, temporary works and all else necessary to carry out the
work.
S507.5
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

SECTION 508: CONCRETE BLOCKWORK
CONTENTS
508.1 Materials
508.2 Nominal Block Dimensions
508.3 Strength Tests
508.4 Execution
_____________________________________________________________________________
508.1 Description
This work shall consist of the construction of blockwork in accordance with these
Specification and as directed by the Engineer.
508.2 Materials
1. Precast Concrete Blocks
Blocks shall conform ASTM C90 for loadbearing masonry units. Where plaster
finish is required on blockwork, rough textured type blocks shall be supplied.
Where "fair faced" finished is required all blocks shall be smooth textured with
clean unbroken edges. All blocks to be incorporated in the works shall be
delivered to the Site in a dry and fully cured state.
2. Sand for Mortar
Sand shall be clean naturally occurring plastering sand free from salts, organic
matter, clay, loam, dirt or other deleterious matter. All sand shall be stored and
kept free from contamination by any other material. Samples of sand shall be
supplied to the Engineer for testing and approval at any time during the
performance of the Works.
3. Water
Water for mixing mortar shall be clean and free from impurities.
4. Plasticizer
Where necessary a plasticizing agent may be added to the mortar in sufficient
quantity to gain the required workability. The plasticizer shall be approved by
the Engineer and applied in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
5. Mortar
Cement mortar shall consist of one part by volume of Portland cement and two
parts by volume of natural sand. The components shall be thoroughly mixed in
the dry state, and then water added to achieve the desired workability. Cement
mortar shall be mixed in small quantities as and when required, and any mortar
that has begun to set or that has been mixed for a period in excess of one hour
S508.1
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

shall be rejected.
6. Concrete Filling
Where vertical reinforcement is specified the reinforced cores shall be filled with
Class 20 concrete for the full height of the wall. The workability of the concrete
shall be such that the mix will flow into and fill all the cavities in the cores without
separation or segregation. The Slump of the concrete to be used in filling shall
be between 75 mm and 100 mm and it shall be placed as soon as possible and
not more than one and one-half (1.5) hours after water is first added. Admixtures
may be used subject to prior approval by the Engineer. The concrete fill shall
develop a minimum compressive strength of 20 N/mm2.
Concrete fill shall not be placed to a height of more than one (1) metre at one
time and there shall be a minimum interval of sixty (60) minutes between pours.
No concrete fill shall be placed until such time as the masonry has sufficiently
hardened to prevent "blow outs".
7. Reinforcement
Concrete blockwork shall generally have horizontal fabric reinforcement such as
"Brickforce" or other equal and approved product laid in the joints after every
third course in addition to any vertical bar reinforcement shown on the Drawings
or requested by the Engineer.
Vertical reinforcement shall be held in position at the top and bottom and at
intervals not exceeding 200 diameters. Vertical reinforcing steel shall have a
minimum clearance of 6 mm from the masonry and not less than one bar
diameter between bars. Fabric reinforcement shall be completely embedded in
mortar and lapped to a minimum of 150 mm at splices and shall contain at least
one cross wire of each piece of reinforcement in the lapped length.
508.3 Nominal Block Dimensions

Free standing blockwalls used as free draining diaphragms behind bridge
abutments and wing walls shall have the following nominal dimensions:
Nominal width Nominal length Nominal height
150 mm 400 mm 200 mm
200 mm 400 mm 200 mm
Minimum face shell thickness and web thickness shall be as follows:
Nominal width Nominal length Nominal height
150 mm 25 mm 25 mm
200 mm 30 mm 25 mm
S508.1
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

Measurements shall be the average of 5 units taken at the thinnest point.
508.4 Strength Tests

Hollow concrete blocks shall be made from Portland cement and suitable aggregate
by an approved reputable manufacturer. All units shall be sound and free from
cracks or other defects that would impair the strength or performance of the
construction. Load bearing blocks shall have an average crushing strength of not
less than 7 N/mm2 measured over the gross area.
The Contractor shall allow for testing 5 random units prior to commencement of the
job. The units to be tested shall be selected at random by the Engineer or his duly
authorized representative.
508.5 Execution
Concrete blockwork shall be accurately set out to the dimensions shown on the
Drawings or as directed by the Engineer. All surfaces on which blockwork is to be
built shall be cleaned and levelled. Blocks shall be laid on a 10 mm mortar bed to
give a good continuous face-shell mortar bedding. All joints shall be filled with
mortar at every course. The lines of all courses and bonds shall be properly
maintained.
At the time of laying, all blocks are to be free from excessive dust and dirt and shall
be free from cracks and chips. Where cutting is necessary it should be carried out
by the use of a broad, heavy chisel and a heavy chipping hammer. The blocks to
be cut should be scored along the cutting line, after which heavier blows are struck
until the unit splits.
Work in hot weather: When blockwork is to be constructed in hot dry conditions,

individual units shall be wetted with a light spray just prior to setting in the mortar
bed.
S508.2
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

SECTION 509: DOWEL BARS
CONTENTS
509.1 Description
_____________________________________________________________________________
509.1 Description
All Dowel Bars shall be Grade 60 steel conforming to the requirements of ASTM 615
for billet steel grades. Bearings shall be supplied with dowel holes to match the size
of the dowels indicated on the Drawings.
All bars are to be placed accurately in position fixed into the abutment as shown on
the Drawings.
Dowel Bars are to be thoroughly cleaned of all dirt, rust, oil, etc. and coated with a
long pot life epoxy adhesive, Eucopoxy LPL MV or similar, as per manufacturer’s
specification upon positioning and before pouring of concrete.
Two layers of bond breaking tape is to be provided only to that portion of the epoxy
coated dowel bar protruding out of the abutment.
Epoxy coating shall meet the requirements of ASTM C-883 and ASTM C-884.

The quantity of Dowel Bars to be paid for under this section will be measured as the
number of bars complete in place and accepted by the Engineer in accordance with
the Specifications.
The unit price shall also include cost for furnishing and installing and shall include for
labour, material, tools, equipment and incidentals for doing all works involved as

509.1 Dowel Bars No.
S509.1
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

SECTION 510: WATERPROOFING FOR STRUCTURES
CONTENTS
510.1 Description
510.2 Materials
510.2 Execution
_____________________________________________________________________________
510.1 Description
The work in this Section covers the requirements for waterproofing structural elements
such as decks, walls, box culverts, etc.
510.2 Materials
1. Waterproofing Materials Primer

Primer for sealing concrete surfaces prior to waterproofing shall be fully compatible
with the bonding agent and waterproofing.
2. Bitumen Compound for Bedding Bituminous Sheeting

Hot applied bitumen compound for use as bedding for bituminous waterproof
sheeting shall be oxidized bitumen. Unless otherwise described, it shall have a
softening point (Ring and Ball) within the range of 80-100° C and penetration at
25° C within the range of 20-30.
3. Mastic Asphalt
Asphalt for waterproofing shall comply with the requirements of ASTM D491.
4. Prefabricated Bituminous Sheeting

Prefabricated bituminous sheeting for waterproofing shall comply with the
requirements of AASHTO M115. Alternatively, glass fibre based sheeting or
equivalent quantity may be employed.
Copper-lined bituminous sheeting shall weigh not less than 3.52 kg/sq.m and shall
have a glass fibre base of the resin-bonded mat type (non-woven) weighing not
less than 42 grams per square metre. The weight of the copper foil shall not be
less than 76 grams per square metre.
S510.1
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

5. Rubberised Filled Bitumen

Rubberised filled bitumen for in-situ waterproofing shall be made from 80-100 pen
straight-run bitumen plus filler. Filler grading and qualities shall be in accordance
with the Specification for filler given in Section 401.2 (b) and unvulcanised natural
rubber powder.
The final softening point (Ring and Ball) of the mixture shall be between 90° C and
100° C. The suggested method of manufacture to achieve this is as follows: (1)
Approximately 3 parts by weight of filler are added to 1 part of bitumen and the
mixture stirred for a minimum of 1 hour at 170-190°C. The softening point (Ring
and Ball) of this mixture is to be between 75-86°C, the exact filler proportions being
adjusted to obtain this result. To the filler/binder mixture is added 0.75% to 1% by
weight of rubber (allowance being made for non-rubber constituents of the powder)
that is stirred in for a further period of 1 hour at 170-190° C. Should the final
softening point be outside the limits specified, the softening point of the filler/binder
mixture may be adjusted to obtain the correct result.
6. Waterproofing Underlay
Waterproofing underlay shall consist of either waterproofing paper complying with
the requirements of ASTM C171 or 250 grade or 500 impermeable plastic sheeting.
510.2 Execution
1. Immediately before waterproofing is laid the surface to be waterproofed shall be

clean and dry.
2. No vehicle of any type shall be permitted to travel on bituminous sheeting or any
other membrane for which a protective layer is specified unless engaged on laying
the protective layer and then only with the permission of the Engineer. The
surfaces of any gullies and other features with which the waterproofing will be in
contact shall be clean and painted with bitumen as specified in Sub-Clause 6.
3. Waterproofing with Prefabricated Bituminous Sheeting
Concrete surfaces shall be thoroughly sealed with one coat of primer. When the
solvent constituent of the primer has completely evaporated, a continuous layer of
hot bitumen compound shall be applied and the sheeting shall be bedded on it.
The sheeting shall be laid so that no air is trapped between it and the concrete
surface or between successive layers of sheeting.
S510.2
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

4. Waterproofing with Rubberised Filled Bitumen

Rubberised filled bitumen shall be laid at temperature of about 180° C by means
of squeegees. It shall be heated to no more than 200° C at any stage nor kept at
a temperature above 170° C for more than 4 hours. Reheating of the material after
setting will not be permitted. No traffic shall be allowed on rubberised filled bitumen
until the surfacing has been laid.
5. Protective Layers to Waterproofing Membranes
The protective layer shall be laid and compacted without damage to the
waterproofing membranes.
6. Waterproofing with Bitumen
Surfaces to be waterproofed with bitumen shall receive two coats of cut-back
bitumen complying with AASHTO M81 having a viscosity grade within the range
25-30 seconds (standard tar ciscometer) with a coverage of 1.8 sq.m/litre. Prior to
the application of bituminous paint, surfaces to which it is to be applied shall be
clean and dry. The first coat shall be allowed to dry before the second coat is
applied.
7. Proprietary Waterproofing Materials
Where proprietary waterproofing materials are specified they shall be laid in
accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
8. Drying of Primed Surfaces
Primed surfaces shall not be covered until all solvent constituents have
evaporated. When spirit base primer is used, a minimum of 20 hours shall elapse
before waterproofing is laid. When bituminous emulsion is used, all water shall be
allowed to evaporate.
a. Measurement
The quantities to be paid for under this Section will be the number of square
metres of structural surface covered by the waterproofing system, measured
once regardless of the number of layers, in place and accepted by the Engineer.
Horizontal surfaces shall be deemed to include surfaces sloping at 10° or less

to the horizontal.
S510.3
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

b. Payment
Payment for waterproofing of structures under this Section will be at the prices
tendered in the Bills of Quantities which payments will constitute full
compensation for the preparation of the surface to be waterproofed and
furnishing all materials, labour, tools, equipment and all else necessary to
complete the work as described on the Drawings, in these Specifications and as

510.1 Waterproofing to horizontal surfaces Sq.m
510.2 Waterproofing to vertical surfaces Sq.m
510.3 Waterproofing with Prefabricated Bituminous Sheeting Sq.m
510.4 Waterproofing with Mastic Asphalt Sq.m
510.5 Proprietary bridge deck waterproofing systems Sq.m
S510.4
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

SECTION 511: MOVEMENT JOINTS
CONTENTS
511.1 Description
511.2 Materials
511.3 Execution
_____________________________________________________________________________
511.1 Description
The work in this Section covers the requirements for movement joints in structural
elements such as decks, walls, box culverts, etc. The term movement joint covers
all types of permanent joints or hinge throats that allow expansion, contraction,
shrinkage or angular rotations to take place.
511.2 Materials
1. Prefabricated Joints
These shall be Transflex or other similar approved. They shall be fixed strictly
in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and supervised by a
competent person experienced in fixing such joints.
2. Joint Sealant and Seals
Joint Sealants shall consist of hot or cold poured compounds or preformed
compression seals which comply with the following Clauses.
3. Sealants
Sealants shall comply with the requirements of AASHTO M173.
The pouring temperature of the hot poured sealant shall not exceed the
manufacturer's recommended safe heating temperature. When a primer is
required or recommended by the sealant manufacturer, it shall be applied strictly
in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
Cold poured sealant shall be composed of a curing agent and a base resin that
shall be in such proportions as recommended by the manufacturer to provide a
fast cure if the material is mixed and applied by special mechanics or a retarded
cure if mixed by hand. When a primer is recommended by the manufacturer, it
shall be applied within the temperature range of 10o C to 40o C. It shall be cured
within 1 hour and remain active for not less than 4 hours. The sealant shall be
applied after the curing period of the primer and within the period that the primer
remains active.
S511.1
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

Materials mixed and applied by hand shall be supplied in separate containers in

the correct proportions and shall be mixed using a powered stirred or mixer or
any other method approved by the Engineer. The work life for machine mixed
material shall be adjusted to suit the appliance.
4. Testing Poured Sealants
Unless a manufacturer's certificate is produced to state that the material has
satisfactorily passed ASTM tests within 6 months prior to use, the Engineer
may require samples to be taken and tests to be carried out in accordance with
the relevant ASTM. The Engineer may at any time also require a sample to be
taken and tested in accordance with the ASTM to determine the quality of the
material as poured into the joint.
5. Preformed Compression Seals
Preformed compression seals shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO
M220. When preformed compression seals are to be vibrated in plastic
concrete for longitudinal joints in pavements, etc. they shall be firm, rigid strips
of bituminous material, polychloroprene or butadience-acrylonitrile rubber or
thermoplastic materials as approved by the Engineer. The strips shall have a
minimum thickness of 3 mm and a depth as required in the Drawings. They
shall be sufficiently rigid to remain vertical and straight without curving or
undue stretching when inserted into the concrete.
511.3 Execution
1. The size of the gap at the time of installation shall be the same as that occurring
at the mean structure temperature. The temperature shall be determined in
accordance with arrangements agreed with the Engineer.
2. The positions of all bolts cast into concrete and holes drilled in plates shall be
accurately determined using templates.
3. The mixing application and curing of all proprietary materials shall comply with
the manufacturer's requirements.
4. Prevention of Damage
To prevent damage to seating, etc. during the placing and hardening of concrete
or mortar under movement joint components, relative movement shall be
prevented between them and the supports to which they are being fixed.
When one half of the joint is being set, the other half shall be completely free
from longitudinal restraint. In particular, where strong-backs or templates are
used to locate the two sides of a joint, they shall not be fixed simultaneously to
S511.2
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

both sides.
Screw threads shall be kept clean and free from rust. Ramps shall be provided
and maintained to protect all movement joints from vehicular loading. Vehicles
shall cross the joints only by means of the ramps until the Engineer permits their
removal.
5. Installation of Deck Movement Joints
All deck movement joints shall be accurately set with their tops flush with the
roadway surface as per the manufacturer's requirements.
6. Grooves at Joints
Grooves in the surface of the concrete over joints may be formed in the plastic
concrete. Alternatively, they may be sawn after the concrete has set. Grooves
shall have truly vertical and parallel sides. If the grooves are to be formed, the
Contractor shall demonstrate to the Engineer's satisfaction that a surface finish
across the joint is obtainable with the appropriate tolerances. The forming
mechanism shall include a vibrating plate or similar device to ensure that the
concrete displaced to form the groove is fully recompacted into place; also a
screed to ensure the surface finish is satisfactory. When the grooves to be
formed are more than 13 mm wide, the method of forming adopted shall remove
from the slab the volume of concrete displaced to form the groove.
If the grooves are to be sawn, sawing shall be completed as soon as possible

within 8 hours after the final compaction of concrete. These periods may be
extended at the direction of the Engineer if the saws cause spalling of the edges
of grooves and this cannot be eliminated by the use of other types of saw blade
and sawing equipment. The Contractor may initially saw a slot 3 mm wide
centrally over contraction joints and a slot 12 mm wide centrally over expansion
joints each to the full specified depth to meet the requirements of this paragraph
provided the full width of groove is sawn within a period of 7 days after the final
compaction of concrete and the saws used do not cause spalling of the edges
of grooves.
Grooves over expansion joints shall be located over the joint filler to such a
depth and with such accuracy that the upper surface of the filler is contained
within the groove.
Where grooves are sawn and there is a tendency for rough arises to develop,
S511.3
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

these shall be ground to provide a radius of approximately 6 mm or a chamfer

approximately 6 mm wide.
Grooves shall be made at all contraction and longitudinal joints at a position

vertically above the fillet to within a tolerance of ±13 mm.
Grooves for longitudinal joints shall be made where slabs abut and the edges of
lane widths when carriageways are constructed as two or three lane widths in
one operation. Sealing grooves are not required at the centre of each slab when
a three -lane carriageway is constructed as two slab widths.
As an alternative to the making of a groove for longitudinal joints when

carriageways are constructed as two or three lane widths in one operation, the
joint may be formed and sealed simultaneously by the insertion of a bituminous
preformed filler strip of depth equal to the depth of slot described in the Contract
and not less than 8 mm wide by an approved dispensing device in front of the
finished screed. The method of placing the sealing strip shall ensure that the
strips in its correct position at the upper surface of the concrete vertical of its
correct dimensions after placing and laid to the correct alignment. The concrete
displaced by the strip shall be properly compacted back into the slab to within
the tolerance of levels permitted.
7. Sealing of Grooves
Before any traffic is permitted to use the carriageway in advance of permanent
sealing, the joint grooves shall be cleaned of any dirt or loose material and be
protected by inserting a temporary sealing strip of a material approved by the
Engineer. Alternatively, in the case of formed joints where a temporary filler or
former is used this shall be left in position until the joints are prepared for
permanent sealing.
Except where otherwise permitted by the Engineer, the permanent sealing of

joints shall be carried out not less than 28 days after laying of the concrete.
Immediately prior to permanent sealing of the joints, any dirt or loose material
or any temporary sealing or filling material shall be removed and the sides of
the sealing groove shall be scoured by means of a power-driven rotary wire
brush or by means of sand-blasting. When sand blasting is used, the groove
shall be temporarily caulked prior to sand-blasting. The groove shall be air dry
S511.4
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

at the time of sealing. Where the sealing compound is required not to extend
to the full depth of the groove, the groove shall be caulked to the required
depth with a compressible caulking material of a type which does not affect
and is not affected by the sealing compound to be used.
The prepared joints shall then be sealed with a compound complying with
Section 510. Where recommended by the manufacturer of the sealing
compound, an appropriate primer shall be used in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations. Hot-poured sealing compound shall be
heated in an indirectly heated melter/pourer to a temperature within the
pouring range recommended by the manufacturer and shall not be heated at
this temperature for a period longer than the safe heating time stated by the
manufacturer. The melter/pourer shall be cleaned out at the end of each day's
work and reheated materials shall not be used. Joints shall be sealed so that
the level of the sealing compound is between 3 mm and 6 mm below the
surface of the concrete.
Where permitted by the Engineer as an alternative to a poured sealing

compound, an approved preformed neoprene compression sealing strip may
be used. Where such strips are used, the width of the strip shall be such that
it remains in compression to the extent of one-eight of its initial width when the
joint is fully open, the anticipated movement being calculated on the basis of
400 mm per 1000 metres run. Any spalling at joints shall be made good to the
Engineer's satisfaction as regards shape and dimensions and shall be sealed
with a poured sealing compound as specified above.

a. Measurement
The quantity to be paid for under this Section will be the number of linear
metres of movement joints complete in place in accordance with these
Specifications and accepted by the Engineer.
b. Payment
Payment for movement joints under this Section will be made at the prices
tendered in the Bill of Quantities which prices and payments will constitute full
compensation for all labour, joints, materials, equipment, tools and all else
necessary to complete the work as described herein, on the Drawings and as
S511.5
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

instructed by the Engineer.


511 Movement Joint Type lin.m
S511.6
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

SECTION 512: CONCRETE REPAIRS
CONTENTS
512.1 Scope
512.2 Materials
512.3 Execution
_____________________________________________________________________________
512.1 Scope
This work shall consist of the repair of concrete elements including beams,
columns, walls and slabs as shown on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
512.2 Materials
 The steel reinforcement primer shall be a single component zinc-rich epoxy
resin.
 The primer shall be an ‘active’ type, capable of avoiding the generation of
incipient anodes in the immediate adjacent location. It shall be fully
compatible with the systems of concrete repair.
 The reinstatement mortar shall be a single component cement-based blend
of powders to which only the site addition of clean water shall be permitted.
The cured mortar shall achieve 28 N/mm2 compressive strength and 7
N/mm2 flexural strength at 28 days. The mortar shall be subject to the
Engineer’s approval.
512.3. Execution
The surface shall be cleaned by removing any dust, unsound or contaminated
material, plaster, corrosion deposits or algae. The repair area shall be broken out
to a minimum depth of 10 mm so that the perimeter of the area to be repaired shall
have a square edge.
Corroded steel reinforcement shall be fully exposed to a minimum of 20 mm all

round and all loose scale and corrosion deposits shall be removed. The steel shall
be cleaned to a bright condition paying particular attention to the back of exposed
steel bars.
S512.1
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

The mortar shall be proportioned in accordance with the manufacturer’s

instructions and shall be thoroughly mixed. The material shall be trowelled or spray
applied to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

(a) Measurement
The repair of concrete elements shall be measured in square metres.
(b) Payment
Payment will be made at the price tendered for the item under this Section
as it appears in the Bills of Quantities. The prices and payment shall
constitute full compensation for all labour, materials, tools, equipment and
plant necessary to complete the work described herein in strict
Payment item, which may appear in the Bills of Quantities, is as follows: -

No.
512.1 Concrete Repair (max depth 100mm) Sq. m

512.2 Concrete Repair (max depth 150mm) Sq. m
S512.2
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

513.1 Scope
This work shall consist of constructing new or replacing or raising existing concrete
sidewalks and driveways of the form and dimensions shown on the drawings or
513.2 Materials
 Granular Base Course material shall conform to Section 304.
 Concrete used shall conform to the requirements of Section 500. The
strength shall be 30 N/mm2 after 28 days.
 Joint Filler shall be as designated in Specification Section 511.
 Expansion joint filler shall be shaped to fit the concrete into which it is being
placed.
 Steel reinforcement is indicated on the detail drawings and shall conform
to the requirements of Specification 504.
513.3. Execution
(a) Subgrade Preparation
Excavate the area of the sidewalk or driveway to a minimum depth of 250
mm. The base of the excavation shall be watered and thoroughly
compacted. All soft or spongy material shall be removed and the resulting
space filled with approved material of a quality that when moistened and
compacted will form a stable foundation.
(b) Base Preparation

Unbound base material shall be placed, wetted if needed, and compacted
with suitable plant to form a dense surface.
The completed base shall be tested for grade and cross-section by means
of a template supported on the side of forms, and shall not project into the
planned concrete cross-section at any point. The base and forms shall be
wetted immediately in advance of placing concrete.
S513.1
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

(c) Existing Sidewalks and Driveways

Where the plans provide for the reconstruction or raising of a portion of an
existing sidewalk, the existing section shall be cut to a minimum depth of
100 mm with an abrasive type saw at the first score line at or beyond the
planned joint and the entire replaced section of sidewalk join the old work
at this line. All damaged or redundant material shall be removed to a level
where a sound base is found.
(d) Suspended Sidewalks and Driveways

Forms
Forms shall be constructed and maintained as specified in Section 501. In
no case will side forms be allowed to be removed less than 12 hours after
the finishing has been completed.
(e) General
Fresh concrete shall be placed, struck off and compacted until a layer of
mortar has been brought to the surface. The surface shall be finished to
grade and cross-section with a float, trowelled smooth and finished with a
broom. The float shall not be less than 3 m in length and not less than 150
mm in width. Concrete adjacent to expansion joints shall be finished with
an edger tool. Brooming shall be transverse to the line of traffic and if water
is necessary, it shall be applied to the surface immediately in advance of
brooming.
The surface of sidewalks shall be marked into uniform sized rectangles of

not less than 1.0 sq.m no more than 2 sq.m. with a scoring tool, which will
leave the edges rounded, and a 100 mm wide surface along the edges
smooth. Such marking shall be done after brooming and before the
concrete has hardened.
Expansion joints 6 mm wide shall be constructed at all returns and opposite

the joints in adjacent kerbs. Where kerbs are not adjacent, expansion joints
shall be constructed at intervals of 20 m. Expansion joints shall be filled
with premoulded joint filler conforming to the provisions of Specification
Section 501.
S513.2
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

The surface shall not vary more than 6 mm under a 3 m straightedge,

except at grade changes and the finished surface shall be free from
blemishes. Concrete sidewalks shall be cured as provided in Specification
Section 501 and protected from disturbance while curing.
Where existing or newly constructed drainage appliances intersect

driveways it is necessary for the installation of a bridging system to allow
unencumbered use. To that end the Contractor shall install a system to the
dimensions and placement as designated on the drawings.

(a) Measurement
Construction of sidewalk or driveway shall be measured in cubic metres of
concrete.
Construction of the bridging system shall be measured in linear metres

along the system, in place.
(b) Payment
constitute full compensation for all labour, concrete, reinforcement and all
the other materials, tools, formwork, temporary access and crossings,
equipment and plant necessary to complete the work described herein in
strict conformance with these Specifications and as approved by the
Engineer.
Excavation, supply and placing of granular base course material shall be

paid separately under their respective items 204 and 304.
S513.3
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

Payment item, which may appear in the Bills of Quantities, is as follows: -
513.1 Sidewalk or Driveway Suspended Cu. M

513.2 Sidewalk or Driveway at Grade Cu. M
513.3 Reconstruct Sidewalk or Driveway Cu. m
513.4 Raise Sidewalk or Driveway Cu. m
513.5 Metal Cover for Sidewalk Opening No.
513.6 Suspended Sidewalk Cu. m
S513.4
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

SECTION 514: SUBSTRUCTURE DRAINAGE
CONTENTS
514.1 Description
514.2 Materials
_____________________________________________________________________________
514.1 Description
The work under this section shall consist of supplying and placing drainage blocks,
filter material, perforated pipes and no-fines concrete to retaining walls and concrete
substructure as shown on the Drawings or as ordered by the Engineer.
514.2 Materials
a) Pipe
Pipe shall be perforated concrete, perforated clay, perforated PVC, perforated
metal, or bituminous-coated perforated corrugated metal as shown on the
Drawings and called for in the bid schedule.
Perforated concrete and clay pipe shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO
M65 for standard perforated clay pipe.
Perforated corrugated metal pipe shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO

M36.
Bituminous coated, perforated, corrugated metal pipe shall conform to the

requirements of AASHTO M36, and in addition, shall be coated with bituminous
material in accordance with the requirements of AASHTO M190.
Perforated PVC pipe shall be DWV (Drain, Waste and Vent).
b) Filter Material
Filter material shall be placed around the perforated pipe to a minimum thickness
of 1/2 pipe diameter on both sides and 1 full pipe diameter on top and beneath the
pipe and completely surrounded with a geotextile fabric approved by the Engineer.
S514.1
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

The filter material shall conform to the following gradation:
Passing Percent
12 mm 100
9.5 mm 70 - 90
4.75 mm 45 - 65
2.36 mm 15 - 25
1.18 mm 10 - 15
0.60 mm 0-8
c) Concrete Drainage Blocks

Hollow load bearing concrete masonry blocks 150 mm wide shall conform to ASTM
C90 - 70. The cores of the blocks shall be filled with granular aggregates of sieve
sizes not larger than 19 mm or smaller than 4.75 mm.
d) Granular Filter Material

The material for the filter material shall be washed and shall consist of invert, hard,
durable, naturally occurring stone.
The Grading shall be as follows: -

SIEVE SIZE (mm) % PASSING
75 mm 100
37.5 mm 50-80
19 mm 5-10
12 mm 3 maximum
e) No-fines Concrete
Cement, aggregate and water shall comply with the following requirements:
Each size of aggregate shall be a single size aggregate
S514.2
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

The volume of aggregate per 50 kg of cement for each class of concrete shall be
as follows:
Class cement Aggregate per 50 kg

NF 38 0,33 m3
NF 19 0,30 m3
NF 13 0,27 m3
Cement shall be measured by mass or in full pockets of 50 kg each and aggregate

shall be measured by volume in approved measuring boxes or barrows.
The aggregate shall be moist or wetted before the cement is added. Where drum
mixers are used, about 20% of the water shall be poured into the drum before the
aggregate and cement is loaded. The mixing time in the drum shall be about 45 to
50 seconds.
The quantity of water added shall be just sufficient to form a smooth grout which
will adhere to and completely coat each and every particle of aggregate, and which
is just wet enough to ensure that, at points of contact of aggregate, the grout will
run together to form a small fillet to bond the aggregate together. The mix shall
contain no more than 20 litres of water for every 50 kg of cement.
Mixing shall be done in an approved batch-type mechanical mixer, but small

quantities may be hand mixed.

Concrete drainage blocks shall be laid to horizontal lines with stretcher bond and dry
joints. Blocks bedded on the concrete haunch shall be cut to the slope shown on the
Drawings. Concrete drainage blocks shall be filled with the approved filter material.
Pipe and Filter Material

The perforated pipe shall be laid to the line and levels shown on the Drawing with the
perforated side of the pipe down. The pipe shall be well embedded in the filter material
and separate pipe sections shall be firmly jointed.
S514.3
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

Drains in Walls
Drain holes and weep holes shall be constructed in abutment walls, wingwalls, and
retaining walls as shown on the Drawings.
In addition to the drainage holes and weep holes in the preceding paragraph, holes
75 mm in diameter for relief of hydrostatic pressure shall be provided at the bottom of
walls, immediately above the footing, at about 2-metre centres, when ordered by the
Engineer.
No-fines Concrete
No-fines concrete shall be placed in accordance with the procedure approved by the
engineer. It shall be placed in its final position within 15 minutes of having been mixed.
The concrete shall be worked sufficiently to ensure that it will completely fill the space
to be concreted and that adjacent aggregate particles are in contact with one another.
Excessive tamping shall be avoided and the concrete shall not in any circumstances
be vibrated.
All no-fines concrete shall be protected from the elements and loss of moisture.
Protection against loss of moisture shall be accomplished by one or more of the
following methods:
i. Retaining formwork in place.

ii. Covering exposed surfaces with sacking or other approved material kept
continuously wet.
iii. Covering exposed surfaces with plastic sheeting.
514.4 ` Measurement and Payment

The quantity to be paid for under this item for drainage to structures and retaining walls
will be number of square metres of blocks or filter drain measured vertically in place,
completed and accepted. Measurement shall be taken vertically from the top of the
filter material surrounding the perforated pipe to the top of the drainage blocks or filter
material and horizontally between the extents of the filter drain or of the drainage
blocks.
S514.4
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

The unit price bid per square metre shall include the cost of furnishing all labour,
material and equipment for placing, laying, cutting and jointing the drainage blocks,
forming drain holes and weep holes in walls, geotextile, placing the filter material to
the geotextile and filling the drainage blocks to the lines and levels shown on the
Drawings. The perforated drain shall be measured separately
The quantity to be paid for under this item for perforated drain pipe to bridge structures
and retaining walls will be number of linear metres measured in place, completed and
accepted. Measurement shall be taken along the centre line of the pipe between the
extents of the filter drain or of the drainage blocks and the outfall.
The unit price bid per metre shall include the cost of furnishing all labour, material and
equipment for placing, laying, cutting and jointing the pipe, bends and special fittings,
forming holes through walls and weep holes in walls, geotextile, placing the filter
material to the pipe and excavating and backfilling, to the lines and levels shown on
the Drawings.
Payment items which may appear in the Bills of Quantities are as follows: -

514.1 Drainage to bridge sub-structures sq. m.
514.2 Drainage to concrete retaining walls sq. m
514.3 Perforated drain pipe Lin. m
S514.5
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

SECTION 515: PROTECTION OF EMBANKMENTS AND SLOPE AREAS BENEATH
STRUCTURES
CONTENTS
515.1 Description
515.2 Materials
515.3 General Requirements
_____________________________________________________________________________
515.1 Description
This work consists of furnishing and placing a protective covering of erosion resistant
material as slope or foundation protection, as shown on the Drawings or as directed
by the Engineer. The work shall be done in reasonably close conformity to the Plans.
515.2 Materials
a. Stone
All stone shall be clean, durable, angular with fractured faces, nearly rectangular
in shape with a breadth or thickness at least one third its length. Maximum size
of the large stone shall be 34 kg.
The Contractor shall supply well-graded material with smaller stones well fitting
the larger stones to the extent that a homogeneous blanket of slope protection
will result.
b. Mortar
Mortar shall consist of one part cement and three parts sand thoroughly mixed
with water to leave a thick creamy consistency.
c. Concrete
The concrete shall meet the requirements for concrete as specified under
Section 500.
d. Reinforcement
Reinforcement, when used, shall conform to the requirements for reinforcement
as specified under Section 504. Mesh fabric reinforcement may be used, type
and application shall be approved by the Engineer prior to placement.
S515.1
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

STRUCTURES
515.3 General Requirements

a. Mortared Rubble Slope and Area Protection
Stones shall be placed and arranged in close contact, the largest stones being
placed near the base of the slope or edges of an area. The spaces between
the larger stones shall be filled with stones of suitable size, leaving the surface
smooth, reasonably tight and conforming to the contour required.
In general, the stone shall be laid with a degree of care that will ensure for
plane surfaces a maximum variation from a true plane of not more than 30 mm
in 1 metre. Warped and curved surfaces shall have the same general degree
of accuracy.
As each of the larger stones is placed, it shall be surrounded by fresh mortar

and adjacent stones shall be pressed into contact. After the larger stones are
in place, all of the spaces or openings between them shall be filled with mortar
and smaller stones then placed by pressing them into position, forcing excess
mortar to the surface and ensuring that each stone is carefully and firmly
bedded laterally.
After the work has been completed as above described, all excess mortar
forced up shall be spread uniformly to completely fill all surface voids. All
surface joints shall then be roughly pointed up either with flush joints or with
shallow, smooth raked joints.
The work shall be protected from the sun and kept moist for a minimum of
three days after placement.
b. Concrete Slope and Area Protection

The slopes to be covered by concrete slope protection shall be trimmed and
dressed to the lines and grades as directed by the Engineer. The Contractor
shall supply and place granular backfill to a minimum thickness of 100 mm
over the trimmed slopes. Granular backfill shall conform to the requirements
as specified under Section 207.
Reinforcing steel where used shall be placed in accordance with Section 504.
S515.2
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

STRUCTURES
The concrete shall be placed in stages with the size of each pour being limited
to the capability of the Contractor and as directed by the Engineer.
Concrete shall be allowed to set before the adjoining course is placed. The
joints between adjacent stages shall be cold joints without filler. Vertical joints
shall be formed or grooved to the depth of the reinforcement. All joints shall
be finished with approved edging tool and the surfaces enclosed by joints shall
be given a Class 4 Floated Surface Finish as per sidewalks.

Payment for mortared rubble or concrete slope and area protection shall be at the unit
price per square metre and shall include full compensation for the cost of furnishing
all tools, labour, equipment and material as specified.
Payment for preparation of the subgrade shall be included in this unit price and no
additional payment shall be made for such work.
Payment shall be made for the following bid items:

a. Mortared rubble Masonry area protection.
b. Concrete Slope Protection.
Payment items which may appear in the Bill of Quantities are as follows:-

515.1 Rubble Masonry Protection sq. m.
515.2 Concrete Slope Protection sq. m.
S515.3
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

SECTION 516: BRIDGE DECK DRAINS
CONTENTS
516.1 Description
516.2 Materials
516.4 Payment
_____________________________________________________________________________
516.1 Description
This section covers requirements for the supply and installation of deck drains.
Included are deck catch basins, steel pipe catch basins, PVC pipe, bends, collars,
reinforced concrete pipes and all other hardware necessary for the installation at the
locations and for the lengths as shown on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
516.2 Materials
a) All steel shall comply with ASTM A36 except as noted on the Drawings.
b) All PVC pipe shall conform to BS 3505 Class D.
c) The entire steel assembly shall be hot-dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM
A129 unless fabricated from stainless steel.

The deck drains, deck catch basin assemblies together with all anchors shall be cast
in place during construction of the deck. Down pipes shall be located and attached to
the structure as detailed on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
516.4 Payment
Payment shall be for deck drains of the type and design specified at the price bid per
unit of drain in place, which price shall include full compensation for all materials,
labour, tools and equipment including deck catch basins, covers, grills, drain pipe, pipe
catch basins, elbows, collars and all other hardware, reinforced concrete pipe
excavation and backfill where involved in the furnishing and installation of the deck
drains complete in place as specified and as shown on the Drawings for each
individual structure.
S516.1
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

SECTION 516: BRIDGE DECK DRAINS
The unit price shall also include full compensation for galvanized or stainless steel
deck drain and down pipe, a drain from the top of deck to the point on the ground
where the steel pipe joins with the manhole, highway drainage ditch or channel
system where specified.
Payment items which may appear in the Bills of Quantities is as follows: -

516.1 Deck Drains No.
S516.2
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

SECTION 517: CONCRETE GUARD RAIL
CONTENTS
517.1 Scope
517.2 Materials
517.3 Execution
_____________________________________________________________________________
517.1 Scope
This work shall consist of the construction of reinforced concrete guardrail in
accordance with the following Specification and as directed by the Engineer.
517.2 Materials
(a) Concrete
Concrete shall conform to the requirements of Section 501 and shall be of
2
30 N/mm strength at 28 days.
(b) Reinforcing Steel
Reinforcing shall be in accordance with the Specification for reinforcing
materials in Section 504. All reinforcing bars shall be of the size and length
shown on the Drawings and shall be accurately placed and firmly held
during placing and setting of the concrete. When placed in work,
reinforcing steel shall be free from dirt, detrimental rust, loose scale, paint,
oil or other foreign material.
(c) Hook and Eye Bars
Hook and eye bars shall be manufactured from commercial steel having a
minimum tensile strength of 350 N/mm2.

All exposed metal shall be thoroughly cleaned and painted with one coat
of red lead primer and one coat of approved paint.
The tolerance allowable for the ends shall be  3 mm and all other dimensions  5
mm.
517.3 Execution
All processes shall be open for inspection and approval by the Engineer or his
representatives at any time during the production of the units. Bullnose ends are
to be constructed with 50% of them having an eye and 50% having a hook.
S517.1
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

All formwork shall be to the requirements of Section 501.

(a) Mixing of Concrete
Concrete shall be thoroughly mixed in a batch mixer of an approved size
and type, which will ensure a uniform distribution of the materials
throughout the mass.
The concrete shall be mixed only in such quantities as are required for
immediate use and any, which has developed initial set, shall not be used.
Concrete, which has partially hardened, shall not be retempered or
remixed.
(b) Placing and Consolidating Concrete

Prior to placing concrete, forms shall be cleaned of all extraneous matter
and adequately oiled with an approved form oil.
Immediately after filling the molds, the concrete shall be thoroughly
consolidated by means of mechanical vibration. The type and design of
vibrating apparatus shall be approved by the Engineer and shall be capable
of transmitting vibration to the concrete at frequencies of not less than four
thousand five hundred (4,500) impulses per minute.
The duration of vibrating shall be sufficient to thoroughly consolidate the
concrete, but shall not be continued so as to cause segregation.
(c) Expansion Joints

The concrete guardrail shall have construction joints at 3 m intervals in
length except where shorter sections are necessary for closures, but no
section shall be less than 1.2 m long. The construction joints may be made
by cross-cutting longer sections with a concrete saw. Alternatively, the
sections shall be separated by sheet metal templates, 3 mm in thickness
set perpendicular to the face and top of the guard rail.
(d) Curing and Finishing

Guard rails shall be cured for a period sufficient to ensure that they attain
the specified strength. The method of curing shall be approved by the
Engineer. The units shall have a smooth finish.
The dimensions shall be within a tolerance of 6 mm and the alignment
within 3 mm.
S517.2
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

(e) Defects
Not more than 2% of the surface shall be defective in any piece. Air holes
over 3 mm in diameter shall not exceed thirty (30) in any lineal 0.3 m or fifty
in any 1 m lineal distance. Air holes within these limits shall be patched.
Products, which develop surface cracking within five (5) days of
manufacture, shall be rejected. Products with cracks over 75 mm long shall
be rejected. Patching shall not be carried out without prior approval of the
Engineer.

(a) Measurement
Construction of reinforced concrete guardrail shall be measured in linear
metres.
(b) Payment
as it appears in the Bill of Quantities. The prices and payment shall
constitute full compensation for all labour, concrete, material and all other
materials, tools, equipment and plant necessary to complete the work
described in strict conformance with these Specifications and as approved
by the Engineer.
Payment item, which may appear in the Bill of Quantities, is follows:

517.1 Construction of Reinforced lin.m.
Concrete Guardrail
S517.3
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

DRAINAGE WORKS
S600.0
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___
SERIES 600: DRAINAGE WORKS

SECTION 601: REINFORCED CONCRETE PIPE CULVERT
CONTENTS
601.1 Description
601.2 Materials
_____________________________________________________________________________
601.1 Description
The work to be performed under this Section consists of supplying and installing
reinforced concrete pipe culverts of the classes, sizes and dimensions required,
furnished and installed at such locations as are designated on the Drawings or by the
Engineer in accordance with these Specifications and in conformity with the lines and
grades given.
601.2 Materials
1. Pipe - Pipes shall be manufactured and conform fully to the requirements of

AASHTO M 170 for Class IV, wall C, pipes. The Contractor shall submit to the
Engineer for approval, certificates from manufacturers showing their products
comply with the stated standards.
4. Concrete - Encasement concrete shall conform to the requirements of Sections
500 and 501.
5. Reinforcing Steel - Reinforcing steel and steel fabric reinforcement shall conform
to the requirements of Section 504.
6. Rubber Gaskets - Rubber gaskets shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO
M 198.
7. Joint Sealer - Oakum for joints in bell and spigot pipe shall be made from hemp
(Cannabis Sativa) line, or Benares Sunn Fibre, or from a combination of these
fibres. The oakum shall be thoroughly corded and finished and virtually free from
lumps, dirt and extraneous matter.
1. Excavation and Backfill - Excavation and backfilling shall be performed in

accordance with the requirements of Section 204, except that the costs of this
work shall be included in the unit prices tendered per linear metre of pipe.
S601.1
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

The trench width shall be constrained to the width shown on the drawings for a
depth from 150mm above the top of the pipe to the base of the excavation. Any
excess excavation shall be backfilled with concrete to the Engineer’s instructions
at the Contractor’s expense.
2. Pipe Bedding - shall be class B as ASCE Manual No. 37 unless defined in the
Contract. Before bedding material is placed in the trench the base and the sides
of the trench shall be trimmed to provide a regular shape in conformity with the
drawings and all loose or soft material removed from the trench floor. Bedding
material shall be placed and compacted in the trench to the level of the underside
of the pipe barrel. Where the bed and surround is full concrete encasement the
pipes shall be first laid on temporary supports so as to support the pipe in its
correct position until encasement.
3. Laying of Pipe - Pipe laying shall begin at the downstream end of the culvert with
the bell or groove ends facing upstream. When the pipes are laid, the barrel of
each pipe shall be in contact with the bedding material throughout its full length,
inclusive of the bell.
When elliptical pipe with circular reinforcement or circular pipe with elliptical
reinforcement is used, the pipe shall be laid in such a position that the
manufacturer's marks designating the "top" or "bottom" of the pipe shall not be
more than five degrees from a vertical plane through the longitudinal axis of the
pipe.
4. Joint Seal - Joints shall be made with :-
a) Portland cement mortar,

b) Portland cement grout,
c) Rubber gaskets, or
d) Oakum
as described below, or by a combination of these types unless one type or

combination is specified in the Special Conditions of Contract.
S601.2
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

5. Joints -
a. Mortar Joints
Mortar mixes shall be one part Portland cement and two parts sand. The
quantity of water in the mix shall be sufficient to produce a stiff, workable
mortar. Excess water in the mix shall be grounds for rejection. Pipe ends
shall be thoroughly cleaned and wetted with water before the joint is made.
A strand of oakum and the stiff mortar shall then be placed in the lower half
of the bell or groove of the pipe section already laid and mortar on the upper
half of the spigot or tongue of the section being laid. The two pipes sections
shall then be joined tightly with their inner surfaces flush and even. The
joints shall be entirely filled and packed with mortar, and sufficient additional
mortar shall be used to form a bead around the outside of the joint.
b. Grouted Joints
Grout shall consist of Portland cement mixed to a workable consistency
with not more than 19 litres of water per sack of cement. The grout shall
be poured or pumped into the joint space and retained by moulds or runners
around the pipe.
c. Rubber Gasket Joints

Rubber gaskets shall be fitted snugly in the annular space between the
bevelled surfaces of the tongue and groove ends of connecting pipe section
to form a flexible watertight seal.
d. Oakum Joints
Bell and spigot joints shall be caulked with oakum and sealed with hot
asphaltic cement or other approved hot-poured sewer joint compound.
6. Joint Finishing
After joints of the above types are made, the inside face of the pipes and the
annular recess between the ends of the pipes shall be cleaned. The recess
shall then be filled with mortar and finished smooth and even with the inside
surface of the pipes. For pipes 750 mm. or less in diameter, joints shall be
finished on the outside surface using grout or mortar. For pipes of greater
diameter than 750 mm, joints shall not be finished until all fill over the pipe has
been completed.
S601.3
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

7. Pipe Surround and Backfilling

In the case of granular bedding and surround the material shall be
thoroughly tamped in under the flanks of the culverts to provide a uniform
bedding, all to the engineers satisfaction.
Surrounding alongside and backfilling over all culverts shall be placed at

optimum moisture content and compacted in layers not exceeding 150 mm
after compaction, to a density of at least the density required for the material
in adjoining layers of fill, subgrade and sub base. The density of backfilling
in excavations made in natural ground shall be at least 90% of modified
AASHTO density.
Backfilling shall be carried out simultaneously and equally on both sides of

a culvert to prevent unequal lateral forces from occurring.
Where shown on the drawings or ordered by the Engineer, pipes shall be

fully encased in concrete according to class and dimensions as shown on
the drawings or as ordered by the engineer. Supports shall be provided
close to the pipe ends to support the pipes during the placing of concrete.
The concrete shall be so placed as to fill all spaces below the pipe
completely. Poker vibrators shall be used to ensure the proper filling of all
spaces below and around the pipes with concrete. Concrete casing shall
be cast in one continuous operation until completed.
a. Measurement
The quantity of Reinforced Concrete Pipe Culvert to be paid for under this Section
will be measured as the number of metres complete in place and accepted.
Measurement will be made along the centreline of the culvert as installed in place
and cut off at the inside face of manholes, catchpits, etc.
b. Payment
Payment for the items under this Section will be made at the prices tendered in the
Bills of Quantities. The prices and payment shall constitute full compensation for
furnishing pipe, bedding, concrete encasement and reinforcing steel if any,
handling, hauling, installing, cuffing, connecting and joining, grouting and finishing,
S601.4
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

including materials, labour, tools, equipment and all else necessary to complete
the works as described in these Specifications and as approved by the Engineer.
The cost of connecting new pipe to existing pipes will also deemed to be included.
Excavation and backfill will be included in the unit price bid per linear metre of pipe
culvert and no additional payment for this work will be made under Section 204,
Structural Excavation.
Separate payment shall be made for concrete and reinforcement associated with
head walls to culverts in accordance with Section 501 of the Specifications.
Payment item that may appear in this Section of the Bills of Quantities is:

601.1 Concrete pipe culvert lin.m
(diameter and bedding stated)
S601.5
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

SECTION 602: RIP RAP
CONTENTS
602.1 Scope
602.2 Materials
602.3 Execution
_____________________________________________________________________________
602.1 Scope
This work shall consist of furnishing and placing a layer of rip-rap for protection of
embankments and other construction against erosion by water or wave action in
accordance with these Specifications and as shown on the Drawings or as ordered
by the Engineer.
602.2 Materials
The materials provided by the Contractor, regardless of their sources shall comply
with the following:
i. Rip rap
Stone for riprap shall be hard field or quarry stone not susceptible to
disintegration or excessive weathering on exposure to the atmosphere or
water, which is angular in shape. Rounded stones, boulders, sandstone or
similar soft stone or relatively thin slabs (less than 125 mm) will not be
acceptable. It shall be free from soft material such as sand, clay, shale or
organic material and shall not contain an excessive quantity elongated
stones.
The required size of the stone will depend on the “critical mass” specified.
At least 50% by mass of the material comprising the riprap shall consist of
stones with a mass heavier than the critical mass, and not more than 10%
by mass of the material shall consist of stones with a mass of less than 10%
of the critical mass or more than 5 times the critical mass. The remainder of
the stone shall be so graded that when placed with the larger stones, the
entire mass will be compact.
Where no critical mass is defined each stone shall weigh not less than 25 kg
and at least 75% of the volume shall consist of stones weighing not less than
S602.1
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

CONTENTS
602.1 Scope
602.2 Materials
602.3 Execution
_____________________________________________________________________________
250 kg each.
ii. Dumped-Rip Rap

Stone used for dumped rip rap shall be hard, durable, angular in shape,
resistant to weathering and shall meet the gradation requirement specified.
Neither breadth nor thickness of a single stone should be less than one-
third its length. Rounded stone or boulders will not be accepted unless
authorized by special provisions.
Stone shall be free from overburden, spoil, shale, and organic material
and shall meet the following requirements:
Weight of Stone Maximum Percent

700 kg. 100
150 80
100 50
10* 10
*Passing 50mm shall not exceed five percent of weight of 10kg stones.
Each load of rip rap shall be reasonably well graded from the smallest to
the maximum size specified. Stones smaller than the specified ten
percent size and spalls will not be permitted in an amount exceeding ten
percent by weight of each load.
iii. Grouted Riprap

Stone for grouted riprap shall meet the requirements of i and ii above. Stone
shall be bedded on a minimum 50mm thickness of 4:1 sand cement mortar.
Spaces and joints between stones shall be grouted with 4:1 sand cement
S602.2
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

grout. On slopes, weep holes, 50 mm diameter, shall be placed at one metre

centres in both directions and staggered as necessary.
602.3 Execution
(a) Placing
Construction shall proceed with a minimum of interruption of the prescribed
lines and grades, and in accordance with the Drawings and Specifications,
or as directed by the Engineer. Should there be an unusual delay,
construction shall not be resumed until the Engineer has examined the
area and found it in a satisfactory condition.
The filter bed shall consist of a layer or layers of permeable material placed
on the prepared surface to the required thickness and each layer shall be
finished to an even surface and thickness. Compaction of pervious material
will not be required. Care shall be taken not to mix various grades of filter
material neither to disturb material already placed when subsequent layers
or riprap are being placed.
When the use of synthetic-fibre filter fabric is required, the material shall be
placed on the prepared surface or on the filter bed, depending on the
instructions. The overlap between adjacent sheets shall be 150mm unless
otherwise specified. Care shall be taken not to damage the filter fabric
when subsequent layers are being placed, neither to expose the filter fabric
to the sun for periods exceeding three days before it is covered up.
The rip-rap shall be placed on top of the filter layer from the outer edges
up the slope of the rip-rap or as shown on the Drawings or as directed by
the Engineer.
The rip-rap shall be laid in two layers. Rip-rap stone in each layer shall be
carefully placed stone beside stone, so that the smaller materials under it
shall not be disturbed. The exposed voids between the stones shall have
spalls of stone wedged into them so as to prevent shifting of the stones due
to wave or current action and to present an even line slope to the grade as
shown on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
S602.3
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

Care shall be taken that in laying the rip-rap, the filter material is not
disturbed, otherwise the Contractor shall immediately correct this condition
at his expense.
The finished surfaces of Rip-Rap shall present an even, tight and relatively
smooth surface conforming to the required lines as shown on the drawings
or as directed by the Engineer.
(b) Tolerance
Rip-rap shall be placed to the thicknesses equal to or greater than shown
on the Drawings. The exposed face of the rip-rap may have depressions
of not more than 150 mm below the line shown on the Drawings in any 3
metres of exposed face measured in any direction by a 3 metre
straightedge.
(c) Maintenance
The Contractor shall maintain at his own expense the rip-rap in its proper
slope until accepted by the Engineer and any material displaced by any
cause shall be replaced by him to the lines and grades shown on the
Drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
(a) Measurement
The quantity of rip-rap or filter layer for which payment will be made shall
be the number of cubic metres of filter layer or riprap placed and accepted
for payment. This calculation shall be based on the payment lines shown
on the Drawings.
The unit of measurement for synthetic fibre filter fabric shall be the square
metre of fabric placed in accordance with the drawings and these
specifications and accepted for payment, including wastage.
(b) Payment
constitute full compensation for all labour, furnishing, transporting, bed
S602.4
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

preparation and placing of all materials, wastage, removal of unsuitable

material deposited during construction operations, tools, equipment and
plant necessary to complete the work described herein in strict
The Contractor shall make all necessary allowance in the rates for the cost
of additional material required in the rip-rap on account of settlement of the
foundations and the consolidation of materials in embankment protection.
He shall allow in the rates for any additional material required over and
above the volumes calculated for payment in order to comply with the
requirements of the Specifications as regards to tolerances of the slopes
and dimensions of the filling in the rip-rap.
Payment items, which may appear in the Bills of Quantities, are as follows:

No.
602.1 Ordinary Rip Rap Cu. m
602.2 Sea Defense Rip Rap Cu. m
602.3 Grouted Rip Rap Cu.m
602.4 Filter bed material as specified on drawings Cu.m
602.5 Geotextile for seperation Sq. m
S602.5
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

SECTION 603: DRAINAGE APPLIANCE
CONTENTS
603.1 Scope
603.2 Materials
603.3 Execution
_____________________________________________________________________________
603.1 Scope
Drainage appliance rehabilitation will be done as shown on the drawings or as directed
by the Engineer to ensure that surfaces are safe and well drained, and that surface
run-off is channelled to watercourses, and to prevent any erosion of side slopes and
surfaces. The Work excludes new construction of manholes or catchpits, and grade
adjustment.
603.2 Materials
Materials to be supplied and used are as follows:
a) Culvert pipe, concrete inverts, catch basin boxes and grates, manhole boxes and
covers and cast iron frames for catch basins and manholes will be required to
match existing materials as replacement to those materials damaged or worn;
b) Clean granular aggregates will be used for backfill. Bituminous material will be
required to complete repairs enclosing collection devices and aiding
channelisation for run-off and materials shall be in accordance with the relevant
400 series sections.
c) Concrete shall be class 20 unless otherwise directed and shallconform to

Specifications 500 and 501.
d) Reinforcement shall conform to the detailed drawings and Specification 504.
603.3 Execution
(a) Preliminary
The Contractor shall make a joint inspection of all drainage appliances including,
without limitation, culverts, concrete inverts, catch basin boxes and frames,
sumps manhole boxes and frames, grates, manhole covers, and related hardware
to be rehabilitated or maintained to permit unobstructed passage of water from
S603.1
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

the Roadway surface and across or along the Right-of-Way. Any worn, blocked
or silted-up, bent, broken, missing or damaged appliances will be noted for
cleaning, repair or replacement. Where the inlet or outlet of a culvert is damaged,
cracked or unravelled, repairs will be noted for replacing of the damaged section.
The kerb and slope invert sections, which have become disconnected or
damaged, will be noted for repair or replacement. All damaged asphalt kerbs will
be noted for patching using an appropriate asphalt mix in accordance with the
relevant 400 series sections.
.
(b) Methods
Methods of clearing debris will vary according to the severity of the problem and
will include, but not be limited
 to:removing debris culverts, debris catchment areas and catch basins by hand
or by specialized machinery;
 flushing the appliance with a high pressure hose to remove any build-up of
debris; and
 cleaning out catch basins and manholes using a vacuum catch basin cleaner
or flushing with a high pressure hose.

(a) Measurement
The quantity to be paid under this item will be the linear metres of culverts or
appliances repaired or cleaned as shown on the drawings or directed by the
Engineer.
In the case of cleaning of sumps the measurement shall be for each sump
cleaned.
(b) Payment
Payment will be made at the price tendered for the item under this Section as it
compensation for all labour, pipes, bituminous material, cleaning, removal of
unsuitable material and its disposal off site and all the other materials, tools,
equipment and plant necessary to complete the work described herein in strict
S603.2
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

Payment items, which may appear in the Bills of Quantities, are as follows: -

No.
603.1 Cleaning of Culverts and Drainage Appliances lin. m

603.2 Repair of Culverts and Drainage Appliances lin. m
603.3 Cleaning sumps No.
S603.3
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

SECTION 604: DITCH REHABILITATION
CONTENTS
604.1 Scope
604.2 Materials
604.3 Execution
_____________________________________________________________________________
604.1 Scope
This work shall consist of rehabilitating lined and unlined existing ditches and
watercourses as required to provide safe, unobstructed drainage for all roadways
surface and natural roadside runoff, and drainage water passing under or alongside
the roadway and structures.
604.2 Materials
 Rip-rap of varying sizes will be supplied and used by the Contractor to repair
and stabilise side slopes and embankments of ditches and watercourses
where required by the Engineer or shown on the Drawings in accordance with
Section 602.
 Concrete and mortar shall meet the requirements of Sections 500 and 501.
 Where required, Geotextile shall be used to repair embankment as directed by

the Engineer in keeping with Section 713.
604.3 Execution
(a) Unlined Ditches
The ditch cross-section and size will be maintained or changed such that run-off
can be controlled. The cross-section will be maintained with a flat or “U” shaped
bottom unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
To minimise damage to the vegetative cover existing in the ditches no mechanical

means or methods shall be employed for the cleaning process unless approved
by the Engineer.
When cleaning or re-shaping a ditch, the backslope and shoulder slopes will not
be undermined and stable vegetated slopes will not be disturbed.
S604.1
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

SECTION 604: DITCH REHABILITATION
The ditch elevation will be kept 300mm below the sub-grade to ensure free
drainage of the road pavement and the ditch gradient will be sufficient to maintain
a continuous flow (a minimum fall of 1 in 100 along the ditch) and prevent
freestanding water.
Where required, ditches will be provided and deepened at culvert entrance

locations to provide a water collection area to prevent the culvert from becoming
obstructed by debris.
(b) Lined Ditches

Lined, paved or surfaced ditches will be cleaned by hand of debris, which has
accumulated in them. Where continual ditch cleaning maintenance is required at
a particular location, additional ditch backsloping, binwalling, or other preventative
solutions will be performed as agreed with the Engineer.
The Contractor will re-set access culverts, as required, when correcting the ditch
profile to ensure free unobstructed drainage.

(a) Measurement
Rehabilitation of lined and unlined ditches shall be measured in linear metre.
(b) Payment
Payment will be made at the price tendered for the item under this Section as it
compensation for all labour, excavation, cleaning, removal of unsuitable materials
and its disposal off-site, tools, equipment and plant necessary to complete the
work described herein in strict conformance with these Specifications and as

604.1 Rehabilitation of Unlined Ditches lin.m
604.2 Rehabilitation of Lined Ditches lin.m
604.3 Rehabilitation of Embankment cu. m
S604.2
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

SECTION 605: CONCRETE CURB, SLIPPER AND SWALE DRAINS
CONTENTS
605.1 Description
605.2 Materials
_____________________________________________________________________________
605.1 Description
The terms ‘curb’ and ‘kerb’ shall be considered to be directly interchangeable when
referred to in the Contract.
This work shall consist of the construction or repair of concrete curbs, curb and
slippers, slipper and swale drains and similar features in accordance with these
Specifications and in conformity with the locations, lines, grades and dimensions
shown on the plans or as ordered by the Engineer.
605.2 Materials
1. Concrete used shall be Class 30 or as specified on the drawings and shall
conform to Sections 500 and 501.
2. Preformed expansion joint filler shall conform to Section 501.
3. Reinforcing Steel
Reinforcing steel and welded wire fabric shall conform to Section 504.
4. Subbase shall conform to Section 301.

1. Excavate to the base of the underside of the proposed concrete curb, slipper etc..
All soft and unsuitable material shall be removed and replaced with suitable
material. If the base of the excavation is pavement quality materials of subbase
or better compact the base of the excavation with 6 passes of a vibrating plate
compactor having a mass per square metre of base plate of >1200kg, or an
equivalent. If the base of the excavation is natural materials the excavation shall
be continued for a further 150mm. The additional excavation will be backfilled
with subbase material in 2 x 75mm layers with each layer being compacted by 6
passes of the plate compactor specified above.
S605.1
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

2. Forms- Forms shall conform to the requirements of Section 501. Metal forms
shall be of an approved section. Forms shall be placed so as to ensure a positive
gradient of the slipper or swale to outfall(s). In flat areas the Engineer may instruct
that the crossfall of the slipper or swale to be varied along it’s length to ensure
that backfalls do not occur.
3. Concrete Placing - Mixing, placing, finish and curing of cement concrete shall
conform to the requirements of Section 501 for cast-in-place concrete or as
modified by the requirements given below. Reinforcement shall be securely fixed
in place to conform to the drawings.
The concrete shall be brought up to the depth required in the forms in layers of
100 mm each. It shall be rodded or spaded, and tamped until fully compacted and
mortar entirely covers the top and formed surfaces and no air voids remain.
The top of the concrete shall be finished to a smooth and even surface and the
edges rounded to the radii shown on the plans. When the concrete is given the
final finishing, the surface of the slipper or swale shall be tested with a 3.0 metre
straightedge and any irregularities of more than 3 mm in any 3 metres length shall
be corrected. The completed construction shall be correct to the line and level
shown on the drawings to within ±5mm. Upon curing the surface of slippers or
swales shall be tested by the application of water from a bowser or similar, to
confirm to the Engineer’s satisfaction that a continuous gradient is maintained to
the outfall(s). Should water pond in the slipper the Engineer may instruct remedial
action, including the breaking out of the construction and its replacement at the
Contractor’s expense.
4. Joints- The works shall be constructed in uniform sections 3 metres in length,

except where shorter sections are necessary for closures; but no section shall be
less than 1.2 metres long. The sections shall be separated by sheet metal
templates set perpendicular to the face and top of the curb or slipper. Templates
shall be set carefully and held firmly during the placing of the concrete and shall
be allowed to remain in place until the concrete has set sufficiently to hold its
shape.
S605.2
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

Expansion joints shall be formed at intervals of 6 metres using preformed 12 mm

thick filler conforming to the requirements of Specification Section 501. When the
works are placed next to a concrete sidewalk, expansion joints shall be located
opposite expansion joints in the sidewalk. The forms shall not be removed until
24 hours after the concrete has been poured.
Minor defects only shall be repaired with mortar containing one part of Portland
cement and two parts of fine aggregate. Plastering shall not be permitted on the
faces and all rejected portions shall be removed and replaced at the Contractor's
expenses. The exposed surfaces shall be finished while the concrete is still
green, by wetting a soft brick or a wood block and rubbing the faces until they are
smooth. The surfaces shall be wet thoroughly, either dipping the brick or block in
water, or by throwing water on the surfaces with a brush. After the concrete has
been rubbed smooth, using water, it shall be again rubbed with a thin grout
containing one part of Portland cement and one part of fine aggregate. Rubbing
with grout shall continue until a uniform colour is produced.
When completed, the concrete shall be cured for a minimum period of three days
in accordance with Section 500. The concrete shall be suitably protected from
the weather until thoroughly hardened. After the concrete has set sufficiently, the
excavated spaces at the back of the construction shall be refilled to the required
elevation with suitable materials which shall be tamped in layers of not more than
150mm until consolidated. At the front face or to each face of swales the
excavated space shall be filled with a class 9 concrete mix to 50mm from the new
or existing road level and the top 50mm filled with bituminous surface course or
as directed by the Engineer.
Roadway pavement base and bituminous courses shall not be placed against any
construction until it has gained sufficient strength to resist damage and also until
curbs are properly supported by backfill or other means.

(a) Measurement
The quantities to be measured for payment under this Section will be the number
of linear metres of the curb or drain type, complete in place or repaired, in
accordance with these Specifications and accepted by the Engineer. The length
S605.3
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

shall be measured in place along the face of the curb for a curb or curb and slipper,
and along the deepest point of a swale or slipper drain.
The measurement of raising of curbs shall be along the front face of the raised
curb. Where the raised curb is slotted the length measured shall continue past the
gaps formed by the slots so as to include them in the length measured.
(b) Payment
Payment for items under this Section will be made at the prices tendered in the Bills
of Quantities which prices and payments shall constitute full compensation for all
labour, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work, including
excavation, shaping, backfilling, reinstatement of pavements, and disposal of
material to licensed landfill and all else necessary to carry out the work in
compliance with the Drawings, these Specifications and as approved by the
Engineer. The cost of supplying and placing subbase and for adjustments in level
at outfall and side entrances to covered box drains shall be included in the unit
price bid per linear metre.

No.
605.1 Concrete Curb (type specified) lin.m

605.2 Concrete Curb and Slipper (type specified) lin.m
605.3 Concrete Slipper (type specified) lin.m
605.4 Concrete Swale (type specified) lin.m
605.4 Raising Curbs lin.m
605.5 Repair of Concrete Curb lin.m
605.6 Repair of Concrete Curb and Slipper lin.m
605.7 Repair of surface Drains (type identified) lin.m
Note - The term curb and kerb shall be interchangeable in the pay items.
S605.4
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

SECTION 606: DRAINAGE CHANNELS
CONTENTS
606.1 Description
606.2 Materials
606.3 Execution
_____________________________________________________________________________
606.1 Description
This work shall consist of constructing and repair of drainage channels and concrete
box drains in accordance with these Specifications and in accordance with the lines,
grades, dimensions and design shown on the Drawings.
606.2 Materials
1. Concrete shall be Class 30 or other class as specified and conform to Section

500 and be placed in accordance with Section 501. The nominal aggregate size
shall be 10mm for core filling to blocks.
2. Reinforcing steel and welded wire fabric shall conform to Specification Section
504.
3. Load bearing hollow concrete blocks shall have a minimum thickness of 120
mm and shall conform to Specification Section 508, with a minimum
compressive strength for the average gross area of 21 N/sq.mm. They shall be
locally made by a reputable firm and all units shall be sound and free from cracks
or other defects.
4. Excavation and backfill shall conform to Section 204.
606.3 Execution
1. Excavation - soft base material, that in the opinion of the Engineer could cause
adverse results, shall be removed and replaced with compacted suitable backfill
material to the Engineer's satisfaction.
Care shall also be exercised when cutting sides and bottoms of lined drains to
prevent over cutting. Any over cut, that in the opinion of the Engineer might lead
to scour under or alongside lined drains, will be backfilled with Class 9 concrete
at the expense of the Contractor.
S606.1
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

Trenches should be excavated to the exact requirements as no extra payment

shall be made for form work required because of excessive excavation.
2. Unlined Drains - For unlined earthen channels, the channel shall be excavated
and sloped to the design lines and dimensions as shown on the Drawings. Side
slopes of channels shall be sloped as shown on the Drawings and trimmed to
present a smooth finish.
3. Blocks - Blocks shall be well bedded with al joints flushed up solidly with mortar
of typical width 12mm. Vertical bonding joints shall be aligned approximately in
the middle of the blocks of the course above or below. Mortar for blocks shall
be 1:6 OPC cement:sand. Blocks shall be filled with concrete which shall be
well rodded and tamped to completely fill all voids. Blocks shall be damp when
laid and shall be cured wet as described in Section 500 for concrete for a
minimum 48 hours.
4. Precast Concrete Inverts and Drains - These shall be constructed to design lines
and dimensions as shown on the Drawings and as required by the Engineer.
Precast units shall be bedded on and surrounded with concrete as shown on
the drawings and any voids between the excavation and the sides of the units
completely filled with class 9 concrete.
5. In situ Concrete Lining - These shall be constructed to design lines and
dimensions as shown on the Drawings and as required by the Engineer.
6. Junctions with Other Drains - Junctions with other drains or intersecting pipes
or drainage shall be made as shown on the Drawings with Class 30 concrete to
the required section. No extra payment shall be made for the joints or
connections.
7. Reinforced Concrete Drains - These cast insitu reinforced concrete box drains
shall be constructed to design lines and dimensions as shown on the Drawings
and as required by the Engineer. The requirements of Clause 606.3.1 shall still
apply and any over cut shall be filled with mass concrete. Refer to Standard
Details.
8. Covered Box Drains - These shall be constructed to design lines and
dimensions as shown on the Drawings and as required by the Engineer. The
requirements of Clause 606.3.1 shall still apply and any over cut shall be filled
with mass concrete. Refer to Typical Details.
S606.2
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

(a) Measurement
The quantities to be measured for payment under this Section will be the number
of linear metres of the various types of drainage channels complete in place
measured along the centre line of the drain, in accordance with the Drawings,
these Specifications and accepted by the Engineer.
Manholes, catchpits, inspection cambers, etc. constructed along a drain will be

measured under Section 607 of these Specifications with the exception of access
covers and openings and side entries to covered box drains which shall not be
measured separately.
(b) Payment
Payment for drainage channels under this Section will be made at the prices
tendered in the Bills of Quantities which prices and payments shall constitute full
compensation for all labour, materials and equipment necessary to complete the
work, including excavation, shaping, backfilling, concrete, reinforcing steel, block
work, jointing, bedding, temporary access and crossings and all else necessary to
carry out the work in compliance with the Drawings, these Specifications and as
In the case of covered box drain the cost of access covers and openings and side
entries (cowmouths) is to be included in the unit bid price for the “covered box
drain”.
606.1 Box Drain (type as described in BoQ) lin.m

606.2 Covered Box Drain (type as described in BoQ) lin.m
606.3 Outfall Box Drain (type as described in BoQ) lin.m
606.4 Drain (type as described in BoQ) lin.m
S606.3
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

SECTION 607: MANHOLES, INSPECTION CHAMBERS AND CATCHPITS
CONTENTS
607.1 Description
607.2 Materials
_____________________________________________________________________________
607.1 Description
This work shall consist of the construction of manholes, inspection chambers and
catchpits or raising existing manholes and valves in accordance with these
Specifications and in reasonably close conformity with the lines and grades shown on
the Drawing or established by the Engineer.
607.2 Materials
1. Portland Cement Concrete - Concrete shall Class 30, conforming to
Specification Sections 500 and 501.
2. Reinforcing Steel - Reinforcing steel and welded wire fabric shall conform to
Specification Section 504.
3. Block Work - Load bearing hollow concrete blocks shall have a minimum
thickness of 120 mm and shall conform to Specification Section 508, with a
minimum compressive strength for the average gross area of 21 N/ sq.mm. They
shall be locally made by a reputable firm and all units shall be sound and free
from cracks or other defects.
4. Excavation - Excavation shall conform to Specification No. 204.
5. Mortar - Mortar shall be one part Portland cement to two parts sand conforming
to AASHTO Specification M-45.
6. Bricks - Bricks shall conform to the AASHTO Specification M-91.
7. Covers and Frames, etc. - Frames, grates and covers and step irons shall
conform to the requirements of AASHTO Specification M 306.
8. Precast Concrete Chambers - Precast concrete chambers shall comply with
the requirements of AASHTO M-199M except for any special requirements for
cement described in the Contract.
S607.1
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___


1. Foundations to chambers shall be of concrete Class 30 and to dimensions in the
Drawings. Channels for chambers shall be formed and finished smooth in
concrete or constructed of preformed half circle channels with sides benched in
concrete of Class 30, as shown on the Drawings.
2. Chambers shall be surrounded with suitable material as defined in Section 203.
Where mechanical compaction is impractical they shall be surrounded in Class 9
concrete.
3. Masonry block work and brickwork shall conform to the requirements for the
respective type. Joints shall be full mortar joints and shall not be more that 12
mm wide. Unless otherwise provided exposed surfaces of concrete masonry
block work and brickwork shall be cured wet for a period of not less than 48 hours.
4. Sections of connecting pipes and drains shall be incorporated into the
construction and placed at the elevation, direction and grade required. The inner
ends of the pipes or drains shall be finished flush with the inner faces of the walls.
5. Concrete cover slabs shall be accurately set true to the line and elevation
indicated on the Drawings.
6. Metal frames, metal covers and metal gratings shall be fabricated in accordance
with the Drawings and the Specification requirements for the designed material.
Metal frames for metal or concrete covers and metal grating shall be accurately
set true to the line and elevation indicated on the Drawings. They shall be bedded
securely on high strength cement or epoxy mortar no thicker than 20mm. Any
make up in levels shall be with engineering bricks or clay tile slips well bedded in
cement or epoxy mortar. No vehicles will be allowed to pass over or pass near
to the cover until the mortar has gained sufficient strength to accept the loads
from such vehicles. The contractor will be responsible for resetting any cover or
frame dislodged due to the passage of traffic.
7. Where covers are raised in an existing pavement the resulting excavation shall
be backfilled with bituminous binder course provided and placed in accordance
with Section 300, and Series 400 of the specifications. Where the cover protrudes
above the pavement and will be subject to the passage of vehicles, the cover shall
be surrounded in temporary bituminous binder leveling course material which
shall be well compacted and sloped away from the cover on all sides at 1 in 10.
The Contractor shall be responsible for providing and maintaining warning traffic
signs to the Engineer’s approval until the final surface course material is laid. The
S607.2
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

temporary material shall be removed immediately prior to the placement of the

surface course.
8. Upon completion, each structure, new or existing, shall be cleaned of any
accumulation of silt, debris or foreign matter of any kind and shall be kept clear of
such accumulation until final acceptance of the work.

(a) Measurement
The quantities of manholes, catchpits and inspection chambers, etc. to be
measured for payment under this Section will be the number of units complete
in place, or raised in accordance with the Drawings, these Specifications and
accepted by the Engineer.
(b) Payment
Payment for raising existing covers, etc. under this Section will be made at the
prices tendered in the Bills of Quantities which prices and payments shall
constitute full compensation for all labour, materials and equipment necessary
to complete the work, including for all excavation and disposal and for temporary
backfill with bituminous material around cover or valve and associated traffic
signing and maintaining all and removal when permanent pavement is placed.
Payment for manholes, catchpits and inspection chambers, etc. under this
Section will be made at the prices tendered in the Bills of Quantities which prices
and payments shall constitute full compensation for all labour, materials and
equipment necessary to complete the work, including excavation, shaping,
backfilling, placing concrete, reinforcing steel, block work, jointing, bedding
frames, covers, grading, step irons and all else necessary to carry out the work
in compliance with the Drawings, these Specifications and as approved by the
Engineer. They will also include for making necessary pipe and channel
connections regardless of skew and for all other materials, forms and labour
required to complete the chambers. Excavation and backfill shall be included in
the unit price.
S607.3
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___


607.1 Raise existing cover (as described in Contract) No.
607.2 Chamber (as described in Contract) No.
607.3 Catchpits and Manholes No
S607.4
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

SECTION 608: UNDERDRAINS
CONTENTS
608.1 Scope
608.2 Materials
608.3 Execution
608.4 Placing the Underdrain
608.5 Placing the Underdrain with Geotextile
608.6 Placing Geocomposite Sheet Drain
608.7 Placing Geocomposite Pavement Edge Drain
608.8 Measurement
608.9 Payment
_____________________________________________________________________________
608.1 Scope
This work consists of excavation for, furnishing and installing and backfilling to
underdrains and geocomposite drains.
Related sections include the following:

Section 202 General Excavation
Section 204 Earthworks for Structures
608.2 Materials
Material shall conform to the following Sections:
Geomembranes 713
Granular backfill 203
PVC/Plastic pipe 514
Sand for use in subdrain installations shall conform to the requirements of the
following grading limitations, as determined by AASHTO T11 and T 27: -
Sieve Designation
Percent Passing
Standard (mm) Alternate (“or No.)
8.0 5/16” 100
4.75 No. 4 95-100
1.18 No. 16 45-80
0.30 No. 50 10-30
0.15 No. 100 2-10
0.075 No. 200 3 max
S608.1
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

Selected granular backfill shall comply with Section 203 – Earthworks for Structures.
608.3 Execution
 Use the same material on all contiguous underdrain sections and extensions.
 Use special section, such as elbows and branch connections, that are the same
material and coating as the attached underdrain.
 Underdrain material, size, and approximate location is as shown on the plans.

The final locations and lengths will be determined in the field.
 Perform the work described under Section 204.
 Plug the upgrade end of installations to prevent entry of soil.
 Outlet pipe shall be nonperforated. Install outlet pipe according to Section

608.4 and immediately cover the outlet end with an approved screen.
608.4 Placing The Underdrain
 Place and compact a layer of granular backfill at least 2 inches (50 mm) thick
in the bottom of the trench. Place underdrain with the perforations down.
 Join pipe sections securely with coupling fittings or bands. Join polyvinyl
chloride (PVC) and acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene (ABS) pipe using either a
flexible elastomeric seal or solvent cement. Join polyethylene pipe with snap-
on, screw-on, or wrap around coupling bands as recommended by the
manufacturer.
 Place granular backfill to a height of 12 inches (300 mm) above the top of the
pipe. Do not displace the pipe. Place the compact and the remainder of the
granular backfill material in layers less than 6 inches (150 mm) thick.
608.5 Placing The Underdrain with Geotextile.
 Smooth the trench surfaces, removing all projections or depressions that may
puncture the geotextile.
 Place the long dimension of the geotextile parallel to the centreline of the
trench.
S608.2
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

 Position the geotextile without stretching so that it lies smoothly in contact with
the trench surface. Overlap the joints a minimum of 600mm with the upstream
geotextile placed over the downstream geotextile.
 Place granular backfill and underdrain according to design and instructions of

the Engineer. Fold the geotextile over the top of the granular backfill with a
minimum overlap of 12 inches (300 mm),
 Replace geotextile damaged during installation or during granular backfill

placement.
608.6 Placing Geocomposite Sheet Drain.
 Excavate a trench with vertical sides. Smooth the trench surfaces and remove
all projections or depressions that may puncture the geocomposite.
 Construct splines, joints and outlet fittings with geotextile overlaps, which will
prevent infiltration of soil into the geocomposite core. Splices, joints and outlet
fittings shall not impede flow through the geocomposite core or damage the
core in any way.
 Place the assembled geocomposite in the trench with the geotextile on the
inflow side of the trench. If the trench wall is irregular, place a layer of granular
backfill for underdrain without geotextile between the geocomposite and the
trench wall.
 Backfill the area behind the geocomposite with excavated material. Before
compacting remove all rocks which may damage the geocomposite. Do not
over compact the backfill.
 Repair any portion of the geocomposite damaged during installation or

backfilling according to the manufacturer’s recommendations.
608.7 Placing Geocomposite Pavement Edge Drain.
 Assemble the geocomposite pavement edge and outlet material according to

the manufacturer’s recommendations and place it in the trench. If the
pavement edge is irregular place a layer of granular backfill for underdrain
without geotextile between the geocomposite and the pavement edge.
S608.3
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

 Temporarily support the drain against the pavement edge while backfilling.
Backfill with granular backfill for underdrain pipe without geotextile in 200 mm
lifts. Compact lifts using a vibrating-type compactor with a properly shaped
shoe. Repair any damaged geocomposite according to the manufacturer’s
recommendations.
608.8 Measurement
Underdrain, geocomposite sheet drain and geocomposite pavement edge drain will
be measured by the linear metre along the centre line of the pipe
Selected granular backfill will be measured by the cubic metre
608.9 Payment
Payment will be made at the prices tendered for the items under this section in the
Bills of Quantities. The prices and payment shall constitute full compensation for
furnishing all labour, materials, tools, equipment and all else necessary including the
cost of excavation and disposal, backfill materials (excluding selected granular
backfill) and backfilling to satisfactorily complete the works described herein in strict
confidence with these Specifications and to the approval of the Engineer. No
additional payment will be made for the following: - excavation outside the designed
formation, slope of sub-grade, the excavation and backfilling of slides, cave-ins, silting
or other filling that occur during construction and any overbreak.
Any materials excavated below the established elevations shall be replaced by the
Contractor at his own expense.
Payment will be made under:

No.
608.1 Perforated Underdrain Lin.m

608.2 Outlet Pipe Lin.m
608.3 Geocomposite Sheet Drain Lin.m
608.4 Geocomposite pavement edge drain Lin.m
608.5 Selected granular backfill Cu. m
S608.4
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

ANCILLARY WORKS
S700.0
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___
SERIES 700: ANCILLARY WORKS

SECTION 701: FENCES
CONTENTS
701.1 Description
701.2 Materials
701.3 Execution
_____________________________________________________________________________
701.1 Description
The work covered in this Section shall consist of the erection of new fences and all
incidentals necessary to tie-into existing fences all in accordance with these
Specifications at locations as shown on the Drawings or as directed by the
Engineer. As near as possible the new fence wall must be similar any existing one
or an approved equal. It shall also include the re-siting of gates and openings and
painting, if necessary, to the same colour as the existing. AASHTO Specification
M181 for chain link fencing shall be applicable unless specifically modified by these
Specifications.
701.2 Materials
1. Chain Link Fence Posts and Rails
. Posts and rails shall be either aluminum schedule 40 standard pipe or standard
butt-weld schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe con-forming to AASHTO
Specification M181 and ASTMA120.
2. Mesh Fabric
Fabric shall be galvanized steel fabric AASHTO Specification M181, 9 gauge
steel wire having a zinc coating (287g of zinc/sq. m) and a 50mm mesh
measured from wire to wire, top selvedge to have a twisted and barbed
finished and bottom selvedge to have a knuckled finish.
3. Fittings
All fittings shall conform to AASHTO Specification M181. Hinges, where
required, shall be malleable iron, hot dipped galvanized in accordance with
ASTM Specification A-338. Approved equal of any material specified may be
used.
4. Concrete Embedment
Concrete shall be Class 21 as specified in Section 500.
S701.1
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

SECTION 701: FENCES
701.3 Execution
All line posts shall be spaced equidistant in the fence line on a maximum of 3m
centres. Posts shall be plumb and the top of the posts properly aligned. Corner
posts shall be located at corners and changes in direction as ordered by the
Engineer.
Pull posts shall be located at all abrupt changes in grade, as ordered by the
Engineer and at intervals no greater than 150m. On runs over 150m, pull posts
shall be evenly spaced between the corner and/or end posts.
When the fence line is on a long curve, the pull posts shall be evenly spaced so
that the strain of the fence will not bend the line posts.
Line post holes shall be 900mm deep with a minimum diameter of 200mm. Posts
shall be set a full 800mm into the hole and the hole shall be filled with concrete.
Terminal corner holes shall be 300mm diameter at top by 1m deep. Posts shall be
set a full 900mm. Exposed surface of the footing shall be sloped to shed water
and provide a neat appearance when completed.
All top rails shall pass through the base of the posts caps and shall form a
continuous branch from end to end of each stretch of fence.
Top rail lengths shall be joined with the expansion sleeves. Top rail shall be
securely fastened to terminal posts by means of rail ends and brace bends.
Horizontal braces shall be provided at all terminal posts, corner posts and pull posts
midway between top rail and ground and shall extend from the above mentioned
posts to the first adjacent line post. Braces shall be securely fastened to the line
posts by brace ends and brace bands, and to the terminal posts by rail ends and
brace brands.
Diagonal brace rods shall be trussed from the brace end on the line post back to
the terminal posts, corner post or pull post and fastened to it by a brace band.
Fence fabric shall be installed to 50mm above ground level and securely fastened
to the line posts with post ties at a maximum of 350mm intervals and to the top rail
S701.2
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

SECTION 701: FENCES
with top ties at a maximum of 600mm intervals. The fabric shall be tightened to
provide a smooth uniform appearance. Stretcher bar band shall be installed at a
maximum of 400mm intervals.
.
The Contractor shall be responsible for all wear and tear of fencing howsoever
arising until the construction of all other works have been completed when the
fencing shall be handed over in sound condition as specified.

Measurement
The quantities to be measured under this Section will be the number of linear
metres of fencing complete in place and accepted within the pay limits shown on
the Drawings or as instructed by the Engineer. The length will be the developed
length along the centre line of any length of fence, measured between the centres
of main corner posts.
Payment
they appear in the Bill of Quantities. The prices and payments shall constitute full
compensation for furnishing, transporting, installing, erecting, excavating, filling,
tying-in, painting, concreting, security and all other labour, material, equipment and
all else necessary to complete the work described herein in strict conformance with
The prices and payments for fences will include for excavation in any material
including rock and pavements, upholding the sides, keeping the excavation free of
water, trimming the ground on the line of fence or at entrances, backfilling,
compacting and disposal of surplus material, concrete, reinforcement, form work,
footings, anchorages and any granular material to foundations.
Where an existing fence is to be removed and re-erected prices and payments will
include for the laying aside or taking to store, re-collecting and preparing for re-
erection including repairs and making good deficiencies.
S701.3
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

SECTION 701: FENCES
Pay items that may appear under this Section of the Bill of Quantities are:

701.1 Chain Link Fence lin.m
701.2 Remove and Re-erect Existing Fencing lin.m
S701.4
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

SECTION 702: METAL BEAM GUARD RAILS
CONTENTS
702.1 Description
702.2 Materials
702.3 Execution
702.4 Removal and Salvage of Existing Guardrail
702.5 Cleaning and Painting of Existing Guardrail
_____________________________________________________________________________
702.1 Description
This item shall consist of the construction and/or repair of beam-type guardrails in
accordance with these Specifications at the locations and in conformity with the
dimensions and design shown on the Drawings, or ordered by the Engineer.
702.2 Materials
1. Posts
Wood posts shall 200 x 150 x 1980mm and be teak wood, guatecare, mora or other
species approved by the Engineer. They shall be treated with an approved
preservative.
Steel posts shall W152 x 12 ASTM A6M / A769M, 1980mm long, pre-drilled and
galvanised to ASTM 123 or be of the type and size shown on the drawings or described
in the project specifications.
2. Beam Element
a. Corrugated sheet steel beams, end shoes, end/terminal sections and backup
plates shall conform to AASHTO M 180-00, class A, type II zinc coating, or
alternatively
b. Beam elements shall be formed from open hearth or electric-furnace steel

number twelve (12) gauge or heavier. A test specimen of the rail material shall
elongate not less than 12% in a 50 mm gauge length when tested in
accordance with ASTM E8. Rail Elements and joints shall meet the strength
requirements of Table 605.1. Rail elements shall be shaped so as to present
no sharp edges to traffic.
S702.1
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

The beam element shall be galvanized in accordance with the requirements of ASTM
A93, Coating Class 2.50.
Table 702.1: Strength Requirements for Beam and Joints

For Beam-Type Guard Rail
Beam Strength
Tensile
Minimum Traffic Face Up Traffic Face down
Strength
Gauge Load Maximum Load Maximum
(kg)
Deflection Deflection
12 36288 680 70 463 70
12 36288 907 140 858 140
10 45360 907 70 858 70
10 45360 1361 140 1286 140
With the rail element freely supported on a 3.65 metre clear span and the load applied
through a 75mm flat surface at the centre of the span. When the joint is tested, it shall
be at the centre of the span.
Radius Beams – where fencing is to be installed on a curved alignment with a radius

of less than 45m the beams shall be formed to the radius required by the manufacturer.
Beam End/Terminal Sections - Terminal sections shall be formed from open-hearth or

electric furnace steel of not less than twelve (12) gauge. A test specimen of the
material shall elongate not less than 12% in a 50mm gauge length when tested in
accordance with ASTM E8. Terminal sections shall slope down at approximately 1 in
6.
3. Bolts and Nuts

For ASSHTO beams bolts and nuts shall conform to or exceed the requirements of
ASTM A 307 and shall be hot dipped zinc coated in accordance with the requirements
of ASSHTO M 232/ Class C.
For other beams they shall be galvanized in accordance with the requirements of
ASTM A153. The post bolt and connection shall develop a 2,268 kg side-pull in either
direction.
S702.2
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

4. Offset Blocks
Offset blocks for insertion between beam and post shall be either timber as for wooden
posts, or recycled solid plastic or rubber approved by the Engineer. They shall
measure 150 x 200 x 350mm min.
5. Galvanizing
Unless otherwise stated in the Contract all steel parts shall after fabrication be
galvanized by the hot-dip process in accordance with B.S. 729: Part 1.
6. Paint
Where called for in the Specifications or on the Drawings, paint shall be of local
manufacture approved by the Engineer. Paint shall be applied in accordance with
section 506 of the specifications
In lieu of red lead or zinc-chromate for shop coat, the manufacturer may use a fast
drying rust-inhibitive primer of his own choice subject to the submission of a certificate
that primer made under the same formula has been exposed for at least 200 hours in
a weatherometer test conducted in accordance with "Recommended Practices for
Light and Water Exposure Apparatus (Carbon Ore Type) for Testing Paint, Varnish,
Lacquer and related products" ASTM D822 with no evidence of cracking, blistering,
rusting, checking, peeling, scaling or loss of adhesion.
7. Concrete
Concrete shall be Class 20 or as otherwise specified in accordance with to
Specification Section 500.
702.3 Execution
1. The construction of the guardrail shall include the assembly and erection of all
component parts materials complete and at the locations shown on the Drawings
or as directed.
2. Before erection is started, the Contractor shall prepare and submit for approval
working drawings showing details of the proposed arrangements of beam sections
and posts based upon field measurements and other pertinent data needed to
establish the method of installation.
S702.3
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

These working drawings must be approved by the Engineer and all differences and
discrepancies in measurements, materials and methods settled with the Engineer
before installation commences.
3. Posts shall be set plumb in hand or mechanically dug holes or by driving. In the
latter case the manner of driving shall be such as to avoid battering or distorting of
posts. Post holes shall be backfilled with acceptable material and thoroughly
compacted.
4. Rail elements shall be erected in a manner resulting in a smooth continuous

installation. All rails shall be lapped to the adjoining element and joined by the full
number of requisite bolts and associated nuts and washers and the nuts shall be
drawn tight on all except adjustment bolts. Bolts shall be of sufficient length to
extend beyond the nuts. Overlaps for rails are to be placed in the direction of
adjacent traffic flow. Bolts for connections to posts shall be of sufficient length and
fitted and tightened as for lap bolts.
5. The guardrail shall be erected to the alignment shown in the Contract and not
deviate more than 6mm in line or level. The rails shall be set 610mm ( +45mm; -
15mm) above the adjacent road level or ground level when >1500mm from the road
edge.
6. No site drilling or cutting of beams and posts shall be permitted without the prior
approval of the Engineer and unless otherwise approved special closure pieces
shall be fabricated prior to galvanizing. Under no circumstances will flame-cutting
equipment be used for cutting beams and forming holes.
7. Double metal beam guardrail shall be erected as specified on the construction

drawings or as directed by the Engineer. All the Specifications herein shall apply.
Where necessary spacers blocks and stiffeners shall be used at posts and between
double beams.
8. Where required by the Contract rails shall be painted, after erection, with alternate
black and white stripes to enhance visibility.
S702.4
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

702.4 Removal, and Salvage of Existing Guardrail
The Contractor shall remove and salvage each section of guardrail, including posts
and neatly pile the salvaged material near the site as designated by the Engineer. The
Contractor shall fill and compact holes left from the post removal.
The Engineer will designate the material to be reused and the material for disposal.
Material damaged by the Contractor during removal shall be replaced with new
material by the Contractor at his own expense.
The Contractor shall haul the material for reuse to a location within the contract limits
for installation as directed by the Engineer. Materials not required for reinstallation
shall become the property of the Contractor and shall be disposed of in a manner
satisfactory to the Engineer.
At sites where existing guardrail is to be removed and new or salvaged guardrail is to

be installed at the same location, the Contractor shall complete the installation within
5 working days of the site becoming available for re-erection of the guardrail.
Until guardrail is erected, the Contractor shall erect barricades and any other safety
protection as directed by the Engineer.
702.5 Cleaning and Painting of Existing Guardrail
The designated guardrail shall be cleaned, prepared for painting and painted. This
shall be done with the installation in place.
Methods of cleaning will vary and will include but not be limited to washing the
guardrail by high-pressure hose or brushed and washed by hand. The guardrail shall
be thoroughly dried before painting can begin. In addition Section 506.1.iii shall apply
for this activity.
The paint to be applied shall be compatible for application to metal surfaces. Section
506 shall apply for the painting portion of the work. Care shall be taken to ensure that
no paint is applied to the posts.
S702.5
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___


a. Measurement
The quantity of Metal Beam Guardrail to be paid for under this Section will be
measured as the number of linear metres of developed length along the centre
line of the rails or the case of double beam guard rails, measured once along the
centre line of the posts between the outer extremity of terminals or anchorages.
b. Payment
Payment for the items under this Section will be made at the prices tendered in
the Bills of Quantities. The prices and payment shall constitute full compensation
for furnishing rails, posts, offset blocks, terminal sections, fittings, anchor blocks,
concrete encasement and all handling, hauling, installing, disposal, connecting,
disconnecting, cleaning, paint, painting, preparation for painting, finishing,
materials, labour, tools, equipment and all else necessary to complete the works
as described in these Specifications and as approved by the Engineer. No
separate payment shall be made for concrete.
Any beam sections or posts, which are damaged and unusable during the salvage
phase, shall be replaced and paid for at the invoiced price to the Contractor from
the supplier. The Contractor shall be required to produce the invoices to confirm
the prices for these items.
Any sections or posts damaged as a result of the Contractor’s operations shall be

replaced by the Contractor at his cost.
No.
702.1 Metal Beam Guardrail lin.m
702.2 Metal Double Beam Guardrail lin.m
702.3 Remove, Salvage and Reinstall Existing Guardrail lin.m
702.4 Remove and Dispose of Existing Guardrail lin.m
702.5 Clean and Paint Existing Guardrail lin.m
S702.6
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

SECTION 703: METAL RAILING
CONTENTS
703.1 Description
703.2 Materials
_____________________________________________________________________________
702.1 Description
This work shall consist of the supply and installation of bridge railing of the material
shown on the Drawings and constructed in accordance with these Specifications
and the Drawings and in accordance with the lines, grades and dimensions shown
on the Drawings. Railing is located on the bridge parapet and wingwalls.
702.2 Materials
All material shall conform to the type and grade specified or called for on the
Drawings.
All bolts and nuts shall meet the requirements of galvanized ASTM A325-79 or an
equivalent appropriate standard, unless otherwise specified on the Drawings.
Welding shall comply with the requirements of Section 505. When directed by the
Engineer and before fabrication is commenced, welding procedure trials shall be
carried out in accordance with Section 505.

Railing shall be constructed to the line and grade shown on the Drawings and shall
not reflect any unevenness in the structure. Unless otherwise specified, all railing
posts shall be vertical. Panels and members shall be free from twist. Railings shall
not be placed on a span until falsework has been removed, rendering the span
self-supporting.
The Contractor shall ensure that the socket fittings are correctly positioned to
match the fabricated sections of the parapet.
S703.1
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

After erection on Site, the metal railing shall receive the following coats of paint:
- 1 coat of etch primer;
- 2 coats of metallic lead primer or 2 coats of red lead primer; followed by
- 2 coats of micaceous iron oxide paint or 1 coat of micaceous iron oxide paint
and
- 1 coat of long oil alkyd paint.
The colour of the final finishing coat shall be as directed by the Engineer.
702.4 Materials
Measurement and Payment
a. Measurement
The quantity of metal railing to be measured under this Section will be the number
of linear metres complete in place and accepted. The length shall be measured
along the line and grade of the railing from centreline end post to centreline end
post. It shall include all work constructed above the top of the barrier and all
fastenings and anchors required to attach the railing to the structure.
Painting or other corrosion protection will not be measured for payment, the cost
of such corrosion protection being deemed to be included in the costs of supplying
the metal bridge railing.
b. Payment
Payment will be made at the prices tendered for items under this Section as they
appear in the Bill of Quantities. The prices and payments will constitute full
compensation for furnishing all labour, materials, tools and equipment to construct
the railings, including the furnishing, installation, painting, all hardware, fixings,
holding down bolts and all else necessary to complete the work described herein
in strict conformance with these Specifications, the Drawings and as instructed by
the Engineer.
In addition, the prices and payments will cover the following:

a. preparation and supply of detailed working drawings;
b. joint fittings, expansion joints, base plates, sockets, anchorage assemblies,
holding down bolts, nuts, washers, fastenings and adhesives;
c. qualification tests of welders;
S703.2
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

d. production tests of welding during fabrication including non-destruction

testing;
e. marking for identification;
f. connection pieces for attachment of metal beam guard rail;
g. drilling holes or forming pockets in the structure and casting in bolts, sockets,
base plates and anchorage assemblies;
h. adhesives and epoxy or polyester mortar, cement mortar or grout;
i. making good any damage or defects in the protective system applied at the
place of manufacture before application of protective system on site.
Payment items that may appear in the Bill of Quantities are:

703.1 Metal Railings lin.m
S703.3
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

SECTION 704: RAISED MEDIANS AND ISLANDS
CONTENTS
704.1 Description
704.2 Materials
_____________________________________________________________________________
702.1 Description
The work to be performed under this Section consists of construction of Portland
cement concrete unsurmountable curbs, filling in between curbs with compacted
earthen material and sealing the exposed earthen top in between the curbs with
cement concrete, in accordance with the Specifications and in conformity with the
lines, grades, thickness and typical cross sections shown on the Drawings or
established by the Engineer.
702.2 Materials
Portland Cement Concrete
Concrete used shall be Class 20 and shall conform to the requirements of Sections
500 and 501 of these Specifications.
Earth Fill
Earth fill shall comprise of reusable material, as approved by the Engineer, from
excavated earth works and stock piled at site under Section 203 or, if no suitable
material is available from excavation, it may be borrow material, approved in
writing, by the Engineer. It shall be compacted as per requirements under Section
207 of these Specifications.
Expansion Joint Filler

Joint filler shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO Specification M33-78:
Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete (Bituminous Type).
Expansion joint filler shall be shaped to fit the concrete that is being placed.
S704.1
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___


Sub base Preparation
The sub base shall be constructed true to grade and cross-section as shown on
the plans or directed by the Engineer. It shall be watered and thoroughly
compacted before placing the concrete.
The completed sub base shall be tested for grade and cross-section by means of
a template supported on the side of forms and shall not project into the planned
concrete cross-section at any point. The sub base and forms shall be moistened
immediately in advance of placing concrete.
Forms
Forms shall be constructed and maintained as specified in Sections 501 of these
Specifications. In no case will side forms be allowed to be removed less than 12
hours after the finishing has been completed.
General
Fresh concrete shall be struck off and compacted until a layer of mortar has been
brought to the surface. The surface shall be finished to grade and cross section
with a float, troweled smooth and then finished with a broom. The float shall not
be less than 3 metres in length and not less than 300 mm in width. Concrete
adjacent to expansion joints shall be finished with an edging tool.
Brooming shall be transverse to the line of traffic and if is necessary to add water
it shall be applied to the surface immediately in advance of brooming.
The surface of medians and islands shall be marked into rectangles of not less
than 1 nor more than 2.2 square metres with a scoring tool that leaves the edges
rounded.
Expansion joints 6mm wide shall be constructed at all returns and opposite
expansion joints in adjacent curbs. Where curb is not adjacent, expansion joints
shall be constructed at intervals of 18 metres. Expansion joints shall be filled with
pre-moulded joint filler conforming to the provision of AASHTO Specification
M33-78.
S704.2
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

The surface shall not vary more than 65mm from a 3m straightedge, except at
grade changes and the finished surface shall be free blemishes. Concrete surfaces
shall be cured as provided in Specification Section 501.

This work will not be measured for payment, payment being under the appropriate
items where they appear elsewhere in these Specifications.
Portland cement concrete items will be paid for under Section 501.1, Cast-in-place
Concrete Class 20, as the number of cubic metres complete in place, as shown on
the Drawings and as accepted by the Engineer.
Earth fill items will be paid for under Section 205.2, Embankment (with suitable
excavated material at site or borrow), as the number of cubic metres complete in
place, as shown on the Drawings and as accepted by the Engineer.
S704.3
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

SECTION 705: ROADSIDE TRAFFIC SIGNS
CONTENTS
705.1 Description
705.2 Materials
_____________________________________________________________________________
702.1 Description
The work to be performed under this Section consists of furnishing and installing
roadside signs, removing existing signs or re-erecting existing signs in accordance
with these Specifications and at the locations and to the details shown on the
Drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
Sign locations shown on the highway layout drawings are approximate and the
exact location of each sign will be determined by the Engineer in the field.
702.2 Materials
1. Sign Panels and Related Hardware
All sign panels shall be of 3.2 mm thick aluminum sheeting, alloy 6061 - T.
Horizontal sign panel stiffeners such as Z bars shall be fabricated of
aluminum alloy 6061 - T (6063 - T). Other miscellaneous hardware
including splice plates or angles, clips, bolts, nuts, washers, screws, rivets,
pull-type lock bolts and welded studs or rivets shall be fabricated of the
materials and in the manner shown on the Drawings.
The above alloy designations are all to "US Commercial and Aluminum
Association Standard".
2. Preparation of Panel for Reflective Sheeting

The treatment of the aluminum panel in preparation for the application of
reflective sheeting shall be performed by one of the following methods and
in strict accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer of the
reflective sheeting:
S705.1
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

Cleaning - one of the following methods shall be used

a. Vapor Cleaning: the sheeting or sign panel shall be totally immersed
in a saturated vapor of trichlorethylene or perchlorethylene. Trademark
printing shall be removed with a lacquer thinner. This shall be followed
with a thorough rinsing.
b. Alkaline Cleaning: the sheeting shall be immersed in a tank containing
alkaline solutions, controlled and titrated to the solution manufacturer's
specifications. Immersion time shall depend upon the amount of soil
present and the gauge of the metal. This shall be followed with a
thorough rinsing.
After cleaning and rinsing, and prior to etching, the aluminum sheeting shall
be checked with a "Water Break Test" as follows:
- If the metal is clean, water will completely cover the surface with no
breaks.
- Wherever water breaks, oil is present and the place shall be
recleaned until all traces of oil disappear.
- Examine the surface near the edges with extreme care for
presence of oil.
3. Etching - one of the following methods shall be used

a. Acid Etch: Etch well in a 6% to 8% phosphoric acid solution at 380
C, then rinse thoroughly with running cold water followed by a hot
water tank rinse.
b. Alkaline Etch: Etch well the pre-cleaned aluminum surface in an
alkaline etching material that is controlled by titration. Times,
temperature and concentration shall be as specified by the solution
manufacturer. Rinse thoroughly, remove smut with an acidic
chromium compound type solution as specified by the solution
manufacturer and then thoroughly rinse.
c. Chemical Conversion: The panels shall be treated with a light,
tightly adherent chromate conversion coating, free of any powdery
residue, ranging in colour from a silvery iridescent to a pale yellow,
conforming with ASTM B449-67, Class 2, 1.1 - 3.8 mg/sq
decimetres, with a median of 2.75 mg/sq decimetres as the
optimum coating weight.
S705.2
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

d. Finishing: Following the etching and rinsing, the panels shall be

dried by a forced hot air dryer or by immersion for one minute, in
circulating hot water at 820C and allowed to air dry. Sand blasting
of the aluminum will not be permitted. The metal shall be handled
between all cleaning operations and application of the reflective
sheeting only using an approved handling device or with clean
canvas gloves.
4. Application of Reflective Background Sheeting

The aluminum sheeting shall be treated as specified above immediately
prior to the application of the reflective sheeting.
The reflective background sheeting shall be adhered to the aluminum

sheeting by one of the following methods:
a. By a vacuum applicator machine with infra-red heat lamps.
b. By a mechanical process such as pressing with a warm iron or a
roller.
In general, the first method is best used with a heat activated adhesive,
the second with a pressure sensitive adhesive, but the Contractor may use
any adhesive meeting the materials Specification below. Any application
method used must be in strict accordance with the recommendation of the
sheeting manufacturer.
In any case, it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to use application

methods which will attain the adhesion and appearance required in the
materials Specifications.
5. Reflectorized Sheeting
Reflectorized background sheeting shall be of the colour called for on
Drawings and shall meet the following requirements:
Background Requirements
The background reflective sheeting shall consist of spherical lens elements
embedded within a transparent plastic having a smooth, flat outer surface
with non-exposed lens surface. The sheeting shall be weather resistant
and have a pre-coated adhesive backing.
S705.3
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

All sign panels shall have completely reflectorized backgrounds consisting

of reflective sheeting bonded to the aluminum panel. The reflectorized
background sheeting shall cover the entire sign panel surface, including
untrimmed corners outside border radii, and the background sheeting shall
not be cut out to accommodate characters.
Photometric Requirements
The reflective sheeting for backgrounds and screened signs shall have the
minimum brightness values at 5 mm and 12.5 mm divergence expressed
as average candlepower of lumen per square metre of material as given
in Table 705.1. Measurements shall be conducted in accordance with
standard photometric testing procedures for reflex reflectors of Federal
Specification L-S-300A Sheeting and tape. Reflective, Non-exposed lens,
Adhesive Backing.
The brightness of the reflective sheeting when totally wet by rain shall be
not less than 90% of the values in Table 705.1. The wet performance shall
be tested by the Standard Rainfall Test specified in U.S. Federal
Specification L-S-300A, as amended.
Table 705.1: Minimum Brightness Values for Reflective Sheeting

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Silver Red & Silver
White Yellow Dark White Orange Blue Green
#1 Red #2
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Divergence 5 12 5 12 5 12 5 12 5 12 5 12 5 12
Angle
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Angle of Incidence
0' 40 17 25 8 10 5 70 35 12 6 5 2 5 3
15' 32 13 20 7 7 4 10 5 3.5 2 3.5 2
30' 20 10 10 4 5 2 6 3 2.2 1 2.2 1
45' 8 4 4 1.2 1 .5 15 9 1.5 .8 .7 .3 .7 .3
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Colour
The diffuse day colour of the reflective sheeting shall meet the
S705.4
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

requirements in Table 705.2 when tested in accordance with ASTM-E-97

(reference ASTM D307-44).
Adhesive
The reflective sheeting shall include a pre-coated pressure sensitive
adhesive or a tack-free, solvent heat activated adhesive, either of which
may be applied without necessity of additional adhesive coats on the
reflective sheeting or application surface.
The protective liner attached to the adhesive shall be removed by peeling

without soaking water or other solvents and shall be easily removed after
accelerated storage for four (4) hours at 65o C under weight of 17,236 N
per square metre.
Table 705.2: Day Colour for Cie Standard Source C

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Colour CIE Chromaticity Co-ordinate Limits
Reflectance
(Corner x, y Points) Limit (y)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
x y x y x y x y
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Silver 0.306 0.311 0.349 0.360 0.338 0.371 0.295 0.322 Min. to 40.0
White
Yellow 0.504 0.458 0.525 0.473 0.493 0.507 0.474 0.488 30.5 to 38.5
Red 0.626 0.322 0.678 0.322 0.649 0.351 0.601 0.347 8.0 to 10.8
Gold 0.457 0.409 0.484 0.426 0.459 0.451 0.436 0.430 20.0 to 27.0
Orange 0.600 0.370 0.624 0.375 0.605 0.394 0.582 0.388 12.0 to 15.0
Blue 0.148 0.064 0.176 0.109 0.161 0.134 0.130 0.096 0.9 to 1.60
Green 0.133 0.376 0.147 0.436 0.123 0.454 0.104 0.386 4.6 to 7.0
Dk.Red 0.649 0.306 0.695 0.305 0.680 0.320 0.636 0.319 5.5 to 7.0
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Adhesive coated sheet shall form a durable bond to smooth corrosion and
weather resistant surfaces and adhere securely at temperatures of -34o
C to 92o C.
The pre-coated adhesive, 48 hours after application, shall be tough
S705.5
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

enough to resist scuffing and marring during handling; elastic enough at

low temperatures to resist shocking off when struck at -23o C; vandal The
pre-coated adhesive, 48 hours after application, shall be tough enough to
resist scuffing and marring during handling; elastic enough at low
temperatures to resist shocking off when struck at -23o C; vandal resistant
and strong enough to resist peeling the reflective sheeting from the
application surface when a 22.24 N per 25 mm width force is applied as
outlined in ASTM D903-49. The pre-coated adhesive shall have no
staining effect on the reflective sheeting and must be mildew resistant.
Physical Requirements
The reflective sheeting shall be sufficiently flexible to be easily cut to
shape and permit application over and in conformance to moderate,
shallow embossing characteristic of certain sign borders and symbols.
Conditioned for 48 hours the tensile strength of the sheeting shall be 2.3
to 9.0 kilograms per 25 mm width when tested in accordance with
AASHTO T139 with 10 to 45% elongation. Following liner removal, the
reflective sheeting shall not shrink more than 0.8 mm in 10 minutes nor
more than 3.2 mm in 25 hours in any dimension per 230 sq.mm at 22o C
and 50% relative humidity. Sheeting when applied according to
manufacturer's recommendations to cleaned and etched 0.4 mm x 40 mm
x 200 mm aluminum sheeting, conditioned (24 hours) and tested at 22o
C and 50% relative humidity shall be sufficiently flexible to show no
cracking when bent around a 19 mm mandrel.
The sheeting shall permit cutting and colour processing at temperatures

of 15o C to 38o C and relative humidities of 20% to 80%. The sheeting
shall be heat resistant and permit force curing of unapplied sheeting at
41o C and up to 93o C on applied sheeting. The sheeting surface shall
be solvent resistant and may be cleaned with gasoline, VM & Naptha,
mineral spirits, turpentine, methanol or xylol.
Surface Texture
The sheeting surface shall be smooth and flat in order to facilitate
cleaning and wet performance and exhibit 85" glossmeter rating of not
less than 40 (ASTM - D523-53T).
S705.6
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

The sheeting surface shall be readily processed and compatible with

recommended transparent and opaque process inks and show no loss of
the colour coat with normal handling, cutting and application. Following
accelerated exposure, no process inks shall be removed when tested by
scratching through the ink surface, applying cellophane tape over the
scratched area, and removing the tape with one quick motion.
Lens Elements
The reflective sheeting shall possess stable and durable spherical lens
elements which following extraction, shall show no deterioration following
submersion in a 5N solution of sulphuric acid for 30 minutes at 22o C.
Durability
The reflective material shall be weather resistant and following cleaning
shall show no appreciable discolouration, cracking, crazing, blistering, or
dimensional change and not less than 80% of the specified wet or dry
minimum brightness values when exposed to accelerated weathering for
either 175,000 Langleys (approximately 1 year), south facing,
unprotected in a tropical climate, or 1,200 hours Atlas Twin arc
weathering (ASTM E42-57 Type D) in accordance with ASTM D-822-60.
The sheeting surface may be readily refurbished by cleaning and clear

overcoating in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
The reflective sheeting as supplied shall be of good appearance, free

from ragged edges, cracks, scales and blisters and shall be furnished in
both rolls and sheets. There shall be no more than four splices per 50m
length and splices shall be suitable for application as supplied.
Rolls shall be packed individually and in such manner that no damage or

defacement may occur to the reflective sheeting during shipment or
storage.
Cut sheets shall be packaged flat to prevent damage or defacement

shipment or storage.
S705.7
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

Application Details
In order to assure uniform appearance and brilliance in both night and
day, the reflective sheeting shall be cut, matched and positioned on the
sign panel in strict accordance with the recommendations of the
manufacturer of the reflective sheeting.
6. Reflectorized Sign Characters

Sign characters shall consist of letters, numerals, borders and arrows,
conforming in design and specification as shown on the Drawings or as
instructed by the Engineer.
Characters shall consist of cut-out reflective material meeting the

requirements of reflective sign background except that the reflective
sheeting shall be silver-white having a minimum brightness 180% of that
specified for backgrounds.
All like characters on the contract shall be cut together from a common
master to insure uniformity. Cutting of characters from reflective sheeting
shall be done in strict accordance with the sheeting manufacturer's
recommendations. Each character, except borders, must be cut from a
single piece of sheeting. Straight sections of borders must have a
minimum length of 6.0mm.
Characters or borders shall be applied directly to clean, dust-free reflective

sheeting background panels. They shall be applied mechanically with
equipment and in a manner specified by the sheeting manufacturer.
Borders shall be cut neatly and butt-jointed at corners and panel points.
The Contractor may at his option, use pre-cut letters of reflective sheeting
or reflective sheeting applied to sheet aluminum cut out letters, that are
supplied by reputable and approved manufacturers. Any such characters
must meet the reflective requirements specified above. If aluminum
sheeting backed characters are used they shall be securely fastened to
the sign background with aluminum or stainless steel screws, or
pull-through blind rivets. Spacing of screws or rivets shall be determined
by character size and shape but in not be more than 200mm on centre.
S705.8
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

Sign characters for the standard designs shall consist of a painted,

screened, or reverse-screened application of paint, paste or transparent
colour of a type and in a manner recommended by the manufacturer of the
reflective material.
Reflective material used for reverse-screened signs shall meet all the
requirements of reflective sign background. Characters shall meet the
requirements of reflective sign background except that the optical
requirements shall be 180% of that specified.
7. Sign Posts and Footings

Posts shall be structural steel of the diameter shown on the Drawings and
conforming to AASHTO 183. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to
ascertain the exact length required to erect the sign in its specific location,
at its proper height in relation to the pavement and with the specified
embedment. Posts shall not extend above the sign panel.
The Contractor may, with the Engineer's approval, alter such sign
clearance or construction dimensions as necessary to avoid the placing of
posts in ditch inverts and the like.
The Contractor may, with Engineer's approval, supply posts of different

cross sections or of materials other than those specified on the Drawings
provided that the structural strength of the replacement is equivalent to that
of the posts shown on the Drawings.
Concrete for steel pipe post footings shall conform to requirements of

Section 501 of these Specifications.

Signs shall be built in accordance with the details shown on the Drawings. The
Contractor may use any optional details proposed by him and approved by the
Engineer, provide all signs of any one type shall be built using the same methods
and materials.
All panels used shall be smooth, without beads, dents, or holes not needed for
S705.9
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

fabrication. Multi panel signs shall have splice plate rivets or welded studs set prior
to the application of reflective background sheeting, but the panels need not be
fully assembled when the background sheeting is applied if the Contractor so
desires.
The bolts attaching the horizontal Z bar stringers to the sign panel shall be located
so that bolt heads shall not come through or touch any characters on the sign face.
Corners need not be cut to follow border radii but may be left square.
1. Design
i. Sign Face Layout shall be in accordance with the detailed layouts shown
in the Drawings or, in the case of standard signs, in accordance with the
standard noted.
ii. Spacing between letters in a word shall conform to the spacing required
by the Ministry of Public Utilities and National Transportation. Spacing
between words, between words and borders, and vertical spacing shall
conform to the detailed layouts shown on the Drawings.
iii. Lettering for all except `Standard Signs' shall conform to the Standard
Alphabets as recommended in the "Traffic Control Devices Manual"
Ministry of Public Utilities and National Transportation.
2. Drawings
Drawings that accompany these Specifications are designed as "Contract
Drawings" and are not intended to be used as "Shop" or "Working"
drawings. Shop drawings are not required. However, the Contractor shall
furnish and be responsible for all dimensions not given such as post
lengths which are required in conjunction with layout for construction.
3. Fabrication
Fabrication of all components and erection of the completed sign shall be
done in a workmanlike manner and shall produce a finished sign
installation to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Holes may be punched or
drilled. Cut edges shall be smooth and true, and free from excessive burrs
or ragged breaks. All fabrications except for cutting posts shall be done in
the shop except upon permission of the Engineer.
4. Substitutions
Wherever a specific standard is mentioned, materials meeting an
equivalent standard will be acceptable, subject to approval by the
S705.10
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

Engineer.
5. Sealing
After the sign has been completed, the entire sign face (backgrounds and
characters) shall be coated and/or edge sealed with a clear finishing
material (sprayed or dipped) as specified by the sheeting manufacturer.
The coating operation shall be done in a workmanlike manner creating an

even, clear, uniform coat, free of streaks, drops, or other conditions which
might affect reflectivity.
6. Erection
The Contractor shall erect new signs and remove existing signs in such a
manner that the travelling public is informed and protected at all times.
When the highway is to be opened prior to acceptance, it will be required

that certain items, designated by the Engineer, be executed as first items
of such work.
Ground mounted signs shall normally be erected so that the sign face is
truly vertical and the intersecting angle measured between the sign face
and the centerline of the travel lane, which the sign serves shall be 93
degrees. Where lanes divide or on curves, sign faces shall be oriented so
as to be most effective both day and night, and to avoid the possibility of
specular reflection.
All material shall be transported and handled in a manner that will cause
no permanent deformation, injury or damage. Material to be stored shall
be stored above the ground in a manner and at a location approved by the
Engineer. Any part of the entire sign or structure damaged during
transportation, handling or erection shall be repaired, or, if in the opinion
of the Engineer, is unfit for use in the finished work, shall be removed from
the site and replaced by the Contractor at his own expense.
The Contractor upon completion of the sign installation will restore the area
to the original state in which he found it. This may require the Contractor
to re-pave, re-seed, re-sod and mulch all areas disturbed by his men or
equipment as ordered by the Engineer. No direct payment will be made
S705.11
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

for this work. The cost of doing this work will be included in the price for
other items.
7. Test Samples
The Engineer may accept the manufacturer's notarized certificate that his
product conforms to all of the above detailed Specifications. When the
Engineer requires tests to be made, samples shall be submitted to the
Engineer. The test samples shall be at least 0.6 square metres in area.
One sample shall be submitted for each 40 square metres or less of
reflectorized material to be used on the contract. These samples shall be
tested as specified above. Failure of the samples to meet all requirements
of the above Specifications shall be cause for rejection of the reflective
sheeting represented by such samples.
8. Field Inspection
All material and workmanship will be inspected in the field unless it has
been previously inspected. All work of erection shall be subject to the
inspection of the Engineer who shall be given all facilities for a thorough
inspection of workmanship. An inspection of the completed erected signs
shall be made in the day-light for proper location, line and grade of signs,
vertical post alignment, appearance and visibility. The completely erected
signs shall also be inspected by the Engineer more particularly for the
following: -
a. Improper orientation
b. Specular reflection
c. Other defects more conspicuous at night
All apparent defects disclosed after day and night inspection shall be
corrected by the Contractor to the satisfaction of the Engineer and the cost
of any work, labour, material or other expenses required for such
adjustment shall be considered as part of the price tendered for the
appropriate item.
Removal and re-erection of existing signs shall follow the construction

requirements contained in Section 705.3.6. Existing signs designated for
removal and disposal shall become the property of the Contractor.
S705.12
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___


a. Measurement
The quantities to be paid for under this Section will be the number of units
of each type and size of steel posts for signs and of each type and size of
sign panel, all complete in place in accordance with the Drawings, these
Specification and as accepted by the Engineer. Excavation of holes and
concrete for foundations will not be measured separately, but will be
deemed to be included in the prices inserted in the Bill of Quantities for the
sign posts and sign panels.
Measurement will be made of the number of sign installations removed or

re-erected.
b. Payment
Payment for steel sign posts and sign units under this Section will be made
at the prices tendered in the Bill of Quantities which prices and payments
will constitute full compensation for fabricating, furnishing, handling,
hauling, erecting the steel post and sign unit stiffeners, splices, stringers,
brackets, hardware, repair, replacement, excavation, concrete
foundations, backfill and cleanup, including materials, labour, tools,
including temporary screening of sign panel until it becomes operative
equipment and all else necessary to complete the work described herein
in strict conformance with the Drawings, theses specifications, and as
Payment for removal or re-erection of sign installations under this Section

will be made at the prices tendered in the Bill of Quantities which prices
and payments will constitute full compensation for handling, hauling,
removal or re-erection of the steel post and sign unit, excavation, concrete
foundations, backfill and cleanup, including materials, labour, tools,
including temporary screening of sign panel until it becomes operative,
equipment and all else necessary to complete the work described herein,
in strict conformance with the Drawings, these specifications, and as
S705.13
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___


705.1 Single Steel Sign Post and Sign Panel (size and type). each
705.2 Double Steel Sign Post and Sign Panel (size and type) each
705.3 Remove and Salvage of Existing Sign Installation –1 post each
705.4 Remove and Salvage of Existing Sign Installation –2 post each
705.5 Remove and Dispose of Existing Sign Installation –1 post each
705.6 Remove and Dispose of Existing Sign Installation –2 post each
705.7 Re-erect Existing Sign Installation – 1 post each
705.8 Re-erect Existing Sign Installation – 2 post each
S705.14
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

SECTION 706: PAVEMENT MARKINGS
CONTENTS
706.1 Description
706.2 Materials
706.3 Reflective Road Studs
_____________________________________________________________________________
706.1 Description
The work to be performed under this Section shall consist of painting traffic lane
lines and other pavement markings in accordance with these Specifications as
shown on the Drawings or directed by the Engineer.
706.2 Materials
Paint shall be of local manufacture. Pavement marking paints shall meet the
requirements of the British Standards Institute BS 2086 or its replacement.
All other paints, thinners and related products shall meet the requirements of the
British Standards Institute Specification for that particular product as determined
by the Engineer.
Paint shall be white reflectorized road marking paint similar to 3-M Green-stripe
conform to BS 2086 and shall be subject to approval by the Engineer. The paint
shall contain not less than 0.54 kilograms of beads per litre.
The pigment and vehicle shall be so prepared and blended that the resulting paint
shall be uniform in composition and of the required consistency. The paint shall not
bleed on asphalt surfaces.
The paint shall have a no-pick up maximum drying time of one hour at 240 C and
50 to 60 percent relative humidity.
Beads shall be 70% spherical particles essentially free of sharp angular particles
and particles showing milkiness, and shall be free of colour.
S706.1
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

The beads shall meet the following grading requirements:-
U.S. Bureau of Standards Sieve Sizes
Passing Retained On % by Weight

No. 16 No. 16 0- 5
No. 16 No. 20 0 - 12
No. 20 No. 30 5 - 35
No. 30 No. 50 35 - 65
No. 50 No. 100 0 - 15
No. 100 - 0 - 10
Beads shall be moisture-proof and show no tendency toward decomposition,

including surface etching, when exposed to atmospheric conditions, moisture,
dilute acids or alkalies or local soils or paint film constituents, and shall be
manufactured from glass of composition designed to be highly resistant to traffic
wear.
706.3 Reflective Road Studs

Reflective Studs
1. Reflective road marking studs shall be Catastud by Berger Traffic Markings
Ltd or similar approved. The colour of the glass lenses and the spacings
of studs shall be as indicated on the drawings.
2. The contact area of the road shall be dry, clear of loose sand, oil spillages
etc. Studs shall be fixed to the surface by the two-part adhesive supplied
by the manufacturer at a maximum rate of eight studs per 20-ounce pack.

The painting of the lines shall conform to the widths and spaces as shown on the
Drawings and as directed by the Engineer.
The lines shall be straight with clear - cut edges. Paint shall be applied at not less
than 17 sq. metres and not more than 25 sq. metres per litre.
Paint shall be placed only upon surfaces which are dry and free from all dirt and
foreign matter. No separate payment will be made for cleaning and preparation of
S706.2
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

surface to be marked. Paint shall be applied only to surfaces that are free of
moisture both external and internal. Sufficient time shall be allowed after rain and
dew to permit the surface to become thoroughly dry. The Contractor may expedite
drying by the use of compressed air.
Striping shall not be applied to any surface until such face has been inspected and
Pavement striping that is not straight and uniform and of good appearance or that
has been applied over dirt or moisture, or that has dripped or been spilled on the
pavement shall be removed by the Contractor at his own expense to the
satisfaction of the Engineer.
The Contractor will be liable for all damage resulting from spattering paint on
passing vehicles. The Contractor shall protect all painting from traffic or other
damage until fully set.

a. Measurement
The quantity of Pavement Paint Marking to be paid for under this Section
will be measured as follows complete in place and accepted.
- Measurement of striping will be by the metre
- Measurement of traffic arrows will be by the unit (each) regardless
of size. Measurement of lettering will be by the letter applied.
- Measurement of crosswalk will be by the square metre in place and
accepted.
b. Payment
as it appears in the Schedule.
The price and payment shall constitute full compensation for cleaning and
drying the pavement, furnishing paint and glass beads, applying, protecting
and repainting, including materials, labor, tools, equipment and all else
necessary to complete the work described herein in strict conformance with
S706.3
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

Section 706 payment items which may appear in the Schedule are as
follows: -

706.1 Pavement Paint Marking Traffic Arrows Each
706.2 Pavement Paint Marking-Stripes 100 mm. wide lin.m
706.5 Pavement Paint Marking-Stripes 300 mm wide. lin.m
706.6 Pavement Paint Marking-Stripes 500 mm wide. lin.m
706.7 Pavement Paint Marking-Lettering Each
706.8 Pavement Paint Marking-Crosswalk m2
706.9 Pavement Paint Marking-Stopline lin.m
706.10 Reflective Road Studs lin.m
.
.
S706.4
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

SECTION 707: EPOXY ADHESIVE FOR PAVEMENT MARKINGS
CONTENTS
707.1 Description
707.2 Standard Set Epoxy Adhesives
707.3 Rapid Set Epoxy
_____________________________________________________________________________
707.1 Description
This Section covers high viscosity paste standard set epoxy and high viscosity
paste rapid epoxy both primarily for use in bonding pavement markings to Portland
cement concrete and asphalt concrete.
707.2 Standard Set Epoxy Adhesive for Pavement Markers

a. Composition:
1. Component A - Specifications
Parts by Weight
Epoxy Resin 1 ... 100.0
Titanium Dioxide ... ASTM Designation:
D 476, Type III or IV ... 7.31
Resin Grade Asbestos ... 5.00*
Talc 3 ... ... 37.64
2. Component B Specifications
Parts by Weight
N-Aminoethyl Piperazine 4 ... 23.16
Nonylphenol 5 ... 52.00
Carbon Black 6 ... 0.22
Talc 3 ... 77.37
Resin Grade Asbestos 2 ...... 1.00 **
* A range of 4.50 to 5.50 is permitted if necessary to achieve proper viscosity and

shear ratio.
** A range of 0.90 to 1.10 is permitted if necessary to achieve viscosity and shear
ratio.
3. Viscosity, 5-7 poises at 25o C; epoxide equivalent 175-195; Colour

(Gardner), 5 maximum; manufactured from epichlorohydrin and
bisphenol A. The reactive diluent shall be butyl glycidyl ether.
S707.1
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

4. Specific gravity, grams per ml., 2.45; moisture content, % by weight,

2.0 maximum; surface area, square metres per gram, 60
approximately; reflectance, G.E. brightness, 72-76; nature of surface
charge, electropositive (cationic); pH in water, 9.5; bulking value, litres
per 100 kgs. 39.9; oil absorption (DOP), kgs per 100 kgs l20; refractive
index, Nd 25o C., 1.54 - 1.56; wet bulk density in water, after dispersion,
2 grams per litre, settling after 1 hr 100 ml clear maximum; dry bulk
density, kgs per cubic metre, 64.3.
5. Percent passing U. S. No 325 sieve, 94-96; maximum particle size, 70

microns; oil absorption (Gardner-Coleman), 6-7 ml per 20 grams;
fineness in oil (Hegman) l-2; specific surface, 0.5-0.6 square metre per
gram; consistency (40% suspension in linseed oil) 55-60 KU.
6. Colour (APHA) 50 maximum; amine value 1250-1350 based on

titration which reacts with the 3 nitrogens in the molecule; appearance
clear and substantially free of suspended matter.
7. Colour (APHA) 50 maximum; hydroxyl number 245-255; distillation

range, degrees C at 760 mm first drop 295 minimum, 5% 298
minimum, 95% 325 maximum; water % (K.F.) 0.05 maximum.
8. Surface area, square metres/gram, 115-130; particle diameter,

millimicrons, 18-30; pH, 7.5-8.5; fixed carbon (moisture free), percent,
96-98; volatile matter, percent, 2-4; oil absorption, stiff paste endpoint,
CCS/gram, 0.80-0.90.
b. Tests:
All tests shall be performed in accordance with ASTM Standards.
Characteristics of Separate components:
Test Requirements
Component A Component B
1. Viscosity, Poise,
TD Helipath spindle at 25o C 1000 to 3000 1000 to 3000
2. Shear Ratio, min at 25o C 2.0 2.0
3. Density, kgs/litre at 25o C 1.38 to 1.42 1.42 to 1.45
4. Skinning (original container) None None
S707.2
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

Test Requirements
5. lnfrared Curves, shall match curves in ASTM Standards.

Components A and B
6. Storage Stability
Components A and B shall not change in viscosity and shear ratio by more
than ± 15 percent when stored for 2 weeks in closed containers at 46.1o C
±1.6o C. All measurements shall be made at 25o C using the same spindle
and apparatus as in Item 1 above.
The adhesive shall meet all other requirements for 12 months from date of
manufacture. There shall be no settling of the fillers that cannot be easily
redispersed with a paddle.
7. Percent Air, maximum 2.0 2.0

Characteristics of Combined Components:
Requirements
8. Gel time, minutes 8 to 13
9. Bond strength to Concrete, time (maximum) to reach not less than
14.1 Kgf per sq cm at 25o C ±1.1o C 3.5 hours
10. Slant Shear Strength Kgf per sq. cm.
24 hours at 25o C ±1.1o C 2200 min
24 hours at 25o C ±1.1o C
plus water soak Kgf per sq cm 1500 min
11. Tensile Adhesion and Cohesion
a. Class polyester marker bottom, Kgf per sq cm 475 min
b. Class III and IV ceramic marker bottom,
Kgf per sq cm. 700 min
c. Class III and IV ceramic marker bottom including
post cure, Kgf per sq cm 700 min
d. Reflective pavement marker bottom, Kgf per sq cm 500 min
12. Colour of Mixed Components approximately that of
Federal Standard No. 595, Colour No. 26152
S707.3
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

c. Directions for use:

Just before use, Components A and B shall be mixed in a one-to-one ratio
by volume. When automatic proportioning and mixing machine is used,
the temperature of the components shall be maintained by indirect heating
or cooling, so that the adhesive will metre, mix and extrude properly. The
maximum temperature shall be such that after proper mixing there shall be
no excess flow of adhesive from under the marker.
707.3 Rapid Set Epoxy for Pavement Marker

a. Composition:
1. Component A Specifications
Parts by Weight
Epoxy Resin 1 ... ... ... 90.00
Orthocresol Glycidyl Ether 2 ... ... 10.00
Titanium Dioxide ... ASTM Designation:
D 476, Type III or IV ... 3.00
Resin Grade Asbestos ... ... 3.00*
Talc 3 ... ... ... 50.00
Silicone Anti-Foam Type Q ... 0.01
2. Component B Specifications
High Functionality Polymercaptan Hardner 5... 60.00
2, 4, 6-Tri (Dimethylaminomethyl) Phenol 6 ... 7.00
Polysulfide Polymer 7 ... ... 35.00
Carbon Black 8 ... ... 0.10
Talc 3 ... ... ... 50.58
Resin Grade Asbestos 4 ... ... 3.00 **
Silicone Anti-Foam Type Q ... 0.01
* A range of 2.70 to 3.30 is permitted if necessary to achieve proper viscosity and shear ratio.
3. Diglycidyl ether of bisphenol A, viscosity, l00-160 poise at 25 degrees C.,

5-10 Centipoise. Weight per litre 1.08-1.09 kilograms. Epoxide equivalent
180-200.
4. Percent passing U.S. No. 325 sieve, 99 minimum; Hegman Rating, 3-4; oil
absorption (spatula), 32-35; reflectance (green filter), 92-94.
5. Specific gravity, grams per ml., 2.45; moisture content, % by weight, 2.0
maximum; surface area, square metres per gram, 60 approximately;
reflectance, G.E. brightness, 72-76; nature of surface charge,
S707.4
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

electropositive (cationic); pH in water, 9.5; bulking value, litres per 100 kgs.,
39.9; oil absorption (DOT), kilograms per 100 kgs., l2O; refractive index, Nd
25o C., 1.54-1.56; wet bulk density in water, after dispersion, 2 grams per
liter, settling after 1 hr., 100 ml. clear maximum; dry bulk density, kilograms
per cubic metre 64.3.
6. Liquid polymercaptan resin, viscosity l00-130 poise at 25o C; specific
gravity 1.14-1.16; mercaptan value, 3.6 meq/gram. Colour, Gardner 1933,
I.
7. Formula weight 265; specific gravity at 25o C./25o C., 0.973; refractive index
1.514 at 25o C.; distillation range 96% at l3Oo C. to l6Oo C. (0.5-1.5 mm);
flash point, Tag Open Cup, 149o C. minimum; water content 0.06%
maximum.
8. Specific gravity, 1.24-1.30 at 2Oo C /2Oo C.; viscosity, 700-1200 centipoise,
Brookfield at 25o C.; pH water extract 6.0-8.0; moisture content, 0.1%
maximum; pour point, -26o C; average molecular weight, lOOO; flash point,
o
C, Cleveland Open Cup, 390 minimum; sulfur content, percent, 36-40;
colour, Hellige, 9-12. The product shall be a defunctional mercaptan made
from 98 mole percent of bis (2-chloroethyl) formal and 2 mole percent of
trichloropropane.
9. Surface area, square metres/gram, 115-130; particle diameter,
millimicrons, 18-30; pH, 7.5-8.5; fixed carbon (moisture free), percent, 96-
98; volatile matter, percent, 2-4; oil absorption, stiff paste enpoint,
CCS/gram, 0.80-0.90.
b. Tests
All tests shall be performed in accordance with ASTM Standards.
Characteristics of Components:
Test Requirements
1. Viscosity, Poise,
TD Helipath spindle at 25o C 1750 to 4000 1750 to 4000
2. Shear Ratio, Max. at 52o C 2.0 2.0
3. Density, kgs per litre at 25o C 1.44 to 1.48 1.44 to 1.48
Test
Requirements
S707.5
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

4. Skinning (original container) None Slight

5. Infrared Curves,
Components A and B shall match curves in Test method No. Calif. 425.
6. Storage Stability
The Components A and B shall not change in viscosity and shear ratio by
more than ± 15 percent when stored for 2 weeks in closed containers at
46o C ±1.1o C. All measurements shall be made at 25o C. using the same
spindle and apparatus as in Item 1 above.
The adhesive shall meet all other requirements for 12 months from date of
manufacture. There shall be no settling of the fillers that cannot be easily
redispersed with a paddle.
7. Percent Air, maximum 2.0 2.0
Characteristics of Combined Components:
Requirements
1. Gel time, minutes 7
2. Bond strength to Concrete, Time (maximum) to
reach not less than 14.1 Kgf per sq cm 35 minutes
at 25o C ±1.1o C 35 minutes
at 10o C ±1.1o C 45 minutes
at -1.11o C ±1.1o C 85 minutes
3. Slant Shear Strength Kgf per sq. cm.
24 hours at 25o C ±1.1o C 1000 min
24 hours at 25o C ±1.1o C
plus water soak Kgf per sq cm 800 min
4. Tensile Adhesion and Cohesion
a. Class II polyester marker bottom, Kgf per sq cm 475 min
b. Class III and IV ceramic marker bottom,
Kgf per sq cm. 700 min
c. Class III and IV ceramic marker bottom
including post cure, Kgf per sq cm 700 min
d. Reflective pavement marker bottom, Kgf per sq cm 500 min
5. Colour of Mixed Components: Approximately that of 26152
Federal Standard Colour No. 595.
S707.6
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

c. Directions for Use :

Just before use, Components A and B shall be mixed in a one-to-one ratio
by volume. When automatic proportioning and mixing machine is used, the
temperature of the components shall be maintained by indirect heating or
cooling, so that the adhesive will metre, mix and extrude properly.
The maximum temperature shall be such that after proper mixing there shall
be no excess flow of adhesive from under the marker other than that
specified in Section 627.5 "Placement"
S707.7
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

SECTION 708: REPAIR/RECONSTRUCTION OF WATER SERVICES LINES
CONTENTS
708.1 Scope
708.2 Materials
708.3 Execution
_____________________________________________________________________________
708.1 Scope
The work to be carried out under this section shall consist of repair or
reconstruction of water services found damaged or unavoidably broken by the
Contractor during road rehabilitation work.
708.2 Materials
a. Pipe
Pipe diameter 19 mm to 75mm to be potyethylene to AWWA C901,
pressure class 160 tubing, Type K annealed copper, to ASTM B88M or
Polybutylene material to AWWA C902, pressure class 160.
b. Underground Valves:
Underground service line valves and fittings 19 mm to 50 mm in size shall
be to AWWA C800 which shall be suitable for 1035 kPa working pressure.
c. Corporation Stops:
19 mm to 50 mm: bronze to ASTM B62, AWWA thread inlet, compression
type outlet. Recommended types are:
- Mueller H-15008, Ford F-1000, Cambridge E-17072 or approved equal.
d. Kerb Stops:
Kerb stops of size 19 mm and 50 mm to be bronze to ASTM B62; inverted
key, ball or cylinder type construction utilizing rubber O-ring seals.It shall
be full flow, full port, Mueller, Ford, Cambridge or other approved equal.
Fittings shall be compression type for underground services.
All fittings and valve connections on polyethylene or polybutylene shall

have solid fluted stiffening liners manufactured from stainless steel to ANSI
T304 designed for the appropriate type and inside dimension of the pipe,
warranted by the manufacturer for that use.
S708.1
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

e. Granular Pipe Bedding Backfill and Surround Material

This material shall conform to the requirements of Section 205 - Selected
Granular Backfill or as shown on the Drawings.
708.3 Execution
a. General
Pipe bedding shall be carried out as shown on the Drawings.
b. Preparation
Carefully inspect materials for defects and clean pipes, valves, and
appurtenances of debris and water before installation. Remove all
defective materials off the Site.
c. Trenching
Trenching shall be in accordance with Section 204 - Structural Excavation.
Trench alignment and depth shall be as shown on the Drawings or as
otherwise approved by Engineer.
The trench depth shall provide cover over pipe of not less than 1.2m from
finished grade or as shown on the Drawings.
d. Concrete Bedding and Encasement
Concrete work shall be in accordance with Section 303 - Concrete for
Structures as shown on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
Pipes may be positioned on concrete blocks to facilitate the placing of
concrete. When necessary, the pipe shall be rigidly anchored to prevent
flotation when the concrete is being placed.
No backfill shall be placed over concrete within 24 hours of concreting.

e. Granular Bedding
All soft, unyeilding or unsuitable material at this level shall be removed to
an additional depth of 300mm, or as directed by the Engineer and replaced
with granular material to provide a firm foundation of uniform density
throughout the length of the pipe. Granular bedding shall be used to fill any
over-excavation below the design elevation for the bottom of the specified
bedding level.
Place granular bedding material across the full width of the trench bottom
in uniform layers to depths shown on the Drawings.
S708.2
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

Shape the bed true to grade to provide a continuous and uniform bearing
surface for the pipe. The use of blocks when bedding pipe shall not be
permitted.
Shape any transverse depressions in the bedding to suit the joints. Backfill
with approved native or imported material and compact each layer over the
full width of bed to a minimum density of 95% of AASHTO T-180
compaction.
Use hand tools to compact material under ‘haunch’ area of pipe and around
fittings and other materials.
Use imported bedding when the proposed work is to be installed through

paved areas and when native material is deemed unsuitable for backfill by
the Engineer or when the trench has been excavated in rock.
f. Pipe Installation
Handle all pipe in accordance with the pipe manufacturer’s
recommendations.
Lay and join the pipes to the manufacturer’s instructions and specifications
except for the following type of pipes: PVC pipe to AWWA M23; HDPE pipe
to ASTM D2321.
The horizontal tolerance shall be plus or minus 50mm from the specified
alignment. The vertical tolerance shall be plus or minus 25mm from the
specified grade.
Pipes shall be laid on a prepared bed, true to line and grade. Face the
socket ends of the pipe in the direction of laying.Do not exceed one-half of
the maximum joint deflection recommended by pipe the manufacturer.
Joint deflection is not permitted in PVC pipes. Deflections in PVC pipelines
shall be achieved using high deflection PVC couplings rated for 1380 kPa
operating pressure. For HDPE pipe cold bending is allowed to a minimum
radius of 50 times the nominal pipe size without special fittings.
S708.3
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

Jointing materials and installed pipe shall be kept free of dirt, water and
other foreign materials. Whenever work is stopped, a removable watertight
bulkhead shall be installed at open end of the last pipe laid to prevent entry
of water and foreign materials.
Position and join pipes with suitable equipment and use methods agreed
with the Engineer. Pipes shall be cut as required, and to the
recommendation of the pipe manufacturer, without damaging the pipe or
its coating and leaving a smooth end at right angles to the axis of the pipe.
All pipes shall be aligned carefully before joining. Pipe joints shall be
maintained free from mud, silt, gravel and other foreign material. When
making joints sufficient pressure shall be applied to ensure that the joint is
complete as outlined in the manufacturer’s recommendations.
All completed joints must be restrained by compacting bedding material

alongside and over the installed pipes as specified or directed by the
Engineer.
When any stoppage of work occurs, pipe shall be restrained in an approved

manner to prevent “creep” during down time.
Recheck any components assembled above ground after placing in trench

to ensure that no movement of joints has taken place.
Pressure test and/or bleed points consisting of Corporation cocks, sized to

achieve a minimum flushing velocity of 0.8 m/s in accordance with AWWA
C651 or as requried by the Engineer.
g. Service Connection Installation
Service connections shall be installed in accordance with the Drawings or
as directed by the Engineer. Service connections shall be constructed at
right angles to the water main unless otherwise directed by the Engineer.
Locate kerb stops as shown on the Drawings and complete service
connections before carrying out any hydrostatic and leakage tests of the
water main.
S708.4
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

Tappings in cast iron or ductile iron mains 200 mm or greater in diameter

may be threaded without service clamps provided the specified pipe wall
thickness is sufficient to conform to ANSI/ASME B1.20.1 for at least 3
threads as shown in Appendix A to AWWA C151.
Tappings in cast iron or ductile iron mains smaller in diameter than 200
mm; or cast iron or ductile iron mains with wall thickness which will not
allow at least 3 full threads; or tap sizes beyond those shown in the
following table are to be made using double strap saddles or tapping
sleeves.
Maximum Tap Maximum Tap

Pipe Diameter Without Clamp With Clamp
(mm) (mm) (mm)
200 25 50
250 25 50
300 40 75
Tappings in PVC mains shall conform to AWWA C900/C905 and the pipe
shall be fitted with service saddles. The nuts on service saddle straps are
to be tightened to the torque range specified by the manufacturer and in no
case in excess of that torque.
Tappings in HDPE mains are to be with sidewall saddle fusion fitting or with
bronze type service clamps, stainless type with “O” ring seal cemented in
place.
Mains shall be tapped not closer to a joint nor closer to adjacent service
connections than recommended by the manufacturer, or 1 m, whichever is
the greater.
Corporation stop valves shall be left fully open. In order to relieve the strain
on the connections, the Contractor shall install the service pipe in “Goose
Neck” form “laid over” into a horizontal position.
S708.5
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

In small diameter plastic pipes rigid stainless steel liners shall be installed
with compression fittings.
Install kerb stop with a kerb stop valve box on those services which have
pipes of 50 mm or less in diameter. Equip the larger services with a gate
valve and cast iron valve box. Set the box plumb over the stop or valve
and adjust the top flush with the final grade elevation. Leave the kerb stop
or service valves fully closed.
A temporary location marker shall be placed at the ends of plugged or

capped unconnected water lines. Each marker shall consist of a 40 x 90
mm stake extending from the pipe level to 500 mm above grade. Mark and
paint blue the exposed portion of stake with the designation “WATER”.
Tapping into a sleeve installation shall be carried out by thoroughly

cleaning the exterior of the main to be tapped and grinding or filing. File
any protrusions or irregularities in the pipe exterior which may interfere with
the uniform seating of gaskets or clamping bands. The interior surface of
the tapping sleeve annulus shall be dusted with calcium hypochlorite
powder before attaching to the main, in accordance with Section 10 of
AWWA C651.
h. Surface Restoration
All backfilling of trenches shall be to within 150mm of the existing ground
surface. The backfill material will be select soil material, as directed by the
Engineer. The material shall be evenly spread and compacted in layers not
exceeding 150mm. Each layer shall be thoroughly compacted at optimum
moisture content by means of pnneumatic or mechanical tamping
equipment.
Backfill within 300mm of the line shall be free from stones of diameter larger
than 80mm. Backfill and compaction layers shall be brought up
simultaneously and evenly on both sides of the line.
This procedure shall continue until the backfill material is within 150mm of
the existing surface.
S708.6
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

i. Backfill in Boulevards and Easements

For those sections of the trench which are in the boulevard or easement
outside of the ditch lines, the backfill shall consist of native backfill. Surface
restoration of the trench shall be 150 mm in depth and shall be as follows:
- for unimproved boulevards reinstate with excavated material equal to
that removed at the surface.
- for gardens reinstate topsoil.
- for lawns reinstate with topsoil and seed or replace with sod.
- for gravel sidewalks reinstate with 75mm of 19mm crushed gravel or
limestone chips.
The Contractor shall restore lawns, plantings, gardens and other things to
a condition which existed prior to construction and he must meet any
reasonable claims that may arise. Working areas in easements shall be
restored to a condition which is at least equivalent to that which existed
prior to construction.
j. Backfill in Gravel Roads, Driveways, Shoulders and Ditch lines

For those sections of the trench that are in gravel roads, gravel driveways,
road shoulders or ditch lines, the backfill shall consist of granular backfill.
Surface restoration for ditch lines shall be composed of 300mm of native
material of such other material necessary to ensure that stability of the ditch
walls and bottom.
Notwithstanding the preceding, native material shall be used as backfill

within those limits of the trench as directed by the Engineer.
Road shoulder shall mean that portion of the right-of-way between the
travelled portion of the road, either asphalt or gravel and the road ditch.
Where no ditch exists, the shoulder width shall be a minimum of 1.5m.
Reinstatement of the surface shall be carried out immediately upon
completion of backfilling to the requirements of Section 416.
k. Backfill in Pavement
For those sections of the trench within existing paved roadways and
driveways the backfill shall consist of granular backfill.
S708.7
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

All pavement cuts, excavation and reinstatement shall conform to Section

412 and to the Drawings. All cuts and trenching in road pavements less
than 5 years old requires the written approval of the Engineer.
No trenching or patching shall be allowed in an arterial road except under

special conditions with the Engineer’s written permission.
Surface restoration shall consist of base material with asphalt paving as

specified and shall be completed in accordance with the following:
- Procedure for Temporary Patching
On all asphalt roads with exception of arterial roads, a 50mm
temporary asphalt patch shall be installed by the Contractor within
24 hours of closing the trench.
The Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining the temporary

patch for up to a maximum of 60 days from notification of the
installation of the temporary patch.
The Contractor shall be responsible for making his own

arrangements to temporarily patch all trenches on arterial roads the
same day they are cut. Cuts shall be continuous, made by either a
spade or saw.
Excavation shall be done to minimize the disturbance to the

adjacent asphalt, base gravel and trench walls.
Backfill shall be granular backfill to within 250mm of the top of the

trench. The last 200 mm shall be with gravel subbase material. All
gravel shall be compacted to a minimum density of 95% in
accordance with AASHTO T-180 compaction. Asphalt mix
materials are to conform to Section 406.
- Procedure for Permanent Patching

The temporary patch and fill materials shall be removed to a depth
of 100 mm below the surface of the existing pavement.
S708.8
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

The trench shall then be compacted to a minimum density of 98%

of AASHTO T-180 compaction.
A continuous spade or saw cut shall be used on all cuts to assist in

mechanical bond. The edge shall be made 200 mm or further back
from the edge of trench depending on the distress of the pavement.
The trench shall then be recompacted using a hoe-pack or
equivalent compactor.
The edges shall be thoroughly cleaned to remove all loose material.

If necessary, the edges of the cut shall be dried using the propane
blower or other heating device.
The edges of the cut shall be painted with bituminous tack coat in
accordance with Section 411. Asphaltic concrete wearing course
shall be placed in accordance with section 407.

a. Measurement
The reconstruction or repair of water service lines shall be measured by
the number of water service lines repaired or reconstructed.
b. Payment
constitute full compensation for all labour, valves, stops, pipes, and all the
other materials, tools, equipment and plant necessary to complete the work
described herein in strict conformance with these Specifications and as
approved by the Engineer. Excavation, selected backfill, gravel sub base
and asphaltic concrete shall be paid for separately under their respective
item.
Payment item which may appear in the Bill of Quantities is as follows:

708.1 Reconstruct or Repair Water Service Lines No.
S708.9
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

SECTION 709: PEDESTRIAN HANDRAIL
CONTENTS
709.1 Description
709.2 Materials
709.3 Execution
_____________________________________________________________________________
709.1 Scope
The work shall consist of the fabrication and erection of new or replacement of
pedestrian handrails in accordance with the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
709.2 Materials
The handrails shall be constructed from galvanized Grade 2 tubular steel post and
rails as AASHTO Specification M181 or an Engineer approved substitute. Galvanizing
shall conform to AASHTO Specification M111.
709.3 Execution
All handrails shall be prefabricated. Construction shall consist of tubular steel with the
intersections joined by continuous fusion welds and galvanized. Handrails shall be
butt-jointed using tubular steel dowels. Tubes and dowels shall be jointed by plug
welds. The handrails shall be secured to a concrete structure by means of grouting in
place in sockets or bolting a welded flange base with 4 resin anchor bolts or welding
where the base is of steel construction. Projections or other imperfections must be
removed so as to leave the handrail with a smooth finish.
All exposed metal parts shall be cleaned to bright metal or zinc and given one coat of
red lead and one coat of an approved paint. All onsite welds for repairs will first be
given two coats of a zinc rich paint.
Damaged handrail shall be cut and removed and the replacement sections shall be
installed as new.

a. Measurement
Supply and placement of pedestrian handrails will be measured in linear
metres of the complete handrail measured along the top.
S709.1
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

SECTION 709: PEDESTRIAN HANDRAIL
Repair of pedestrian handrails will be measured in linear metres reinstalled.
b. Payment
constitute full compensation for all labour, galvanized tubular steel and all
the other materials, tools, equipment and plant necessary to complete the
work described herein in strict conformance with these Specifications and
as approved by the Engineer.

709.1 Fabrication and Erection of Pedestrian Handrail lin.m
709.2 Repair of Pedestrian Handrail lin.m
S709.2
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

SECTION 710: ELECTRICAL DUCTS, SPLICE BOXES & POLE BASES
CONTENTS
710.1 Description
710.2 Materials
710.3 Execution
_____________________________________________________________________________
710.1 Description
The work covered by this Section shall consist of the supply of all equipment,
labour, materials and services required to construct, install and test the system of
underground ducts, splice boxes and pole bases. The underground duct system
consists of: P.V.C. ducts to accommodate high or low voltage; and manholes or
splice boxes of the types and sizes specified.
The underground duct system does not include cabling which will be done by
others. The Contractor shall be responsible for clearing every section of duct and
leaving in place in each section a 4.5mm galvanized steel draw wire for future
pulling-in of cable. The Contractor shall ensure that ducts and splice boxes are
clean and free of water and leave each splice box properly covered. Modification
to routes shown on the Drawings shall be done only with the written consent of the
Engineer.
710.2 Materials
PVC Ducts
Rigid PVC ducts and sleeves shall conform to the requirements of the latest edition
of ASTM D-2663 or other approved equivalent. The ducts and sleeves shall be
listed by a qualified testing agency as suitable for direct burial without concrete
encasement. The ducts and sleeves shall be of the sizes specified on the
Drawings.
Splice Boxes
Splice boxes shall be of the types and sizes as specified on the Drawings. They
shall be constructed of reinforced masonry block wall and cast in-situ foundations
as shown on the Drawings.
Foundations to splice boxes and precast covers shall be reinforced with No. 65
S710.1
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

BRC wire mesh, or equal approved. All in-situ concrete shall be Class 21 concrete.
Splice boxes shall be set on a 75mm minimum level bed of gravel.
Backfill around splice boxes shall be done in layers not exceeding 150mm
compacted thickness. Work will not be considered complete until fill has reached
a density equivalent to 95% Standard Proctor density. Any soft areas that may
develop during compaction shall be removed and replaced with selected excavated
material. Compaction shall be done evenly on the four sides of the splice box.
Any damage to the splice box resulting from improper or incorrect punning of
backfilling shall be made good at the Contractor's expense. The Contractor shall
make good any subsequent subsidence of the backfilled trenches.
710.3 Execution
Excavation for Trenches
The extent of the works shall be as indicated on the Drawings or instructed by the
Engineer.
The lines of trenches shall be properly marked out by the Contractor. The depth
of trenches shall be as shown on the Drawings. In the execution of the works, the
Contractor shall excavate with vertical sided excavations. Excavated material shall
not be placed closer than 300mm from the edges of the trench. The sides of
excavations shall be fully supported to prevent slides or slips.
Where trenches cross roadways or in other locations as shown on the Drawings,

the Contractor shall encase P.V.C. ducts in a minimum of 150mm concrete
surround.
Responsibility for Position of Excavation

Before excavating a trench, the ground shall be examined by the Contractor jointly
with the Engineer. If the Contractor shall object to any position selected as being
likely to cause damage to adjoining property or to other public utility plant, the
Engineer shall give such modified directions as shall remove the objection.
Trench Dimensions
The width of the trench shall not be greater than is necessary for the satisfactory
S710.2
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

execution of the work, the width corresponding to the sections shown on the
relevant drawings. The width of the trench beneath the surface shall not exceed
the width at surface level. There shall be no undercutting for the purpose of
avoiding surface reinstatement.
The depth of the trench shall be in accordance with the sections shown on the
relevant drawings. The depth of the trench shall be such that the depth below the
surface to the top of the uppermost duct shall not be less than 600mm.
Drainage of Splice Boxes

Drainage shall be provided in each splice box to keep it free of water. Drainage
shall be by means of a soakaway. The soakaway shall be as detailed on the
Drawings or as instructed by the Engineer.
Obstructions
When an obstruction such as a water main, sewer, power supply, etc. is found to
exist, the contractor shall immediately inform the Engineer who shall decide
whether to:
a. Alter the proposed route;
b. Deviate the trench around the obstruction;
c. Route the ducts over or under the obstruction; or
d. Remove the obstructions.
Laying of Ducts
The bottoms of all trenches after excavation shall be carefully levelled with a 75mm
layer of sand. Lines of ducts shall be kept as straight as possible. All P.V.C. ducts,
fittings and solvent shall be supplied by the Contractor. The ducts shall be of sizes
as specified on the Drawings. After laying ducts shall be covered with a 75mm
layer of sand. All duct fittings and solvent cement must be handled and installed in
accordance with the manufacturer’s recommended procedure or as otherwise
directed by the Engineer. It is important that no dirt be allowed to lodge in the
joints. Special care must be taken in the case of ducts set at an angle or on curves
that sufficient solvent is in the gaps between the sections.
Upon completion of duct installation and prior to placement of backfill material,

each duct shall be proven clear of obstructions. This shall be accomplished by
S710.3
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

blowing a Styrofoam ball 6mm smaller in diameter than the inside diameter of the
duct or pulling a mandrel of the same diameter and 300mm in length through the
duct.
Galvanized steel draw wires shall be left in each duct section to cater for future
installation of cables. Any open ends of the ducts shall be closed with wooden,
plastic or other suitable plugs to prevent entry of animals or objects. This should
also be done whenever work in halted for any length of time, even overnight.
Backfilling
Backfilling of trenches shall not be commenced until the work to be covered has
been approved by the Engineer. After the sand has been laid, the trench shall be
covered with a layer of selected earth free from stones and hand punned to a
consolidated thickness of not less than 75mm. Care shall be taken to ram both
outer edges of the trench simultaneously.
The contractor shall allow in his prices or rates for backfilling and providing suitable
material for same, if this is not available from the excavation.

a. Measurement
The quantity of electrical ducts to be measured under this Section will be
the number of linear metres complete in place and accepted in accordance
with these Specifications and as approved by the Engineer. The quantity
of electrical splice boxes and pole bases to be measured under this Section
will be the number of units complete in place and accepted in accordance
b. Payment
Payment for items under this Section shall be made at the prices tendered
in the Bill of Quantities which prices and payments will constitute full
compensation for all labour, materials, excavation, sand and gravel
bedding, backfilling, cleaning, draw wires and all else necessary to
complete the work in strict conformance with these Specifications, as
shown on the Drawings and as instructed by the Engineer.
S710.4
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

Payment items that may appear under this Section of the Bill of Quantities
are:
710.1 P.V.C. Duct lin.m
710.2 Splice Box No.
708.1 Pole Base No.
S710.5
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

SECTION 711: DUCTING FOR TRAFFIC LIGHTS
CONTENTS
711.1 Description
711.2 Materials
711.3 Execution
_____________________________________________________________________________
711.1 Description
The work covered in this Section consists of the construction of traffic signal ducts,
splice boxes and mast arm bases all in conformity with the lines and grades shown
on the Drawings or established by the Engineer.
711.2 Materials
Concrete for mast arm bases and splice boxes shall be cast-in-place concrete,
Class 25 and shall conform to the requirements of Sections 500 and 501. Concrete
for covers of splice boxes shall be cast-in-place concrete, Class 25 and shall
conform to the requirements of Sections 500 and 501.
Reinforcing steel for covers of splice boxes shall conform to the requirements of
Section 504.
All nuts and bolts nuts shall conform to the requirements of Section 505: Structural
Steelwork.'
All ducting shall be P.V.C. Pipe and conform to the B.S.3505 Class D with
appropriate solvent.
711.3 Execution
Excavation and backfill shall conform to the requirements of Section 204: Structural
Excavation.
Concrete construction shall conform to the requirements of Sections 500 and 501.
Ends of connection pipes and drains shall be incorporated into the construction at
the elevations, directions and grades required. The inner ends of pipes or drains
shall be flush with the inner faces of the walls.
S711.1
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

Bolts shall be accurately set true to plumb, line and level as indicated on the
Drawings.
Upon completion, each structure shall be cleaned of any accumulation of silt,

debris or foreign matter of any kind and shall be kept clear of such accumulation
until final acceptance of the work.
Conduit laid to the lines, levels and grades as shown on the Drawings and
instructed by Engineer. Line of conduit shall be kept as straight. The minimum
radius of curvature of ducts shall be seven and half (7.5) metre.
The ends of all conduits, whether shop or field cut, shall be reamed to remove burrs
and rough edges. Cuts shall be made square and true so that the ends will butt or
come together for the full circumference thereof. Slip joints will not be permitted
for coupling conduit. Connections shall be made with the solvent recommended
by the conduit manufacturer and approved by the Engineer.
Conduit ends shall be capped until wiring is started.
In all cases the plastic conduit, fittings and solvent cement shall be handled and
installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommended procedure or as
otherwise directed by the Engineer.
It is important that no dirt shall be allowed to lodge in the joints. Special care must
be taken in the case of ducts set at an angle or on curves that sufficient solvent is
in the gaps between the sections.
Upon completion of the conduit installation and prior to placement of the bituminous
concrete or cement concrete cover, each duct shall be proved clear of obstructions.
This may be accomplished by blowing a plastic or Styrofoam ball 6mm smaller in
diameter than the inside diameter of the duct, or pulling a mandrel of the same
diameter and 300mm in length through the duct. This operation must be done in
the presence of the Engineer.
A draw string shall be installed in all conduits. The draw string shall be of nylon
with a minimum tensile strength of 250kg. At least 500mm of draw string shall be
S711.2
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

doubled back into the conduit at each terminal.

a. Measurement
Excavation and backfill will be measured and paid for under and in
accordance with Section 204: Structural Excavation, paragraph 204.5.
Concrete will be measured and paid for under and in accordance with
Section 501: Cast-in-place concrete, paragraph 501.29.
Reinforcing steel will be measured and paid for under and in accordance
with Section 504: Reinforcing Steel, paragraph 504.4.
The quantities to be paid for bolts and nuts will be measured and paid for
under and in accordance with Section 505: Structural Steelwork, paragraph
505.13.
The quantity of ducting to be measured for payment under this Section will
be the number of linear metres of ducting measured along the duct route
as installed in place, completed and accepted by the Engineer.
b. Payment
Payment for ducting will be made at the price tendered for the item in the
Bill of Quantities. The prices and payments shall constitute full
compensation for all labour, material, tools and equipment necessary to
complete the ducting work. The prices and payments shall not include the
costs of excavation and back filling for mast arm bases and splice boxes,
concrete for covers of splice boxes, reinforcing steel for covers of splice
boxes, and bolts and nuts for mast arm bases.
S711.3
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

Section 711 payment items that may appear in the Bill of Quantities are:

711.1 P.V.C. Ducting, Class D 50 mm diameter. Lin.m
711.2 P.V.C. Ducting, Class D 110 mm diameter. Lin.m
711.3 Mast Arm Base for Traffic Light Nos
711.4 Splice Boxes Nos
711.5 Pedestal Base for Traffic Lights Nos
711.6 Control Panel Base Nos
S711.4
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

SECTION 712: GABIONS
CONTENTS
712.1 Description
712.2 Materials
712.3 Execution
_____________________________________________________________________________
712.1 Description
The work under this Section covers the excavation for, the furnishing, assembly, filling
with stones and securing zinc coated (galvanized) and/or P.V.C. coated steel wire
woven mesh baskets or mattresses of approved sizes, along with the placing of a
geotextile filter below and behind, and backfilling. Sizes shall be as specified in
Contract or as instructed by the Engineer. They shall be manufactured in accordance
with these Specifications and placed to the lines, grades and dimensions shown on
the Drawings, or as instructed by the Engineer.
The following clauses shall be read in conjunction with this section:-

- 203 Earthworks for Structures
- 713 Geomembranes
712.2 Materials
Gabions shall be manufactured in such a manner that their sides, ends, lid and
diaphragm(s) can be assembled to form rectangular units of the specified dimensions.
Gabions shall be of a single unit construction. The front, base, back and lid shall be
woven into a single unit. All perimeter edges of the mesh forming the gabion shall be
securely selvedged so that the joints obtained have at least the same strength as the
wire mesh itself.
All wire gauges are subject to tolerances in accordance with ASTM 641A-71A Table
3. Tensile Strength of all wire used for manufacturing the gabions and lacing wire
shall be in accordance with ASTM A641, measured before fabrication of netting. Load
Test shall be conducted in accordance with Federal Specifications (QQ-W-461 H
Class 3). Elongation Test shall be conducted in accordance with Federal
Specifications (QQ-W-461 H Class 3). The steel wire diameters are based on the
French wire gauges and are approximately the U.S. gauge numbers stated.
S712.1
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

Nominal Dimensions of Gabion Boxes

The Gabion boxes shall be a minimum of 1m wide at their ends. Gabion length shall
be 2, 3, or 4 times its horizontal width or as specified in the Contract. Where the
gabion length exceeds 1.5 times its horizontal width, the gabion shall be divided into
cells by diaphragm(s), at 1m spacing, of the same mesh and gauge as the gabion
body.
Nominal Dimensions of Gabion Mattresses

Gabion Mattresses shall be 300mm deep or to the dimension defined in the Contract.
Mattresses shall be 2m wide and 3m or 6m long as required. Each mattress shall be
divided into cells by diaphragms at 1m maximum centres of the same mesh and gauge
as the mattress body.
Gabion Mesh
Mesh shall be hexagonal woven mesh with uniform sized openings measuring
approximately 80mm by 105mm. All joints shall be flexible and twisted at least three
times to prevent unravelling.
Galvanized to Wire for Gabions

All steel wire used in the manufacture shall be zinc coated (galvanized) having a
minimum amount of zinc coating of 0.25 kg/m2 of wire, and complying with Federal
Specification (QQ-W-W-461 H, Class 3). Binding wire shall have a coating of not less
than 0.21 kg/m2. All dimensions are subject to a tolerance limit of +5% of
manufacturer's specified sizes.
Zinc Coated Galvanized Gabions

Mesh Wire: The nominal diameter of the steel wire mesh shall be 3mm (U.S. Gauge
No. 11) after zinc coating.
Selvedge Wire: The nominal diameter of the selvedge wire, running through all the
edges (perimeter wire), shall be 4mm (U.S. Gauge No. 9) after coating.
Lacing Wire: The nominal diameter of the wire, necessary for assembling and lacing
the gabion units, shall be 2.2mm (U.S. Gauge No. 13) after coating.
S712.2
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

P.V.C. Coated Gabions

P.V.C. Coating: Where stated in the Contract or specified by the Engineer, all zinc
coated steel wire shall be additionally coated with a minimum of 0.5mm of grey P.V.C.,
which shall be suitable to resist destructive effects of immersion in acidic, salt, or
polluted water, exposure to ultra violet light and abrasion, and retain these
characteristics under test in accordance with ASTM Specifications B117-73, D1499-
64 (77) and D1203-74 (1SO 176-1976).
Mesh Wire: The nominal diameter of the steel wire mesh shall be 2.7 (U.S. Gauge No.
12) after zinc coating and an overall nominal diameter (core wire plus P.V.C. coating
of 3.7mm.
edges (perimeter wire), shall be 3.4mm (U.S. Gauge No. 10) after zinc coating and an
overall nominal diameter (core wire plus P.V.C. coating) of 4.4mm.
Lacing Wire: The nominal diameter of the wire, necessary for assembling and lacing
the gabion units, shall be 2.2 (U.S. Gauge No. 13) after zinc coating and an overall
nominal diameter (core wire plus P.V.C. coating) of 3.1.
Selected Granular Material

Select granular material to gabions, shall consist of stone, sand, gravel or other
acceptable granular material, all of which passes the 75mm sieve, with not more than
40% by weight passes the 0.425mm sieve and not more than ten percent by weight
passes the 0.075 mm sieve.
Geotextiles
Geotextiles for the control of drainage from backfill material into the gabions and
elsewhere shall be in accordance with Clause 716.
712.3 Execution
General
The Engineer shall confirm the extent of gabion construction prior to excavation.
Particular care shall be exercised throughout construction to ensure tightness of mesh,
well packed and compacted filling with minimum of voids, and secure lacing. The
exposed faces of completed work shall present a neat face and line, free from bulges.
Where described in the Contract a filter fabric shall be placed behind and beneath the
S712.3
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

gabion baskets in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. These

requirements cover both zinc coated (galvanized) and P.V.C. coated gabions. See
also Bills of Quantities.
Assembling
All kinks and bends shall be flattened from the gabion materials. The gabions unit
shall be assembled individually, by erecting the sides (front and back), ends and
diaphragm(s), ensuring that all creases are in the correct position and the tops of all
sides even. The four corners of the gabion unit shall be laced first, followed by the
edges of internal diaphragm(s) to the sides. The recommended lacing procedure
consists of cutting a length of lacing wire (approximately 1.5 times the distance to be
laced - not to exceed 1.5m). The wire terminal shall be secured at a top corner by
looping and twisting around the selvedge. Lacing shall then proceed by passing the
wire around the two edges to be joined with alternating single and double loops at
approximately 100mm intervals passing through each mesh in turn. The finishing end
of the lacing wire shall be securely fastened to the bottom selvedge and the ends
turned inside. Alternative methods of assembly using pre-formed rings or wire ties
fully in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions may be used in lieu of lacing
wire, if approved by the Engineer.
Installation
The assembled gabion units shall carried to the work site and firmly seated on a
prepared area in their final location. The placement of the gabion boxes shall be
carried out in an orderly manner so that a face of uncompleted work is maintained.
Gabion baskets shall be constructed in tiers as shown on the drawings. Baskets in
each tiers shall be staggered a minimum of 300mm with respect to baskets in adjacent
tiers.
For structural integrity, all adjoining empty gabions must be laced as specified above
along the full perimeter of their contact surfaces in order to obtain a monolithic
structure.
Where defined in the Contract a geotextile filter fabric will be provided below the base
of and to the back of the gabion structure.
S712.4
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

Stretching
After the gabion units have been laced together, they shall be stretched to effective
alignment. This operation shall be carried out after several empty gabion units have
been positioned. Prior to filling any box on end or side of the box shall be secured to
completed works or to stakes driven into the ground at the corners or in any other
approved manner and the opposite end, side or corner shall be stretched with
crowbars and secured top and bottom in an approved manner. The first gabion in the
line shall then be partially filled to provide the necessary anchorage.
Any stretching shall be carried out using a come-along or other means of at least one
ton capacity firmly secured to the free end of the assembled boxes or panels. While
under tension, the gabion joints shall be carefully controlled against any possible
unravelling. Whenever gabion structures require more than one tier, the upper empty
gabion tier (under tension) shall also be laced to the top of the lower one at all contact
edges (including each box end and diaphragm), and also, as appropriate, adjacent
boxes already stretched and filled.
Filling and Compacting

Gabion units shall be filled with hard, durable, clean stone from 100mm to 250mm in
size, or as approved by the Engineer. For units 300mm deep the stone size shall not
exceed 150mm unless directed by the Engineer. The top layer of material shall consist
of selected smaller stone of nominal 100 millimetre dimensions. Filling shall be placed
to produce a neat face and line. Hand compaction will be required to ensure that all fill
has a minimum of voids and all stones are firmly position to limit further movement.
The outer layer of stone shall be carefully placed and packed by hand along all
exposed gabion faces, in order to ensure proper alignment and a neat, compact,
square appearance.
Particular care shall be taken to ensure that sharp edges of quarried stone are not
placed against the mesh, so causing unnecessary abrasion. Care shall be taken when
placing fill material to assure that the sheathing on P.V.C. coated gabions is not broken
or damaged. Mechanical filling equipment shall not be used, unless approved by the
Engineer consequent upon trials to show that the operation can proceed without
damage to or misalignment of the gabions and adequate compaction is achieved to
minimise voids.
S712.5
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

Gabions shall be filled in 250/300mm thick layers. Filling shall proceed up to slightly
above the half height of the box, and after compaction, internal cross link bracing wires
shall be installed and tensioned. Internal cross link bracing wires shall be placed in all
cells along all exposed faces of the gabion structure. All connecting wires shall be
looped around two mesh openings and the wire terminals shall be securely twisted to
prevent their loosening. Filling may only then be recommenced.
Filling of the gabions shall be carried out only while panels are under tension and the
cells in any row shall be filled in stages so that local deformation may be avoided. At
no time shall any cell be filled to a depth exceeding 300mm higher than the adjoining
cell. Tension on the panels shall be released only when sufficiently full to prevent the
mesh from slacking. Gabions shall be overfilled 25/50mm above their tops to allow
for subsequent settlement. 100mm filling materials shall be used for this purpose.
It is good practice to place backfill to gabion walls simultaneously with the gabion filling
operation.
Lid Closing
Lids shall be stretched tight over the filling, using crowbars or lid closing tools, until the
lid meets the perimeter edges of the front and end panels. They shall then be tightly
laced along all edges, ends and diaphragm(s) in the same manner as described above
for assembling. On completion the structure shall be checked and all ends of wire shall
be folded into the structure. It is essential that all structures have well packed fillings
without undue bulging, and are securely laced.
Cutting and Folding Mesh

Where shown on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer, the gabion mesh shall
be cut, folded and wired together to suit existing site conditions. The mesh must be
cleanly cut and the surplus mesh cut out completely, or folded back and neatly wired
to an adjacent gabion face. The cut edges of the mesh shall be securely laced
together in the manner described above for assembling. The assembling, installation,
filling and lid closing of the re-shaped gabions shall be carried out as specified above.
S712.6
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

Backfilling
Backfilling behind gabions shall be with Selected Imported Structural Backfill or other
such materials as defined in the Contract. Placing and compaction shall be in
accordance with Section 206.

a. Measurement
The quantity of gabion baskets measured for payment under this Section
will be the number of cubic metres in the final compact position to the lines
shown on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
b. Payment
Payment will be made at the prices tendered for the items under this
Section as they appear in the Bills of Quantities. The prices and payments
shall constitute full compensation for furnishing all labour, materials, stone
filling, plant, equipment and all else necessary to satisfactorily secure and
complete the work described herein in strict conformance with these
Excavation and backfilling, and geotextile supply and placement that is

incidental to the gabion installation shall be included under the pay items
for gabions.
Payment items that may appear in this Section of the Bills of Quantities
are:

712.1 Galvanized Gabions (size or type specified) cu.m
712.2 P.V.C. Coated Gabions (size or type specified) cu.m
S712.7
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

SECTION 713: GEOMEMBRANES & GEOTEXTILES
CONTENTS
713.1 Definition
713.2 Scope
713.3 Samples for Approval
713.4 Materials
713.5 Test Methods
713.6 Execution
713.7 Protection
713.8 Repairs
_____________________________________________________________________________
713.1 Definitions
A geomembrane is a plastic material used to prevent the movement of water in civil
engineering applications. Geotextiles and geogrids allow water to flow relatively freely.
High strength synthetic filaments are used to reinforce earth structures while allowing
water to drain. Non-woven geotextiles are used to move water efficiently while
preventing the loss of soil fines.
713.2 Scope
This section refers to those portions of the work that are unique to the supply and
installation of geomembrane & geotextile materials. This section must be referenced
to and interpreted simultaneously with all other sections pertinent to the works
described herein.
This section provides minimum Specifications only. These geomembranes and

geotextiles are to be used in related works:
 Hot Mix Asphalt Concrete Pavement Strengthening;
 Roadways Pavement Patching;
 Base course, sub-base and sub grade strengthening;
 Embankment widening
 Reinforcement
 Separation
 Drainage
 Filtration
S713.1
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

713.3 Samples for Approval

At least 2 weeks prior to commencing the work the Contractor shall submit samples of
the geofabric material, which he proposes for use to the Engineer, clearly detailing the
properties of the geofabric material and its proposed application. After approval by
the Engineer the Contractor shall submit the supplier’s material certificates prior to
commencing Work.
713.4 Materials
The Contractor shall use the relevant geofabric material as specified for the site
conditions and obtain the Engineer’s approval. Alternative products may be used
providing they meet or exceed all relevant specifications and are approved by the
Engineer. The required physical and mechanical properties of geogrid or geotextile
reinforcement shall be as shown on the drawings or specified in the Bill of Quantities
as defined below:
a. Tult (Tu) - Ultimate Tensile Strength shall be the minimum average roll value
ultimate tensile strength as tested per ASTM D6637. This test shall be
conducted without artificially deforming test materials under load before
measuring such resistance or employing an artificial “secant” or “offset”
tangent basis of measurement so as to overstate tensile properties.
b. Junction Strength (JS) - Breaking tensile strength of junctions when tested in
accordance with GRI-GG2 as modified by AASHTO Standard Specification for
Highway Bridges, 1997 Interim, using a single rib having the greater of 3
junctions or 8 inches and tested at a strain rate of 10 percent per minute based
on this gauge length. Values shown are minimum average roll values. For
multi-layer geogrid products, junction strength testing shall be performed
across junctions from each layer of grid individually, and results shall not be
assumed as additive from single layers to multiple layers.
c. Flexural Stiffness (also known as Flexural Rigidity) (FR)- Resistance to
bending force measured via ASTM D1388-96, Option A, using specimen
dimensions of 864 millimeters in length by 1 aperture in width. Values shown
are MARVs. For multi-layer geogrid products, flexural stiffness testing shall be
performed directly on the multi-layer configuration without using any
connecting elements other than those used continuously throughout the actual
product, and results shall not be assumed as additive from testing performed
on a single layer of the multi-layer product.
S713.2
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

Suitable products are:-

 Pavement reinforcement
 Drainage separators and filters
 Geogrid and Geotextile separators
 Geogrid and Geotextile soil reinforcement
713.5 Test Methods

The guide Specifications provided in this document include a number of test methods
used in determining geotextile, soil and aggregate properties. Test methods are
referred to in this document from the American society of Testing and Materials
(ASTM) and the American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials
(AASHTO). A complete list of all referenced geotextile test methods is provided in
Table 7-1.
Table 7-1 - Geotextile Test Methods

Designation Title
ASTM D 276 Test method for identification of fibers in textiles
ASTM D 3786 Test methods for hydraulic burst strength of knitted goods and
nonwoven fabric – Diaphragm Bursting Strength Tester Method
ASTM D 4354 Practice for sampling of geotextile for testing
ASTM D 4355 Test method for deterioration of geotextiles for exposure to ultraviolet
light and water (Xenon – Arc Type Apparatus)
ASTM D 4491 Test method for water permeability of geotextiles by permittivity
ASTM D 4533 Test method for trapezoid tearing strength of geotextiles
ASTM D 4595 Test method for tensile properties of geotextiles by the Wide Width
Strip Method
ASTM D 4632 Test method for tensile properties of geotextiles (Grab Method)
ASTM D 4751 Test method for determining apparent opening size for a geotextile
ASTM D 4759 Practice for determining specification conformance of geosynthetics
ASTM D 4833 Test method for index puncture resistance of geotextiles,
geomembrane, and related products
ASTM D 4873 Practice for identification, storage and handling of geotextile
ASTM D 4884 Test method for seam strength of sewn geotextiles
S713.3
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

713.6 Execution
a. Delivery and Storage
Each individual roll of membrane to be wrapped and covered to protect the
membrane from direct sunlight, ultraviolet rays, excessive heat, mud, dirt, debris
and rodents in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations.
Use equipment that does not directly contact the material itself during loading,
unloading and handling. Slings or other lifting devices to provide adequate support
without damaging material. Off-loading shall be with a minimum of steps directly
to storage or installation area.
Store rolls of membrane on smooth, flat surfaces raised above ground that provides
continuous support to rolls. Maintain additional protective cover if rolls are to be
stored in excess of 30 days.
b. Installation
Paving Works
Prior to repaving, ensure the surface is dry and dust free. Use of compress air is
recommended; hand swept surfaces will not be accepted. If existing pavement
surface is exceptionally rough, apply a thin leveling course.
Place the geotextile over the prepared surface. Centre the membrane over the
crack, for crack repair. Pressure rolls all installations to ensure there are no air
voids under the membrane and to improve adhesion. When lapping allows 100
mm at roll ends.
Full road width application for waterproofing is accomplished by commencing

placement of the membrane at the lowest point and installing rolls in assigned
method to provide for minimum drainage efficiency.
Laps should be 100 mm at roll ends and 50mm on the sides and may require
heating of the rubberised asphalt to ensure maximum bonding. Any wrinkle over
100 mm in width should be slit and folded down.
Drainage and Separation

Prior to placement of the geotextile, the surface will be prepared to a smooth
condition free of debris, depression, or obstructions, which may damage the
geotextile. The geotextile shall be placed loosely (not taut) with no wrinkles or
S713.4
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

folds. Care will be taken to place geotextile in intimate contact so that no void
spaces occur between the geotextile and the trench or structure. The geotextile
shall be overlapped 300mm or the full width of the trench, whichever is less, at the
top of the trench. Additional overlap or anchoring may be required as determined
by the Engineer. The upstream geotextile shall be overlapped over the
downstream.
Soil Reinforcement
The geotextile shall be unrolled as smoothly as possible on the prepared subgrade
or formation, in the direction of construction traffic. Geotextile rolls shall be
overlapped in the direction of sub base or fill placement. The geotextile shall be
overlapped or seamed in accordance with the minimum requirements. Sewing is
recommended where subgrade soils exhibit a CBR less than 0.5 and is preferred
where subgrade soils exhibit a CBR greater than 0.5 but less than or equal to 1.
If required, the geotextile may be held in place prior to sub base or fill placement
with sand bags or piles of fill or rock. On curves, the geotextile may be folded or
cut to conform to the curve. If site conditions require geotextile seaming, the
geotextile shall be cut and seamed on the curve. The fold or overlap shall be in the
direction of construction and shall be held in place as prescribed above. The
geotextile shall not be dragged across the subgrade or formation.
Damage to geotextile, as identified by the Engineer, shall be repaired immediately.

The damaged area plus an additional 3 ft. around the damaged area shall be
cleared of all fill material. A geotextile patch extending 3 ft. beyond the perimeter
of the damage area shall be constructed as directed by the Engineer. Sewing of a
geotextile patch may be required over soft subgrade as directed by the Engineer.
Damaged geotextiles shall be repaired at the Contractor’s expense.
713.7 Protection
Do not permit passage of any vehicle directly on geofabric material at any time.
Maximum drop height for material directly onto geofabric material not to exceed 1 m.
713.8 Repairs
Repair seams which open, tears and punctures by resetting membrane. Additional
membrane to be placed over area, extending beyond perimeter of failure a distance
corresponding to lapping requirements given above.
S713.5
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___


a. Measurement
Supply and placement of textile will be measured in square meters of surface covered
by material. No allowance will be made for seams and overlaps.
b. Payment
Payment will be made at the price tendered for the item under this Section as it appears
in the Bills of Quantities. The prices and payment shall constitute full compensation for
all labour, geofabric material, and all the other materials, tools, equipment and plant
necessary to complete the work described herein in strict conformance with these
Payment items which may appear in the bills of quantities is as follows:-

713.1 Paving Reinforcement (min/max Tu, JS, FR) Sq.m
713.2 Geotextile for Drainage (min/max Tu, JS, FR) Sq.m
713.3 Geotextile for Separation (min/max Tu, JS, FR) Sq.m
713.4 Geotextile for Soil Reinforcement (min/max Tu, JS, FR) Sq.m
713.5 Geomembrane (min/max Tu, JS, FR) Sq.m
S713.6
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

SECTION 714: RUBBLE MASONRY
CONTENTS
714.1 Description
714.2 Materials
714.3 Execution
_____________________________________________________________________________
714.1 Description
The work to be performed under this Section consists of the construction of rubble
masonry wall system with roughly dressed stone laid in cement mortar and plastering
the exposed surfaces of masonry with cement mortar; and shall be built in accordance
with the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
714.2 Materials
1. Stone for rubble masonry shall consist of broken stone and be hard, strong and
durable with specific gravity of at least 1.90. It shall be free from segregation,
seams, cracks and other defects tending to destroy its resistance to weather. It
shall be free from rounded, worn, or weathered surfaces or any coating tending
to destroy the bond with the mortar. The pieces shall be roughly angular and shall
be reasonably free from thin, flat or elongated pieces.
2. Individual stones shall have a thickness of not less than 200mm and a width of
not less than one and a half (1.5) times the thickness. Stones shall increase in
thickness from the top to the bottom of the wall.
3. Headers shall hold in the heart of the wall, the same size as shown in face and
shall extend into the wall a minimum of 450mm beyond the face stones. They
shall occupy not less than one fifth (1/5) of the face area of the wall and shall be
evenly distributed. Headers in walls of 600mm or less in thickness shall extend
entirely through the wall.
4. Sand shall consist of hard, strong, durable, uncoated, mineral or rock particles
free from injurious amounts or organic or other deleterious substances. It shall
meet the requirements of Section 501.
5. Portland cement used in rubble masonry shall be of Type I and shall meet the
requirements of Section 500.
6. Mortar shall be composed of one part Portland Cement Type I and three parts of
sand.
S714.1
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

CONTENTS
714.1 Description
714.2 Materials
714.3 Execution
_____________________________________________________________________________
7. Mortar shall be machine mixed in an approved mixer for a period of not less than
one and one half (1½) minutes.
8. Mortar shall be used within 45 minutes after mixing. Retempering of mortar will
not be permitted.
9. Rubble Packing shall consist of durable angular fragments obtained by breaking
and crushing solid or shattered natural rock, gravel boulders or stones. The
grading when tested in accordance with AASHTO T 27 shall be as follows:
Table 714.1 – Gradation Requirements for Rubble Fill
Sieve Designation
Standard (mm) Alternate (No.) Percent Passing(by weight)
50 100
37.5 90-100
25
19 50-85
12.5
4.75 4 25-45
2.36 8
0.600 30 10-25
0.075 200 2-9
714.3 Execution
1. The stone shall be roughly squared on joints, beds and faces. Selected stones,
roughly squared and pitched to line, shall be used at all angles and ends of walls.
All shaping and dressing of stone shall be done before the stone is laid in the wall
and no dressing or hammering which will loosen the stone after it is placed will be
permitted.
S714.2
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

CONTENTS
714.1 Description
714.2 Materials
714.3 Execution
_____________________________________________________________________________
2. The masonry shall be laid to line and in roughly level courses. The bottom of
foundation courses shall be composed of large selected stones and all courses
shall be laid with bearing beds parallel to the natural bed of the material.
3. Each stone shall be cleaned and thoroughly saturated with water before being
set. The bed that is to receive stones shall be cleaned and wall moistened.
4. All stones shall be bedded in freshly laid mortar. The mortar joints shall be full
and the stones carefully settled in place before the mortar has set. Joints and
beds shall have an average thickness of not more than 25mm.
5. The face joints shall be properly scraped to a depth of 50mm and left clean before
the mortar becomes set. Face surfaces of stone shall be clean of smearing with
mortar forced out of the joints.
6. The vertical joints in each course shall break joints with those in adjoining courses
at least 150mm. In no case shall a vertical joint be so located as to occur directly
above or below a header.
7. Shall any stone be moved or the joint broken, the stone shall be taken up, the
mortar thoroughly cleaned from bed and joints and the stone reset in fresh mortar.
8. The same standard of workmanship and materials shall be maintained in building
the heart of the wall as elsewhere. The walls shall be laid true to the lines staked
out on the ground for the top and toe of the wall, and shall present a surface true
to the inclined plane for which the lines were staked.
9. All joints shall be thoroughly raked, scraped and cleaned. The joints as well as
the face of the wall shall be thoroughly wet with clean water and filled with mortar.
The mortar shall be well driven into the joints and finished smooth with an
approved plastering tool. The wall shall be kept wet while plastering is being done
and in hot or dry weather, the plastered surface shall be protected from the sun
and kept wet for a period of at least three (3) days after completion.
10. Weep holes shall be constructed at a spacing of 1.2m horizontally and vertically
with alternate layers staggered or as shown on the Drawings.
11. Concrete will be in accordance with Section 501 and as illustrated in the drawings.
S714.3
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

CONTENTS
714.1 Description
714.2 Materials
714.3 Execution
_____________________________________________________________________________
12. Steel Reinforcement shall be in accordance with Section 504 and as illustrated in
the drawings.
13. The mortar Cap will be as illustrated in the drawings.

a. Measurement
The quantity of rubble masonry to be measured under this Section will be the number
of cubic metres complete in place and accepted, as shown on the Drawings or directed
by the Engineer and shall include the volume of the footing. The projections of face
stones extending beyond the pitch lines will not be included. No deduction will be
made for weep holes, drain pipes or other openings of less than 0.18 square metres
in area or for chamfers or other ornamental cuts that amount to five (5%) percent or
less of the volume of the stone in which they occur.
b. Payment
Payment will be made at the prices tendered for the items under this Section as they
appear in the Bills of Quantities. The prices and payments shall constitute full
compensation for all labour, materials, tools, plant, equipment, form work, drain pipes
and weep holes where required, concrete footings, steel reinforcement, rubble
packing, mortar cap and all else necessary to complete the work described herein in
strict accordance with these Specifications and as approved by the Engineer.
Excavation and backfill shall be paid for separately in accordance with Section 203,
Earthwork for Structures.
Item that may appear in this Section of the Bills of Quantities is:
Pay Item. No. Description Unit
714.1 Rubble Masonry cu.m
S714.4
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

SECTION 715: RENO MATTRESS
CONTENTS
715.1 Description
715.2 Materials
715.3 Execution
_____________________________________________________________________________
715.1 Description
The work under this Section covers the furnishing, assembly, filling with stones and
securing zinc coated (galvanized) and/or P.V.C. coated steel wire mesh baskets of
approved sizes. Sizes shall be as specified in the Bill of Quantities, on the
Drawings or as instructed by the Engineer. They shall be manufactured in
accordance with these Specifications and placed to the lines, grades and
dimensions shown on the Drawings, or as instructed by the Engineer.
715.2 Materials
Mattress Mesh
Mesh openings shall be hexagonal woven mesh with uniform sized openings
measuring approximately 60mm by 80mm. All joints shall be flexible and twisted at
least three times to prevent unravelling.
Galvanizing
All steel wire used shall be zinc coated having a minimum weight of zinc of 0.22
kg/sq.m of wire, and complying with Federal Specifications (QQ-W-461 H, Class
3). All dimensions are subject to a tolerance limit of + 5% of manufacturer's
specified sizes.
Zinc-coated Galvanized Reno Mattress

Mesh Wire: The nominal diameter of the steel wire mesh shall be 2.2mm (U.S.
Gauge No. 13) after zinc-coating.
edges (perimeter wire), shall be 2.7mm (U.S. Gauge No. 11) after zinc-coating.
Lacing Wire: The nominal diameter of the wire, necessary for assembling and
lacing the mattress units, shall be 2.2mm (U.S. Gauge No. 13) after zinc-coating.
S715.1
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

P.V.C. Coated Reno Mattress

P.V.C. Coating: Where stated in the Bill of Quantities or where specified by the
Engineer, all zinc-coated steel wire shall be additionally coated with P.V.C. of
nominal thickness 0.55mm that shall be suitable to resist destructive effects of
immersion in acidic, salt, or polluted water, exposure to ultra violet light and
abrasion, and retain these characteristics under test in accordance with ASTM
Specifications B117-73(79), D1499-64(77) and D1203-74 (ISO 176-1976). All wire
gauges are subject to tolerances in accordance with ASTM 641A, Table 3. Tensile
Strength of all wire used for manufacturing the mattresses and lacing wire shall be
in accordance with ASTM A641, measured before fabrication of netting. Load Test
shall be conducted in accordance with Federal Specifications (QQ-W-461 H Class
3). Elongation Test shall be conducted in accordance with Federal Specifications
(QQ-W-461 H Class 3). The steel wire diameters are based on the French wire
gauges and are approximately the U.S. gauge numbers stated.
715.3 Execution
Mattress Manufacture
Mattresses shall be manufactured in such a manner that their sides, ends, lid and
diaphragm(s) can be assembled to form rectangular units of the specified
dimensions. The mattress bases shall be of a single unit construction. The base,
sides and ends shall be woven as a single sheet. The lids shall also be supplied
as a single sheet. All perimeter edges of the mesh forming the mattress shall be
securely selvedged so that the joints obtained have at least the same strength as
the wire mesh itself. The mattresses shall be 1.0m by 1.0m by 1.0m
Nominal Dimensions of the Reno Mattress

The mattress length shall be 1.5, 2 or more times its horizontal width, as shown on
the Drawings, or as give in the Bill of Quantities or instructed by the Engineer. The
horizontal width shall not be less than 2m. The mattress shall be divided into cells
by diaphragms(s) of the same mesh and gauge as the mattress body at one metre
nominal spacing or as otherwise approved.
Mattress Installation
a. Assembling
All kinks and bends in the mattress materials shall be flattened. The mattress
units shall be assembled individually, by erecting the sides (front and back),
S715.2
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

ends and diaphragm(s), ensuring that all creases are in the correct position
and the tops of all sides are level, in accordance with the manufacturer’s
instructions. The four corners of the mattress unit shall be laced first, followed
by the edges of internal diaphragm(s) to the sides. The recommended lacing
procedure consists of cutting a length of lacing wire (approximately 1.5 times
the distance to be laced - not to exceed 1.5m). The wire terminal shall be
secured at the corner by looping and twisting, then lacing shall proceed with
alternating single and double loops at approximately 100mm intervals. The
finishing end of the lacing wire shall be securely fastened. Alternative methods
of assembly using rings or wire ties may be used in lieu of lacing wire if
b. Installation
The assembled mattresses shall be carried to the work site and placed in their
proper location. For structural integrity, all adjoining empty mattresses must
be laced along the perimeter of their contact surfaces in order to obtain a
monolithic structure. After the mattresses have been laced together, they shall
be stretched to effective alignment. This operation shall be carried out after
several empty mattresses have been positioned. The first mattress in the line
shall be partially filled to provide the necessary anchorage. Any stretching
shall be carried out using a come-along or other means of at least one ton
capacity. While under tension, the mattress joints shall be carefully controlled
against any possible unravelling. Whenever mattress structures are required
to be more than one tier, the upper empty mattress tier (under tension) shall
also be laced to the top of the lower one.
c. Filling
Reno mattresses shall be filled with suitable hard, durable, clean stone as
approved by the Engineer. A suitable grading is from 70mm to 150mm. For
units of 150mm nominal depth the stone size shall not exceed 100mm unless
directed by the Engineer. Mattresses may be filled using earth handling
equipment such as backhoes, gradalls, cranes, etc. Care shall be taken when
placing fill material to assure that the sheathing on P.V.C. coated mattresses
is not broken or damaged. The outer layer of stone shall be carefully placed
and packed by hand along all exposed mattress edges, in order to ensure
proper alignment and a neat, compact, square appearance. The last layer of
S715.3
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

stone shall be levelled with or slightly higher than the top of the mattress to
allow proper closing of the lid.
d. Lid Closing
Lids shall be stretched tight over the filling, using crowbars or lid closing tools,
until the lid meets the perimeter edges of the front and end panels. They
shall then be tightly laced along all edges, ends and diaphragm(s) in the
same manner as described above for assembling. Adjacent lids may be wired
simultaneously. On completion the structure shall be checked and all ends
of wire shall be folded into the structure. It is essential that all structures have
well packed fillings without undue bulging, and are securely laced.
e. Cutting and Folding Mesh

Where shown on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer, the mattress
mesh shall be cut, folded and wired together to suit existing site conditions.
The mesh must be cleanly cut and the surplus mesh cut out completely, or
folded back and neatly wired to an adjacent mattress face. The cut edges of
the mesh shall be securely laced together in the manner described above for
assembling. The assembling, installation, filling and lid closing of the re-
shaped mattresses shall be carried out as specified above.
f. General Notes
Reno mattresses with the additional P.V.C. sleeve shall be used where soil
or water is acidic, in salt or brackish water or where ever the risk of corrosion
is present.

a. Measurement
The quantity of Reno mattresses measured for payment under this Section will
be the number of cubic metres in the final compact position to the lines shown
on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
b. Payment
Payment will be made at the prices tendered for the items under this Section
as they appear in the Bill of Quantities. The prices and payments shall
constitute full compensation for furnishing all labour, materials, stone filling,
S715.4
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

plant, equipment and all else necessary to satisfactorily secure and complete
the work described herein in strict conformance with these Specifications and
as approved by the Engineer.

715 Galvanized Reno Mattresses cu.m
715 P.V.C. Coated Reno Mattresses cu.m
S715.5
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

SECTION 716: RUMBLE STRIPS
CONTENTS
716.1 Description
716.2 Travelled Way Rumble Strips
716.3 Shoulder Rumble Strips
716.4 Installation Guide
_____________________________________________________________________________
716.1 Description
Rumble strips are bands of raised material or indentations formed or grooved in the
traveled way on the centerline, or shoulders. Rumble strips call the motorist's attention
to standard warning or regulatory devices or otherwise alert drivers by transmitting sound
and/or vibration through the vehicle.
Rumble strips may be used in the traveled way and highways if standard traffic control
devices have been thoroughly evaluated and documented and the traffic engineer
considers their use as the optimal solution to the identified problem.
Types of centerline rumble strips include: barrier strips with raised profile thermoplastic
traffic strips, rumble strips (raised or ground in) within centerline buffer zones, surface
mounted channelizers on a centerline buffer zone, black raised pavement markers on
the centerline, etc.
716.2 Traveled Way Rumble Strips

Rumble strips on the traveled way are 19mm or less in height if raised, 25mm or less in
depth if rolled in indentations, 8.5mm +/- 1.5 mm if ground in indentations and generally
extend across the travel lanes.
Typical locations where rumble strips on the traveled way may been used include:
• End of a freeway.
• In advance of toll booths.
• Within a construction zone in advance of the workers.
• In advance of a "T" Intersection where the motorist is not expecting to stop.
S716.1
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___

716.3 Shoulder Rumble Strips

Shoulder rumble strips are 19 mm or less in height if raised, 25mm in depth for rolled in
indentations and 8.5mm +/- 1.5mm for ground in indentations. The maximum width of
shoulder rumble strips is 300mm for both rolled in and ground in indentations. Typically
they should be placed at 150mm from the edge of traveled way but may be moved to
300mm to avoid longitudinal joints, paving tapers etc. Shoulder rumble strips should
never be ground or rolled into bridge decks or bridge approach slabs, if rumble strips are
to be installed along a segment of highway and are needed across these locations they
should be installed using a suitable raised or inverted profile thermoplastic. Where
bicycles are permitted, shoulder rumble strips should not be used unless approximately
1.5m of clear shoulder width for bicycle use is available between the rumble strips and
the outer edge of the shoulder. If shoulder width is less than 1.5m and rumble strips are
required then only raised and inverted profile thermoplastic stripe shall be used.
The rumble strips may consist of grooves rolled into the hot mix as part of a resurfacing
project, ground in indentation in Portland Concrete Cement or Asphalt Concrete in
existing roadway shoulders, or the application of a raised and inverted profile
thermoplastic. When freeways or conventional highways are to be resurfaced,
consideration should be given to the drift-off-road problem and any related collision
history for the subject roadway and the use of rumble strips considered.
716.4 Installation Guide

Rumble strips shall be installed to the guidelines as stated in table 716-1 below:
Table 716-1
RUMBLE STRIP INSTALLATION GUIDE
RUMBLE STRIP RUMBLE STRIP SHOULDER BICYCLES SHOULDER WIDTH
TREATMENT DEPTH (mm) TYPE PERMITTED
Rolled in Rumble Strip 25 ACC Only YES 1.5 meters minimum
Treatment Standard Plan NO 1.2 meters minimum
A40A
Ground In Rumble Strip 8 (+/- 1.5) ACC and PCC YES 1.5 meters minimum
Treatment Standard Plan
A40B NO 1.2 meters minimum
Raised and Inverted Profile N/A ACC and PCC YES No minimum
Thermoplastic NO No minimum
Centerline Ground In 8 (+/- 1.5) ACC and PCC N/A N/A
Rumble Strip Treatment
Experimental
NOTE: Ground In Rumble Strip Treatments that are greater than 8.5mm +/- 1.5mm in depth shall not be installed on
shoulders where bicyclists are allowed
S716.2
____________________________________________________________________________________ ___


a. Measurement
The quantity of rumble strips to be measured under this Section will be the number
of square metres complete in place and accepted. It shall include all work
necessary to construct as stated above.
b. Payment
Payment will be made at the prices tendered for items under this Section as they
appear in the Bill of Quantities. The prices and payments will constitute full
compensation for furnishing all labour, materials, tools and equipment to construct.
Payment items that may appear in the Bill of Quantities are:

716.1 Travelway Rumble Strips raised, rolled in or Sq.m
ground in
716.2 Shoulder Rumble Strips raised, rolled in or Sq.m
ground in
S716.3

OFS San Fernando Facility Project Phase II - CIVIL - STRUCTURAL Specifications

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

You might also like

OFS San Fernando Facility Project Phase II - CIVIL - STRUCTURAL Specifications

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

OFS San Fernando Facility Project Phase II - CIVIL - STRUCTURAL Specifications

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Materials & Workmanship for the

OFS SAN FERNANDO FACILITY PROJECT

SPECIFICATION SERIES 100 – GENERAL

SPECIFICATION SERIES 200 –EARTHWORKS

SPECIFICATION SERIES 300 – PAVEMENT LAYERS OF GRAVEL OR GRANULAR

SPECIFICATION SERIES 400 – PAVEMENT LAYERS OF BITUMINOUS MATERIAL

SPECIFICATION SERIES 500 – STRUCTURAL WORKS

SPECIFICATION SERIES 600 – DRAINAGE WORKS

SPECIFICATION SERIES 700 – ANCILLARY WORKS

SPECIFICATION SERIES 100

SERIES 100: GENERAL

101.1 General Definitions and Terms

SERIES 100: GENERAL

Overlay Additional bituminous pavement layer(s) applied on top of an existing road

SERIES 100: GENERAL

Cables, pipes or other facilities to provide conduits for electricity, telephone,

2. When referring to this as a pavement layer: The upper pavement layer

SERIES 100: GENERAL

101.3 Standard Methods of Sampling and Testing of Soils and Materials

*All are AASHTO Standard Tests unless otherwise noted.

SERIES 100: GENERAL

*All are AASHTO Standard Tests unless otherwise noted.

*All are AASHTO Standard Tests unless otherwise noted.

SERIES 100: GENERAL

*All are AASHTO Standard Tests unless otherwise noted.

SERIES 100: GENERAL

*All are AASHTO Standard Tests unless otherwise noted.

SERIES 100: GENERAL

SERIES 100: GENERAL

102.2 Performance Security, Insurances and Maintenance during Defects Liability

i. To provide a Performance Security.

SERIES 100: GENERAL

102.3 Relocation and Protection of Services

SERIES 100: GENERAL

It shall be clearly understood that, in certain instances, existing services can be

102.4 Road Intersections and Junctions

SERIES 100: GENERAL

102.5 Workmanship and Quality Control

SERIES 100: GENERAL

102.6 Setting-Out of Work and Protection of Beacons

Where a beacon is likely to be displaced during construction operations, the Contractor

SERIES 100: GENERAL

In cases where the displacement of or damage to property beacons or trigonometric-

SERIES 100: GENERAL

102.7 Notices, Signs and Advertisements

SERIES 100: GENERAL

102.8 Measurements and Quantities

i. Direct the Contractor to supply such materials to the dimensions stated in

SERIES 100: GENERAL

c. Measurement of completed work

102.9 Contract Rates and Payment

SERIES 100: GENERAL

less than the scheduled quantities.

c. The meanings of certain phrases in payment clauses:

SERIES 100: GENERAL

ii. Placing material

These descriptions shall be read in conjunction with the relevant specifications